Teledyne 200Eh Em Users Manual API 200EH/EM Operation

200EHEM to the manual 1fdf21b1-0289-439d-97c3-00b08cb545fa

2015-02-03

: Teledyne Teledyne-200Eh-Em-Users-Manual-464565 teledyne-200eh-em-users-manual-464565 teledyne pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 370 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

INSTRUCTION MANUAL
MODEL 200EH/EM
NITROGEN OXIDES ANALYZER
© TELEDYNE ADVANCED POLLUTION INSTRUMENTATION
9480 CARROLL PARK DRIVE
SAN DIEGO, CA 92121-5201
USA
Toll-free Phone: 800-324-5190
Phone: 858-657-9800
Fax: 858-657-9816
Email: api-sales@teledyne.com
Website: http://www.teledyne-api.com/
04521
Rev. C
DCN 5731
Copyright 2007-2010
Teledyne Advanced Pollution Instrumentation
14 May 2010
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Safety Messages
i
SAFETY MESSAGES
Your safety and the safety of others is very important. We have provided many important safety messages in
this manual. Please read these messages carefully.
A safety message alerts you to potential hazards that could hurt you or others. Each safety message is
associated with a safety alert symbol. These symbols are found in the manual and inside the instrument. The
definition of these symbols is described below:
GENERAL SAFETY HAZARD: Refer to the instructions for details on the specific
hazard.
CAUTION: Hot Surface Warning.
CAUTION: Electrical Shock Hazard.
TECHNICIAN SYMBOL: All operations marked with this symbol are to be
performed by qualified maintenance personnel only.
CAUTION
The analyzer should only be used for the purpose and in the manner described in this
manual. If you use the analyzer in a manner other than that for which it was intended,
unpredictable behavior could ensue with possible hazardous consequences.
NOTE
Technical Assistance regarding the use and maintenance of the
Model 200EH/EM NOx Analyzer or any other Teledyne Instruments product
can be obtained by:
Contacting Teledyne Instruments’ Customer Service Department at 800-324-5190
or
Via the internet at http://www.teledyne-api.com/inquiries.asp
04521C (DCN5731)
ii
This page intentionally left blank.
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Table of Contents
iii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. M200EH/EM Documentation....................................................................................................................................................1
1.1. Using This Manual............................................................................................................................................................1
2. Specifications, Approvals and Warranty...................................................................................................................................3
2.1. M200EH/EM Operating Specifications .............................................................................................................................3
2.2. CE Mark Compliance .......................................................................................................................................................4
2.3. Warranty...........................................................................................................................................................................4
3. Getting Started.........................................................................................................................................................................7
3.1. Unpacking and Initial Setup..............................................................................................................................................7
3.1.1. M200EH/EM Layout..................................................................................................................................................8
3.1.2. Electrical Connections ............................................................................................................................................10
3.1.2.1. Power Connection...........................................................................................................................................10
3.1.2.2. Analog Output Connections ............................................................................................................................11
3.1.2.3. Connecting the Status Outputs .......................................................................................................................12
3.1.2.4. Connecting the Control Inputs.........................................................................................................................13
3.1.2.5. Connecting the Serial Ports ............................................................................................................................14
3.1.2.6. Connecting to a LAN or the Internet................................................................................................................14
3.1.2.7. Connecting to a Multidrop Network .................................................................................................................14
3.1.3. Pneumatic Connections..........................................................................................................................................15
3.1.3.1. Calibration Gases ...........................................................................................................................................16
3.1.3.2. Pneumatic Connections to M200EH/EM Basic Configuration: ........................................................................18
3.1.3.3. Connections with Internal Valve Options Installed ..........................................................................................19
3.2. Initial Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................20
3.2.1. Startup ....................................................................................................................................................................20
3.2.2. Warm-Up ................................................................................................................................................................22
3.2.3. Warning Messages.................................................................................................................................................22
3.2.4. Functional Check....................................................................................................................................................24
3.3. Calibration ......................................................................................................................................................................25
3.3.1. Basic NOx Calibration Procedure............................................................................................................................25
3.3.2. Basic O2 Sensor Calibration Procedure..................................................................................................................28
3.3.2.1. O2 Calibration Setup .......................................................................................................................................28
3.3.2.2. O2 Calibration Method ....................................................................................................................................28
3.3.3. Interferences for NOX Measurements .....................................................................................................................31
4. Frequently Asked Questions & Glossary................................................................................................................................33
4.1. Frequently Asked Questions ..........................................................................................................................................33
4.2. Glossary .........................................................................................................................................................................34
5. Optional Hardware and Software ........................................................................................................................................... 37
5.1. External Pumps (OPT 10) ..............................................................................................................................................37
5.2. Rack Mount Kits (OPTs 20-23)....................................................................................................................................... 37
5.3. Carrying Strap Handle (OPT 29) ....................................................................................................................................38
5.4. Current Loop Analog Outputs (OPT 41) .........................................................................................................................39
5.4.1. Converting Current Loop Analog Outputs to Standard Voltage Outputs.................................................................39
5.5. Particulate Filter Kit (OPT 42A) ......................................................................................................................................40
5.6. Ozone Supply Filter (OPT 49) ........................................................................................................................................40
5.7. Calibration Valve Options ...............................................................................................................................................40
5.7.1. Zero/Span Valves (OPT 50) ...................................................................................................................................40
5.7.2. Second Range span Valve (OPT 52)......................................................................................................................42
5.8. Oxygen Sensor (OPT 65)...............................................................................................................................................45
5.8.1. Theory of Operation................................................................................................................................................45
5.8.1.1. Paramagnetic measurement of O2..................................................................................................................45
5.8.1.2. Operation Within the M200EH/EM Analyzer ................................................................................................... 46
5.8.1.3. Pneumatic Operation of the O2 Sensor...........................................................................................................46
5.8.2. Zero Air Scrubber (OPT 64B) .................................................................................................................................48
5.8.3. Zero Air Scrubber Maintenance Kit (OPT 43) .........................................................................................................48
5.8.4. M200EH/EM Expendables Kit (OPT 42).................................................................................................................48
5.8.5. M200EH/EM Spare Parts Kit (OPT 43)...................................................................................................................48
5.9. Communication Options .................................................................................................................................................48
5.9.1. RS232 Modem Cables (OPTs 60 and 60A)............................................................................................................48
5.9.2. RS-232 Multidrop (OPT 62) ....................................................................................................................................49
5.9.3. Ethernet (OPT 63) ..................................................................................................................................................49
5.10. Sample Gas Conditioners (OPTs 86 & 88)...................................................................................................................50
04521C (DCN5731)
iv
5.11. Alarm Relay Option (OPT 67).......................................................................................................................................51
5.12. Special Software Features ...........................................................................................................................................53
5.12.1. Maintenance Mode Switch....................................................................................................................................53
5.12.2. Second Language Switch .....................................................................................................................................53
5.12.3. Dilution Ratio Option.............................................................................................................................................53
5.13. Additional Manual (OPT 70) .........................................................................................................................................53
5.14. Extended Warranty (OPTs 92 & 93).............................................................................................................................54
6. Operating Instructions ............................................................................................................................................................55
6.1. Overview of Operating Modes ........................................................................................................................................55
6.2. Sample Mode .................................................................................................................................................................57
6.2.1. Test Functions ........................................................................................................................................................57
6.2.2. Warning Messages.................................................................................................................................................59
6.3. Calibration Mode ............................................................................................................................................................60
6.3.1. Calibration Functions ..............................................................................................................................................60
6.4. SETUP MODE................................................................................................................................................................61
6.5. SETUP CFG: Viewing the Analyzer’s Configuration Information ...............................................................................62
6.6. SETUP ACAL: Automatic Calibration.........................................................................................................................62
6.7. SETUP DAS - Using the Data Acquisition System (iDAS) ........................................................................................63
6.7.1. iDAS Structure........................................................................................................................................................64
6.7.1.1. iDAS Channels................................................................................................................................................64
6.7.1.2. iDAS Parameters ............................................................................................................................................65
6.7.1.3. iDAS Triggering Events...................................................................................................................................65
6.7.2. Default iDAS Channels ...........................................................................................................................................66
6.7.2.1. Viewing iDAS Data and Settings.....................................................................................................................68
6.7.2.2. Editing iDAS Data Channels ...........................................................................................................................69
6.7.2.3. Trigger Events.................................................................................................................................................70
6.7.2.4. Editing iDAS Parameters ................................................................................................................................71
6.7.2.5. Sample Period and Report Period ..................................................................................................................73
6.7.2.6. Number of Records.........................................................................................................................................75
6.7.2.7. RS-232 Report Function .................................................................................................................................76
6.7.2.8. Compact Report..............................................................................................................................................76
6.7.2.9. Starting Date...................................................................................................................................................76
6.7.2.10. Disabling/Enabling Data Channels................................................................................................................77
6.7.2.11. HOLDOFF Feature .......................................................................................................................................77
6.7.3. Remote iDAS Configuration.................................................................................................................................... 78
6.8. SETUP RNGE: Range Units and Dilution Configuration............................................................................................ 80
6.8.1. Range Units............................................................................................................................................................80
6.8.2. Dilution Ratio ..........................................................................................................................................................81
6.9. SETUP PASS: Password Feature .............................................................................................................................82
6.10. SETUP CLK: Setting the Internal Time-of-Day Clock ..............................................................................................84
6.11. SETUP MORE COMM: Setting Up the Analyser’s Communication Ports ...........................................................86
6.11.1. Analyzer ID ...........................................................................................................................................................86
6.11.2. COM Port Default Settings ...................................................................................................................................87
6.11.3. RS-232 COM Port Cable Connections .................................................................................................................87
6.11.4. RS-485 Configuration of COM2............................................................................................................................89
6.11.5. DTE and DCE Communication .............................................................................................................................90
6.11.6. Ethernet Card Configuration .................................................................................................................................91
6.11.6.1. Ethernet Card COM2 Communication Modes and Baud Rate...................................................................... 91
6.11.6.2. Configuring the Ethernet Interface Option using DHCP ................................................................................91
6.11.6.3. Manually Configuring the Network IP Addresses ..........................................................................................94
6.11.6.4. Changing the Analyzer’s HOSTNAME.......................................................................................................... 96
6.11.7. Multidrop RS-232 Set Up......................................................................................................................................97
6.11.8. COM Port Communication Modes ........................................................................................................................99
6.11.9. COM Port Baud Rate..........................................................................................................................................101
6.11.10. COM Port Testing.............................................................................................................................................102
6.12. SETUP MORE VARS: Internal Variables (VARS) .............................................................................................103
6.12.1. Setting the Gas Measurement Mode ..................................................................................................................105
6.13. SETUP MORE DIAG: Diagnostics MENU........................................................................................................106
6.13.1. Accessing the Diagnostic Features.....................................................................................................................107
6.13.2. Signal I/O............................................................................................................................................................108
6.13.3. Analog Output Step Test ....................................................................................................................................109
6.13.4. ANALOG OUTPUTS and Reporting Ranges...................................................................................................... 110
6.13.4.1. Analog Output Signals Available on the M200EH/EM................................................................................. 110
6.13.4.2. Physical Range versus Analog Output Reporting Ranges.......................................................................... 111
6.13.5. ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION........................................................................................................................113
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Table of Contents
v
6.13.5.1. The Analog I/O Configuration Submenu. .................................................................................................... 113
6.13.5.2. Analog Output Signal Type and Range Selection....................................................................................... 115
6.13.5.3. Turning the Analog Output Over-Range Feature ON/OFF.......................................................................... 116
6.13.5.4. Adding a Recorder Offset to an Analog Output........................................................................................... 117
6.13.5.5. Assigning an iDAS parameter to an Analog Output Channel...................................................................... 118
Reporting Gas Concentrations via the M200EH/EM Analog Output Channels ........................................118
6.13.5.6. Setting the Reporting Range Scale for an Analog Output........................................................................... 121
6.13.5.7. Setting Data Update Rate for an Analog Output .........................................................................................123
6.13.5.8. Turning an Analog Output On or Off ...........................................................................................................124
6.13.6. ANALOG OUTPUT CALIBRATION ....................................................................................................................125
6.13.6.1. Automatic Analog Output Calibration ..........................................................................................................126
6.13.6.2. Manual Calibration of Analog Output configured for Voltage Ranges ......................................................... 127
6.13.6.3. Manual Calibration of Analog Outputs configured for Current Loop Ranges .............................................. 128
6.13.6.4. AIN Calibration............................................................................................................................................131
6.13.7. OTHER DIAG MENU FUNCTIONS ....................................................................................................................132
6.13.7.1. Display Sequence Configuration.................................................................................................................132
6.13.7.2. Optic Test ...................................................................................................................................................135
6.13.7.3. Electrical Test .............................................................................................................................................136
6.13.7.4. Ozone Generator Override .........................................................................................................................137
6.13.7.5. Flow Calibration ..........................................................................................................................................138
6.14. SETUP – ALRM: Using the optional Gas Concentration Alarms (OPT 67) ................................................................ 139
6.15. REMOTE OPERATION OF THE ANALYZER ............................................................................................................ 140
6.15.1. Remote Operation Using the External Digital I/O ...............................................................................................140
6.15.1.1. Status Outputs ............................................................................................................................................140
6.15.1.2. Control Inputs..............................................................................................................................................141
6.15.2. Remote Operation Using the External Serial I/O ................................................................................................142
6.15.2.1. Terminal Operating Modes ......................................................................................................................... 142
6.15.2.2. Help Commands in Terminal Mode.............................................................................................................143
6.15.2.3. Command Syntax .......................................................................................................................................143
6.15.2.4. Data Types..................................................................................................................................................144
6.15.2.5. Status Reporting .........................................................................................................................................145
6.15.2.6. Remote Access by Modem .........................................................................................................................145
6.15.2.7. COM Port Password Security .....................................................................................................................147
6.15.2.8. APICOM Remote Control Program .............................................................................................................148
6.15.3. Additional Communications Documentation .......................................................................................................148
6.15.4. Using the M200EH/EM with a Hessen Protocol Network....................................................................................149
6.15.4.1. General Overview of Hessen Protocol ........................................................................................................149
6.15.4.2. Hessen COMM Port Configuration..............................................................................................................149
6.15.4.3. Selecting a Hessen Protocol Type ..............................................................................................................150
6.15.4.4. Setting The Hessen Protocol Response Mode ...........................................................................................151
6.15.4.5. Hessen Protocol Gas ID .............................................................................................................................152
6.15.4.6. Setting Hessen Protocol Status Flags.........................................................................................................153
6.15.4.7. Instrument ID Code.....................................................................................................................................154
7. Calibration Procedures.........................................................................................................................................................155
7.1. Calibration Preparations...............................................................................................................................................155
7.1.1. Required Equipment, Supplies, and Expendables................................................................................................155
7.1.2. Zero Air.................................................................................................................................................................155
7.1.3. Span Calibration Gas Standards & Traceability....................................................................................................156
7.1.3.1. Traceability ...................................................................................................................................................156
7.1.4. Data Recording Devices .......................................................................................................................................157
7.1.5. NO2 Conversion Efficiency ...................................................................................................................................157
7.1.5.1. Determining / Updating the NO2 Converter Efficiency................................................................................... 157
7.2. Manual Calibration .......................................................................................................................................................160
7.3. Calibration Checks .......................................................................................................................................................163
7.4. Manual Calibration with Zero/Span Valves...................................................................................................................164
7.5. Calibration Checks with Zero/Span Valves...................................................................................................................167
7.6. Calibration With Remote Contact Closures ..................................................................................................................168
7.7. Automatic Calibration (AutoCal) ...................................................................................................................................169
7.8. Calibration Quality Analysis..........................................................................................................................................172
8. EPA Protocol Calibration......................................................................................................................................................173
9. Instrument Maintenance.......................................................................................................................................................175
9.1. Maintenance Schedule.................................................................................................................................................175
9.2. Predictive Diagnostics ..................................................................................................................................................177
9.3. Maintenance Procedures..............................................................................................................................................177
9.3.1. Changing the Sample Particulate Filter ................................................................................................................178
04521C (DCN5731)
vi
9.3.2. Changing the O3 Dryer Particulate Filter............................................................................................................... 179
9.3.3. Maintaining the External Sample Pump................................................................................................................ 180
9.3.3.1. Rebuilding the Pump.....................................................................................................................................180
9.3.3.2. Changing the Inline Exhaust Scrubber.......................................................................................................... 180
9.3.4. Changing the Pump and IZS Dust Filters .............................................................................................................180
9.3.5. Changing the External Zero Air Scrubber .............................................................................................................182
9.3.6. Changing the NO2 converter................................................................................................................................. 183
9.3.7. Cleaning the Reaction Cell ...................................................................................................................................184
9.3.8. Changing Critical Flow Orifices.............................................................................................................................185
9.3.9. Checking for Light Leaks ......................................................................................................................................186
10. Theory of Operation ...........................................................................................................................................................189
10.1. Measurement Principle...............................................................................................................................................189
10.1.1. Chemiluminescence ...........................................................................................................................................189
10.1.2. NOX and NO2 Determination ............................................................................................................................... 190
10.2. Chemiluminescence Detection ...................................................................................................................................191
10.2.1. The Photo Multiplier Tube................................................................................................................................... 191
10.2.2. Optical Filter .......................................................................................................................................................192
10.2.3. Auto Zero............................................................................................................................................................192
10.2.4. Measurement Interferences................................................................................................................................193
10.2.4.1. Direct Interference ......................................................................................................................................193
10.2.4.2. Third Body Quenching ................................................................................................................................193
10.2.4.3. Light Leaks..................................................................................................................................................194
10.3. Pneumatic Operation..................................................................................................................................................195
10.3.1. Pump and Exhaust Manifold...............................................................................................................................195
10.3.2. Sample Gas Flow ...............................................................................................................................................196
10.3.2.1. NO/NOx and AutoZero cycles ..................................................................................................................... 196
10.3.3. Flow Rate Control - Critical Flow Orifices ...........................................................................................................197
10.3.3.1. Critical Flow Orifice .....................................................................................................................................199
10.3.4. Sample Particulate Filter.....................................................................................................................................201
10.3.5. Ozone Gas Air Flow............................................................................................................................................201
10.3.6. O3 Generator...................................................................................................................................................... 202
10.3.7. Perma Pure® Dryer.............................................................................................................................................203
10.3.8. Ozone Supply Air Filter.......................................................................................................................................205
10.3.9. Ozone Scrubber .................................................................................................................................................205
10.3.10. Pneumatic Sensors...........................................................................................................................................206
10.3.10.1. Vacuum Manifold ......................................................................................................................................206
10.3.10.2. Sample Pressure Sensor ..........................................................................................................................206
10.3.10.3. Vacuum Pressure Sensor .........................................................................................................................207
10.3.10.4. O3 Supply Air Flow Sensor........................................................................................................................207
10.3.11. Dilution Manifold ...............................................................................................................................................207
10.4. Electronic Operation...................................................................................................................................................209
10.4.1. CPU ....................................................................................................................................................................210
10.4.1.1. Disk On Chip............................................................................................................................................... 211
10.4.1.2. Flash Chip...................................................................................................................................................211
10.4.2. Sensor Module, Reaction Cell ............................................................................................................................211
10.4.2.1. Reaction Cell Heating Circuit ......................................................................................................................211
10.4.3. Photo Multiplier Tube (PMT)...............................................................................................................................212
10.4.4. PMT Cooling System.......................................................................................................................................... 213
10.4.4.1. TEC Control Board......................................................................................................................................213
10.4.5. PMT Preamplifier ................................................................................................................................................214
10.4.6. Pneumatic Sensor Board.................................................................................................................................... 215
10.4.7. Relay Board........................................................................................................................................................215
10.4.7.1. Relay PCA Location and Layout .................................................................................................................215
10.4.7.2. Heater Control.............................................................................................................................................215
10.4.7.3. Thermocouple Inputs and Configuration Jumper (JP5)............................................................................... 216
10.4.7.4. Valve Control ..............................................................................................................................................217
10.4.8. Status LEDs & Watch Dog Circuitry....................................................................................................................218
10.4.8.1. Watchdog Indicator (D1) ............................................................................................................................. 218
10.4.9. Motherboard .......................................................................................................................................................219
10.4.9.1. A to D Conversion.......................................................................................................................................219
10.4.9.2. Sensor Inputs..............................................................................................................................................219
10.4.9.3. Thermistor Interface....................................................................................................................................220
10.4.10. Analog Outputs.................................................................................................................................................220
10.4.11. External Digital I/O............................................................................................................................................221
10.4.12. I2C Data Bus.....................................................................................................................................................221
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Table of Contents
vii
10.4.13. Power-up Circuit ...............................................................................................................................................221
10.5. Power Distribution &Circuit Breaker ...........................................................................................................................222
10.6. Communications Interface..........................................................................................................................................223
10.6.1. Front Panel Interface ..........................................................................................................................................224
10.6.1.1. Analyzer Status LED’s ................................................................................................................................224
10.6.1.2. Keyboard ....................................................................................................................................................224
10.6.1.3. Display ........................................................................................................................................................225
10.6.1.4. Keyboard/Display Interface Electronics ......................................................................................................225
10.7. Software Operation ....................................................................................................................................................227
10.7.1. Adaptive Filter.....................................................................................................................................................228
10.7.2. Calibration - Slope and Offset.............................................................................................................................228
10.7.3. Temperature/Pressure Compensation (TPC) .....................................................................................................229
10.7.4. NO2 Converter Efficiency Compensation............................................................................................................230
10.7.5. Internal Data Acquisition System (iDAS) ............................................................................................................230
11. Troubleshooting & Repair ..................................................................................................................................................231
11.1. General Troubleshooting............................................................................................................................................231
11.1.1. Warning Messages ............................................................................................................................................. 232
11.1.2. Fault Diagnosis with Test Functions ...................................................................................................................232
11.1.3. Using the Diagnostic Signal I/O Function ...........................................................................................................233
11.1.4. Status LED’s.......................................................................................................................................................235
11.1.4.1. Motherboard Status Indicator (Watchdog) ..................................................................................................235
11.1.4.2. CPU Status Indicator ..................................................................................................................................235
11.1.4.3. Relay Board and Status LEDs ....................................................................................................................235
11.2. Gas Flow Problems ....................................................................................................................................................238
11.2.1. M200EH Internal Gas Flow Diagrams ................................................................................................................238
11.2.2. M200EM Internal Gas Flow Diagrams................................................................................................................241
11.2.3. Zero or Low Flow Problems................................................................................................................................243
11.2.3.1. Sample Flow is Zero or Low........................................................................................................................243
11.2.3.2. Ozone Flow is Zero or Low ......................................................................................................................... 244
11.2.4. High Flow............................................................................................................................................................245
11.2.5. Sample Flow is Zero or Low But Analyzer Reports Correct Flow ....................................................................... 245
11.3. Calibration Problems ..................................................................................................................................................246
11.3.1. Negative Concentrations ....................................................................................................................................246
11.3.2. No Response......................................................................................................................................................246
11.3.3. Unstable Zero and Span.....................................................................................................................................247
11.3.4. Inability to Span - No SPAN Key ........................................................................................................................247
11.3.5. Inability to Zero - No ZERO Key ......................................................................................................................... 248
11.3.6. Non-Linear Response.........................................................................................................................................248
11.3.7. Discrepancy Between Analog Output and Display ............................................................................................. 249
11.3.8. Discrepancy between NO and NOX slopes.........................................................................................................249
11.4. Other Performance Problems..................................................................................................................................... 249
11.4.1. Excessive noise..................................................................................................................................................249
11.4.2. Slow Response...................................................................................................................................................249
11.4.3. Auto-zero Warnings ............................................................................................................................................250
11.5. Subsystem Checkout..................................................................................................................................................251
11.5.1. Simple Vacuum Leak and Pump Check .............................................................................................................251
11.5.2. Detailed Pressure Leak Check ........................................................................................................................... 251
11.5.3. Performing a Sample Flow Check ......................................................................................................................252
11.5.4. AC Power Configuration .....................................................................................................................................253
11.5.4.1. AC configuration – Internal Pump (JP7)......................................................................................................254
11.5.4.2. AC Configuration – Standard Heaters (JP2) ............................................................................................... 255
11.5.4.3. AC Configuration –Heaters for Option Packages (JP6) .............................................................................. 256
11.5.5. DC Power Supply Test Points ............................................................................................................................257
11.5.6. I2C Bus ...............................................................................................................................................................257
11.5.7. Keyboard / Display Interface...............................................................................................................................258
11.5.8. Genreal Relay Board Diagnostic ........................................................................................................................258
11.5.9. Motherboard .......................................................................................................................................................259
11.5.9.1. A/D functions...............................................................................................................................................259
11.5.9.2. Analog Output Voltages ..............................................................................................................................259
11.5.9.3. Status Outputs ............................................................................................................................................260
11.5.9.4. Control Inputs..............................................................................................................................................261
11.5.10. CPU ..................................................................................................................................................................261
11.5.11. RS-232 Communication.................................................................................................................................... 262
11.5.11.1. General RS-232 Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................262
11.5.11.2. Modem or Terminal Operation ..................................................................................................................262
04521C (DCN5731)
viii
11.5.12. PMT Sensor......................................................................................................................................................263
11.5.13. PMT Preamplifier Board ...................................................................................................................................263
11.5.14. High Voltage Power Supply ..............................................................................................................................263
11.5.15. Pneumatic Sensor Assembly............................................................................................................................264
11.5.15.1. Reaction Cell Pressure .............................................................................................................................264
11.5.15.2. Sample Pressure ......................................................................................................................................264
11.5.15.3. Ozone Flow...............................................................................................................................................265
11.5.16. NO2 Converter ..................................................................................................................................................265
11.5.17. O3 Generator ....................................................................................................................................................266
11.5.18. Box Temperature.............................................................................................................................................. 266
11.5.19. PMT Temperature.............................................................................................................................................266
11.6. Repair Procedures .....................................................................................................................................................267
11.6.1. Disk-on-Chip Replacement................................................................................................................................. 267
11.6.2. Flash Chip Replacement or Upgrade..................................................................................................................268
11.6.3. O3 Generator Replacement ................................................................................................................................268
11.6.4. Sample and Ozone Dryer Replacement .............................................................................................................269
11.6.5. PMT Sensor Hardware Calibration .....................................................................................................................270
11.6.6. Replacing the PMT, HVPS or TEC .....................................................................................................................271
11.7. Removing / Replacing the Relay PCA from the Instrument........................................................................................ 274
11.8. Technical Assistance..................................................................................................................................................275
12. A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge.................................................................................................................................277
12.1. How Static Charges are Created................................................................................................................................277
12.2. How Electro-Static Charges Cause Damage.............................................................................................................. 278
12.3. Common Myths About ESD Damage .........................................................................................................................279
12.4. Basic Principles of Static Control................................................................................................................................279
12.4.1. General Rules..................................................................................................................................................... 280
12.4.2. Basic anti-ESD Procedures for Analyzer Repair and Maintenance .................................................................... 281
12.4.2.1. Working at the Instrument Rack..................................................................................................................281
12.4.2.2. Working at an Anti-ESD Work Bench.......................................................................................................... 281
12.4.2.3. Transferring Components from Rack to Bench and Back ........................................................................... 282
12.4.2.4. Opening Shipments from Teledyne Instruments Customer Service............................................................ 282
12.4.2.5. Packing Components for Return to Teledyne Instruments Customer Service. ...........................................283
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 3-1: M200EH/EM Layout.......................................................................................................................8
Figure 3-2: M200EH/EM Rear Panel Layout....................................................................................................9
Figure 3-3: M200EH/EM Front Panel Layout...................................................................................................9
Figure 3-4: Analog Output Connector ............................................................................................................11
Figure 3-5: Status Output Connector .............................................................................................................12
Figure 3-6: Control Input Connector...............................................................................................................13
Figure 3-7: M200EH Internal Pneumatic Block Diagram - Standard Configuration.......................................15
Figure 3-8: M200EM Internal Pneumatic Block Diagram - Standard Configuration ......................................16
Figure 3-9: Pneumatic Connections–Basic Configuration–Using Gas Dilution Calibrator.............................18
Figure 3-10: Pneumatic Connections–Basic Configuration–Using Bottled Span Gas.....................................18
Figure 3-11: Pneumatic Connections–With Zero/Span Valve Option (50) ......................................................19
Figure 3-12: Pneumatic Connections–With 2-Span point Option (52) –Using Bottled Span Gas ...................20
Figure 3-13: Front Panel Display During Startup Sequence............................................................................21
Figure 3-14: O2 Sensor Calibration Set Up ......................................................................................................28
Figure 5-1: M200EH/EM with Carrying Strap Handle and Rack Mount Brackets..........................................38
Figure 5-2: Current Loop Option Installed on the Motherboard .....................................................................39
Figure 5-3: M200EH – Internal Pneumatics with Zero-Span Valve Option 50...............................................41
Figure 5-4: M200EM – Internal Pneumatics with Zero-Span Valve Option 50 ..............................................41
Figure 5-5: M200EH – Internal Pneumatics with Second Span Point Valve Option 52.................................44
Figure 5-6: M200EM – Internal Pneumatics with Second Span Point Valve Option 52 ................................45
Figure 5-7: Oxygen Sensor - Principle of Operation ......................................................................................46
Figure 5-8: M200EH – Internal Pneumatics with O2 Sensor Option 65 .........................................................47
Figure 5-9: M200EM – Internal Pneumatics with O2 Sensor Option 65.........................................................47
Figure 5-10: M200EH/EM Multidrop Card........................................................................................................49
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual List of Figures
ix
Figure 5-11: M200EH/EM Ethernet Card .........................................................................................................50
Figure 5-12: M200EH/EM Rear Panel with Ethernet Installed.........................................................................50
Figure 5-13: Alarm Relay Output Pin Assignments..........................................................................................52
Figure 6-6-1: Front Panel Display......................................................................................................................55
Figure 6-6-2: Viewing M200EH/EM TEST Functions........................................................................................58
Figure 6-6-3: Viewing and Clearing M200EH/EM WARNING Messages .........................................................59
Figure 6-6-4: APICOM Graphical User Interface for Configuring the iDAS ......................................................78
Figure 6-6-5: iDAS Configuration Through a Terminal Emulation Program......................................................79
Figure 6-6-6: Back Panel connector Pin-Outs for COM1 & COM2 in RS-232 mode........................................87
Figure 6-6-7: CPU connector Pin-Outs for COM1 & COM2 in RS-232 mode...................................................88
Figure 6-6-8: CPU card Locations of RS-232/486 Switches, Connectors and Jumpers...................................89
Figure 6-6-9: Back Panel connector Pin-Outs for COM2 in RS-485 mode.......................................................90
Figure 6-6-10: CPU connector Pin-Outs for COM2 in RS-485 mode..................................................................90
Figure 6-6-11: Location of JP2 on RS232-Multidrop PCA (option 62) ...............................................................97
Figure 6-6-12: RS232-Multidrop PCA Host/Analyzer Interconnect Diagram ......................................................98
Figure 6-6-13: Analog Output Connector Key.................................................................................................. 110
Figure 6-6-14: Setup for Calibrating Analog Outputs ....................................................................................... 127
Figure 6-6-15: Setup for Calibrating Current Outputs ...................................................................................... 129
Figure 6-6-16: Alternative Setup for Calibrating Current Outputs .................................................................... 129
Figure 6-6-17: Status Output ConnectorTable 6-29: Status Output Pin Assignments..................................... 140
Table 6-29: Status Output Pin Assignments ................................................................................................ 141
Figure 6-6-18: Control Inputs with local 5 V power supply............................................................................... 142
Figure 6-6-19: Control Inputs with external 5 V power supply ......................................................................... 142
Figure 6-6-20: APICOM Remote Control Program Interface ........................................................................... 148
Figure 7-1: Gas Supply Setup for Determination of NO2 Conversion Efficiency......................................... 157
Figure 7-2: Pneumatic Connections–With Zero/Span Valve Option (50) ................................................... 160
Figure 7-3: Pneumatic Connections–With 2-Span point Option (52) –Using Bottled Span Gas ................ 160
Figure7-4: Pneumatic Connections–With Zero/Span Valve Option (50) ................................................... 164
Figure 9-1: Sample Particulate Filter Assembly .......................................................................................... 178
Figure 9-2: Particle Filter on O3 Supply Air Dryer ....................................................................................... 179
Figure 9-3: Zero Air Scrubber Assembly..................................................................................................... 182
Figure 9-4: NO2 Converter Assembly.......................................................................................................... 183
Figure 9-5: Reaction Cell Assembly............................................................................................................ 184
Figure 9-6: Critical Flow Orifice Assembly ..................................................................................................186
Figure 10-10-1: M200EH/EM Sensitivity Spectrum............................................................................................ 190
Figure 10-10-2: NO2 Conversion Principle ......................................................................................................... 191
Figure 10-10-3: Reaction Cell with PMT Tube ................................................................................................... 192
Figure 10-10-4: Reaction Cell During the AutoZero Cycle................................................................................. 193
Figure 10-10-5: External Pump Pack ................................................................................................................. 195
Figure 10-10-6: Location of Gas Flow Control Assemblies for M200EH............................................................ 197
Figure 10-10-7: Location of Gas Flow Control Assemblies for M200EM ........................................................... 198
Figure 10-10-8: Location of Gas Flow Control Assemblies for M200EH with O2 sensor Option 65 .................. 198
Figure 10-10-9: Location of Gas Flow Control Assemblies for M200EH with Second Span Point Option 52 ... 199
Figure 10-10-10: Flow Control Assembly & Critical Flow Orifice ......................................................................... 200
Figure 10-10-11: Ozone Generator Principle .......................................................................................................202
Figure 10-10-12: Semi-Permeable Membrane Drying Process ........................................................................... 203
Figure 10-10-13: M200EH/EM Perma Pure® Dryer.............................................................................................. 204
Figure 10-10-14: Vacuum Manifold ...................................................................................................................... 206
Figure 10-10-15: Dilution Manifold ....................................................................................................................... 208
Figure 10-10-16: M200EH/EM Electronic Block Diagram .................................................................................... 209
Figure 10-10-17: M200EH/EM CPU Board Annotated......................................................................................... 210
Figure 10-10-18: PMT Housing Assembly ........................................................................................................... 212
Figure 10-10-19: Basic PMT Design .................................................................................................................... 212
Figure 10-10-20: PMT Cooling System ................................................................................................................ 213
Figure 10-10-21: PMT Preamp Block Diagram .................................................................................................... 214
Figure 10-10-22: Heater Control Loop Block Diagram......................................................................................... 215
Figure 10-10-23: Thermocouple Configuration Jumper (JP5) Pin-Outs............................................................... 216
Figure 10-10-24: Status LED Locations – Relay PCA......................................................................................... 218
04521C (DCN5731)
x
Figure 10-10-25: Power Distribution Block Diagram ........................................................................................... 222
Figure 10-10-26: Interface Block Diagram ........................................................................................................... 223
Figure 10-10-27: M200EH/EM Front Panel Layout.............................................................................................. 224
Figure 10-10-28: Keyboard and Display Interface Block Diagram ....................................................................... 225
Figure 10-10-29: Schematic of Basic Software Operation ................................................................................... 227
Figure 11-1: Viewing and Clearing Warning Messages................................................................................ 232
Figure 11-2: Switching Signal I/O Functions ................................................................................................. 234
Figure 11-3: Motherboard Watchdog Status Indicator .................................................................................. 235
Figure 11-4: Relay Board PCA...................................................................................................................... 236
Figure 11-5: M200EH – Basic Internal Gas Flow.......................................................................................... 238
Figure 11-6: M200EH – Internal Gas Flow With OPT 50.............................................................................. 239
Figure 11-7: M200EH – Internal Gas Flow With OPT 52.............................................................................. 239
Figure 11-8: M200EH – Internal Gas Flow With OPT 65.............................................................................. 240
Figure 11-9: M200EH – Internal Gas Flow With OPT 50 + OPT 65 ............................................................. 240
Figure 11-10: M200EM – Basic Internal Gas Flow ......................................................................................... 241
Figure 11-11: M200EM – Internal Gas Flow With OPT 50 ............................................................................. 241
Figure 11-12: M200EM – Internal Gas Flow With OPT 52 ............................................................................. 242
Figure 11-13: M200EM – Internal Gas Flow With OPT 65 ............................................................................. 242
Figure 11-14: M200EM – Internal Gas Flow With OPT 50 + OPT 65............................................................. 243
Figure 11-15: Location of AC power Configuration Jumpers .......................................................................... 253
Figure 11-16: Pump AC Power Jumpers (JP7)............................................................................................... 254
Figure 11-17: Typical Set Up of AC Heater Jumper Set (JP2) ....................................................................... 255
Figure 11-18: Typical Set Up of AC Heater Jumper Set (JP2) ....................................................................... 256
Figure 11-19: Typical Set Up of Status Output Test ....................................................................................... 260
Figure 11-20: Pressure / Flow Sensor Assembly............................................................................................ 264
Figure 11-22: Pre-Amplifier Board Layout....................................................................................................... 270
Figure 11-22: M200EH/EM Sensor Assembly ................................................................................................ 272
Figure 11-23: Relay PCA with AC Relay Retainer In Place............................................................................ 274
Figure 11-24: Relay PCA Mounting Screw Locations.................................................................................... 274
Figure 12-1: Triboelectric Charging ....................................................................................................................... 277
Figure 12-2: Basic anti-ESD Work Station ............................................................................................................ 280
LIST OF TABLES
Table 2-1: Model 200EH/EM Basic Unit Specifications ..................................................................................3
Table 3-1: Analog Output Data Type Default Settings..................................................................................11
Table 3-2: Analog Output Pin-Outs...............................................................................................................11
Table 3-3: Status Output Signals ..................................................................................................................12
Table 3-4: Control Input Signals ...................................................................................................................13
Table 3-5: Inlet / Outlet Connector Nomenclature ........................................................................................15
Table 3-6: NIST-SRM's Available for Traceability of NOx Calibration Gases ................................................17
Table 3-7: Front Panel Display During System Warm-Up ............................................................................22
Table 3-8: Possible Warning Messages at Start-Up.....................................................................................23
Table 5-1: Zero/Span Valve States...............................................................................................................42
Table 5-2: Two-Point Span Valve Operating States .....................................................................................43
Table 5-3: Contents of Zero Air Scrubber Maintenance Kit ..........................................................................48
Table 5-4: Dryer and NH3 Removal Options.................................................................................................51
Table 5-5: Alarm Relay Output Assignments................................................................................................51
Table 5-6 Concentration Alarm Relay Output Operation .............................................................................52
Table 6-1: Analyzer Operating modes ..........................................................................................................56
Table 6-2: Test Functions Defined................................................................................................................57
Table 6-3: List of Warning Messages Revision F.0 ......................................................................................59
Table 6-4: Primary Setup Mode Features and Functions .............................................................................61
Table 6-5: Secondary Setup Mode Features and Functions ........................................................................61
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual List of Tables
xi
Table 6-6: Front Panel LED Status Indicators for iDAS................................................................................63
Table 6-7: iDAS Data Channel Properties ....................................................................................................64
Table 6-8: iDAS Data Parameter Functions..................................................................................................65
Table 6-9: M200EH/EM Default iDAS Configuration ....................................................................................67
Table 6-10: Password Levels..........................................................................................................................82
Table 6-11: Ethernet Status Indicators ...........................................................................................................91
Table 6-12: LAN/Internet Configuration Properties.........................................................................................92
Table 6-13: Internet Configuration Keypad Functions ....................................................................................96
Table 6-14: COMM Port Communication modes............................................................................................99
Table 6-15: Variable Names (VARS) ...........................................................................................................103
Table 6-16: M200EH/EM Diagnostic (DIAG) Functions............................................................................... 106
Table 6-17: Analog Output Voltage Ranges with Over-Range Active ......................................................... 110
Table 6-18: Analog Output Pin Assignments ............................................................................................... 110
Table 6-19: Analog Output Current Loop Range ......................................................................................... 111
Table 6-20: Example of Analog Output configuration for M200EH/EM ....................................................... 111
Table 6-21: DIAG - Analog I/O Functions .................................................................................................... 113
Table 6-22: Analog Output Data Type Default Settings............................................................................... 118
Table 6-23: Analog Output iDAS Parameters Related to Gas Concentration Data..................................... 119
Table 6-24: Voltage Tolerances for Analog Output Calibration ................................................................... 127
Table 6-25: Current Loop Output Calibration with Resistor ......................................................................... 130
Table 6-26: M200EH/EM Available Concentration Display Values ............................................................. 132
Table 6-27: M200EH/EM Concentration Display Default Values................................................................. 133
Table 6-28: Concentration Alarm Default Settings....................................................................................... 139
Table 6-30: Control Input Pin Assignments ................................................................................................. 141
Table 6-31: Terminal Mode Software Commands ....................................................................................... 143
Table 6-32: Command Types....................................................................................................................... 143
Table 6-33: Serial Interface Documents ......................................................................................................148
Table 6-34: RS-232 Communication Parameters for Hessen Protocol ....................................................... 149
Table 6-28: M200EH/EM Hessen Protocol Response Modes..................................................................... 151
Table 6-35: M200EH/EM Hessen GAS ID List ............................................................................................ 152
Table 6-36: Default Hessen Status Bit Assignments ................................................................................... 153
Table 7-1: NIST-SRM's Available for Traceability of NOx Calibration Gases ............................................. 156
Table 7-2: AutoCal Modes ......................................................................................................................... 169
Table 7-3: AutoCal Attribute Setup Parameters......................................................................................... 169
Table 7-4: Example Auto-Cal Sequence.................................................................................................... 170
Table 7-5: Calibration Data Quality Evaluation.......................................................................................... 172
Table 9-1: M200EH/EM Preventive Maintenance Schedule...................................................................... 176
Table 9-2: Predictive Uses for Test Functions ........................................................................................... 177
Table 10-1: List of Interferents ..................................................................................................................... 194
Table 10-2: M200EH/EM Valve Cycle Phases ............................................................................................ 196
Table 10-3: M200EH/EM Critical Flow Orifice Diameters and Gas Flow Rates .......................................... 200
Table 10-4: Thermocouple Configuration Jumper (JP5) Pin-Outs............................................................... 216
Table 10-5: Typical Thermocouple Settings For M200E Series Analyzers ................................................. 217
Table 10-6: Front Panel Status LED’s ......................................................................................................... 224
Table 11-1: Test Functions - Possible Causes for Out-Of-Range Values ................................................... 233
Table 11-2: Relay Board Status LEDs .........................................................................................................237
Table 11-3: AC Power Configuration for Internal Pumps (JP7) ................................................................... 254
Table 11-4: Power Configuration for Standard AC Heaters (JP2)............................................................... 255
Table 11-5: Power Configuration for Optional AC Heaters (JP6) ................................................................ 256
Table 11-6: DC Power Test Point and Wiring Color Code........................................................................... 257
Table 11-7: DC Power Supply Acceptable Levels ....................................................................................... 257
Table 11-8: Relay Board Control Devices.................................................................................................... 258
Table 11-9: Analog Output Test Function - Nominal Values ....................................................................... 259
Table 11-10: Status Outputs Pin Assignments ............................................................................................. 260
Table 11-11: Example of HVPS Power Supply Outputs ................................................................................ 263
Table 12-1: Static Generation Voltages for Typical Activities ...................................................................... 277
Table 12-2: Sensitivity of Electronic Devices to Damage by ESD............................................................... 278
04521C (DCN5731)
xii
LIST OF APPENDICES
APPENDIX A - VERSION SPECIFIC SOFTWARE DOCUMENTATION
APPENDIX A-1: M200EH/EM Software Menu Trees, Revision F.0
APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O, Revision F.0
APPENDIX A-3: Warnings and Test Functions, Revision F.0
APPENDIX A-4: M200EH/EM Signal I/O Definitions, Revision F.0
APPENDIX A-5: M200EH/EM iDAS Functions, Revision F.0
APPENDIX A-6: Terminal Command Designators, Revision F.0
APPENDIX B - M200EH/EM SPARE PARTS LIST
APPENDIX C - REPAIR QUESTIONNAIRE - M200EH/EM
APPENDIX D - ELECTRONIC SCHEMATICS
04521C (DCN5731)
04521C (DCN5731)
M200EH/EM Documentation Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
2
6.0 Operation Instructions
Step by step instructions for operating the analyzer.
7.0 Calibration Procedures
General information and step by step instructions for calibrating your analyzer.
8.0 EPA Protocol Calibration
Because there is no single, standard method for EPA equivalency in application where high concentrations of
NOx are measured, no specific EPA calibration/validation method is included in this manual.
9.0 Instrument Maintenance
Description of preventative maintenance procedures that should be regularly performed on you instrument to
assure good operating condition. This includes information on using the iDAS to predict possible component
failures before they happen.
10.0 Theory of Operation
An in-depth look at the various principals by which your analyzer operates as well as a description of how the
various electronic, mechanical and pneumatic components of the instrument work and interact with each other.
A close reading of this section is invaluable for understanding the instrument’s operation.
11.0 Troubleshooting & Repair
This section includes pointers and instructions for diagnosing problems with the instrument, such as excessive
noise or drift, as well as instructions on performing repairs of the instrument’s major subsystems.
12.0 Electro-static Discharge Primer
This section describes how static electricity occurs; why it is a significant concern and; how to avoid it and avoid
allowing ESD to affect the reliable and accurate operation of your analyzer.
Appendices
For easier access and better updating, some information has been separated out of the manual and placed in a
series of appendices at the end of this manual. These include version-specific software menu trees, warning
messages, definitions of iDAS & serial I/O variables as well as spare part listings, repair questionnaire,
interconnect drawing, detailed pneumatic and electronic schematics.
NOTE
Throughout this manual, words printed in capital, bold letters, such as SETUP or ENTR
represent messages as they appear on the analyzer’s front panel display.
NOTE
The flowcharts in this manual contain typical representations of the analyzer’s display
during the various operations being described. These representations are not intended
to be exact and may differ slightly from the actual display of your instrument.
USER NOTES:
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Specifications, Approvals and Warranty
3
2. SPECIFICATIONS, APPROVALS AND WARRANTY
2.1. M200EH/EM OPERATING SPECIFICATIONS
Table 2-1: Model 200EH/EM Basic Unit Specifications
Min/Max Range
(Physical Analog Output)
200EH: Min: 0-5 ppm; Max: 0-5000 ppm
200EM: Min: 0-1 ppm; Max: 0-200 ppm
Measurement Units ppm, mg/m3 (user selectable)
Zero Noise <20 ppb (RMS)
Span Noise <0.2% of reading above 20 ppm
Lower Detectable Limit 40 ppb (2x noise as per USEPA)
Zero Drift (24 hours) <20 ppb (at constant temperature and voltage.)
Zero Drift (7 days) <20 ppb (at constant temperature and voltage.)
Span Drift (7 Days) <1% of reading (at constant temperature and voltage.)
Linearity 1% of full scale
Precision 0.5% of reading
Lag Time 20 s
Rise/Fall Time 95% in <60 s (~10 s in NO only or NOX only modes)
Gas Flow Rates
200EH: -40 cm³/min sample gas through NO2 converter & sensor module
-250 cm3/min ± 10% though bypass manifold;
-290 cm³/min total flow
200EM: -250 cm³/min sample gas through NO2 converter & sensor module
O2 Sensor option adds 80 cm³/min to total flow though M200EH/EM when installed;
Temperature Range 5 - 40 C operating range
Humidity Range 0-95% RH non-condensing
Dimensions H x W x D 18 cm x 43 cm x 61 cm (7" x 17" x 23.6")
Weight, Analyzer 18 kg (40 lbs) without options
Weight, Ext Pump Pack 7 kg (16 lbs)
AC Power Rating
100 V, 50/60 Hz (3.25A);
115 V, 60 Hz (3.0 A);
220 - 240 V, 50/60 Hz (2.5 A)
Power, Ext Pump 100 V, 50/60 Hz (3.25A); 115 V, 60 Hz (3.0 A);
220 - 240 V, 50/60 Hz (2.5 A)
Environmental Installation category (over-voltage category) II; Pollution degree 2
Analog Outputs 4 user configurable outputs
Analog Output Ranges
All Outputs: 0.1 V, 1 V, 5 V or 10 V
Three outputs convertible to 4-20 mA isolated current loop.
All Ranges with 5% under/over-range
Analog Output Resolution 1 part in 4096 of selected full-scale voltage (12 bit)
Status Outputs 8 Status outputs from opto-isolators, 7 defined, 1 spare
Control Inputs 6 Control inputs, 4 defined, 2 spare
Alarm outputs 2 relay alarms outputs (Optional equipment) with user settable alarm limits
- 1 Form C: SPDT; 3 Amp @ 125 VAC
Serial I/O 1x RS-232; 1x RS-485 or RS-232 (configurable)
Communication speed: 300 - 115200 baud (user selectable)
Certifications CE: EN61326 (1997 w/A1: 98) Class A, FCC Part 15 Subpart B Section 15.107 Class A,
ICES-003 Class A (ANSI C63.4 1992) & AS/NZS 3548 (w/A1 & A2; 97) Class A.
04521C (DCN5731)
Specifications, Approvals and Warranty Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
4
2.2. CE MARK COMPLIANCE
Emissions Compliance
The Teledyne-Advanced Pollution Instrumentation Nitrogen Oxides Analyzers M200EH/EM, M200EH/EMH and
M200EH/EMM were tested and found to be fully compliant with:
EN61326 (1997 w/A1: 98) Class A, FCC Part 15 Subpart B Section 15.107 Class A, ICES-003 Class A (ANSI
C63.4 1992) & AS/NZS 3548 (w/A1 & A2; 97) Class A.
Tested on January 02-06, 2003 at CKC Laboratories, Inc., Report Number CE03-005.
Safety Compliance
The Teledyne-Advanced Pollution Instrumentation Nitrogen Oxides Analyzers M200EH/EM, M200EH/EMH and
M200EH/EMM were tested and found to be fully compliant with:
IEC 61010-1:90 + A1:92 + A2:95,
Tested on January 27-20, 2003.
2.3. WARRANTY
Warranty Policy (02024D)
Prior to shipment, T-API equipment is thoroughly inspected and tested. Should equipment failure occur, T-API
assures its customers that prompt service and support will be available.
COVERAGE
After the warranty period and throughout the equipment lifetime, T-API stands ready to provide on-site or in-plant
service at reasonable rates similar to those of other manufacturers in the industry. All maintenance and the first
level of field troubleshooting is to be performed by the customer.
NON-API MANUFACTURED EQUIPMENT
Equipment provided but not manufactured by T-API is warranted and will be repaired to the extent and according
to the current terms and conditions of the respective equipment manufacturers warranty.
GENERAL
During the warranty period, T-API warrants each Product manufactured by T-API to be free from defects in
material and workmanship under normal use and service. Expendable parts are excluded.
If a Product fails to conform to its specifications within the warranty period, API shall correct such defect by, in
API's discretion, repairing or replacing such defective Product or refunding the purchase price of such Product.
The warranties set forth in this section shall be of no force or effect with respect to any Product: (i) that has been
altered or subjected to misuse, negligence or accident, or (ii) that has been used in any manner other than in
accordance with the instruction provided by T-API, or (iii) not properly maintained.
04521C (DCN5731)
04521C (DCN5731)
04521C (DCN5731)
04521C (DCN5731)
Getting Started Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
8
VENTILATION CLEARANCE: Whether the analyzer is set up on a bench or installed into an instrument rack, be
sure to leave sufficient ventilation clearance.
AREA MINIMUM REQUIRED CLEARANCE
Back of the instrument 10 cm / 4 inches
Sides of the instrument 2.5 cm / 1 inch
Above and below the instrument. 2.5 cm / 1 inch
Various rack mount kits are available for this analyzer. See Chapter 5 of this manual for more information.
3.1.1. M200EH/EM LAYOUT
Figure 3-1 shows a top-down view of the analyzer. The shown configuration includes the Ethernet board, IZS
option, zero-air scrubber and an additional sample dryer. See Chapter 5 for optional equipment. Figure 3-2
shows the rear panel configuration with optional zero-air scrubber mounted to it and two optional fittings for the
IZS option. Figure 3-3, finally shows the front panel layout of the analyzer.
Figure 3-1: M200EH/EM Layout
04521C (DCN5731)
04521C (DCN5731)
Getting Started Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
10
3.1.2. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
Refer to Figure 3-2 for the location of the rear panel electrical and pneumatic connections.
3.1.2.1. Power Connection
Attach the power cord to the analyzer and plug it into a power outlet capable of carrying at least 10 A current at
your AC voltage and that it is equipped with a functioning earth ground.
CAUTION
CHECK THE VOLTAGE AND FREQUENCY LABEL ON THE REAR PANEL
OF THE INSTRUMENT (SEE FIGURE 3-2 FOR COMPATIBILITY WITH THE
LOCAL POWER BEFORE PLUGGING THE M200EH/EM INTO LINE POWER.
Do not plug in the power cord if the voltage or
frequency is incorrect.
CAUTION
POWER CONNECTION MUST HAVE FUNCTIONING GROUND
CONNECTION.
DO NOT DEFEAT THE GROUND WIRE ON POWER PLUG.
TURN OFF ANALYZER POWER BEFORE DISCONNECTING OR
CONNECTING ELECTRICAL SUBASSEMBLIES.
DO NOT OPERATE WITH COVER OFF.
The M200EH/EM analyzer can be configured for both 100-130 V and 210-240 V at either 50 or 60 Hz., To avoid
damage to your analyzer, make sure that the AC power voltage matches the voltage indicated on the rear panel
serial number label and that the frequency is between 47 and 63 Hz.
04521C (DCN5731)
A
A
A
A
04521C (DCN5731)
Getting Started Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
12
3.1.2.3. Connecting the Status Outputs
If you wish to utilize the analyzer’s status outputs to interface with a device that accepts logic-level digital inputs,
such as programmable logic controller (PLC) chips, you can access them through a 12 pin connector on the
analyzer’s rear panel labeled STATUS.
EMITTER BUS
FOR PINS 1-8
STATUS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 D +
SYSTEM OK
HIGH RANGE
CONC VALID
ZERO CAL
SPAN CAL
DIAGNOSTIC
MODE
LOW SPAN
Figure 3-5: Status Output Connector
NOTE
Most PLC’s have internal provisions for limiting the current the input will draw. When
connecting to a unit that does not have this feature, external resistors must be used to
limit the current through the individual transistor outputs to ≤50mA (120 Ω for 5V
supply).
Table 3-3: Status Output Signals
PIN # STATUS CONDITION (ON = CONDUCTING)
1 SYSTEM OK ON if no faults are present.
2 CONC VALID ON if concentration measurement (NO, NO2 or NOx) is valid.
OFF any time the hold-off feature is active.
3 HIGH RANGE ON if unit is in high range of the Auto Range Mode.
4 ZERO CAL ON whenever the instrument is in ZERO point calibration mode.
5 SPAN CAL ON whenever the instrument is in SPAN point calibration mode.
6 DIAG MODE ON whenever the instrument is in diagnostic mode.
7 LOW SPAN CAL ON when in low span calibration (optional equipment necessary)
8 Unused
D EMITTER BUS The emitters of the transistors on pins 1-8 are tied together.
Unused
+ DC POWER + 5 VDC, 300 mA (combined rating with Control Output, if used).
Digital Ground The ground level from the analyzer’s internal DC power supplies
04521C (DCN5731)
04521C (DCN5731)
Getting Started Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
14
3.1.2.5. Connecting the Serial Ports
If you wish to utilize either of the analyzer’s two serial interfaces, refer to Section 6.11 and 6.15 of this manual for
instructions on configuration and usage.
3.1.2.6. Connecting to a LAN or the Internet
If your unit has a Teledyne Instruments Ethernet card (Option 63), plug one end of a 7’ CAT5 cable into the
appropriate place on the back of the analyzer (see Figure 5-11 in Section 5.9.3) and the other end into any
nearby Ethernet access port.
NOTE:
The M200EH/EM firmware supports dynamic IP addressing or DHCP.
If your network also supports DHCP, the analyzer will automatically configure its LAN
connection appropriately,
If your network does not support DHCP, see Section 6.11.6.3 for instructions on
manually configuring the LAN connection.
3.1.2.7. Connecting to a Multidrop Network
If your unit has a Teledyne Instruments RS-232 multidrop card (Option 62), see Section 6.11.7 for instructions
on setting it up.
CAUTION
To prevent dust from getting into the analyzer, it was shipped with small plugs inserted
into each of the pneumatic fittings on the rear panel. Make sure that all dust plugs are
removed before attaching exhaust and supply gas lines.
04521C (DCN5731)
04521C (DCN5731)
Getting Started Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
16
Figure 3-8: M200EM Internal Pneumatic Block Diagram - Standard Configuration
Note:
Pneumatic Diagrams do not reflect the physical layout of the instrument.
The most significant differences between the M200EH and M200 EM versions in regards to pneumatic flow are:
A bypass line leading directly from the bypass manifold to the exhaust manifold is present on the
M200EH, but not in the M200EM.
The Diameter of the critical flow orifice controlling the gas flow into the sample chamber is smaller and
therefore the flow rate of sample gas through the instrument is lower.
See Section 10.3.2 for more information on these differences
See Chapter 5 for or information on the pneumatic flow though instruments with one of the M200Eh/Em’available
options installed.
3.1.3.1. Calibration Gases
Zero Air
Zero air or zero calibration gas is defined as a gas that is similar in chemical composition to the
measured medium but without the gas to be measured by the analyzer, in this case NO and NO2. If
your analyzer is equipped with an external zero air scrubber option, it is capable of creating zero air from
ambient air.
04521C (DCN5731)
04521C (DCN5731)
Getting Started Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
18
3.1.3.2. Pneumatic Connections to M200EH/EM Basic Configuration:
Figures 3-7 and 3-8 show the most common configurations for gas supply and exhaust lines to the Model
200EH/EM Analyzer. Please refer to Figure 3-2 for the locations of pneumatic connections on the rear panel and
Table 3-5 for nomenclature.
NOTE
Sample and calibration gases should only come into contact with PTFE (Teflon) or glass
or materials. They should not come in contact with FEP or stainless steel materials.
Source of
SAMPLE GAS
Removed during
calibration
MODEL
200EH/EM
SAMPLE
EXHAUST
PUMP
MODEL 700
Gas Dilution
Calibrator
VENT
MODEL 701
Zero Gas
Generator
NOx Gas
(High Concentration)
VENT here if input
is pressurized
Figure 3-9: Pneumatic Connections–Basic Configuration–Using Gas Dilution Calibrator
Source of
SAMPLE GAS
Removed during
calibration
MODEL
200EH/EM
SAMPLE
EXHAUST
PUMP
MODEL 701
Zero Gas
Generator
VENT
3-way Valve
Manual
Control Valve
VENT here if input
is pressurized
NOX Gas
(High Concentration)
Figure 3-10: Pneumatic Connections–Basic Configuration–Using Bottled Span Gas
04521C (DCN5731)
04521C (DCN5731)
Getting Started Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
20
VENT here if input
is pressurized
Source of
SAMPLE Gas
PUMP
VENT
MODEL
200EH/EM
Sample
Exhaust
High Span Point
Low Span Point
Zero Air
Calibrated NO
at HIGH Span
Concentration
Calibrated NO
at LOW Span
Concentration
Filter
External Zero
Air Scrubber
VENT
On/Off
Valves
Figure 3-12: Pneumatic Connections–With 2-Span point Option (52) –Using Bottled Span Gas
Once the appropriate pneumatic connections have been made, check all pneumatic fittings for leaks using the
procedures defined in Section 11.5.
3.2. INITIAL OPERATION
CAUTION!
If the presence of ozone is detected at any time, call Teledyne API Customer Service as soon as possible:
800-324-5190 or email: api-customerservice@teledyne.com
If you are unfamiliar with the theory of operation of the M200EH/EM analyzer, we recommend that you read
Chapter 10 before proceeding. For information on navigating the analyzer’s software menus, see the menu
trees described in Appendix A-1.
3.2.1. STARTUP
After electrical and pneumatic connections are made, turn on the instrument and supply power to the external
pump.
The exhaust and PMT cooler fans should start.
The display should immediately display a single, horizontal dash in the upper left corner of the display.
This will last approximately 30 seconds while the CPU loads the operating system.
Once the CPU has completed this activity, it will begin loading the analyzer firmware and configuration data.
During this process, a string of messages will appear on the analyzer’s front panel display as shown in Figure
3-13. The analyzer should automatically switch to SAMPLE mode after completing the boot-up sequence and
start monitoring NOX, NO, NO2 gases.
04521C (DCN5731)
04521C (DCN5731)
Getting Started Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
22
3.2.2. WARM-UP
The M200EH/EM requires about 45 minutes warm-up time before reliable NOX, NO and NO2 measurements can
be taken. During that time, various portions of the instrument’s front panel will behave as follows.
Table 3-7: Front Panel Display During System Warm-Up
NAME COLOR BEHAVIOR SIGNIFICANCE
Concentration
Field N/A Switches between
NOX, NO and NO2 This is normal operation.
Mode Field N/A Displays blinking
“SAMPLE”
Instrument is in sample mode but is still in the process
of warming up (hold-off period is active).
STATUS LEDs
Sample Green On Unit is operating in sample mode, front panel display
is continuously updated.
Cal Yellow Off The instrument’s calibration is not enabled.
Fault Red Blinking The analyzer is warming up and out of specification for
a fault-free reading.
See Figure 3-3 for locations
3.2.3. WARNING MESSAGES
During warm-up, internal temperatures and other parameters may be outside of specified limits. The software
will suppress most warning conditions for 30 minutes after power up.
SAMPLE HVPS WARNING NOX = 0.0
TEST CAL MSG CLR SETUP
Press CLR to clear the current
message.
If more than one warning is active, the
next message will take its place
Once the last warning has been
cleared, the analyzer returns to
SAMPLE mode
SAMPLE RANGE=200.0 PPM NO = 0.0
< TST TST > CAL MSG CLR SETUP
SAMPLE HVPS WARNING NOX = 0.0
TEST CAL MSG CLR SETUP
TEST deactivates warning
messages
MSG activates warning
messages.
<TST TST> keys replaced with
TEST key
NOTE:
If the warning message persists after several attempts to
clear it, the message may indicate a real problem and not
an artifact of the warm-u
p
p
eriod
04521C (DCN5731)
04521C (DCN5731)
Getting Started Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
24
3.2.4. FUNCTIONAL CHECK
After the analyzer’s components have warmed up for at least 30 minutes, verify that the software properly
supports any hardware options that were installed.
Check to make sure that the analyzer is functioning within allowable operating parameters. Appendix A and C
include a list of test functions viewable from the analyzer’s front panel as well as their expected values. These
functions are also useful tools for diagnosing performance problems with your analyzer (Chapter 11). The
enclosed Final Test and Validation Data Sheet (part number 04490) lists these values before the instrument left
the factory. To view the current values of these test functions press the <TST TST> keys:
A
1:NXCNC1=100 PPM
1
A2:N0CNC1=100 PPM1
A3:N2CNC1=25 PPM1
A4:NXCNC2=100%1
NOX STB
SAMP FLOW
0ZONE FLOW
PMT
NORM PMT
AZERO
HVPS
RCELL TEMP
BOX TEMP
PMT TEMP
MF TEMP
O2 CELL TEMP2
MOLY TEMP
RCEL
SAMP
NOX SLOPE
NOX OFFSET
NO SLOPE
NO OFFSET
O2 SLOPE2
O2 OFFSET2
TIME
SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100 PPM NOX = XXX
< TST TST > CAL SETUP
1
default settings for user
selectable reporting range
settings.
2 Only appears if O2 sensor
o
p
tion is installed.
Refer to
Section 6.2.1
for definitions
of these test
functions.
Toggle <TST TST> keys to
scroll throu
g
h list of functions
04521C (DCN5731)
04521C (DCN5731)
Getting Started Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
26
If the dilution ration option is enabled on your M200EH/EM and your application involves diluting the sample gas
before it enters the analyzer, set the dilution ration as follows:
SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT
SETUP X.X RANGE CONTROL MENU
UNIT DIL EXIT
SETUP X.X IL FACTOR:1.0 Gain
0 0 0 0 .0 ENTR EXIT
SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL SETUP
Toggle these
buttons to select the
dilution ratio factor
EXIT ignores the new setting
and returns to the previous
display.
ENTR accepts the new setting
and returns to the
previous display..
STEP 3 – Set NOx and NO span gas concentrations :
Set the expected NO and NOx span gas concentration. These should be 80% of range of concentration values
likely to be encountered in this application. The default factory setting is 100 ppm. If one of the configurable
analog outputs is to be set to transmit concentration values, use 80% of the reporting range set for that output
(see Section 6.13.4.5)
If you supply NO span gas to the analyzer as well as NOx, the values for expected NO and NOx span gas
concentrations need to be identical.
SAMPLE GAS TO CAL:NOX
NOX O2 ENTR EXIT
SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL SETUP
M-P CAL A1:NXCNC1 =100PPM NOX=X.XXX
<TST TST> ZERO SPAN CONC EXIT
SAMPLE RANGE TO CAL:LOW
LOW HIGH ENTR EXIT
M-P CAL CONCENTRATION MENU
NOX NO CONV EXIT
M-P CAL NOX SPAN CONC:80.0 Conc
0 0 8 0 .0 ENTR EXIT
The NOX & NO span concentration
values automatically default to
80.0 Conc.
If this is not the the concentration of
the span gas being used, toggle
these buttons to set the correct
concentration of the NOX and NO
calibration gases.
EXIT ignores the new
setting and returns to
the previous display.
ENTR accepts the new
setting and returns to
the
CONCENTRATION
MENU.
If using NO span gas
in addition to NOX
repeat last step.
04521C (DCN5731)
04521C (DCN5731)
Getting Started Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
28
3.3.2. BASIC O2 SENSOR CALIBRATION PROCEDURE
If your instrument has an O2 sensor option installed that should be calibrated as well.
3.3.2.1. O2 Calibration Setup
The pneumatic connections for calibrating are as follows:
Calibrated N2
at HIGH Span
Concentration
Calibrated O2
at 20.8% Span
Concentration
Source of
SAMPLE GAS
Removed during
calibration
MODEL
200EH/EM
SAMPLE
EXHAUST
PUMP
VENT
3-way
Valve
Manual
Control Valve
VENT here if input
is pressurized
Figure 3-14: O2 Sensor Calibration Set Up
O2 SENSOR ZERO GAS: Teledyne Instruments’ recommends using pure N2 when calibration the zero point of
your O2 sensor option.
O2 SENSOR SPAN GAS: Teledyne Instruments’ recommends using 21% O2 in N2 when calibration the span
point of your O2 sensor option.
3.3.2.2. O2 Calibration Method
STEP 1 – Set O2 span gas concentration :
Set the expected O2 span gas concentration.
This should be equal to the percent concentration of the O2 span gas of the selected reporting range (default
factory setting = 20.8%; the approximate O2 content of ambient air).
04521C (DCN5731)
04521C (DCN5731)
Getting Started Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
30
STEP 4 – O2 ZERO/SPAN CALIBRATION :
To perform the zero/span calibration procedure:
04521C (DCN5731)
04521C (DCN5731)
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Frequently Asked Questions & Glossary
33
4. FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS & GLOSSARY
4.1. FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
The following list contains some of the most commonly asked questions relating to the Model 200EH/EM NOx
Analyzer.
Q: Why is the ZERO or SPAN key not displayed during calibration?
A: The M200EH/EM disables certain keys whenever the chosen value is out of range for that particular
parameter. In this case, the expected span or zero value is too different from the actually measured value
and the instrument does not allow to span or zero to that point. If, for example, the span set point is 80 ppm
and the measurement response is only .5 ppm, the SPAN button will not appear to prevent the user from
spanning to an out-of-range response curve. Chapter 11 describes this in detail.
Q: Why does the ENTR key sometimes disappear on the front panel display?
A: Sometimes the ENTR key will disappear if you select a setting that is invalid or out of the allowable range for
that parameter, such as trying to set the 24-hour clock to 25:00:00 or a M200EH reporting range to less than
more than 5000 ppm (200 ppm for a M200EM). Once you adjust the setting to an allowable value, the ENTR
key will re-appear.
Q: Why does the analyzer not respond to span gas?
A: There are several reasons why this can happen. Section 11.3.2 has some possible answers to this question.
Q: Can I automate the calibration of my analyzer?
A: Any analyzer with zero/span valve options can be automatically calibrated using the instrument’s AutoCal
feature.
Q: What do I do if the concentration on the instrument's front panel display does not match the value recorded or
displayed on my data logger even if both instruments are properly calibrated?
A: This most commonly occurs for one of the following reasons: (1) a difference in circuit ground between the
analyzer and the data logger or a wiring problem; (2) a scale problem with the input to the data logger. The
analog outputs of the analyzer can be manually calibrated to compensate for either or both of these effects,
see Section 6.13.4; analog outputs are not calibrated, which can happen after a firmware upgrade (Section
6.13.5).
Q: How do I measure the sample flow?
A: Sample flow is measured by attaching a calibrated flow meter to the sample inlet port when the instrument is
operating.
For the M200EH in its basic configuration, the sample flow should be 290 cm³/min 10%.
For the M200Em in its basic configuration, the sample flow should be 250 cm³/min 10%.
See Table 10-3 for more detailed information bout gas flow rates.
Chapter 11 includes detailed instructions on performing a check of the sample gas flow.
Q: How often do I need to change the particulate filter?
A: Once per week. Table 9-1 contains a maintenance schedule listing the most important, regular maintenance
tasks. Highly polluted sample air may require more frequent changes.
Q: How long does the sample pump last?
04521C (DCN5731)
Frequently Asked Questions & Glossary Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
34
A: The sample pump should last one to two years and the pump head should be replaced when necessary. Use
the RCEL pressure indicator on the front panel to see if the pump needs replacement. If this value goes
above 10 in-Hg-A, on average, the pump head needs to be rebuild.
Q: Do I need a strip chart recorder or external data logger?
A: No, the M200EH/EM is equipped with a very powerful internal data acquisition system (iDAS). Section 6.7
describes the setup and operation in detail.
Q: Why does my RS-232 serial connection not work?
A: There are many possible reasons: 1) the wrong cable, please use the provided or a generic “straight-through”
cable (do not use a “null-modem” type cable), 2) The DCE/DTE switch on the back of the analyzer is not set
properly; make sure that both green and red lights are on, 3) the baud rate of the analyzer’s COM port does
not match that of the serial port of your computer/data logger. See Section 11.5.11 more trouble-shooting
information.
4.2. GLOSSARY
Acronym – A short form or abbreviation for a longer term. Often artificially made up of the first letters of the
phrase’s words.
APICOM – Name of a remote control program offered by Teledyne-API to its customers
ASSY - Acronym for Assembly.
cm3 – metric abbreviation for cubic centimeter. Same as the obsolete abbreviation “cc”.
Chemical formulas used in this document:
CO2 – carbon dioxide
H2O – water vapor
HNO3 – nitric acid
NOX – nitrogen oxides, here defined as the sum of NO and NO2
NO – nitric oxide
NO2 – nitrogen dioxide
NOy – nitrogen oxides, often called odd nitrogen, the sum of NO, NO2 (NOX) plus other compounds
such as HNO3. Definitions vary widely and may include nitrate (NO3-), PAN, N2O and other
compounds.
NH3 – ammonia
O2 - molecular oxygen
O3 - ozone
SO2 – sulfur dioxide
DAS - Acronym for Data Acquisition System, the old acronym of iDAS
DIAG - Acronym for diagnostics, the diagnostic menu or settings of the analyzer
DHCP: acronym for dynamic host configuration protocol. A protocol used by LAN or Internet servers to
automatically set up the interface protocols between themselves and any other addressable device connected to
the network.
04521C (DCN5731)
04521C (DCN5731)
04521C (DCN5731)
04521C (DCN5731)
Optional Hardware and Software Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
38
5.3. CARRYING STRAP HANDLE (OPT 29)
The chassis of the M200EH/EM analyzer allows to attach a strap handle for carrying the instrument (Figure 5-1).
The handle is located on the right side and pulls out to accommodate a hand for transport. When pushed in, the
handle is nearly flush with the chassis, only protruding out about 9 mm (3/8”).
Figure 5-1: M200EH/EM with Carrying Strap Handle and Rack Mount Brackets
NOTE:
Installing the strap handle prevents the use of the rack mount slides, although the rack
mount brackets, Option 21, can still be used.
CAUTION
THE M200EH/EM WEIGHS ABOUT 17 KG (40 POUNDS) WITHOUT
OPTIONS INSTALLED.
TO AVOID PERSONAL INJURY:
WE RECOMMEND TWO PERSONS LIFT AND CARRY THE
ANALYZER.
MAKE SURE TO DISCONNECT ALL CABLES AND TUBING
FROM THE ANALYZER BEFORE CARRYING IT.
04521C (DCN5731)
V
V
04521C (DCN5731)
Optional Hardware and Software Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
40
9. Place a shunt between the leftmost two pins of the connector (see Figure 5-1).
6 spare shunts (P/N CN0000132) were shipped with the instrument attached to JP1 on the back of
the instruments keyboard and display PCA
10. Reattach the top case to the analyzer.
11. The analyzer is now ready to have a voltage-sensing, recording device attached to that output
5.5. PARTICULATE FILTER KIT (OPT 42A)
This option includes a one-year supply of 50 replacement, Teflon membrane, particulate filters, 47 mm in
diameter, 1 micrometer pore size. Operation of the particulate filter and weekly maintenance are mandatory on
the M200EH/EM.
5.6. OZONE SUPPLY FILTER (OPT 49)
This filter removes very fine particulates as well as nitric acid, sulfates, nitrates and other compounds from the
ozone supply air stream. The filter is pneumatically connected between ozone generator and reaction cell. The
corona discharge ozone generator produces small amounts of the above mentioned compounds, which may
deposit on the reaction cell walls and – over time – cause drift and non-linear response. Having this filter in line
minimizes these problems and maximizes the reaction cell cleaning intervals. The filter and its maintenance is
shown in detail in Section9.3.3. Refer to Figure 3-1 for location of this optional filter.
5.7. CALIBRATION VALVE OPTIONS
5.7.1. ZERO/SPAN VALVES (OPT 50)
The Model 200EH/EM NOx analyzer can be equipped with a zero/span valve option for controlling the flow of
calibration gases generated from external sources. This option contains two solenoid valves located inside the
analyzer that allow the user to switch either zero, span or sample gas to the instrument’s sensor.
The user can control these valves from the front panel keyboard either manually or by activating the instrument’s
CAL or AutoCal features (Section 7.7). The valves may also be opened and closed remotely through the serial
ports (Section 6.11) or through the external, digital control inputs (Section 6.15).
This option also includes a two-stage, external zero air scrubber assembly that removes all NO and NO2 from
the zero air source (ambient air). The scrubber is filled with 50% Purafil Chemisorbant® (for conversion of NO to
NO2) and 50% activated charcoal (for removal of NO2). This assembly also includes a small particle filter to
prevent scrubber particles to enter the analyzer as well as two more rear panel fittings so each gas can enter the
analyzer separately.
Figure 5-3 & 5-4 shows the internal, pneumatic layouts the zero/span valve option installed for a Model 200EH
and M200EM respectively.
04521C (DCN5731)
04521C (DCN5731)
Optional Hardware and Software Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
42
Table 5-1: Zero/Span Valve States
MODE VALVE CONDITION
Sample/Cal Open to sample gas inlet
SAMPLE Zero/Span Open to zero air inlet
Sample/Cal Open to zero/span inlet (activated)
ZERO
CALIBRATION Zero/Span Open to zero air inlet
Sample/Cal Open to zero/span inlet (activated)
SPAN
CALIBRATION Zero/Span Open to span gas inlet / IZS gas (activated)
The state of the zero/span valves can also be controlled:
Manually from the analyzer’s front panel by using the SIGNAL I/O controls located under the DIAG
Menu (Section 6.13.1),
By activating the instrument’s AutoCal feature (Section 7.7),
Remotely by using the external digital control inputs (Section 6.15.1.2) or Ethernet option.
Remotely through the RS-232/485 serial I/O ports (Section 6-11).
All supply lines should be vented outside of the analyzer’s enclosure. In order to prevent back-diffusion and
pressure drop effects, these vent lines should be between 2 and 10 meters in length.
5.7.2. SECOND RANGE SPAN VALVE (OPT 52)
This option includes a special set of valves that allows two separate NOx mixtures to enter the analyzer from two
independent sources. Typically these two gas mixtures will come from two, separate, pressurized bottles of
certified calibration gas: one mixed to produce a NO, NO2 or NOx concentration equal to the expected span
calibration value for the application and the other mixed to produce a concentration at or near the midpoint of the
intended measurement range. Individual gas inlets, labeled HIGH SPAN and LOW SPAN are provided at the
back on the analyzer.
The valves allow the user to switch between the two sources via keys on the front panel or from a remote
location by way of either the analyzer’s digital control inputs or by sending commands over it’s serial I/O port(s).
NOTE
The analyzer’s software only allows the SLOPE and OFFSET to be calculated when
sample is being routed through the HIGH SPAN inlet.
The LOW SPAN gas is for midpoint reference checks only.
The state of the optional valves can be controlled:
Manually from the analyzer’s front panel by using the SIGNAL I/O controls located under the DIAG
Menu (Section 6-13.1),
By activating the instrument’s CAL or AutoCal features (Section 7.7),
Remotely by using the external digital control inputs (Section 6.15.1.2) or Ethernet option.
Remotely through the RS-232/485 serial I/O ports (Section 6.11).
04521C (DCN5731)
04521C (DCN5731)
Optional Hardware and Software Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
44
Figure 5-5: M200EH – Internal Pneumatics with Second Span Point Valve Option 52
04521C (DCN5731)
04521C (DCN5731)
Optional Hardware and Software Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
46
Oxygen from the sample stream is attracted into the magnetic field displacing the nitrogen filled spheres and
causing the suspended mirror to rotate. This changes the amount of light reflected onto the photocells and
therefore the output levels of the photocells. The feedback loop increases the amount of current fed into the
winding in order to move the mirror back into its original position. The more O2 present, the more the mirror
moves and the more current is fed into the winding by the feedback control loop.
A sensor measures the amount of current generated by the feedback control loop which is directly proportional
to the concentration of oxygen within the sample gas mixture (see Figure 5-7).
Figure 5-7: Oxygen Sensor - Principle of Operation
5.8.1.2. Operation Within the M200EH/EM Analyzer
The oxygen sensor option is transparently integrated into the core analyzer operation. All functions can be
viewed or accessed through the front panel, just like the functions for NOX.
The O2 concentration is displayed in the upper right-hand corner, alternating with NOX, NO and NO2
concentrations.
Test functions for O2 slope and offset are viewable from the front panel along with the analyzer’s other
test functions.
O
2 sensor calibration is performed via the front panel CAL function and is performed in a nearly
identical manner as the standard NOX/NO calibration. See Chapter 0 for more details.
Stability of the O2 sensor can be viewed (see 3.3.2.1)
The O2 concentration range is 0-100% (user selectable) with 0.1% precision and accuracy and is available to be
output via one of the instrument’s four user selectable analog outputs (see Section 6.13.4).
The temperature of the O2 sensor is maintained at a constant 50° C by means of a PID loop and can be viewed
on the front panel as test function O2 TEMP.
The O2 sensor assembly itself does not have any serviceable parts and is enclosed in an insulated canister.
5.8.1.3. Pneumatic Operation of the O2 Sensor
Pneumatically, the O2 sensor is connected to the bypass manifold and draws a flow of about 80 cm³/min in
addition to the normal sample flow rate (See Table 10.-3 for nominal sample inlet gas flow rates) and is
separately controlled with its own critical flow orifice located inside the vacuum manifold.
Figures 15-8 shows the internal pneumatics of the M200EH with the O2 Sensor installed.
Figures 15-9 shows the internal pneumatics of the M200EM with the O2 Sensor installed.
04521C (DCN5731)
04521C (DCN5731)
Optional Hardware and Software Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
48
5.8.2. ZERO AIR SCRUBBER (OPT 64B)
This kit includes a zero air scrubber cartridge, which can be used to produce and supply zero air to the
analyzer’s ZERO inlet port. The cartridge mounts to the outside rear panel by means of two rubberized clips and
contains two chemicals, 50% volume of Purafil Chemisorbant to convert NO to NO2, followed 50% volume of
charcoal to absorb NO2.
The zero air scrubber exit contains a particle filter that retains any dust coming from the cartridge and connects
with a 0.25” PVC tubing to the ZERO inlet port. The chemicals need to be exchanged periodically (use Option
43) to prevent saturation and break-through of NOX into the zero air stream. This kit is recommended if no other
zero air source is available and if the analyzer is equipped with the zero/span valve option (Section 5.7.1). The
kit is included in the IZS option but not in the zero/span valve option.
5.8.3. ZERO AIR SCRUBBER MAINTENANCE KIT (OPT 43)
This kit includes the items needed to refurbish the external zero air scrubber.
Table 5-3: Contents of Zero Air Scrubber Maintenance Kit
TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS PART
NO.
DESCRIPTION
005960000 Activated charcoal refill
059700000 Purafil Chemisorbant® refill
FL0000001 1 Sintered filter for critical orifice port
FL0000003 Replacement particulate filter for zero air inlet fitting
OR0000001 1 O-Ring (qty:2) for critical orifice port
1 These items are required for units with IZS option only. They are used for rebuilding the IZS-exhaust critical flow
orifice on the analyzer’s exhaust manifold.
5.8.4. M200EH/EM EXPENDABLES KIT (OPT 42)
This kit includes a recommended set of expendables for one year of operation of the M200EH/EM. See
Appendix B for a detailed listing of the contents.
5.8.5. M200EH/EM SPARE PARTS KIT (OPT 43)
This kit includes a recommended set of spare parts for 2-3 years of operation of the M200EH/EM. It includes
items such as the orifice holder, a spare PMT and other items that are recommended as backups to minimize
down-time in case of component failures. See Appendix B for a detailed listing of the contents.
5.9. COMMUNICATION OPTIONS
5.9.1. RS232 MODEM CABLES (OPTS 60 AND 60A)
The analyzer can have come standard with a shielded, straight-through DB-9F to DB-9F cable of about 1.8 m
length, which should fit most computers of recent build. This cable can be ordered as Option 60.
Option 60A consists of a shielded, straight-through serial cable of about 1.8 m length to connect the analyzer’s
COM1 port to a computer, a code activated switch or any other communications device that is equipped with a
DB-25 female connector. The cable is terminated with one DB-9 female connector and one DB-25 male
connector. The DB-9 connector fits the analyzer’s COM1 port.
04521C (DCN5731)
04521C (DCN5731)
Optional Hardware and Software Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
50
Figure 5-11: M200EH/EM Ethernet Card
Rear Panel
(as seen from inside)
CPU
Card
Ethernet
Card
Female RJ-45
Connector
RE-232
Connector To
Motherboard
LNK LED
ACT LED
TxD LED
RxD LED
Interior View Exterior View
Figure 5-12: M200EH/EM Rear Panel with Ethernet Installed
This option can be installed in conjunction with the RS-2323 multidrop (option 62) allowing the instrument to
communicate on both types of networks simultaneously. For more information on using and setting up this
option see Section 6.11.6)
5.10. SAMPLE GAS CONDITIONERS (OPTS 86 & 88)
Several permeation devices using Nafion® permeation gas exchange tubes are available for applications with
high moisture and/or moderate levels of NH3 in the sample gas. This type of sample conditioner is part of the
standard M200EH/EM equipment to remove H2O and NH3 from the ozone generator supply gas stream but can
be purchased for the sample gas stream as well. All gas conditioners remove water vapor to a dew point of
about –20° C (~600 ppm H2O) and effectively remove concentrations of ammonia up to about 1 ppm. More
information about these dryers and their performance is available at http://www.permapure.com/.
The following options include the hardware required to install the dryers.
04521C (DCN5731)
04521C (DCN5731)
Optional Hardware and Software Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
52
A
LARM OUT
AL1 AL2 AL3 AL4
NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC
ST_SYSTEM_OK2
(Optional Alert)
CONCENTRATION
ALARM 1
CONCENTRATION
ALARM 2 SPARE
Figure 5-13: Alarm Relay Output Pin Assignments
Each of the two concentration relay outputs has 3-pin connections that allow the relay to be connected for either
normally open or normally closed operation. Table 5-6 describes how to connect the alarm relays.
Table 5-6 Concentration Alarm Relay Output Operation
RELAY PIN
STATE1
RELAY FUNCTION
N
O C N
C
COMMENTS
Concentration Alarm 1
Active
Gas concentration level is above the trigger limit set for
CONC_ALARM_1
iDAS Trigger
CONCW1 ACTIVATED
CONC ALARM1 WARN appears on Analyzer Display
AL2
Concentration Alarm 1
Inactive Gas concentration level is below the trigger limit set for
CONC_ALARM_1
Concentration Alarm 2
Active
Gas concentration level is above the trigger limit set for
CONC_ALARM_2
iDAS Trigger
CONCW2 ACTIVATED
CONC ALARM2 WARN appears on Analyzer Display
AL3
Concentration Alarm 2
Inactive Gas concentration level is below the trigger limit set for
CONC_ALARM_2
1 NO = Normally Open operation.
C = Common
NC = Normally Closed operation.
04521C (DCN5731)
04521C (DCN5731)
Optional Hardware and Software Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
54
5.14. EXTENDED WARRANTY (OPTS 92 & 93)
Two options are available for extending the standard manufacturer’s warranty (Section 2.2). Both options have
to be specified upon ordering the analyzer.
OPTION NUMBER DESCRIPTION
OPT 92 Extends warranty to cover a two (2) year period from the date of
purchase.
OPT 93 Extends warranty to cover a five (5) year period from the date of
purchase.
USER NOTES:
04521C (DCN5731)
04521C (DCN5731)
Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
56
Besides SAMPLE and SETUP, other modes the analyzer can be operated in are:
Table 6-1: Analyzer Operating modes
MODE EXPLANATION
SAMPLE Sampling normally, flashing text indicates adaptive filter is on.
M-P CAL This is the basic calibration mode of the instrument and is activated
by pressing the CAL key.
SETUP X.#2 SETUP mode is being used to configure the analyzer. The gas
measurement will continue during this process.
SAMPLE A Indicates that unit is in SAMPLE mode and AUTOCAL feature is
activated.
ZERO CAL M1 Unit is performing ZERO calibration procedure initiated manually by
the user.
ZERO CAL A1 Unit is performing ZERO calibration procedure initiated automatically
by the AUTOCAL feature.
ZERO CAL R1 Unit is performing ZERO calibration procedure initiated remotely
through the COM ports or digital control inputs.
LO CAL A Unit is performing LOW SPAN (midpoint) calibration initiated
automatically by the analyzer’s AUTOCAL feature.
LO CAL R Unit is performing LOW SPAN (midpoint) calibration initiated remotely
through the COM ports or digital control inputs.
SPAN CAL M1 Unit is performing SPAN calibration initiated manually by the user.
SPAN CAL A1 Unit is performing SPAN calibration initiated automatically by the
analyzer’s AUTOCAL feature.
SPAN CAL R1 Unit is performing SPAN calibration initiated remotely through the
COM ports or digital control inputs.
DIAG One of the analyzer’s diagnostic modes is active (Section 6.13).
1 Only Appears on units with Z/S valve or IZS options.
2 The revision of the analyzer firmware is displayed following the word SETUP, e.g., SETUP
F.0.
The third operating mode is the CAL mode, which allows calibration of the analyzer in various ways. Because of
its importance, this mode is described separately in Chapter 7.
04521C (DCN5731)
04521C (DCN5731)
Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
58
A
1:NXCNC1=100 PPM
1
A2:N0CNC1=100 PPM1
A3:N2CNC1=25 PPM1
A4:NXCNC2=100%1
NOX STB
SAMP FLOW
0ZONE FLOW
PMT
NORM PMT
AZERO
HVPS
RCELL TEMP
BOX TEMP
PMT TEMP
MF TEMP
O2 CELL TEMP2
MOLY TEMP
RCEL
SAMP
NOX SLOPE
NOX OFFSET
NO SLOPE
NO OFFSET
O2 SLOPE2
O2 OFFSET2
TIME
SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100 PPM
1
NOX = XXX
< TST TST > CAL SETUP
1
Default settings for user
selectable reporting range
settings.
2 Only appears if O2 sensor
o
p
tion is installed.
Refer to
Section
6.2.1 for
definitions
of these
test
functions.
Toggle <TST TST> keys to
scroll throu
g
h list of functions
Figure 6-6-2: Viewing M200EH/EM TEST Functions
NOTE
A value of “XXXX” displayed for any of the TEST functions indicates an out-of-range
reading or the analyzer’s inability to calculate it.
All pressure measurements are represented in terms of absolute pressure. Absolute,
atmospheric pressure is 29.92 in-Hg-A at sea level. It decreases about 1 in-Hg per 300
m gain in altitude. A variety of factors such as air conditioning and passing storms can
cause changes in the absolute atmospheric pressure.
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Operating Instructions
59
6.2.2. WARNING MESSAGES
The most common instrument failures will be reported as a warning on the analyzer’s front panel and through
the COM ports. Section 11.1.2 explains how to use these messages to troubleshoot problems. Section 0 shows
how to view and clear warning messages.
Table 6-3: List of Warning Messages Revision F.0
MESSAGE MEANING
ANALOG CAL WARNING The instruments analog-to-digital converter (A/D) circuitry or one of the analog
outputs are not calibrated.
AZERO WRN XXX.X MV
The reading taken during the Auto-zero cycle is outside the specified limits. The
value shown here as “XXX.X” indicates the actual auto-zero reading at the time of
the warning.
BOX TEMP WARNING The temperature inside the M200EH/EM chassis is outside the specified limits.
CANNOT DYN SPAN Remote span calibration failed while the dynamic span feature was ON.
CANNOT DYN ZERO Remote zero calibration failed while the dynamic zero feature was ON.
CONFIG INITIALIZED Configuration storage was reset to factory configuration or was erased.
CONV TEMP WARNING NO2 converter temperature is outside of specified limits.
DATA INITIALIZED iDAS data storage was erased.
HVPS WARNING High voltage power supply for the PMT is outside of specified limits.
IZS TEMP WARNING On units with IZS option installed: The IZS temperature is outside of specified
limits.
OZONE FLOW WARNING Ozone flow is outside of specified limits.
OZONE GEN OFF Ozone generator is off. This is the only warning message that automatically
clears itself when the ozone generator is turned on.
PMT TEMP WARNING PMT temperature is outside of specified limits.
RCELL PRESS WARN Reaction cell pressure is outside of specified limits.
RCELL TEMP WARNING Reaction cell temperature is outside of specified limits.
REAR BOARD NOT DET The firmware is unable to communicate with the motherboard.
RELAY BOARD WARN The firmware is unable to communicate with the relay board.
SAMPLE FLOW WARN The flow rate of the sample gas is outside the specified limits.
SYSTEM RESET The computer rebooted or was powered up.
To view and clear warning messages
SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X
TEST CAL MSG CLR SETUP
Make sure warning messages are
not due to real problems.
Press CLR to clear the current
message.
If more than one warning is active, the
next message will take its place
Once the last warning has been
cleared, the analyzer returns to
SAMPLE mode
SAMPLE
A
1:NXCNC1=100PPM NO=XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL MSG CLR SETUP
SAMPLE HVPS W
A
RNING NO2=XXX.X
TEST CAL MSG CLR SETUP
TEST deactivates warning
messages MSG activates warning
messages.
<TST TST> keys replaced with
TEST key
All Warning messages are hidden,
but MSG button appears
NOTE:
If the warning message persists
after several attempts to clear it,
the message may indicate a
real problem and not an artifact
of the warm-up period
Figure 6-6-3: Viewing and Clearing M200EH/EM WARNING Messages
04521C (DCN5731)
Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
60
6.3. CALIBRATION MODE
6.3.1. CALIBRATION FUNCTIONS
Pressing the CAL key switches the M200EH/EM into calibration mode. In this mode, the user can calibrate the
instrument with the use of calibrated zero or span gases.
If the instrument includes either the zero/span valve option or IZS option, the display will also include CALZ and
CALS keys. Pressing either of these keys also puts the instrument into multipoint calibration mode.
The
CALZ key is used to initiate a calibration of the zero point.
The
CALS key is used to calibrate the span point of the analyzer. It is recommended that this span
calibration is performed at 90% of full scale of the analyzer’s currently selected reporting range.
Because of their critical importance and complexity, calibration operations are described in detail in other
sections of the manual:
Chapter 7 details basic calibration and calibration check operations.
For more information concerning the zero/span, zero/span/shutoff valve options, see Section 5.7.
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Operating Instructions
61
6.4. SETUP MODE
The SETUP mode contains a variety of choices that are used to configure the analyzer’s hardware and software
features, perform diagnostic procedures, gather information on the instruments performance and configure or
access data from the internal data acquisition system (iDAS). The areas access under the Setup mode are:
Table 6-4: Primary Setup Mode Features and Functions
MODE OR FEATURE KEYPAD
LABEL DESCRIPTION MANUAL
SECTION
Analyzer Configuration CFG Lists key hardware and software configuration information 6.5
Auto Cal Feature ACAL Used to set up an operate the AutoCal feature. Only appears if
the analyzer has one of the internal valve options installed 7.7
Internal Data Acquisition
(iDAS) DAS Used to set up the iDAS system and view recorded data 6.7
Analog Output Reporting
Range Configuration RNGE Used to set the units of measure for the display and set the
dilution ratio on instruments with that option active. 6.8
Calibration Password Security PASS Turns the password feature ON/OFF 6.9
Internal Clock Configuration CLK Used to Set or adjust the instrument’s internal clock 6.10
Advanced SETUP features MORE This button accesses the instruments secondary setup menu See
Table 6-5
Table 6-5: Secondary Setup Mode Features and Functions
MODE OR FEATURE KEYPAD
LABEL DESCRIPTION MANUAL
SECTION
External Communication
Channel Configuration COMM
Used to set up and operate the analyzer’s various external I/O
channels including RS-232; RS 485, modem communication
and/or Ethernet access.
6.11 &
6.15
System Status Variables VARS Used to view various variables related to the instruments current
operational status 6.12
System Diagnostic Features
and
Analog Output Configuration
DIAG
Used to access a variety of functions that are used to configure,
test or diagnose problems with a variety of the analyzer’s basic
systems.
Most notably, the menus used to configure the output signals
generated by the instruments Analog outputs are located here.
6.13
Alarm Limit Configuration1 ALRM Used to turn the instrument’s two alarms on and off as well as
set the trigger limits for each. 6.14
1 Only present if the optional alarm relay outputs (Option 67) are installed.
NOTE
Any changes made to a variable during one of the following procedures is not
acknowledged by the instrument until the ENTR Key is pressed
If the EXIT key is pressed before the ENTR key, the analyzer will beep, alerting the user
that the newly entered value has not been accepted.
04521C (DCN5731)
Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
62
6.5. SETUP CFG: VIEWING THE ANALYZER’S
CONFIGURATION INFORMATION
Pressing the CFG key displays the instrument configuration information. This display lists the analyzer model,
serial number, firmware revision, software library revision, CPU type and other information. Use this information
to identify the software and hardware when contacting customer service. Special instrument or software
features or installed options may also be listed here.
SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL SETUP
SAMPLE
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT
SAMPLE M100E NOX
A
NALYZER
NEXT PREV EXIT
Press EXIT at
any time to
return to
SETUP menu
Press EXIT at
any time to
return to the
SAMPLE dis
p
la
y
Press NEXT of PREV to move back
and forth through the following list
of Configuration information:
 MODEL NAME
 SERIAL NUMBER
 SOFTWARE REVISION
 LIBRARY REVISION
iCHIP SOFTWARE REVISION1
HESSEN PROTOCOL REVISION1
ACTIVE SPECIAL SOFTWARE
OPTIONS1
 CPU TYPE
 DATE FACTORY CONFIGURATION
SAVED
1
Only appears if relevant option of Feature is active.
6.6. SETUP ACAL: AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION
Instruments with one of the internal valve options installed can be set to automatically run calibration procedures
and calibration checks. These automatic procedures are programmed using the submenus and functions found
under the ACAL menu.
A menu tree showing the ACAL menu’s entire structure can be found in Appendix A-1 of this manual.
Instructions for using the ACAL feature are located in the Section 7.7 of this manual along with all other
information related to calibrating the M200EH/EM analyzer.
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Operating Instructions
63
6.7. SETUP DAS - USING THE DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM
(iDAS)
The M200EH/EM analyzer contains a flexible and powerful, internal data acquisition system (iDAS) that enables
the analyzer to store concentration and calibration data as well as a host of diagnostic parameters. The iDAS of
the M200EH/EM can store up to about one million data points, which can, cover days, weeks or months of
valuable measurements. The data are stored in non-volatile memory and are retained even when the instrument
is powered off. Data are stored in plain text format for easy retrieval and use in common data analysis programs
(such as spreadsheet-type programs).
NOTE:
Please be aware that all stored data will be erased if the analyzer’s disk-on-chip, CPU
board or configuration is replaced/reset.
The iDAS is designed to be flexible. Users have full control over the type, length and reporting time of the data.
The iDAS permits users to access stored data through the instrument’s front panel or its communication ports.
Teledyne Instruments also offers APICOM, a program that provides a visual interface for configuration and data
retrieval of the iDAS or using a remote computer. Additionally, the analyzer’s four analog output channels can
be programmed to carry data related to any of the available iDAS parameters.
The principal use of the iDAS is logging data for trend analysis and predictive diagnostics, which can assist in
identifying possible problems before they affect the functionality of the analyzer. The secondary use is for data
analysis, documentation and archival in electronic format.
IDAS STATUS
The green SAMPLE LED on the instrument front panel, which indicates the analyzer status, also indicates
certain aspects of the iDAS status:
Table 6-6: Front Panel LED Status Indicators for iDAS
LED STATE IDAS STATUS
Off
System is in calibration mode. Data logging can be enabled or disabled for this mode.
Calibration data are typically stored at the end of calibration periods, concentration data
are typically not sampled, diagnostic data should be collected.
Blinking
Instrument is in hold-off mode, a short period after the system exits calibrations. IDAS
channels can be enabled or disabled for this period. Concentration data are typically
disabled whereas diagnostic should be collected.
On Sampling normally.
The iDAS can be disabled only by disabling or deleting its individual data channels.
04521C (DCN5731)
Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
64
6.7.1. IDAS STRUCTURE
The iDAS is designed around the feature of a “record”, an automatically stored single data point. (e.g.
concentration, PMT signal level, etc.). Records are organized into data channels which are defined by
properties that characterize the:
Type of date recorded (e.g. concentration, PMT signal level, etc.);
Trigger event that causes the record to be made (e.g. every minute, upon exiting calibration mode,
etc.);
How many records to be stored, as well as;
How the information is to be stored (e.g. average over 1 hour, individual points, minimum value over
last 5 minutes, etc.).
The configuration of each iDAS channel is stored in the analyzer’s memory as a script, which can be edited from
the front panel or downloaded, edited and uploaded to the instrument in form of a string of plain-text lines
through the communication ports.
6.7.1.1. iDAS Channels
The key to the flexibility of the iDAS is its ability to store a large number of combinations of triggering events and
data parameters in the form of data channels. Users may create up to 20 data channels. For each channel one
triggering event is selected and one or all of the M200EH/EM’s 25 data parameters are allowed. The number of
parameters and channels is limited by available memory.
The properties that define the structure of an iDAS data channel are:
Table 6-7: iDAS Data Channel Properties
PROPERTY DESCRIPTION DEFAULT SETTING RANGE
NAME The name of the data channel. “NONE” Up to 6 letters or digits1.
TRIGGERING
EVENT
The event that triggers the data channel to
measure and store the datum ATIMER Any available event
(see Appendix A-5).
NUMBER AND
LIST OF
PARAMETERS
A User-configurable list of data types to be
recorded in any given channel. 1 - PMTDET Any available parameter
(see Appendix A-5).
REPORT PERIOD The amount of time between each channel data
point. 000:01:00
000:00:01 to
366:23:59
(Days:Hours:Minutes)
NUMBER OF
RECORDS
The number of reports that will be stored in the
data file. Once the limit is exceeded, the oldest
data is over-written.
100 1 to 1 million, limited by
available storage space.
RS-232 REPORT Enables the analyzer to automatically report
channel values to the RS-232 ports. OFF OFF or ON
CHANNEL
ENABLED
Enables or disables the channel. Allows a channel
to be temporarily turned off without deleting it. ON OFF or ON
CAL HOLD OFF Disables sampling of data parameters while
instrument is in calibration mode2. OFF OFF or ON
1 More with APICOM, but only the first six are displayed on the front panel).
2 When enabled records are not recorded until the DAS HOLD OFF period is passed after calibration mode. DAS HOLD OFF set in
the VARS menu (see Section 6.12.)
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Operating Instructions
65
6.7.1.2. iDAS Parameters
Data parameters are types of data that may be measured by the analyzers instrumentality concentrations of
measured gases, temperatures of heated zones,, pressures and flows of the pneumatic subsystem as well as
calibration data such as slope and offset for each gas. For each Teledyne Instruments analyzer model, the list
of available data parameters is different, fully defined and not customizable (see Appendix A.5 for a list of
M200EH/EM parameters).
Most data parameters have associated measurement units, such as mV, ppm, cm³/min, etc., although some
parameters have no units. The only units that can be changed are those of the concentration readings
according to the SETUP-RANGE settings.
NOTE
The iDAS does not keep track of the unit of each concentration value and iDAS data files
may contain concentrations in multiple units if the unit was changed during data
acquisition.
Each data parameter has user-configurable functions that define how the data are recorded.
Table 6-8: iDAS Data Parameter Functions
FUNCTION EFFECT
PARAMETER Instrument-specific parameter name.
SAMPLE MODE INST: Records instantaneous reading.
AVG: Records average reading during reporting interval.
MIN: Records minimum (instantaneous) reading during reporting interval.
MAX: Records maximum (instantaneous) reading during reporting interval.
SDEV: Records the standard deviation of the data points recorded during the reporting
interval.
PRECISION Decimal precision of parameter value(0-4).
STORE NUM.
SAMPLES
OFF: stores only the average (default).
ON: stores the average and the number of samples in each average for a parameter.
This property is only useful when the AVG sample mode is used. Note that the
number of samples is the same for all parameters in one channel and needs to be
specified only for one of the parameters.
6.7.1.3. iDAS Triggering Events
Triggering events define when and how the iDAS records a measurement of any given data channel. Triggering
events are firmware-specific and are listed in Appendix A-5. The most common triggering events are:
ATIMER: Sampling occurs at regular intervals specified by an automatic timer. Trending information is
often stored via such intervals, as either individual datum or averaged.
EXITZR, EXITSP, SLPCHG (exit zero, exit span, slope change): Sampling at the end of an irregularly
occurring event such as calibration or when the slope changes. These events create individual data
points. Zero and slope values can be used to monitor response drift and to document when the
instrument was calibrated.
WARNINGS: Some data may be useful when stored if one of several warning messages appears. This
is helpful for trouble-shooting by monitoring when a particular warning occurred.
04521C (DCN5731)
Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
66
6.7.2. DEFAULT IDAS CHANNELS
The M200EH/EM is configured with a basic iDAS configuration, which is enabled by default. New data channels
are also enabled by default but each channel may be turned off for later or occasional use. Note that iDAS
operation is suspended while its configuration is edited through the front panel. To prevent such data loss, it is
recommended to use the APICOM graphical user interface for iDAS changes.
A set of default data channels has been included in the analyzer’s software for logging nitrogen oxides
concentrations, calibration and predictive diagnostic data. They are:
CONC: Samples NOX, NO and NO2 concentration at one minute intervals and stores an average every
hour with a time and date stamp along with the number of (1-minute) samples within each average(for
statistical evaluation). Readings during calibration and calibration hold off are not included in the data.
By default, the last 800 hourly averages are stored.
CALDAT: Every time a zero or span calibration is performed CALDAT logs concentration, slope and
offset values for NOX and NO with a time and date stamp. The NOX stability (to evaluate calibration
stability) as well as the converter efficiency (for reference) are also stored. This data channel will store
data from the last 200 calibrations and can be used to document analyzer calibration. The slope and
offset data can be used to detect trends in (instrument response.
CALCHECK: This channel logs concentrations and the stability each time a zero or span check (not
calibration) is finished. This allows the user to track the quality of zero and span responses over time
and assist in evaluating the quality of zero and span gases and the analyzer’s noise specifications. The
last 200 data points are retained.
DIAG: Daily averages of temperature zones, flow and pressure data as well as some other diagnostic
parameters (HVPS, AZERO). These data are useful for predictive diagnostics and maintenance of the
M200EH/EM. The last 1100 daily averages are stored to cover more than four years of analyzer
performance.
HIRES: Records one minute, instantaneous data of all active parameters in the M200EH/EM. Short-
term trends as well as signal noise levels can be detected and documented. Readings during calibration
and the calibration hold off period are included in the averages. The last 1500 data points are stored,
which covers a little more than one day of continuous data acquisition. This data channel is disabled by
default but may be turned on when needed such as for trouble-shooting problems with the analyzer.
The default data channels can be used as they are, or they can be customized from the front panel or through
APICOM to fit a specific application. The Teledyne Instruments website contains this default and other sample
iDAS scripts for free download. We recommend that the user backs up any iDAS configuration and its data
before altering it.
NOTE
Teledyne-API recommends downloading and storing existing data and the iDAS
configurations regularly for permanent documentation and future data analysis.
Sending an iDAS configuration to the analyzer through its COM ports will replace the
existing configuration and will delete all stored data.
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Operating Instructions
67
Table 6-9: M200EH/EM Default iDAS Configuration
PARAMETERS
CHANNELS with PROPERTIES NAME MODE EVENT PRECISION
NUM
SAMPLES
NOXCNC1 AVG - - 4 ON
NOCNC1 AVG - - 4 OFF
N2CNC1 AVG - - 4 OFF
Name: CONC
Event: ATIMER
Sample Period: 000:00:01
Report Period: 000:01:00
Number of Records: 800
RS-232 report: OFF
Channel enabled: ON
DAS HOLDOFF: ON STABIL AVG - - 4 OM
NXZSC1 - - SLPCHG 4 OFF
NOXSLP1 - - SLPCHG 4 OFF
NOXOFFS1 - - SLPCHG 4 OFF
NOZSC1 - - SLPCHG 4 OFF
NOSLP1 - - SLPCHG 4 OFF
NOOFFS1 - - SLPCHG 4 OFF
N2ZSC1 - - SLPCHG 4 OFF
CNVEF1 - - SLPCHG 4 OFF
Name: CALDAT
Event: SLPCHG
Number of Records: 200
RS-232 report: OFF
Channel enabled: ON
DAS HOLDOFF: OFF
STABIL - - SLPCHG 4 OFF
NXZSC1 - - EXITMP 4 OFF
NOZSC1 - - EXITMP 4 OFF
N2ZSC1 - - EXITMP 4 OFF
Name: CALCHECK
Event: EXITMP
Number of Records: 200
RS-232 report: OFF
Channel enabled: ON
DAS HOLDOFF: OFF STABIL - - EXITMP 4 OFF
SMPFLW AVG - - 2 OFF
O3FLOW AVG - - 2 OFF
RCPRESS AVG - - 2 OFF
SMPPRES AVG - - 2 OFF
RCTEMP AVG - - 2 OFF
PMTTMP AVG - - 2 OFF
CNVTMP AVG - - 2 OFF
BOXTMP AVG - - 2 OFF
HVPS AVG - - 2 OFF
Name: CALCHECK
Event: EXITMP
Number of Records: 200
RS-232 report: OFF
Channel enabled: ON
DAS HOLDOFF: OFF
AZERO AVG - - 2 OFF
NOXCNC1 AVG - - 4 OFF
NOCNC1 AVG - - 4 OFF
N2CNC1 AVG - - 4 OFF
STABIL AVG - - 4 OFF
SMPFLW AVG - - 2 OFF
O3FLOW AVG - - 2 OFF
RCPRESS AVG - - 2 OFF
SMPPRES AVG - - 2 OFF
RCTEMP AVG - - 2 OFF
PMTTMP AVG - - 2 OFF
CNVTMP AVG - - 2 OFF
BOXTMP AVG - - 2 OFF
HVPS AVG - - 1 OFF
AZERO AVG - - 2 OFF
REFGND AVG 1 OFF
Name: HIRES
Event: ATIMER
Sample Period: 000:00:01
Report Period: 000:00:01
Number of Records: 1500
RS-232 report: OFF
Channel enabled: OFF
DAS HOLDOFF: OFF
REF4096 AVG 1 OFF
04521C (DCN5731)
Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
68
6.7.2.1. Viewing iDAS Data and Settings
IDAS data and settings can be viewed on the front panel through the following keystroke sequence.
SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL SETUP
SETUP X.X CONC : DATA AVAILABLE
NEXT VIEW EXIT
SETUP X.X CALDAT: DATA
A
VAILABLE
PREV NEXT VIEW EXIT
SETUP X.X CALCHE: DATA AVAILABLE
PREV NEXT VIEW EXIT
SETUP X.X 285:00:00 SMPFLW= X.XXX cc/m
PV10 PREV <PRM PRM> EXIT
SETUP X.
X
287:10:00 NXCNC1: XXX.X PPM
PV10 PREV NEXT NX10 <PRM PRM> EXIT
SETUP X.X 281:15:10 NXZCS1: X.XXX PPM
PV10 PREV NEXT NX10 <PRM PRM> EXIT
SETUP X.X DATA ACQUISITION
VIEW
EDIT EXIT
SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT
V
IEW KEYPAD FUNCTIONS
KEY FUNCTION
<PRM Moves to the next Parameter
PRM> Moves to the previous
Parameter
NX10 Moves the view forward 10
data points/channels
NEXT Moves to the next data
point/channel
PREV Moves to the previous data
point/channel
PV10 Moves the view back 10 data
points/channels
Keys only appear as needed
EXIT will return to the
main SAMPLE Display.
SETUP X.X DIAG: DATA AVAILABLE
PREV NEXT VIEW EXIT
SETUP X.X 00:00::00 PMTDET=0000.0000 m
PV10 PREV <PRM PRM> EXIT
SETUP X.X HIRES: NO DATA AVAILABLE
PREV EXIT
Default
setting for
HIRES is
DISABLED.
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Operating Instructions
69
6.7.2.2. Editing iDAS Data Channels
IDAS configuration is most conveniently done through the APICOM remote control program. The following list of
key strokes shows how to edit using the front panel.
Edit Data Channel Menu
SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL SETUP
SETUP X.X 0) CONC: ATIMER, 8, 800
PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT
SETUP X.X DATA ACQUISITION
VIEW
EDIT EXIT
SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT
EXIT will return to the
previous SAMPLE
display.
SETUP X.
X
ENTER DAS PASS: 818
8 1 8 ENTR EXIT
Moves the
display up &
down the list of
Data Channels
Inserts a new Data
Channel into the list
BEFORE the Channel
currently being displayed Deletes The Data
Channel currently
being displayed
Exports the
configuration of all
data channels to
RS-232 interface.
Exits to the Main
Data Acquisition
Menu
SETUP X.X NAME:CONC
<SET SET> EDIT PRNT EXIT
Moves the display
between the
PROPERTIES for this
data channel.
Reports the configuration of current
data channels to the RS-232 ports.
EXITS returns to
the previous
Menu
Allows to edit the channel name, see next key sequence.
When editing the data channels, the top line of the display indicates some of the configuration
parameters. For example, the display line:
0) CONC : ATIMER, 4, 800
Translates to the following configuration:
Channel No.: 0
NAME: CONC
TRIGGER EVENT: ATIMER
PARAMETERS: Four parameters are included in this channel
EVENT: This channel is set up to record 800 data points.
04521C (DCN5731)
Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
70
To edit the name of a data channel, follow the above key sequence and then press:
FROM THE PREVIOUS KEY SEQUENCE …
SETUP X.X NAME:CONC
C O N C - - ENTR EXIT
ENTR accepts the new
string and returns to the
previous menu.
EXIT ignores the new
string and returns to the
p
revious menu.
Press each key repeatedly to cycle through the available character
set:
0-9,
A
-Z, space ’ ~ ! # $ % ^ & *
(
)
-_ = +
[
]
{
}
< >
\
|
; : , . / ?
SETUP X.X NAME:CONC
<SET SET> EDIT PRINT EXIT
6.7.2.3. Trigger Events
To edit the list of data parameters associated with a specific data channel, press:
ENTR accepts the new string
and returns to the previous
menu.
EXIT ignores the new string
and returns to the previous
menu.
SETUP X.X EVENT:ATIMER
<PREV NEXT> ENTR EXIT
Edit Data Channel Menu
SETUP X.X 0) CONC: ATIMER, 8, 800
PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT
From the DATA ACQUISITION menu
(see Section 6.7.2.2)
EXITS to the Main
Data Acquisition
menu
Press each key repeatedly to cycle through the
list of available trigger events.
SETUP X.X NAME:CONC
<SET SET> EDIT PRINT EXIT
SETUP X.X EVENT:ATIMER
<SET SET> EDIT PRINT EXIT
See Appendix A-5 for list of iDAS trigger events available on the M200EH/EM.
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Operating Instructions
71
6.7.2.4. Editing iDAS Parameters
Data channels can be edited individually from the front panel without affecting other data channels. However,
when editing a data channel, such as during adding, deleting or editing parameters, all data for that particular
channel will be lost, because the iDAS can store only data of one format (number of parameter columns etc.) for
any given channel. In addition, an iDAS configuration can only be uploaded remotely as an entire set of
channels. Hence, remote update of the iDAS will always delete all current channels and stored data.
To modify, add or delete a parameter, follow the instruction shown in section 6.7.2.2 then press:
Edit Data Parameter Menu
Edit Data Channel Menu
SETUP X.X 0) CONC: ATIMER, 8, 800
PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT
From the DATA ACQUISITION menu
(see Section 6.7.2.2)
Exits to the main
Data Acquisition
menu
SETUP X.X NAME:CONC
<SET SET> EDIT PRINT EXIT
SETUP X.X PARAMETERS: 8
<SET SET> EDIT PRINT EXIT
SETUP X.X 0) PARAM=DETREP, MODE=INST
PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT EXIT
Press SET> key until…
SETUP X.X EDIT PARAMS (DELETE DATA)
Y
ES NO
NO returns to
the previous
menu and
retains all data.
Moves the
display between
available
Parameters
Inserts a new Parameter
before the currently
displayed Parameter
Deletes the Parameter
currently displayed.
Use to configure
the functions for
this Parameter.
Exits to the main
Data Acquisition
menu
YES will delete
all data in that
entire channel.
04521C (DCN5731)
Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
72
To configure the parameters for a specific data parameter, press:
FROM THE EDIT DATA PARAMETER MENU
(see previous section)
SETUP X.X 0) PARAM=NXCNC!, MODE=AVG
PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT EXIT
SETUP X.X PARAMETERS: NOCNC1
SET> EDIT EXIT
SETUP X.X SAMPLE MODE: INST
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
SETUP X.X PARAMETER: NXCNC1
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
Cycle through list of available
Parameters.
ENTR accepts the
new setting and
returns to the previous
menu.
EXIT ignores the new
setting and returns to
the previous menu.
SETUP X.X SAMPLE MODE: INST
INST AVG MIN MAX EXIT
Press the key for the desired mode
SETUP X.X PRECISION:4
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
SETUP X.X PRECISION: 4
1 EXIT
Set for 0-4
SETUP X.X STORE NUM. SAMPLES: OFF
<SET EDIT EXIT
SETUP X.X STORE NUM. SAMPLES: OFF
OFF ENTR EXIT
Turn ON or OFF
<SET Returns to
previous
Functions
See Appendix A-5 for list of iDAS parameters available on the M200EH/EM.
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Operating Instructions
73
6.7.2.5. Sample Period and Report Period
The iDAS defines two principal time periods by which sample readings are taken and permanently recorded:
SAMPLE PERIOD: Determines how often iDAS temporarily records a sample reading of the parameter
in volatile memory. The SAMPLE PERIOD is set to one minute by default and generally cannot be
accessed from the standard iDAS front panel menu, but is available via the instruments communication
ports by using APICOM or the analyzer’s standard serial data protocol.
SAMPLE PERIOD is only used when the iDAS parameter’s sample mode is set for AVG, MIN or MAX.
REPORT PERIOD: Sets how often the sample readings stored in volatile memory are processed, (e.g.
average, minimum or maximum are calculated) and the results stored permanently in the instruments
Disk-on-Chip as well as transmitted via the analyzer’s communication ports. The REPORT PERIOD
may be set from the front panel.
If the INST sample mode is selected the instrument stores and reports an instantaneous reading of the
selected parameter at the end of the chosen REPORT PERIOD
In AVG, MIN or MAX sample modes, the settings for the SAMPLE PERIOD and the REPORT PERIOD
determine the number of data points used each time the average, minimum or maximum is calculated, stored
and reported to the COMM ports. The actual sample readings are not stored past the end of the of the chosen
REPORT PERIOD.
Also, the SAMPLE PERIOD and REPORT PERIOD intervals are synchronized to the beginning and end of the
appropriate interval of the instruments internal clock.
If
SAMPLE PERIOD were set for one minute the first reading would occur at the beginning of the next
full minute according to the instrument’s internal clock.
If the
REPORT PERIOD were set for of one hour the first report activity would occur at the beginning of
the next full hour according to the instrument’s internal clock.
EXAMPLE: Given the above settings, if iDAS were activated at 7:57:35 the first sample would occur at
7:58 and the first report would be calculated at 8:00 consisting of data points for 7:58. 7:59 and 8:00.
During the next hour (from 8:01 to 9:00) the instrument will take a sample reading every minute and
include 60 sample readings.
When the STORE NUM. SAMPLES feature is turned on the instrument will also store how many sample
readings were used for the AVG, MIN or MAX calculation but not the readings themselves.
Report periods in Progress when Instrument Is Powered Off
If the instrument is powered off in the middle of a REPORT PERIOD, the samples accumulated so far during that
period are lost. Once the instrument is turned back on, the iDAS restarts taking samples and temporarily them
in volatile memory as part of the REPORT PERIOD currently active at the time of restart. At the end of this
REPORT PERIOD only the sample readings taken since the instrument was turned back on will be included in
any AVG, MIN or MAX calculation. Also, the STORE NUM. SAMPLES feature will report the number of sample
readings taken since the instrument was restarted.
04521C (DCN5731)
Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
74
To define the REPORT PERIOD, follow the instruction shown in section 6.7.2.2 then press:
Edit Data Channel Menu
SETUP X.X 0) CONC: ATIMER, 8, 8500
PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT
Exits to the main
Data Acquisition
menu.
SETUP X.X NAME: CONC
<SET SET> EDIT PRINT EXIT
Press SET> key until you reach REPORT PERIOD (OR SAMPLE PERIOD) …
SETUP X.X REPORT PERIODD:DAYS:0
0 0 0 ENTR EXIT
ENT
R
accepts the new string and
returns to the previous menu.
EXIT ignores the new string and
returns to the previous menu.
Press keys to set hours
between reports in the format :
HH:MM (max: 23:59). This is a
24 hour clock . PM hours are 13
thru 23, midnight is 00:00.
Example 2:15 PM = 14:15
Set the number of days
between reports (0-366).
IIf at any time an illegal entry is selected (e.g., days > 366)
the ENTR key will disappear from the display.
SETUP X.X REPORT PERIODD:TIME:01:01
0 1 0 0 ENTR EXIT
Use the PREV and NEXT
keys to scroll to the data
channel to be edited.
SETUP X.X REPORT PERIOD:000:01:00
<SET SET> EDIT PRINT EXIT
From the DATA
A
CQUISITION menu
(see Section 6.7.2.2)
SETUP X.X ENTER DAS PASS: 818
9 2 9 ENTR EXIT
Changing the SAMPLE
PERIOD or REPORT
PERIOD Requires a
special password
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Operating Instructions
75
6.7.2.6. Number of Records
The number of data records in the M200EH/EM is limited to a cumulative one million data points in all channels
(one megabyte of space on the disk-on-chip). However, the actual number of records is also limited by the total
number of parameters and channels and other settings in the iDAS configuration. Every additional data channel,
parameter, number of samples setting etc. will reduce the maximum amount of data points somewhat. In
general, however, the maximum data capacity is divided amongst all channels (max: 20) and parameters (max:
50 per channel).
The iDAS will check the amount of available data space and prevent the user from specifying too many records
at any given point. If, for example, the iDAS memory space can accommodate 375 more data records, the
ENTR key will disappear when trying to specify more than that number of records. This check for memory space
may also make an upload of an iDAS configuration with APICOM or a Terminal program fail, if the combined
number of records would be exceeded. In this case, it is suggested to either try from the front panel what the
maximum number of records can be or use trial-and-error in designing the iDAS script or calculate the number of
records using the DAS or APICOM manuals. To set the number of records for one channel from the front panel,
follow the instruction shown in section 6.7.2.2 then press.
Edit Data Channel Menu
SETUP X.X 0) CONC: ATIMER, 8, 800
PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT
Exits to the main
Data Acquisition
menu
SETUP X.X NAME:CONC
<SET SET> EDIT PRINT EXIT
SETUP X.X NUMBER OF RECORDS:000
<SET SET> EDIT PRINT EXIT
SETUP X.X REPORT PERIODD:DAYS:0
0 0 0 0 0 ENTR EXIT
ENTR accepts the new
setting and returns to the
previous menu.
EXIT ignores the new setting
and returns to the previous
menu.
Toggle keys to set
number of records
(1-99999)
SETUP X.X EDIT RECOPRDS (DELET DATA)
YES NO
NO returns to the
previous menu.
YES will delete all data
in this channel.
Press SET> key until…
From the DATA ACQUISITION menu
(see Section 6.7.2.2)
04521C (DCN5731)
Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
76
6.7.2.7. RS-232 Report Function
The M200EH/EM iDAS can automatically report data to the communications ports, where they can be captured
with a terminal emulation program or simply viewed by the user.
To enable automatic COM port reporting, follow the instruction shown in section 6.7.2.2 then press:
Edit Data Channel Menu
SETUP X.X 0) CONC: ATIMER, 8, 800
PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT
Exits to the main
Data Acquisition
menu
SETUP X.X NAME:CONC
<SET SET> EDIT PRINT EXIT
SETUP X.X RS-232 REPORT: OFF
<SET SET> EDIT PRINT EXIT
ENTR accepts the new
setting and returns to the
previous menu.
EXIT ignores the new setting
and returns to the previous
menu.
SETUP X.X RS-232 REPORT: OFF
OFF ENTR EXIT
Toggle key to turn
reporting ON or OFF
Press SET> key until…
From the DATA ACQUISITION menu
(see Section 6.7.2.2)
6.7.2.8. Compact Report
When enabled, this option avoids unnecessary line breaks on all RS-232 reports. Instead of reporting each
parameter in one channel on a separate line, up to five parameters are reported in one line, instead. For
example, channel DIAG would report its record in two lines (10 parameters) instead of 10 lines. Individual lines
carry the same time stamp and are labeled in sequence.
6.7.2.9. Starting Date
This option allows to specify a starting date for any given channel in case the user wants to start data acquisition
only after a certain time and date. If the Starting Date is in the past, the iDAS ignores this setting.
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Operating Instructions
77
6.7.2.10. Disabling/Enabling Data Channels
Data channels can be temporarily disabled, which can reduce the read/write wear on the disk-on-chip. The
HIRES channel of the M200EH/EM, for example, is disabled by default.
To disable a data channel, follow the instruction shown in section 6.7.2.2 then press:
Edit Data Channel Menu
SETUP X.X 0) CONC: ATIMER, 8, 800
PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT
Exits to the main
Data Acquisition
menu
SETUP X.X NAME:CONC
<SET SET> EDIT PRINT EXIT
SETUP X.X CHANNEL ENABLE:ON
<SET SET> EDIT PRINT EXIT ENT
R
accepts the new
setting and returns to the
previous menu.
EXIT ignores the new setting
and returns to the previous
menu.
SETUP X.X CHANNEL ENABLE:ON
OFF ENTR EXIT
Toggle key to turn
channel ON or OFF
Press SET> key until…
From the DATA ACQUISITION menu
(see Section 6.7.2.2)
6.7.2.11. HOLDOFF Feature
The iDAS HOLDOFF feature allows to prevent data collection during calibrations and during the
DAS_HOLDOFF period enabled and specified in the VARS (Section 6.12). To enable or disable the HOLDOFF
for any one iDAS channel, follow the instruction shown in section 6.7.2.2 then press:
Edit Data Channel Menu
SETUP X.X 0) CONC: ATIMER, 2, 900
PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT
Exits to the main
Data Acquisition
menu
SETUP X.X NAME:CONC
<SET SET> EDIT PRINT EXIT
SETUP X.X CAL HOLD OFF:ON
SET> EDIT PRINT EXIT
ENTR accepts the new
setting and returns to the
previous menu.
EXIT ignores the new setting
and returns to the previous
menu.
SETUP X.X CAL HOLD OFF:ON
ON ENTR EXIT
Toggle key to turn
HOLDOFF ON or OFF
Press SET> key until…
From the DATA ACQUISITION menu
(see Section 6.7.2.2)
04521C (DCN5731)
Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
78
6.7.3. REMOTE IDAS CONFIGURATION
Editing channels, parameters and triggering events as described in 6.7 is much more conveniently done in one
step through the APICOM remote control program using the graphical interface shown in Figure 6-6-4. Refer to
Section 6.15 for details on remote access to the M200EH/EM analyzer.
Figure 6-6-4: APICOM Graphical User Interface for Configuring the iDAS
Once an iDAS configuration is edited (which can be done offline and without interrupting DAS data collection), it
is conveniently uploaded to the instrument and can be stored on a computer for later review, alteration or
documentation and archival. Refer to the APICOM manual for details on these procedures. The APICOM user
manual (Teledyne Instruments part number 039450000) is included in the APICOM installation file, which can be
downloaded at http://www.teledyne-api.com/software/apicom/.
Although Teledyne Instruments recommends the use of APICOM, the iDAS can also be accessed and
configured through a terminal emulation program such as HyperTerminal (Figure 6-6-5). However, all
configuration commands must be created following a strict syntax or be pasted in from of a text file, which was
edited offline and then uploaded through a specific transfer procedure.
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Operating Instructions
79
Figure 6-6-5: iDAS Configuration Through a Terminal Emulation Program
Both procedures are best started by downloading the default iDAS configuration, getting familiar with its
command structure and syntax conventions, and then altering a copy of the original file offline before uploading
the new configuration.
CAUTION
Whereas the editing, adding and deleting of iDAS channels and parameters of one
channel through the front-panel keyboard can be done without affecting the other
channels, uploading an iDAS configuration script to the analyzer through its
communication ports will erase all data, parameters and channels by replacing them
with the new iDAS configuration. It is advised to download and backup all data and the
original iDAS configuration before attempting any iDAS changes.
04521C (DCN5731)
Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
80
6.8. SETUP RNGE: RANGE UNITS AND DILUTION
CONFIGURATION
This Menu is used to set the units of measure to be associated with the analyzer’s reporting ranges (see Section
6.13.3.2. for more information on reporting ranges vs. physical ranges) and for instruments with the sample gas
dilution option operating, to set the dilution ratio.
6.8.1. RANGE UNITS
The M200EH/EM can display concentrations in parts per million (106 mols per mol, PPM) or milligrams per cubic
meter (mg/m3, MG). Changing units affects all of the display, COM port and iDAS values for all reporting ranges
regardless of the analyzer’s range mode. To change the concentration units:
SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1= 100.0 PPM NOX=XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL SETUP
SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT
SETUP X. RANGE CONTROL MENU
UNIT DIL EXIT
SETUP X.X CONC UNITS: PPM
PPM MGM ENTER EXIT
Select the preferred
concentration unit.
SETUP X.X CONC UNITS: MGM
PPM MGM ENTER EXIT
EXIT returns
to the main
menu.
ENTR accepts
the new unit,
EXIT returns
to the SETUP
menu.
Conversion factors from volumetric to mass units used in the M200EH/EM:
NO: ppm x 1.34 = mg/m3
NO2: ppm x 2.05 = mg/m3
Concentrations displayed in mg/m3 and µg/m3 use 0° C and 760 Torr as standard temperature and pressure
(STP). Consult your local regulations for the STP used by your agency. EPA protocol applications, for example,
use 25° C as the reference temperature. Changing the units may cause a bias in the measurements if standard
temperature and pressure other than 0C and 760 Torr are used. This problem can be avoided by recalibrating
the analyzer after any change from a volumetric to a mass unit or vice versa.
CAUTION
In order to avoid a reference temperature bias, the analyzer must be recalibrated after
every change in reporting units.
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Operating Instructions
81
6.8.2. DILUTION RATIO
The dilution ratio is a software option that allows the user to compensate for any dilution of the sample gas
before it enters the sample inlet.
12. The SPAN value entered during calibration is the maximum expected concentration of the undiluted
calibration gas
13. The span gas should be either supplied through the same dilution inlet system as the sample gas or be
supplied at an appropriately lower actual concentration.
For example, with a dilution set to 100, a 1 ppm gas can be used to calibrate a 100 ppm sample gas if
the span gas is not routed through the dilution system.
On the other hand, if a 100 ppm span gas is used, it needs to pass through the same dilution steps as
the sample gas.
14. Set the dilution factor as a gain (e.g., a value of 20 means 20 parts diluent and 1 part of sample gas):
The analyzer will multiply the measured gas concentrations with this dilution factor and displays the
result.
SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL SETUP
SETUP C.3 PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT
SETUP C.3 RANGE CONTROL MENU
UNIT DIL EXIT
DIL only appears
if the dilution ratio
option has been
installed
SETUP C.3 DIL FACTOR: 1.0 GAIN
0 0 0 1 .0 ENTR EXIT
Toggle these keys to
set the dilution factor.
This is the number by
which the analyzer will
multiply the NO, NO2
and NOx concentrations
of the gas passing
through the reaction
cell.
SETUP C.3 DIL FACTOR: 20.0 GAIN
0 0 2 0 .0 ENTR EXIT
EXIT ignores the
new setting.
ENTR accepts the
new setting.
The analyzer multiplies the measured gas concentrations with this dilution factor and displays the result.
Calibrate the analyzer. Once the above settings have been entered, the instrument needs to be recalibrated
using one of the methods discussed in Chapter 0.
04521C (DCN5731)
Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
82
6.9. SETUP PASS: PASSWORD FEATURE
The M200EH/EM provides password protection of the calibration and setup functions to prevent unauthorized
adjustments. When the passwords have been enabled in the PASS menu item, the system will prompt the user
for a password anytime a password-protected function is requested.
There are three levels of password protection, which correspond to operator, maintenance, and configuration
functions. Each level allows access to all of the functions in the previous level.
Table 6-10: Password Levels
PASSWORD LEVEL MENU ACCESS ALLOWED
No password Operator TEST, MSG, CLR
101 Maintenance CAL, CALZ, CALS
818 Configuration SETUP, VARS, DIAG
To enable or disable passwords, press the following keystroke sequence:
SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL SETUP
SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT
Toggle this
button to
enable, disable
password
feasture
SETUP X.X PASSWORD ENABLE: OFF
OFF ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X PASSWORD ENABLE: ON
ON ENTR EXIT
Example: If all passwords are enabled, the following keypad sequence would be required to enter the SETUP
menu:
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Operating Instructions
83
SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X
< TST TST > CA
L
SETUP
SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS: 0
0 0 0
ENTR EXIT
prompts for
password
number
Example: this
password enables the
SETUP mode
SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS: 0
8 1 8
ENT
R
EXIT
SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
EXIT
Press individual
keys to set
numbers
Note that the instrument still prompts for a password when entering the VARS and DIAG menus, even if
passwords are disabled, but it displays the default password (818) upon entering these menus. The user only
has to press ENTR to access the password-protected menus but does not have to enter the required number
code.
04521C (DCN5731)
Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
84
6.10. SETUP CLK: SETTING THE INTERNAL TIME-OF-DAY
CLOCK
The M200EH/EM has a built-in clock for the AutoCal timer, Time TEST function, and time stamps on COM port
messages and iDAS data entries.
To set the time-of-day, press:
SETUP X.X TIME-OF-DAY CLOCK
TIME DATE EXIT
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT
EXIT returns
to the main
SAMPLE display
Enter Current
Date-of-Year
SETUP X.X DATE: 01-JAN-02
0 1 JAN 0 2 ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X DATE: 01-JAN-02
0 1 JAN 0 2 ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X TIME-OF-DAY CLOCK
TIME DATE EXIT
Enter Current
Time-of-Day
SETUP X.X3 TIME: 12:00
1 2 : 0 0 ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X TIME: 12:00
1 2 : 0 0 ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT
SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL SETUP
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Operating Instructions
85
In order to compensate for CPU clocks which run fast or slow, there is a variable to speed up or slow down the
clock by a fixed amount every day.
To change this variable, press:
SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS : 818
8 1 8 ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT
SETUP X.X 0 ) DAS_HOLD_OFF=15.0 Minutes
NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT
SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU
COMM VARS DIAG EXIT
SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL SETUP
3x EXIT returns
to the main SAMPLE display
Enter sign and number of seconds per
day the clock gains (-) or loses (+).
SETUPX.X 1 ) MEASURE_MODE=NOX-NO
PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT
SETUP X.X 7) CLOCK_ADJ=0 Sec/Da
y
PREV JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT
SETUP X.X CLOCK_ADJ:0 Sec/Da
y
+ 0 0 ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X 7) CLOCK_ADJ=0 Sec/Day
PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT
Continue to press NEXT until …
04521C (DCN5731)
Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
86
6.11. SETUP MORE COMM: SETTING UP THE ANALYSER’S
COMMUNICATION PORTS
The M200EH/EM is equipped with two serial communication ports located on the rear panel (see Figure 3-2).
Both ports operate similarly and give the user the ability to communicate with, issue commands to, and receive
data from the analyzer through an external computer system or terminal. By default, both ports operate on the
RS-232 protocol.
The COM1 port can also be configured to operate in single or RS-232 multidrop mode (option 62; See Section
5.9.2 and 6.11.7).
The COM2 port, can be configured for standard RS-232 operation, half-duplex RS-485 communication or for
access via an LAN by installing the Teledyne Instruments Ethernet interface card (option 63; see Section 5.9.3
and 6.11.6).
A code-activated switch (CAS), can also be used on either port to connect typically between 2 and 16
send/receive instruments (host computer(s) printers, dataloggers, analyzers, monitors, calibrators, etc.) into one
communications hub. Contact Teledyne Instruments sales for more information on CAS systems.
6.11.1. ANALYZER ID
Each type of Teledyne Instruments analyzer is configured with a default ID code. The default ID code for all
M200EH/EM analyzers is 200. The ID number is only important if more than one analyzer is connected to the
same communications channel such as when several analyzers are on the same Ethernet LAN (see Section
6.11.6); in a RS-232 multidrop chain (see Section 6.11.7) or operating over a RS-485 network (see Section
6.11.4). If two analyzers of the same model type are used on one channel, the ID codes of one or both of the
instruments needs to be changed so that they are unique to the instruments. To edit the instrument’s ID code,
press:
SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT
SETUP X.X COMMUNICATIONS MENU
ID INET COM1 EXIT
SETUP X. MACHINE ID: 200 ID
0 2 0 0 ENTR EXIT
Toggle these keys to
cycle through the
available character set:
0-9
ENTR key accepts the
new settings
EXIT key ignores the new
settings
SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL SETUP
The ID can be any 4 digit number and can also be used to identify analyzers in any number of ways (e.g.
location numbers, company asset number, etc.)
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Operating Instructions
87
6.11.2. COM PORT DEFAULT SETTINGS
As received from the factory, the analyzer is set up to emulate a DCE or modem, with pin 3 of the DB-9
connector designated for receiving data and pin 2 designated for sending data.
COM1: RS-232 (fixed), DB-9 male connector.
o Baud rate: 19200 bits per second (baud).
o Data Bits: 8 data bits with 1 stop bit.
o Parity: None.
COM2: RS-232 (configurable), DB-9 female connector.
o Baud rate: 115000 bits per second (baud).
o Data Bits: 8 data bits with 1 stop bit.
o Parity: None.
CAUTION
Cables that appear to be compatible because of matching connectors may incorporate
internal wiring that make the link inoperable. Check cables acquired from sources other
than Teledyne Instruments for pin assignments before using.
6.11.3. RS-232 COM PORT CABLE CONNECTIONS
In its default configuration, the M200EH/EM analyzer has two available RS-232 Com ports accessible via 2 DB-9
connectors on the back panel of the instrument. The COM1 connector is a male DB-9 connector and the COM2
is a female DB9 connector.
Male DB-9 (RS-232)
(As seen from outside analyzer)
(DTE mode)
(DCE mode)
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9
RXD GND
TXD
CTS
RTS
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9
TXD GND
RXD
RTS
CTS
Female DB-9 (COM2)
(As seen from outside analyzer)
(DTE mode)
12345
6789
RXD GND
TXD
CTS
RTS
Figure 6-6-6: Back Panel connector Pin-Outs for COM1 & COM2 in RS-232 mode.
04521C (DCN5731)
Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
88
The signals from these two connectors are routed from the motherboard via a wiring harness to two 10-pin
connectors on the CPU card, CN3 (COM1) and CN4 (COM2).
CN3 & CN4
(Located on CPU card)
(As seen from inside analyzer)
TXD GND
246810
13579
RXD RTS
CTS
Figure 6-6-7: CPU connector Pin-Outs for COM1 & COM2 in RS-232 mode.
Teledyne Instruments offers two mating cables, one of which should be applicable for your use.
Part number WR000077, a DB-9 female to DB-9 female cable, 6 feet long. Allows connection of COM1
with the serial port of most personal computers. Also available as Option 60 (see Section 5.9.1).
Part number WR000024, a DB-9 female to DB-25 male cable. Allows connection to the most common
styles of modems (e.g. Hayes-compatible) and code activated switches.
Both cables are configured with straight-through wiring and should require no additional adapters.
To assist in properly connecting the serial ports to either a computer or a modem, there are activity indicators
just above the RS-232 port. Once a cable is connected between the analyzer and a computer or modem, both
the red and green LEDs should be on. If the lights for COM 1 are not lit, use small switch on the rear panel to
switch it between DTE and DCE modes (see 16.10.5). If both LEDs are still not illuminated, check the cable for
proper wiring.
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Operating Instructions
89
6.11.4. RS-485 CONFIGURATION OF COM2
As delivered from the factory, COM2 is configured for RS-232 communications. This port can be re-configured
for operation as a non-isolated, half-duplex RS-485 port capable of supporting up to 32 instruments with a
maximum distance between the host and the furthest instrument being 4000 feet. If you require full-duplex or
isolated operation, please contact Teledyne Instruments Customer Service.
To reconfigure COM2 as an RS-285 port set switch 6 of SW1 to the ON position(see Figure 6-8).
The RS-485 port can be configured with or without a 150 Ω termination resistor. To include the resistor,
install jumper at position JP3 on the CPU board (see Figure 6-8). To configure COM2 as an un-
terminated RS-485 port leave JP3 open.
SW1
Pin 6
CN5
COM2 – RS-485
JP3
CN4
COM2 – RS-232 CN3
COM1 – RS-232
Figure 6-6-8: CPU card Locations of RS-232/486 Switches, Connectors and Jumpers
04521C (DCN5731)
Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
90
When COM2 is configured for RS-485 operation the port uses the same female DB-9 connector on the back of
the instrument as when Com2 is configured for RS-232 operation, however, the pin assignments are different.
Female DB-9 (COM2)
(As seen from outside analyzer)
(RS-485)
12345
67 8 9
GND
RX/TX+
RX/TX-
Figure 6-6-9: Back Panel connector Pin-Outs for COM2 in RS-485 mode.
The signal from this connector is routed from the motherboard via a wiring harness to a 6-pin connector on the
CPU card, CN5.
CN5
(Located on CPU card)
(As seen from inside analyzer)
2 4 6
1 3 5
RX/TX+
RX/TX-
GND
Figure 6-6-10: CPU connector Pin-Outs for COM2 in RS-485 mode.
6.11.5. DTE AND DCE COMMUNICATION
RS-232 was developed for allowing communications between data terminal equipment (DTE) and data
communication equipment (DCE). Basic terminals always fall into the DTE category whereas modems are
always considered DCE devices. The difference between the two is the pin assignment of the Data Receive and
Data Transmit functions.
DTE devices receive data on pin 2 and transmit data on pin 3.
DCE devices receive data on pin 3 and transmit data on pin 2.
To allow the analyzer to be used with terminals (DTE), modems (DCE) and computers (which can be either), a
switch mounted below the serial ports on the rear panel allows the user to set the configuration of COM1 for one
of these two modes. This switch exchanges the receive and transmit lines on COM1 emulating a cross-over or
null-modem cable. The switch has no effect on COM2.
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Operating Instructions
91
6.11.6. ETHERNET CARD CONFIGURATION
When equipped with the optional Ethernet interface, the analyzer can be connected to any standard 10BaseT
Ethernet network via low-cost network hubs, switches or routers. The interface operates as a standard TCP/IP
device on port 3000. This allows a remote computer to connect through the internet to the analyzer using
APICOM, terminal emulators or other programs.
The firmware on board the Ethernet card automatically sets the communication modes and baud rate (115 200
kBaud ) for the COM2 port. Once the Ethernet option is installed and activated, the COM2 submenu is replaced
by a new submenu, INET. This submenu is used to manage and configure the Ethernet interface with your LAN
or Internet Server(s).
The card has four LEDs that are visible on the rear panel of the analyzer, indicating its current operating status.
Table 6-11: Ethernet Status Indicators
LED FUNCTION
LNK (green) ON when connection to the LAN is valid.
ACT (yellow) Flickers on any activity on the LAN.
TxD (green) Flickers when the RS-232 port is transmitting data.
RxD (yellow) Flickers when the RS-232 port is receiving data.
6.11.6.1. Ethernet Card COM2 Communication Modes and Baud Rate
The firmware on board the Ethernet card automatically sets the communication modes for the COM2 port. The
baud rate is also automatically set at 115 200 kBaud.
6.11.6.2. Configuring the Ethernet Interface Option using DHCP
The Ethernet option for you M200EH/EM uses Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) to automatically
configure its interface with your LAN. This requires your network servers also be running DHCP. The analyzer
will do this the first time you turn the instrument on after it has been physically connected to your network. Once
the instrument is connected and turned on it will appear as an active device on your network without any extra
set up steps or lengthy procedures.
Should you need to, the Ethernet configuration properties are viewable via the analyzer’s front panel See Table
6-12.
04521C (DCN5731)
Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
92
Table 6-12: LAN/Internet Configuration Properties
PROPERTY DEFAULT STATE DESCRIPTION
DHCP STATUS On Editable
This displays whether the DHCP is
turned ON or OFF.
INSTRUMENT
IP ADDRESS
Configured by
DHCP
EDIT key
disabled when
DHCP is ON
This string of four packets of 1 to 3
numbers each (e.g. 192.168.76.55.) is
the address of the analyzer itself.
GATEWAY IP
ADDRESS
Configured by
DHCP
EDIT key
disabled when
DHCP is ON
A string of numbers very similar to the
Instrument IP address (e.g.
192.168.76.1.)that is the address of
the computer used by your LAN to
access the Internet.
SUBNET MASK Configured by
DHCP
EDIT key
disabled when
DHCP is ON
Also a string of four packets of 1 to 3
numbers each (e.g. 255.255.252.0)
that defines that identifies the LAN the
device is connected to.
All addressable devices and
computers on a LAN must have the
same subnet mask. Any transmissions
sent devices with different assumed to
be outside of the LAN and are routed
through gateway computer onto the
Internet.
TCP PORT1 3000 Editable
This number defines the terminal
control port by which the instrument is
addressed by terminal emulation
software, such as Internet or Teledyne
Instruments’ APICOM.
HOST NAME M200EH (EM) Editable
The name by which your analyzer will
appear when addressed from other
computers on the LAN or via the
Internet. While the default setting for
all Teledyne Instruments analyzers is
the model number, the host name may
be changed to fit customer needs.
1 Do not change the setting for this property unless instructed to by Teledyne Instruments
Customer Service personnel.
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Operating Instructions
93
NOTE
It is a good idea to check these settings the first time you power up your analyzer after
it has been physically connected to the LAN/Internet to make sure that the DHCP has
successfully downloaded the appropriate information from you network server(s).
If the gateway IP, instrument IP and the subnet mask are all zeroes (e.g. “0.0.0.0”),
the DCHP was not successful.
You may have to manually configure the analyzer’s Ethernet properties.
See your network administrator.
To view the above properties, press:
SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS : 818
8 1 8
SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM
NOX=XXX.X
SETUP X.X COMMUNICATIONS MENU
ID INET COM1
SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU
COMM VARS DIAG EXIT
SETUP X.X DHCP: ON
SET> EDIT
SETUP X.X INST IP: 0.0.0.0
<SET SET>
SETUP X.X GATEWAY IP: 0.0.0.0
<SET SET>
SETUP X.X SUBNET MASK: 0.0.0.0
<SET SET>
SETUP X.X TCP PORT: 3000
<SET SET> EDIT
SETUP X.X HOSTNAME: M200EH
<SET EDIT
EDIT Key
Disabled
Do not alter unless
directed to by Teledyne
Instruments Customer
Service personnel
From this point on,
EXIT returns to
COMMUNICATIONS
MENU
04521C (DCN5731)
Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
94
6.11.6.3. Manually Configuring the Network IP Addresses
There are several circumstances when you may need to manually configure the interface settings of the
analyzer’s Ethernet card. The INET sub-menu may also be used to edit the Ethernet card’s configuration
properties
Your LAN is not running a DHCP software package,
The DHCP software is unable to initialize the analyzer’s interface;
You wish to program the interface with a specific set of IP addresses that may not be the ones
automatically chosen by DHCP.
Editing the Ethernet Interface properties is a two step process.
STEP 1: Turn DHCP OFF: While DHCP is turned ON, the ability to manually set INSTRUMENT IP, GATEWAY
IP and SUBNET MASK is disabled
ENTR accept
new settings
EXIT ignores
new settin
g
s
SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT
SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS : 818
8 1 8 ENTR EXIT
SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL SETUP
SETUP X.X COMMUNICATIONS MENU
ID INET COM1 EXIT
SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU
COMM VARS DIAG EXIT
SETUP X.X DHCP: ON
ON ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X DHCP: ON
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
SETUP X.X DHCP: ON
OFF ENTR EXIT
Continue with editing of Ethernet interface
properties (see Step 2, below).
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Operating Instructions
95
STEP 2: Configure the INSTRUMENT IP, GATEWAY IP and SUBNET MASK addresses by pressing:
Internet Configuration Keypad Functions
KEY FUNCTION
[0] Press this key to cycle through the range of
numerals and available characters (“0 – 9” & “ . ”)
<CH CH> Moves the cursor one character left or right.
DEL Deletes a character at the cursor location.
ENTR Accepts the new setting and returns to the previous
menu.
EXIT Ignores the new setting and returns to the previous
menu.
Some keys only appear as needed.
SETUP X.X DHCP: OFF
SET> EDIT EXIT
SETUP X.X INST IP: 000.000.000.000
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
SETUP X.X GATEWAY IP: 000.000.000.000
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
SETUP X.X INST IP: [0] 00.000.000
<CH CH> DEL [0] ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X SUBNET MASK:255.255.255.0
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
SETUP X.X SUBNET MASK:[2]55.255.255.0
<CH CH> DEL [?] ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X TCP PORT 3000
<SET EDIT EXIT
The PORT number needs to remain at 3000.
Do not change this setting unless instructed to by
Teledyne Instruments Customer Service personnel.
From Step 1 above)
SETUP X.X GATEWAY IP: [0] 00.000.000
<CH CH> DEL [?] ENTR EXIT
Cursor
location is
indicated by
brackets
SETUP X.X INITIALIZING INET 0%
…
INITIALIZING INET 100%
SETUP X.X INITIALIZATI0N SUCCEEDED
SETUP X.X INITIALIZATION FAILED
SETUP X.X COMMUNICATIONS MENU
ID INET COM1 EXIT
Pressing EXIT from
any of the above
display menus
causes the Ethernet
option to reinitialize
its internal interface
firmware
Contact your IT
Network Administrator
04521C (DCN5731)
Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
96
6.11.6.4. Changing the Analyzer’s HOSTNAME
The HOSTNAME is the name by which the analyzer appears on your network. The default name for all
Teledyne Instruments Model 200EH/EME analyzers is M????. To change this name (particularly if you have
more than one M200EH/EM analyzer on your network), press.
SETUP X.X COMMUNICATIONS MENU
ID INET COM1 EXIT
SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS : 818
8 1 8 ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT
SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL SETUP
SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU
COMM VARS DIAG ALRM EXIT
SETUP X.X
DHCP: ON
SET> EDIT EXIT
SETUP X.X
HOSTNAME: 200E
<SET EDIT EXIT
SETUP X.X
HOSTNAME: [M]200E
<CH CH> INS DEL [?] ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X
HOSTNAME: 200E-FIELD1
<SET EDIT EXIT
Continue pressing SET> UNTIL …
SETUP X.X INITIALIZING INET 0%
…
INITIALIZING INET 100%
SETUP X.X INITIALIZATI0N SUCCEEDED
SETUP X.X INITIALIZATION FAILED
SETUP X.X
COMMUNICATIONS MENU
ID INET COM1 EXIT
Contact your IT Network
Administrator
Use these keys (See Table 6-19)
to edit HOSTNAME
Table 6-13: Internet Configuration Keypad Functions
KEY FUNCTION
<CH Moves the cursor one character to the left.
CH> Moves the cursor one character to the right.
INS Inserts a character before the cursor location.
DEL Deletes a character at the cursor location.
[?] Press this key to cycle through the range of numerals and characters available for insertion.
0-9, A-Z, space ’ ~ ! # $ % ^ & * ( ) - _ = +[ ] { } < >\ | ; : , . / ?
ENTR Accepts the new setting and returns to the previous menu.
EXIT Ignores the new setting and returns to the previous menu.
Some keys only appear as needed.
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Operating Instructions
97
6.11.7. MULTIDROP RS-232 SET UP
The RS-232 multidrop consists of a printed circuit assembly that plugs onto the CN3, CN4, and CN5 connectors
of the CPU card (see Figure 6-11) and the cabling to connect it to the analyzer’s motherboard. This PCA
includes all circuitry required to enable your analyzer for multidrop operation. It converts the instrument’s COM1
port to multidrop configuration allowing up to eight analyzers to be connected the same I/O port of the host
computer.
Because both of the DB9 connectors on the analyzer’s back panel are needed to construct the multidrop chain,
COM2 is no longer available for separate RS-232 or RS-485 operation, however, with the addition of an Ethernet
Option (option 63, see Sections 5.9.3 and 6.11.6) the COM2 port is available for communication over a 10BaseT
LAN.
Rear Panel
(as seen from inside)
CPU Card
Multidrop
PCA
JP2
Cable to
Ethernet
Card
Cable to
Motherboard
Figure 6-6-11: Location of JP2 on RS232-Multidrop PCA (option 62)
Each analyzer in the multidrop chain must have:
One Teledyne Instruments option 62 installed.
One 6’ straight-through, DB9 male DB9 Female cable (Teledyne Instruments P/N WR0000101) is
required for each analyzer.
To set up the network, for each analyzer:
1. Turn the analyzer on and change its ID code (see Section 6.11.1) to a unique 4-digit number.
2. Remove the top cover (see Section 3.1) of the analyzer and locate JP2 on the multidrop PCA (see
Figure 6-11)
3. Make sure that the jumpers are in place connection pins 9 10 and 11 12.
4. If the analyzer is to be the last instrument on the chain, make sure a jumper is in place connecting pins
21 22.
04521C (DCN5731)
Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
98
5. If you are adding an analyzer to the end of an already existing chain, don’t forget to remove JP2, pins 21
22 on the multidrop PCA on the analyzer that was previous the last instrument in the chain.
6. Close the instrument.
7. Using straight-through, DB9 male DB9 Female cables, interconnect the host and the analyzers as
shown in Figure 6-12.
NOTE:
Teledyne Instruments recommends setting up the first link, between the Host and the
first analyzer and testing it before setting up the rest of the chain.
Analyzer Analyzer Analyzer Last Analyzer
Female DB9
Male DB9
RS-232
COM2
RS-232
COM2
RS-232
COM2
RS-232
COM2
Host
RS-232 port
Make Sure
Jumper between
JP2 pins 21 22
is installed.
KEY:
Figure 6-6-12: RS232-Multidrop PCA Host/Analyzer Interconnect Diagram
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Operating Instructions
99
6.11.8. COM PORT COMMUNICATION MODES
Each of the analyzer’s serial ports can be configured to operate in a number of different modes, which are listed
in the following table. Each COM port needs to be configured independently.
Table 6-14: COMM Port Communication modes
MODE1 ID DESCRIPTION
QUIET
1
Quiet mode suppresses any feedback from the analyzer (iDAS reports, and warning
messages) to the remote device and is typically used when the port is communicating
with a computer program such as APICOM. Such feedback is still available but a
command must be issued to receive them.
COMPUTER 2 Computer mode inhibits echoing of typed characters and is used when the port is
communicating with a computer program, such as APICOM.
SECURITY 4 When enabled, the serial port requires a password before it will respond. The only
command that is active is the help screen (? CR).
HESSEN
PROTOCOL 16 The Hessen communications protocol is used in some European countries. Teledyne
Instruments part number 02252 contains more information on this protocol.
E, 7, 1
2048
When turned on this mode switches the COMM port settings
from
No parity; 8 data bits; 1 stop bit
to
Even parity; 7 data bits; 1 stop bit
RS-485 1024 Configures the COM2 Port for RS-485 communication. RS-485 mode has precedence
over multidrop mode if both are enabled.
MULTIDROP
PROTOCOL 32 Multidrop protocol allows a multi-instrument configuration on a single communications
channel. Multidrop requires the use of instrument IDs.
ENABLE
MODEM 64 Enables to send a modem initialization string at power-up. Asserts certain lines in the
RS-232 port to enable the modem to communicate.
ERROR
CHECKING2 128 Fixes certain types of parity errors at certain Hessen protocol installations.
XON/XOFF
HANDSHAKE2 256 Disables XON/XOFF data flow control also known as software handshaking.
HARDWARE
HANDSHAKE 8
Enables CTS/RTS style hardwired transmission handshaking. This style of data
transmission handshaking is commonly used with modems or terminal emulation
protocols as well as by Teledyne Instrument’s APICOM software.
HARDWARE
FIFO2 512 Improves data transfer rate when on of the COMM ports.
COMMAND
PROMPT 4096 Enables a command prompt when in terminal mode.
1 Modes are listed in the order in which they appear in the
SETUP MORE COMM COM[1 OR 2] MODE menu
2 The default sting for this feature is ON. Do not disable unless instructed to by Teledyne Instruments Customer Service
personnel.
04521C (DCN5731)
Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
100
Press the following keys to select a communication mode for a one of the COMM Ports, such as the following
example where HESSEN PROTOCOL mode is enabled:
Continue pressing next until …
SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT
SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU
COMM VARS DIAG ALRM EXIT
SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL SETUP
SETUP X.X COMMUNICATIONS MENU
ID INET COM1 EXIT
SETUP X.X COM1 MODE:0
SET> EDIT EXIT
SETUP X.X COM1 QUIET MODE: OFF
NEXT OFF ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X COM1 HESSEN PROTOCOL : ON
PREV NEXT ON ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X COM1 HESSEN PROTOCOL : OFF
PREV NEXT OFF ENTR EXIT
Continue pressing the NEXT and PREV keys to select any other
modes you which to enable or disable
Use PRE
V
and NEXT keys
to move between available
modes.
A mode is enabled by
toggling the ON/OFF key.
Select which COM
port to configure
EXIT returns
to the
previous
menu
ENTR key accepts the
new settings
EXIT key ignores the new
settings
The sum of the mode
IDs of the selected
modes is displayed
here
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Operating Instructions
101
6.11.9. COM PORT BAUD RATE
To select the baud rate of one of the COM Ports, press:
EXAMPLE
SETUP X.X COM1 BAUD RATE:19200
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X COM1 BAUD RATE:9600
NEXT ON ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT
SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU
COMM VARS DIAG EXIT
SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL SETUP
SETUP X.X COMMUNICATIONS MENU
ID INET COM1 EXIT
SETUP X.X COM1 MODE:0
SET> EDIT EXIT
SETUP X.X COM1 BAUD RATE:19200
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
Select which COM port
to configure.
EXIT returns
to the
previous
menu
Use PREV and NEXT
keys to move
between available
baud rates.
300
1200
4800
9600
19200
38400
57600
115200
Press SET> until you
reach
COM1 BAUD RATE
ENTR key
accepts
the new
setting
EXIT key
ignores the
new
setting
04521C (DCN5731)
Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
102
6.11.10. COM PORT TESTING
The serial ports can be tested for correct connection and output in the COMM menu. This test sends a string of
256 ‘w’ characters to the selected COM port. While the test is running, the red LED on the rear panel of the
analyzer should flicker.
To initiate the test press the following key sequence.
SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL SETUP
SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT
SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU
COMM VARS DIAG EXIT
Select which
COM port to
test.
SETUP X.X COMMUNICATIONS MENU
ID COM2 COM1 EXIT
SETUP X.X COM1 : TEST PORT
<SET TEST EXIT
SETUP X.X TRANSMITTING TO COM1
<SET TEST EXIT
SETUP X.X COM1 MODE:0
SET> EDIT EXIT
SETUP X.X COM1 BAUD RATE:19200
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
EXIT returns to
COMM menu
Test runs
automatically
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Operating Instructions
103
6.12. SETUP MORE VARS: INTERNAL VARIABLES (VARS)
The M200EH/EM has several-user adjustable software variables, which define certain operational parameters.
Usually, these variables are automatically set by the instrument’s firmware, but can be manually re-defined using
the VARS menu. Table 6-15 lists all variables that are available within the 818 password protected level. See
Appendix A2 for a detailed listing of all of the M200EH/EM variables that are accessible through the remote
interface.
Table 6-15: Variable Names (VARS)
NO. VARIABLE DESCRIPTION ALLOWED VALUES
0 DAS_HOLD_OFF
Duration of no data storage in the iDAS. This is the time when
the analyzer returns from one of its calibration modes to the
SAMPLE mode. The DAS_HOLD_OFF can be disabled in each
iDAS channel.
Can be between 0.5
and 20 minutes
Default=15 min.
1 MEASURE_MODE
Selects the gas measurement mode in which the instrument is to
operate. NOx only, NO only or dual gas measurement of NOx
and NO simultaneously. Dual gas mode requires that a special
switching optional be installed.
NO; NOx;
NOx–NO
2 STABIL_GAS Selects which gas measurement is displayed when the STABIL
test function is selected.
NO; NOx;
NO2; O21
3 TPC_ENABLE Enables or disables the temperature and pressure
compensation (TPC) feature (Section 10.7.3).
ON/OFF
Default=ON
4 DYN_ZERO
Dynamic zero automatically adjusts offset and slope of the NO
and NOX response when performing a zero point calibration
during an AutoCal (Chapter 7.7).
ON/OFF
Default=OFF
5 DYN_SPAN
Dynamic span automatically adjusts the offsets and slopes of
the NO and NOx response when performing a zero point
calibration during an AutoCal (Chapter 7.7).
Note that the DYN_ZERO and DYN_SPAN features are not
allowed for applications requiring EPA equivalency.
ON/OFF
Default=OFF
6 CONC_PRECISION Allows to set the number of decimal points of the concentration
and stability parameters displayed on the front panel.
AUTO, 1, 2, 3, 4
Default=AUTO
7 CLOCK_ADJ Adjusts the speed of the analyzer’s clock. Choose the + sign if
the clock is too slow, choose the - sign if the clock is too fast.
-60 to +60 s/day
Default=0
1 Only available in analyzer’s with o2 sensor options installed.
NOTE:
There is a 2 second latency period between when a VARS value is changed and the new
value is stored into the analyzer’s memory.
DO NOT turn the analyzer off during this period or the new setting will be lost.
04521C (DCN5731)
Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
104
To access and navigate the VARS menu, use the following key sequence:
SETUP X.X 7) CLOCK_ADJ=0 Sec/Day
+ 0 0 ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X 6) CONC_PRECUISION : 3
AUTO 0 1 2 3 4 ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X 6) CONC_PRECUISION : 1
PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT
Toggle these keys to change setting
SETUP X.X 2 ) STABIL GAS =NOX
NO NO2 NOX O2 ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X 2 ) STABIL_GAS=NOX
PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT
Choose Gas
SETUP X.X 1 ) MEASURE_MODE=NO
X
-NO
NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT
SAMPLE RANGE = 500.0 PPB NOX=X.X
< TST TST > CAL SETUP
SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT
SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU
COMM VARS DIAG EXIT
SETUP X.X 0 ) DAS_HOLD_OFF=15.0 Minutes
NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT
SETUP X.X 3 ) TPC_ENABLE=ON
PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT
SETUP X.X ENTER VARS PASS: 818
8 1 8 ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X 0) DAS_HOLD_OFF=15.0 Minutes
1 5 .0 ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X 7) CLOCK_ADJ=0 Sec/Day
PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT
EXIT ignores the new setting.
ENTR accepts the new setting.
SETUP X.X 3 ) TPC_ENABLE=ON
ON ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X 4 ) DYN_ZERO=ON
PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT
SETUP X.X 4 ) DYN_ZERO=ON
ON ENTR EXIT
Toggle this keys to change setting
Toggle this keys to change setting
SETUP X.X 5) DYN_SPAN=ON
PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT
SETUP X.X 5 ) DYN_SPAN=ON
ON ENTR EXIT
Toggle this keys to change setting
Toggle this keys to change setting
Toggle this keys to change setting
See Section 6.12.1. for
information on setting the
MEASRUE MODE
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Operating Instructions
105
6.12.1. SETTING THE GAS MEASUREMENT MODE
In its standard operating mode the M200EH/EM measures NO, NO2 and NOx. It can be set to measure only NO
or Only NOX s can be set to measure NO or NOx. To select one of these three measurement modes, press:
SETUP X.X 1 ) MEASURE_MODE=NOX-NO
PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT
EXI
T
ignores the new
setting.
ENTR accepts the
new setting.
SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS : 818
8 1 8 ENTR EXIT
SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL SETUP
SETUP X.X MEASURE MODE: NOX-NO
PREV ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X MEASURE MODE: NOX
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X MEASURE MODE: NO
NEXT ENTR EXIT
NOX-NO mode is the
default mode for the
M200EH/EM
Press the PREV
and NEXT buttons
to move back and
forth between gas
modes
SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT
SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU
COMM VARS DIAG EXIT
SETUP X.X 0 ) DAS_HOLD_OFF=15 minutes
NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT
04521C (DCN5731)
Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
106
6.13. SETUP MORE DIAG: DIAGNOSTICS MENU
A series of diagnostic tools is grouped together under the SETUP-MORE-DIAG menu. These parameters are
dependent on firmware revision. These tools can be used in a variety of troubleshooting and diagnostic
procedures and are referred to in many places of the maintenance and trouble-shooting sections.
An overview of the entire DIAG menu can be found in menu tree A-6 of Appendix A.1.
Table 6-16: M200EH/EM Diagnostic (DIAG) Functions
DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION AND MEANING
FRONT PANEL
MODE
INDICATOR
SECTION
SIGNAL I/O: Allows observation of all digital and analog signals in the
instrument. Allows certain digital signals such as valves and heaters to be
toggled ON and OFF.
DIAG I/O 6.13.2
ANALOG I/O: When entered, the analyzer performs an analog output step test.
This can be used to calibrate a chart recorder or to test the analog output
accuracy.
DIAG AOUT 6.13.3
ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION: This submenu allows the user to configure
the analyzer’s four analog output channels, including choosing what parameter
will be output on each channel. Instructions that appear here allow adjustment
and calibration the voltage signals associated with each output as well as
calibration of the analog to digital converter circuitry on the motherboard.
DIAG AIO
6.13.4,
through
6.13.6
DISPLAY SEQUENCE CONFIGURATION: Allows the user to program which
concentration values are displayed in the . DIAG DISP 6.13.7.1
OPTIC TEST: When activated, the analyzer performs an optic test, which turns
on an LED located inside the sensor module near the PMT (Fig. 10-15). This
diagnostic tests the response of the PMT without having to supply span gas.
DIAG OPTIC 6.13.7.2
ELECTRICAL TEST: When activated, the analyzer performs an electric test,
which generates a current intended to simulate the PMT output to verify the
signal handling and conditioning of the PMT preamp board.
DIAG ELEC 6.13.7.3
OZONE GEN OVERRIDE: Allows the user to manually turn the O3 generator on
or off. This setting is retained when exiting DIAG. DIAG OZONE 6.13.7.4
FLOW CALIBRATION: This function is used to calibrate the gas flow output
signals of sample gas and ozone supply. These settings are retained when
exiting DIAG.
DIAG FCAL 6.13.7.5
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Operating Instructions
107
6.13.1. ACCESSING THE DIAGNOSTIC FEATURES
To access the DIAG functions press the following keys:
SETUP X.X ENTER DIAG PASS: 818
8 1 8 ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT
SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU
COMM VARS DIAG EXIT
From this point
forward, EXIT returns
to the
SECONDARY
SETUP MENU
DIAG SIGNAL I / O
NEXT ENTR EXIT
DIAG ANALOG OUTPUT
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
DIAG
A
NALOG I / O CONFIGURATION
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
DIAG DISPLAY SEQUENCE CONFIG.
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
DIAG ELECTRICAL TEST
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
DIAG OZONE GEN OVERRIDE
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
EXIT returns
to the main
SAMPLE
display
DIAG OPTIC TEST
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
DIAG FLOW CALIBRATION
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL SETUP
EXIT returns
to the PRIMARY
SETUP MENU
04521C (DCN5731)
Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
108
6.13.2. SIGNAL I/O
The signal I/O diagnostic mode allows to review and change the digital and analog input/output functions of the
analyzer. See Appendix A-4 for a complete list of the parameters available for review under this menu.
NOTE
Any changes of signal I/O settings will remain in effect only until the signal I/O menu
is exited. Exceptions are the ozone generator override and the flow sensor calibration,
which remain as entered when exiting.
To enter the signal I/O test mode, press:
SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL SETUP
EXAMPLE
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT
SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU
COMM VARS DIAG EXIT
DIAG SIGNAL I / O
PREV NEXT JUMP ENTR EXIT
DIAG I / O Test Signals Displayed Here
PREV NEXT JUMP PRNT EXIT
Use the JUMP key to
go directly to a
specific signal
See Appendix A-4 for
a complete list of
available SIGNALS
DIAG I / O JUMP TO: 5
0 5 ENTR EXIT
Enter 05 to Jump
to Signal 5:
(CAL_LED)
DIAG I / O CAL_LED = ON
PREV NEXT JUMP ON PRNT EXIT
Exit to return
to the
DIAG menu
SETUP X.X ENTER DIAG PASS: 818
8 1 8 ENTR EXIT
Use the NEXT & PREV
keys to move between
signal types.
Pressing the PRNT key will send a formatted printout to the serial port and can be
ca
p
tured with a com
p
uter or other out
p
ut device.
EXIT
returns
to the main
SAMPLE
display
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Operating Instructions
109
6.13.3. ANALOG OUTPUT STEP TEST
This test can be used to check the accuracy and proper operation of the analog outputs. The test forces all four
analog output channels to produce signals ranging from 0% to 100% of the full scale range in 20% increments.
This test is useful to verify the operation of the data logging/recording devices attached to the analyzer.
To begin the Analog Output Step Test press:
SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL SETUP
SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT
SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU
COMM VARS DIAG EXIT
DIAG SIGNAL I / O
NEXT ENTR EXIT
Exit-Exit
returns to the
DIAG menu
SETUP X.X ENTER DIAG PASS: 818
8 1 8 ENTR EXIT
DIAG ANALOG OUTPUT
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
DIAG AOUT ANALOG OUTPUT
0% EXIT
Performs
analog output
step test.
0% - 100%
DIAG AOUT ANALOG OUTPUT
[0%] EXIT
Pressing the key under “0%” while performing the test will
pause the test at that level. Brackets will appear around
the value: example: [20%] Pressing the same key again
will resume the test.
04521C (DCN5731)
Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
110
6.13.4. ANALOG OUTPUTS AND REPORTING RANGES
6.13.4.1. Analog Output Signals Available on the M200EH/EM
The analyzer has four analog output signals, accessible through a connector on the rear panel.
ANALOG OUT
A1
A
2
A
3
A
4
+ - + - + - + -
0-20 mA current loop
output available for these
channels only
Figure 6-6-13: Analog Output Connector Key
The signal levels of each output can be independently configured as follows. An over-range feature is available
that allows each range to be usable from -5% to + 5% of its nominal scale:
Table 6-17: Analog Output Voltage Ranges with Over-Range Active
RANGE MINIMUM OUTPUT MAXIMUM OUTPUT
0-0.1 V -5 mV +105 mV
0-1 V -0.05 V +1.05 V
0-5 V -0.25 V +5.25 V
0-10 V -0.5 V +10.5 V
The default offset for all ranges is 0 VDC.
Pin assignments for the ANALOG output connector at the rear panel of the instrument:
Table 6-18: Analog Output Pin Assignments
PIN ANALOG
OUTPUT
VOLTAGE
SIGNAL
CURRENT
SIGNAL
1 V Out I Out +
2 A1 Ground I Out -
3 V Out I Out +
4 A2 Ground I Out -
5 V Out I Out +
6 A3 Ground I Out -
7 V Out I Out +
8 A4 Ground I Out -
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Operating Instructions
111
Additionally A1, A2 andA3 may be equipped with optional 0-20 mA current loop drivers. A4 is not available for
the current loop option.
Table 6-19: Analog Output Current Loop Range
RANGE MINIMUM OUTPUT MAXIMUM OUTPUT
0-20 mA 0 mA 20 mA
These are the physical limits of the current loop modules, typical applications use 2-20 or 4-20 mA for the
lower and upper limits. Please specify desired range when ordering this option. The default offset for all
ranges is 0 mA.
All of these outputs can be configured output signals representing any of the iDAS parameters available on this
model (See Table A-6 of Appendix A.5 for a complete list).
The ability to select any one of the M200EH/EM’s 40+ iDAS data types coupled with the ability to select from a
variety of signal ranges and scales makes the analog outputs of the M200EH/EM extremely flexible.
Table 6-20: Example of Analog Output configuration for M200EH/EM
OUTPUT
IDAS
PARAMETER
ASSIGNED
SIGNAL
SCALE
A1 NXCNC1 0-5 V
A2 N2CNC2 4-20 mA
A3 PMTDET 0 - 1 V
A4 O2CONC 0-10 V
1 With current loop option installed
6.13.4.2. Physical Range versus Analog Output Reporting Ranges
The entire measurement range of the analyzer is quite large, 0 – 5,000 ppm for the M200Eh and 0-200 PPM for
the M200EM, but many applications use only a small part of the analyzer’s full measurement range. This
creates two performance challenges:
1. The width of the analyzer’s physical range can create data resolution problems for most analog
recording devices. For example, in an application where a M200Eh is being used to measure an
expected concentration of typically less than 200 ppm NOx, the full scale of expected values is only 4%
of the instrument’s full 5000 ppm measurement range. Unmodified, the corresponding output signal
would also be recorded across only 4% of the range of the recording device.
The M200EH/EM solves this problem by allowing the user to select a scaled reporting range for the
analog outputs that only includes that portion of the physical range relevant to the specific application.
Only the reporting range of the analog outputs is scaled, the physical range of the analyzer and the
readings displayed on the front panel remain unaltered.
2. Applications where low concentrations of NO, NO2 and NOx are measured require greater sensitivity and
resolution than typically necessary for measurements of higher concentrations.
The M200EH/EM solves this issue by using two hardware physical ranges that cover the instruments
entire measurement range The analyzer’s software automatically selects which physical range is in
effect based on the analog output reporting range selected by the user:
04521C (DCN5731)
Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
112
FOR THE M200EM:
Low range spans 0 to 20 ppm NOX (20 ppm = 5 V);
High range spans 0-200 ppm NOX (200 ppm = 5 V).
If the high end of the selected reporting range is 20 ppm. The low physical range is selected. If the
high end of the selected reporting range is > 20 ppm. The high physical range is selected.
FOR THE M200EH:
Low range spans 0 to 500 ppm NOX (500 ppm = 5 V);
High range spans 0-5000 ppm NOX (5000 ppm = 5 V).
If the high end of the selected reporting range is 500 ppm. The low physical range is selected. If the
high end of the selected reporting range is > 500 ppm. The high physical range is selected.
Once properly calibrated, the analyzer’s front panel will accurately report concentrations along the entire span of
its 0 and 20,000 ppb physical range regardless of which reporting range has been selected for the analog
outputs and which physical range is being used by the instruments software.
Both reporting ranges need to be calibrated independently to the same span gas concentrations in order to allow
switching back and forth between high and low ranges.
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Operating Instructions
113
6.13.5. ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION
6.13.5.1. The Analog I/O Configuration Submenu.
Table 6-21 lists the analog I/O functions that are available in the M200EH/EM.
Table 6-21: DIAG - Analog I/O Functions
SUB MENU FUNCTION
AOUTS
CALIBRATED:
Shows the status of the analog output calibration (YES/NO) and initiates a calibration
of all analog output channels.
DATA_OUT_1: Configures the A1 analog output:
RANGE1: Selects the signal type (voltage or current loop) and full scale value of the
output.
OVERRANGE: Turns the ± 5% over-range feature ON/OFF for this output channel.
REC_OFS1: Sets a voltage offset (not available when RANGE is set to CURRent loop.
AUTO_CAL1: Sets the channel for automatic or manual calibration
CALIBRATED1: Performs the same calibration as AOUT CALIBRATED, but on this
one channel only.
OUTOUT: Turns the output channel ON/OFF. A signal. Equal to the low end of the
output scale (zero point) is still output by the analyzer, but no data is sent.
DATA: Allows the user to select which iDAS parameter to be output.
SCALE: Sets the top end of the reporting range scale for this channel. The analyzer
automatically chooses the units of measure appropriate for the iDAS parameter chosen
(e.g. ppm for concentration parameters; in-Hg-A for pressure measurements, etc.)
UPDATE: Sets the time interval at which the analyzer updates the data being output
on the channel.
DATA_OUT_2 Same as forDATA_OUT_1 but for analog channel 2 (NO)
DATA_OUT_3 Same as for DATA_OUT_1 but for analog channel 3 (NO2)
DATA_OUT_4 Same as for DATA_OUT_1 but for analog channel 3 (NO2)
TEST OUTPUT Same as for DATA_OUT_1 but for analog channel 4 (TEST)
AIN CALIBRATED Shows the calibration status (YES/NO) and initiates a calibration of the analog to digital
converter circuit on the motherboard.
1Changes to RANGE or REC_OFS require recalibration of this output.
To configure the analyzer’s four analog outputs, set the electronic signal type of each channel and calibrate the
outputs. This consists of:
1. Selecting an output type (voltage or current, if an optional current output driver has been installed) and
the signal level that matches the input requirements of the recording device attached to the channel.
2. Determine if the over-range feature is needed and turn it on or off accordingly.
3. If a Voltage scale is in use, a bipolar recorder offset may be added to the signal if required (Section
6.13.4.4).
4. Choose an iDAS parameter to be output on the channel.
5. Set the reporting range scale for the data type chosen.
6. Set the update rate for the channel.
04521C (DCN5731)
Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
114
7. Calibrating the output channel. This can be done automatically or manually for each channel (see
Sections 6.13.5).
To access the analog I/O configuration sub menu, press:
AIO Configuration Submenu
SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL SETUP
SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT
SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU
COMM VARS DIAG ALRM EXIT
SETUP X.X ENTER PASSWORD:818
8 1 8 ENTREXIT
DIAG SIGNAL I/O
NEXT ENTR EXIT
Continue pressing NEXT until ...
DIAG ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
DIAG AIO A OUTS CALIBRATED: NO
<SET SET> CAL EXIT
DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_1: 5V, NXCNC1, NOCAL
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
DIAG AIO AIN CALIBRATED: NO
<SET SET> CAL EXIT
DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2: 5V, NXCNC1, NOCAL
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_3: 5V, NXCNC1, NOCAL
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_4: 5V, NXCNC1, NOCAL
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Operating Instructions
115
6.13.5.2. Analog Output Signal Type and Range Selection
To select an output signal type (DC Voltage or current) and level for one output channel press:
DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO
SET> CAL EXIT
From the
AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU
(See Section 6.13.4.1)
DIAG ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
Continue pressing SET> until you reach the
output to be configured
DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_3: 5V, NXCNC1, NOCAL
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_3: RANGE: 5V
0.1V 1V 5V 10V CURR ENTR EXIT
These keys set
the signal level
and type of the
selected
channel
Pressing ENTR records
the new setting and
returns to the previous
menu.
Pressing EXIT ignores the
new setting and returns to
the previous menu.
04521C (DCN5731)
Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
116
6.13.5.3. Turning the Analog Output Over-Range Feature ON/OFF
In its default configuration a ± 5% over-range is available on each of the M200EH/EM’s analog output channels.
This over-range can be disabled if your recording device is sensitive to excess voltage or current.
NOTE:
Instruments with current range options installed on one or more of the outputs often
are delivered from the factory with the over-range feature turned OFF on those
channels.
To Turn the over-range feature on or off, press:
From the
AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU
(See Section 6.13.4.1)
DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 5V, NXCNC1, NOCAL
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 OVERRANGE: ON
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 RANGE: 5V
SET> EDIT EXIT
DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 OVERRANGE: ON
ON ENTR EXIT
DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 OVERRANGE: OFF
OFF ENTR EXIT
DIAG ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
Toggle this key
to turn the
Over-Range
feature
ON/OFF
Continue pressing SET> until you reach the
output to be configured
DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO
SET> CAL EXIT
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Operating Instructions
117
6.13.5.4. Adding a Recorder Offset to an Analog Output
Some analog signal recorders require that the zero signal is significantly different from the baseline of the
recorder in order to record slightly negative readings from noise around the zero point. This can be achieved in
the M200EH/EM by defining a zero offset, a small voltage (e.g., 10% of span).
To add a zero offset to a specific analog output channel, press:
EXAMPLE
From the
AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU
(See Section 6.13.4.1)
DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 5V, NXCNC1, NOCAL
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 REC OFS: 0 mV
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 OUTPUT: 5V
SET> EDIT EXIT
DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 REC OFS: 0 mV
+ 0000ENTREXIT
DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 REC OFS: -10 mV
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
DIAG ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
Toggle these
keys to set ther
value of the
desired offset.
Continue pressing SET> until ...
DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 REC OFS: -10 mV
–0010ENTR EXIT
Continue pressing SET> until you reach the
output to be configured
DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO
SET> CAL EXIT
04521C (DCN5731)
Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
118
6.13.5.5. Assigning an iDAS parameter to an Analog Output Channel
The M200EH/EM analog output channels can be assigned to output data from any of the 40+ available iDAS
parameters (see Table A-6 of Appendix A.5). The default settings for the four output channels are:
Table 6-22: Analog Output Data Type Default Settings
CHANNEL DEFAULT SETTING
PARAMETER A1 A2 A3 A43
DATA TYPE1 NXCNC1 NOCNC1 N2CNC1 NXCNC2
RANGE 0 - 5 VDC2
REC OFS 0 mVDC
AUTO CAL. ON
CALIBRATED NO
OUTPUT ON
SCALE 100 ppm
UPDATE 5 sec
1 See Table A-6 of M200EH/EM Appendix A for definitions of these iDAS data types
2 Optional current loop outputs are available for analog output channels A1-A3.
3 On analyzers with O2 sensor options installed, iDAS parameter O2CONC is assigned to output A4.
REPORTING GAS CONCENTRATIONS VIA THE M200EH/EM ANALOG OUTPUT CHANNELS
While the iDAS parameters available for output over via the analog channels A1 thru A4 include a vide variety
internal temperatures, gas flows and pressures as well as certain key internal voltage levels, most of the iDAS
parameters are related to gas concentration levels.
Two parameters exist for each gas type measured by the M200EH/EM. They are generally referred to as range
1 and range 2 (e.g. NXCNC1 and NXCNC2; NOCNC1 and NOCNC2; etc.). These take the place of the high
and low concentration ranges of previous versions of the analyzer software. Concentrations for each range are
computed using separate slopes and offsets which are also stored via separate iDAS parameters.
NOTE
If an analog output channel is set to report a gas concentration (e.g. NXCNC1; NOx
concentration; Range 1) it is generally a good idea to use 80% of the reporting range
for that channel for the span point calibration.
If both available parameters for a specific gas type are being reported (e.g. NXCNC1
and NXCNC2) separate Calibrations should be carried out for each parameter.
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Operating Instructions
119
The available gas concentration iDAS parameters for output via the M200EH/EM analog output channels are:
Table 6-23: Analog Output iDAS Parameters Related to Gas Concentration Data
REPORTING
RANGE
PARAMETER
NAME1 DESCRIPTION
NXCNC1 Concentration
NXSLP1 Slope
NXOFS1 Offset
NOx Range 1
(LOW)
NXZSC1 Concentration during calibration, prior to computing new slope and offset
NXCNC2 Concentration
NXSLP2 Slope
NXOFS2 Offset
NOx RANGE 2
(HIGH)
NXZSC2 Concentration during calibration, prior to computing new slope and offset
NOCNC1 Concentration
NOSLP1 Slope
NOOFS1 Offset
NO Range 1
(LOW)
NOZSC1 Concentration during calibration, prior to computing new slope and offset
NOCNC2 Concentration
NOSLP2 Slope
NOOFS2 Offset
NO RANGE 2
(HIGH)
NOZSC2 Concentration during calibration, prior to computing new slope and offset
N2CNC1 Concentration - Computed with data from NOx Range 1 and NO Range 1
NO2 Range 12
(LOW) N2ZSC1 Concentration during calibration, prior to computing new slope and offset
N2CNC2 Concentration - Computed with data from NOx Range 2 and NO Range 2
NO2 RANGE 22
(HIGH) N2ZSC2 Concentration during calibration, prior to computing new slope and offset
O2CONC3 Concentration
O2OFST3 Slope
O2SLPE3 Offset
O2 Range3
O2ZSCN 3 Concentration during calibration, prior to computing new slope and offset
1 Parameters are not listed in the order they appear on the iDAS list (see Table A-6 or Appendix A.5 for the proper order of the full list of
parameters)
2 Since NO2 values are computed rather than measured directly, no separate slope or offset exist.
3 Only available on instruments with O2 sensor options installed.
04521C (DCN5731)
Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
120
To assign an iDAS parameter to a specific analog output channel, press,
EXAMPLE
From the
AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU
(See Section 6.13.4.1)
DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 5V, NXCNC1, NOCAL
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 DATA: NOCNC1
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 OUTPUT: 5V
SET> EDIT EXIT
DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 DATA: STABIL
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
DIAG ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
Use these keys to move up
and down the list if available
iDAS parameters
(See Table A-6 of Appendix A.5)
Continue pressing SET> until ...
Continue pressing SET> until you reach the
output to be configured
DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO
SET> CAL EXIT
DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 DATA: NOCNC1
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 DATA: STABIL
<CH CH> INS DEL [1] ENTR EXIT
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Operating Instructions
121
6.13.5.6. Setting the Reporting Range Scale for an Analog Output
Once the iDAS parameter has been set, the top end of the scale must be selected. For concentration values
this should be equal to the expected maximum value for the application. The analog channel will scale its output
accordingly.
EXAMPLE:
IDAS parameter being output: NXCNC1
Maximum value expected: 800 ppm
Output range; 10 V
Output: 0 ppm......... 0.000 V
100 ppm...... 1.250 V
200 ppm...... 2.500 V
400 ppm...... 5.000 V
750 ppm...... 9.375 V
NOTE
Regardless of how the reporting range for an analog output channel is set, the
instrument will continue to measure NO, NO2 and NOx accurately for the entire physical
range of the instrument (See Section 6.13.3.2 for information on Physical range versus
reporting range)
Each output channel can be programmed for a separate gas with independent reporting range.
EXAMPLE:
A1 NXCNC1 (NOx Range 1) 0-1000 ppm NOX.
A1 NXCNC2 (NOx Range 2) 0-1250 ppm NOX.
A3 NOCNC1 (NOx Range 1) 0-500 ppm NO.
A4 N2CNC1 (NO2 Range 1) 0-750 ppm NO2.
NOTE:
While Range 1 for each gas type is often referred to as the LOW range and Range 2 as
the HIGH range, this is simply a naming convention. The upper limit for each range can
be set to any value.
EXAMPLE: A1 NXCNC1 (NOx Range 1) 0-1500 ppm NOX
A2 NXCNC2 (NOx Range 2) 0-1000 ppm NOX.
04521C (DCN5731)
Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
122
To set the reporting range for an analog output, press:
EXAMPLE
From the
AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU
(See Section 6.13.4.1)
DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 5V, NXCNC1, NOCAL
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 SCALE: 100.00 PPM
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 OUTPUT: 5V
SET> EDIT EXIT
DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 SCALE: 1250.00 PPM
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
DIAG ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
Use these
keys to
change the
range scale.
Continue pressing SET> until ...
Continue pressing SET> until you reach the
output to be configured
DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO
SET> CAL EXIT
DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 SCALE: [1]00.00 PPM
<CH CH> INS DEL [1] ENTR EXIT
DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 SCALE: 12[5]0. PPM
<CH CH> INS DEL [1] ENTR EXIT
RANGE SELECTION KEYPAD FUNCTIONS
KEY FUNCTION
<CH Moves the cursor one character to the left.
CH> Moves the cursor one character to the right.
INS Inserts a character before the cursor location.
DEL Deletes a character at the cursor location.
[?] Press this key to cycle through the range of numerals and characters available for insertion:
0-9; as well as “+” & “-“.
ENTR Accepts the new setting and returns to the previous menu.
EXIT Ignores the new setting and returns to the previous menu.
Some keys only appear as needed.
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Operating Instructions
123
6.13.5.7. Setting Data Update Rate for an Analog Output
The data update rate for the M200EH/EM analog outputs can be adjusted to match the requirements of the
specific iDAS parameter chosen for each channel. For instance, if the parameter NXCNC1 (NOx concentration;
Range 1) is chosen for channel A1 on an instrument set for dual gas measurement mode, it would be
meaningless to have an update rate of less than 30 seconds, since the NOx-No measurement cycle takes that
long to complete. On the other hand, if the channel was set to output the PMTDET voltage or the temperature of
the moly converter it might be useful to have output updated more frequently.
To change the update rate for an individual analog output channel, press:
EXAMPLE
From the
AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU
(See Section 6.13.4.1)
DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 5V, NXCNC1, NOCAL
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 UPDATE: 5 SEC
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 OUTPUT: 5V
SET> EDIT EXIT
DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 UPDATE: 30 SEC
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
DIAG ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
Toggle these
keys to set the
data update
rate for this
channel.
Continue pressing SET> until ...
DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 UPDATE: 30 SEC
030 ENTREXIT
Continue pressing SET> until you reach the
output to be configured
DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO
SET> CAL EXIT
DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 UPDATE: 5 SEC
005 ENTR EXIT
04521C (DCN5731)
Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
124
6.13.5.8. Turning an Analog Output On or Off
Each output can be temporarily turned off. When off no data is sent to the output. Electronically, it is still active,
there is simply no data so the signal level at the rear of the instrument will fall to zero.
To turn an individual analog output channel ON/OFF, press:
From the
AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU
(See Section 6.13.4.1)
DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 5V, NXCNC1, NOCAL
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 OUTPUT: ON
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 OUTPUT: 5V
SET> EDIT EXIT
DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 OUTPUT: ON
ON ENTR EXIT
DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 OUTPUT: OFF
OFF ENTR EXIT
DIAG ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
Toggle this key
to turn the
channel
ON/OFF
Continue pressing SET> until ...
Continue pressing SET> until you reach the
output to be configured
DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO
SET> CAL EXIT
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Operating Instructions
125
6.13.6. ANALOG OUTPUT CALIBRATION
Analog calibration needs to be carried out on first startup of the analyzer (performed in the factory as part of the
configuration process) or whenever re-calibration is required.
The analog outputs can be calibrated automatically or adjusted manually (see Section 6.13.5). During automatic
calibration the analyzer tells the output circuitry to generate a zero mV signal and high-scale point signal (usually
about 90% of chosen analog signal scale) then measures actual signal of the output. Any error at zero or high-
scale is corrected with a slope and offset.
Automatic calibration can be performed a group via the AOUTS CALIBRATION command, or individually by
using the CAL button located inside each output channels submenu. By default, the analyzer is configured so
that calibration of all four of the outputs can be initiated with the AOUTS CALIBRATION command.
To enable or disable the Auto-Cal feature for one output channel, press.
From the
AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU
(See Section 6.13.4.1)
DIAG ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_3: 5V, NXCNC1, NOCAL
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_3 AUTO CAL.:ON
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_3 AUTO CAL.:ON
ON ENTR EXIT
Toggle this key to
turn AUTO CAL
ON or OFF
(OFF = manual
calibration mode).
ENTR accepts
the new setting.
EXIT ignores the
new setting
Continue pressing SET> until ...
DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_3 RANGE: 5V
SET> EDIT EXIT
DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_3 AUTO CAL.:OFF
OFF ENTR EXIT
Continue pressing SET> until you reach the
output to be configured
DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO
SET> CAL EXIT
NOTE:
Channels with current loop output options cannot be calibrated automatically.
Outputs Configured for 0.1V full scale should always be calibrated manually.
04521C (DCN5731)
Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
126
6.13.6.1. Automatic Analog Output Calibration
To calibrate the outputs as a group with the AOUTS CALIBRATION command, press:
From the
AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU
(See Section 6.13.4.1)
Analyzer
automatically
calibrates all
channels for which
AUTO-CAL is turned
ON
If any of the channels
have not been calibrated
ot if at least one channel
has AUTO-CAL turned
OFF, this message will
read NO.
DIAG AIO AUTO CALIBRATING DATA_OUT_1
DIAG AIO AUTO CALIBRATING DATA_OUT_2
DIAG AIO NOT AUTO CAL. DATA_OUT_3
DIAG AIO AUTO CALIBRATING DATA_OUT_4
This message
appears when
AUTO-CAL is
Turned OFF for
a channel
DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED: YES
SET> CAL EXIT
DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO
SET> CAL EXIT
DIAG ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
NOTE:
Manual calibration should be used for the 0.1V range or in cases where the outputs
must be closely matched to the characteristics of the recording device.
To initiate an automatic calibration for an individual output channel, press:
From the
AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU
(See Section 6.13.4.1)
DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 5V, NXCNC1, NOCAL
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
Continue pressing SET> until ...
DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 CALIBRATED:NO
<SET SET> CAL EXIT
DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 RANGE: 5V
SET> EDIT EXIT
DIAG AIO AUTO CALIBRATING DATA_OUT_2
DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 CALIBRATED: YES
<SET SET> CAL EXIT
DIAG ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
Continue pressing SET> until you reach the
output to be configured
DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO
SET> CAL EXIT
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Operating Instructions
127
6.13.6.2. Manual Calibration of Analog Output configured for Voltage Ranges
For highest accuracy, the voltages of the analog outputs can be manually calibrated.
NOTE:
The menu for manually adjusting the analog output signal level will only appear if the
AUTO-CAL feature is turned off for the channel being adjusted (see Section 6.13.5.1)
Calibration is performed with a voltmeter connected across the output terminals (See Figure 6-14) and by
changing the actual output signal level using the front panel keys in 100, 10 or 1 count increments.
V
+DC Gnd
V OUT +
V OUT -
V IN +
V IN -
Recording
Device
ANALYZER
See Table 3-1 for
pin assignments
of Analog Out
connector on the
rear panel
Figure 6-6-14: Setup for Calibrating Analog Outputs
Table 6-24: Voltage Tolerances for Analog Output Calibration
FULL
SCALE
ZERO
TOLERANCE SPAN VOLTAGE SPAN
TOLERANCE
MINIMUM
ADJUSTMENT
(1 count)
0.1 VDC ±0.0005V 90 mV ±0.001V 0.02 mV
1 VDC ±0.001V 900 mV ±0.001V 0.24 mV
5 VDC ±0.002V 4500 mV ±0.003V 1.22 mV
10 VDC ±0.004V 4500 mV ±0.006V 2.44 mV
04521C (DCN5731)
Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
128
To manually adjust the signal levels of an analog output channel, press:
From the
AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU
(See Section 6.13.4.1)
DIAG ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
Continue pressing SET> until you reach the
output to be configured
DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 5V, NXCNC1, NOCAL
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
Continue pressing SET> until ...
DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 CALIBRATED:NO
<SET SET> CAL EXIT
DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 RANGE: 5V
SET> EDIT EXIT
DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 VOLT-Z: 0 mV
U100 UP10 UP DOWN DN10 D100 ENTR EXIT
DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 VOLT-S: 4500 mV
U100 UP10 UP DOWN DN10 D100 ENTR EXIT
DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 CALIBRATED: YES
<SET SET> CAL EXIT
These menu’s
only appear if
AUTO-CAL is
turned OFF
These keys increase / decrease
the analog output signal level
(not the value on the display)
by 100, 10 or 1 counts.
Continue adjustments until the
voltage measured at the output
of the analyzer and/or the input
of the recording device matches
the value in the upper right hand
corner of the display (within the
tolerances
listed in Table 6-24.
DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO
SET> CAL EXIT
6.13.6.3. Manual Calibration of Analog Outputs configured for Current Loop Ranges
The current loop output option (see Section 5.4) uses a small converter assembly to change the DC voltage
output by the standard voltage output to a current signal ranging between 0-20 mA. Since the exact current
increment per voltage count varies from converter to converter and from instrument to instrument, analog
outputs with this option installed cannot be calibrated automatically and must be adjusted manually.
Adjusting the signal zero and full scale values of the current loop output is done in a similar manner as manually
adjusting analog outputs configured for voltage output except that:
In this case calibration is performed with a current meter connected in series with the output circuitry
(See Figure 6-6-15).
Adjustments to the output are made using the front panel keys, also in 100, 10 or 1 count increments,
but the change in the voltage driving the converter assembly is displayed on the front panel.
As before, adjustment of the output is performed until the current reading of the meter reaches the
desired point (e.g. 2 mA, 4 mA, 20 mA, etc.)
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Operating Instructions
129
mA
IN OUT
V OUT +
V OUT -
I IN +
I IN -
Recording
Device
Analyzer
See Table 3-2 for
pin assignments of
the Analog Out
connector on the
rear panel.
Current
Meter
Figure 6-6-15: Setup for Calibrating Current Outputs
CAUTION
Do not exceed 60 V between current loop outputs and instrument ground.
If a current meter is not available, an alternative method for calibrating the current loop outputs is to connect a
250 1% resistor across the current loop output. Using a voltmeter, connected across the resistor, follow the
procedure above but adjust the output to the following values:
V
+DC Gnd
Recording
Device
V IN +
V IN -
ANALYZER
V OUT +
V OUT -
250 O
Volt
Meter
Figure 6-6-16: Alternative Setup for Calibrating Current Outputs
04521C (DCN5731)
Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
130
Table 6-25: Current Loop Output Calibration with Resistor
FULL SCALE VOLTAGE FOR 2-20 MA
(measured across 250Ω resistor)
VOLTAGE FOR 4-20 MA
(measured across 250Ω resistor)
0% 0.5 V 1.0 V
100% 5.0 V 5.0 V
To adjust the zero and span values of the current outputs, press:
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 CURR-Z: 13 mV
U100 UP10 UP DOWN DN10 D100 ENTR EXIT
DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 CURR-S: 4866 mV
U100 UP10 UP DOWN DN10 D100 ENTR EXIT
From the
AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU
(See Section 6.13.4.1)
DIAG ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
Continue pressing SET> until you reach the
output to be configured
DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2: CURR, NXCNC1, NOCAL
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
Continue pressing SET> until ...
DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 CALIBRATED:NO
<SET SET> CAL EXIT
DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 RANGE: CURR
SET> EDIT EXIT
DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 CURR-Z: 0 mV
U100 UP10 UP DOWN DN10 D100 ENTR EXIT
DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 CURR-S: 5000 mV
U100 UP10 UP DOWN DN10 D100 ENTR EXIT
DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 CALIBRATED: YES
<SET SET> CAL EXIT
Increase or decrease
the current output by
100, 10 or 1 counts.
The resulting change in
output voltage is
displayed in the upper
line.
Continue adjustments
until the correct current
is measured with the
current meter.
DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO
SET> CAL EXIT
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Operating Instructions
131
6.13.6.4. AIN Calibration
This is the sub-menu calibrates the analyzer’s A-to-D conversion circuitry. This calibration should only be
necessary after major repair such as a replacement of CPU, motherboard or power supplies.
To perform a AIN CALIBRATION, press:
From the
AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU
(See Section 6.13.4.1)
DIAG ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
Continue pressing SET> until ….
DIAG AIO AIN CALIBRATED: NO
<SET CAL EXIT
DIAG AIO CALIBRATING A/D ZERO
DIAG AIO CALIBRATING A/D SPAN
DIAG AIO AIN CALIBRATED: YES
<SET CAL EXIT
DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO
SET> CAL EXIT
04521C (DCN5731)
Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
132
6.13.7. OTHER DIAG MENU FUNCTIONS
6.13.7.1. Display Sequence Configuration
The model M200EH/EM analyzer allows the user to choose which gas concentration measurement and
reporting range is to be displayed in the concentration field on the instrument’s front panel display as well as
what order and how long each will appear before analyzer cycle to the next item on the display list.
NOTE
This M200EH/EM is constantly monitoring all of the gas measurements it is configured
to make regardless of which range is being displayed. This feature merely changes how
that display sequence occurs, not how the instrument makes measurements.
The software permits the user to choose from the following list of display values:
Table 6-26: M200EH/EM Available Concentration Display Values
DISPLAY
VALUE DESCRIPTION ASSOCIATED iDAS
PARAMETER
NOX NOx value computed with the slope and offset values for the currently selected
NOx range.1 --
NXL NOx value computed with the slope and offset values for NOx reporting range
1 (Low) NXCNC1
NXH NOx value computed with the slope and offset values for NOx reporting range
2 (High) NXCNC2
NO NO value of computed with the slope and offset values for the currently
selected NO range 1 --
NOL NO value computed with the slope and offset values for NO reporting range 1
(Low) NOCNC1
NOH NO value computed with the slope and offset values for NO reporting range 2
(High) NOCNC2
N2 NO2 value of computed with the slope and offset values for the currently
selected NO2 range 1 --
N2L NO2 value computed for with the slope and offset values for NOx reporting
range 1 (Low) & N0 reporting range 1 (Low) N2CNC1
N2H NO2 value computed for with the slope and offset values for NOx reporting
range 2 (High) & N0 reporting range 2 (High) N2CNC2
O2 O2 concentration value. O2CONC2
1 With the following exceptions this will be reporting range 1 (Low) for the appropriate gas type:
If the analyzer is in calibration mode, this will be the concentration value computed with the slope and offset for which ever range
is being calibrated.
If the instrument is in either E-Test or O-Test mode, this will be the value computed with the slope and offset values used by
those tests.
2 Only appears if O2 sensor option is installed.
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Operating Instructions
133
The default settings for this feature are:
Table 6-27: M200EH/EM Concentration Display Default Values
DISPLAY VALUE DISPLAY DURATION
NOX 4 sec.
NO 4 sec.
NO2 4 sec.
O2 4 sec.
1 Only appears if O2 sensor option is installed.
To change these settings, press:
INSERT adds a new entry on the display list
before the currently selected value.
Toggle PREV and NEXT keys until desired
display value appears (See Table 6-23).
SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL SETUP
SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT
SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU
COMM VARS DIAG ALRM EXIT
SETUP X.X ENTER PASSWORD:818
8 1 8 ENTREXIT
DIAG SIGNAL I/O
NEXT ENTR EXIT
Continue pressing NEXT until ...
DIAG DISPLAY SEQUENCE CONFIG.
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
DIAG DISP 1) NOX, 4 SEC
PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT ENTR EXIT
Moves back and forth
along existing list of
display values
DIAG DISP DISPLAY DATA: NOX
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
DIAG DISP DISPLAY DATA: N2H
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
DIAG DISP DISPLAY DURATION: 4 SEC
0 4 ENTR EXIT
Toggle these keys to set desired
display duration in seconds
ENTR Accepts the
new setting.
EXIT discards the
new setting.
04521C (DCN5731)
Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
134
To delete an entry in the display value list, press:
SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL SETUP
SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT
SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU
COMM VARS DIAG ALRM EXIT
SETUP X.X ENTER PASSWORD:818
8 1 8 ENTREXIT
DIAG SIGNAL I/O
NEXT ENTR EXIT
Continue pressing NEXT until ...
DIAG DISPLAY SEQUENCE CONFIG.
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
DIAG DISP 1) NOX, 4 SEC
PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT ENTR EXIT
Moves back and forth
along existing list of
display values DIAG DISP DELETE?
YES NO
DIAG DISP DELETED
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Operating Instructions
135
6.13.7.2. Optic Test
The optic test function tests the response of the PMT sensor by turning on an LED located in the cooling block of
the PMT (Fig. 10-15). The analyzer uses the light emitted from the LED to test its photo-electronic subsystem,
including the PMT and the current to voltage converter on the pre-amplifier board. To make sure that the
analyzer measures only the light coming from the LED, the analyzer should be supplied with zero air. The optic
test should produce a PMT signal of about 2000±1000 mV. To activate the electrical test press the following key
sequence.
SAMPLE RANGE = 500.0 PPB NOX=X.X
< TST TST > CAL SETUP
SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT
SETUP X.X
SECONDARY SETUP MENU
COMM VARS DIAG ALRM EXIT
DIAG SIGNAL I / O
PREV NEXT JUMP ENTR EXIT
DIAG OPTIC A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.
X
<TST TST> EXIT
SETUP X.X ENTER DIAG PASS: 818
8 1 8 ENTR EXIT
Press NEXT until…
DIAG OPTIC TEST
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
Press TST until…
DIAG ELEC PMT = 2751 MV NOX=X.X
<TST TST> EXIT
While the optic test is
activated, PMT should be
2000 mV ± 1000 mV
NOTE
This is a coarse test for functionality and not an accurate calibration tool. The resulting
PMT signal can vary significantly over time and also changes with low-level calibration.
04521C (DCN5731)
Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
136
6.13.7.3. Electrical Test
The electrical test function creates a current, which substitutes the PMT signal, and feeds it into the preamplifier
board. This signal is generated by circuitry on the pre-amplifier board itself and tests the filtering and
amplification functions of that assembly along with the A/D converter on the motherboard. It does not test the
PMT itself. The electrical test should produce a PMT signal of about 2000 ±1000 mV.
To activate the electrical test press the following keys.
SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL SETUP
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT
SETUP X.X
SECONDARY SETUP MENU
COMM VARS DIAG EXIT
DIAG SIGNAL I / O
PREV NEXT JUMP ENTR EXIT
DIAG ELEC A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X
<TST TST> EXIT
Press NEXT until…
DIAG ELECTRICAL TEST
PREV NEXT
ENTR EXIT
Press TST until…
DIAG ELEC PMT = 1732 MV NOX=X.X
<TST TST> EXIT
While the electrical test is
activated, PMT should equal:
2000 mV ± 1000 mV
SETUP X.X ENTER DIAG PASS: 818
8 1 8 ENTR EXIT
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Operating Instructions
137
6.13.7.4. Ozone Generator Override
This feature allows the user to manually turn the ozone generator off and on. This can be done before
disconnecting the generator, to prevent ozone from leaking out, or after a system restart if the user does not
want to wait for 30 minutes during warm-up time. Note that this is one of the two settings in the DIAG menu that
is retained after you exit the menu. To access this feature press the following keys. Also note that the ozone
generator does not turn on if the ozone flow conditions are out of specification (e.g., if there is no flow through
the system or the pump is broken).
SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL SETUP
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT
SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU
COMM VARS DIAG EXIT
SETUP X.X ENTER DIAG PASS: 818
8 1 8 ENTR EXIT
DIAG SIGNAL I / O
PREV NEXT JUMP ENTR EXIT
DIAG OZONE OZONE GEN OVERRIDE
OFF ENTR EXIT
Press NEXT until…
DIAG OZONE GEN OVERRIDE
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
Toggle this key to turn the O3
generator ON/OFF.
04521C (DCN5731)
Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
138
6.13.7.5. Flow Calibration
The flow calibration allows the user to adjust the values of the sample flow rates as they are displayed on the
front panel and reported through COM ports to match the actual flow rate measured at the sample inlet. This
does not change the hardware measurement of the flow sensors, only the software-calculated values.
To carry out this adjustment, connect an external, sufficiently accurate flow meter to the sample inlet (see
Chapter 11 for more details). Once the flow meter is attached and is measuring actual gas flow, press:
Adjust these values
until the displayed
flow rate equals the
flow rate being
measured by the
independent flow
meter.
SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL SETUP
SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG ACAL DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT
SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU
COMM VARS DIAG EXIT
Exit at
any time
to return
to main
the
SETUP
menu
DIAG SIGNAL I / O
NEXT ENTR EXIT
Exit returns
to the
previous menu
Repeat Pressing NEXT until . . .
DIAG FLOW CALIBRATION
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
DIAG FCAL
A
CTUAL FLOW: 480 CC / M
0 4 8 0 ENTR EXIT
ENTR accepts the
new value and
returns to the
previous menu
EXIT ignores the
new value and
returns to the
previous menu
Adjust these values until
the displayed flow rate
equals the flow rate being
measured by the
independent flow meter.
DIAG FLOW SENSOR TO CAL: SAMPLE
SAMPLE OZONE ENTR EXIT
Choose between
sample and ozone
flow sensors.
SETUP X.X ENTER DIAG PASS: 818
8 1 8 ENTR EXIT
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Operating Instructions
139
6.14. SETUP – ALRM: USING THE OPTIONAL GAS
CONCENTRATION ALARMS (OPT 67)
The optional alarm relay outputs (Option 67) are installed includes two concentration alarms Each alarm has a
user settable limit, and is associated with an opto-isolated TTL relay accessible via the status output connector
on the instrument’s back panel (see Section 6.15.1.1). If the concentration measured by the instrument rises
above that limit, the alarm‘s status output relay is closed NO2.
The default settings for ALM1 and ALM2 are:
Table 6-28: Concentration Alarm Default Settings
ALARM STATUS LIMIT SET POINT1 OUTPUT RELAY
DESIGNATION
ALM1 Disabled 100 ppm 133.9 mg/m3 AL2
ALM2 Disabled 300 ppm 401.6 mg/m3 AL3
1 Set points listed are for PPM. Should the reporting range units of measure be changed (see Section 6.13.4.5) the
analyzer will automatically scale the set points to match the new range unit setting.
NOTE
To prevent the concentration alarms from activating during span calibration operations
make sure to press CAL or CALS button prior to introducing span gas into the analyzer.
To enable either of the concentration alarms and set the Limit points, press:
ENTR key accepts the
new settings
EXIT key ignores the new
settings
SETUP X.
A
LARM 1 LIMIT: 200,00 PPM
0 1 0 0 .0 0 ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X
A
LARM MENU
ALM1 ALM2 EXIT
SETUP X.
A
LARM 1 LIMIT: OFF
OFF ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT
SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU
COMM VARS DIAG ALRM EXIT
SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL SETUP
Toggle these keys to
cycle through the
available character set:
0-9
SETUP X.
A
LARM 1 LIMIT: ON
ON ENTR EXIT
04521C (DCN5731)
Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
140
6.15. REMOTE OPERATION OF THE ANALYZER
6.15.1. REMOTE OPERATION USING THE EXTERNAL DIGITAL I/O
6.15.1.1. Status Outputs
The status outputs report analyzer conditions via optically isolated NPN transistors, which sink up to 50 mA of
DC current. These outputs can be used interface with devices that accept logic-level digital inputs, such as
programmable logic controllers (PLC’s). Each Status bit is an open collector output that can withstand up to 40
VDC. All of the emitters of these transistors are tied together and available at D.
NOTE
Most PLC’s have internal provisions for limiting the current that the input will draw from
an external device. When connecting to a unit that does not have this feature, an
external dropping resistor must be used to limit the current through the transistor
output to less than 50 mA. At 50 mA, the transistor will drop approximately 1.2V from
its collector to emitter.
The status outputs are accessed through a 12 pin connector on the analyzer’s rear panel labeled STATUS (see
Figure 6-17). The function of each pin is defined in Table 6–29
COMMON
EMITTERS
STATUS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 D +
SYSTEM OK
HIGH RANGE
CONC VALID
ZERO CAL
SPAN CAL
DIAG MODE
LOW SPAN
GROUND
Figure 6-6-17: Status Output Connector
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Operating Instructions
141
Table 6-29: Status Output Pin Assignments
CONNECTO
R PIN STATUS CONDITION (ON=CONDUCTING)
1 SYSTEM OK ON if no faults are present.
2 CONC VALID ON if concentration measurement is valid, OFF when invalid.
3 HIGH RANGE ON if unit is in high range of any AUTO range mode.
4 ZERO CAL ON whenever the instrument is in ZERO calibration mode.
5 SPAN CAL ON whenever the instrument is in SPAN calibration mode.
6 DIAG MODE ON whenever the instrument is in DIAGNOSTIC mode.
7 LOW RANGE ON if unit is in low range of any AUTO range mode.
8 Unused.
D EMITTER BUS
The emitters of the transistors on pins 1-8 are bussed together. For
most applications, this pin should be connected to the circuit ground
of the receiving device.
+ DC POWER + 5 VDC, 30 mA maximum (combined rating with Control Inputs).
DIGITAL
GROUND The ground from the analyzer’s internal, 5/±15 VDC power supply.
6.15.1.2. Control Inputs
Control inputs allow the user to remotely initiate ZERO and SPAN calibration modes are provided through a 10-
pin connector labeled CONTROL IN on the analyzer’s rear panel. These are opto-isolated, digital inputs that are
activated when a 5 VDC signal from the “U” pin is connected to the respective input pin.
Table 6-30: Control Input Pin Assignments
INPUT STATUS CONDITION WHEN ENABLED
A EXTERNAL ZERO
CAL
Zero calibration mode is activated. The mode field of the display
will read ZERO CAL R.
B EXTERNAL SPAN
CAL
Span calibration mode is activated. The mode field of the display
will read SPAN CAL R.
C EXTERNAL LOW
SPAN CAL
Low span (mid-point) calibration mode is activated. The mode field
of the display will read LO CAL R.
D, E & F Unused
DIGITAL GROUND Provided to ground an external device (e.g., recorder).
U DC power for Input
pull ups
Input for +5 VDC required to activate inputs A - F. This voltage can
be taken from an external source or from the “+” pin.
+ Internal +5V Supply Internal source of +5V which can be used to activate inputs when
connected to pin U.
04521C (DCN5731)
Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
142
There are two methods to activate control inputs. The internal +5V available from the “+” pin is the most
convenient method (see Figure 6-18). However, to ensure that these inputs are truly isolated, a separate,
external 5 VDC power supply should be used (see Figure 6-19).
CONTROL IN
A B C D E F U +
LOW SPAN
ZERO
SPAN
Figure 6-6-18: Control Inputs with local 5 V power supply
LOW SPAN
SPAN
-
CONTROL IN
+
5 VDC Power
Supply
ZERO
A B C D E F U +
Figure 6-6-19: Control Inputs with external 5 V power supply
6.15.2. REMOTE OPERATION USING THE EXTERNAL SERIAL I/O
6.15.2.1. Terminal Operating Modes
The Model 200EH/EM can be remotely configured, calibrated or queried for stored data through the serial ports.
As terminals and computers use different communication schemes, the analyzer supports two communicate
modes specifically designed to interface with these two types of devices.
Computer mode is used when the analyzer is connected to a computer with a dedicated
interface program such as APICOM. More information regarding APICOM can be found in later
in this section or on the Teledyne Instruments website at http://www.teledyne-
api.com/software/apicom/.
Interactive mode is used with a terminal emulation programs such as HyperTerminal or a
“dumb” computer terminal. The commands that are used to operate the analyzer in this mode
are listed in Table 6-31 and in Appendix A-6.
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Operating Instructions
143
6.15.2.2. Help Commands in Terminal Mode
Table 6-31: Terminal Mode Software Commands
COMMAND FUNCTION
Control-T Switches the analyzer to terminal mode (echo, edit). If mode flags 1 & 2 are OFF, the interface
can be used in interactive mode with a terminal emulation program.
Control-C Switches the analyzer to computer mode (no echo, no edit).
CR
(carriage return)
A carriage return is required after each command line is typed into the terminal/computer. The
command will not be sent to the analyzer to be executed until this is done. On personal
computers, this is achieved by pressing the ENTER key.
BS
(backspace) Erases one character to the left of the cursor location.
ESC
(escape) Erases the entire command line.
? [ID] CR
This command prints a complete list of available commands along with the definitions of their
functionality to the display device of the terminal or computer being used. The ID number of
the analyzer is only necessary if multiple analyzers are on the same communications line, such
as the multi-drop setup.
Control-C Pauses the listing of commands.
Control-P Restarts the listing of commands.
6.15.2.3. Command Syntax
Commands are not case-sensitive and all arguments within one command (i.e. ID numbers, keywords, data
values, etc.) must be separated with a space character.
All Commands follow the syntax:
X [ID] COMMAND <CR>
Where
X is the command type (one letter) that defines the type of command. Allowed designators
are listed in Table 6-31 and Appendix A-6.
[ID] is the analyzer identification number (see Section 6.11.1.). Example: the Command “? 200”
followed by a carriage return would print the list of available commands for the revision of
software currently installed in the instrument assigned ID Number 200.
COMMAND is the command designator: This string is the name of the command being issued (LIST,
ABORT, NAME, EXIT, etc.). Some commands may have additional arguments that define
how the command is to be executed. Press ? <CR> or refer to Appendix A-6 for a list of
available command designators.
<CR> is a carriage return. All commands must be terminated by a carriage return (usually
achieved by pressing the ENTER key on a computer).
Table 6-32: Command Types
COMMAND COMMAND TYPE
C Calibration
D Diagnostic
L Logon
T Test measurement
V Variable
W Warning
04521C (DCN5731)
Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
144
6.15.2.4. Data Types
Data types consist of integers, hexadecimal integers, floating-point numbers, Boolean expressions and text
strings.
Integer data are used to indicate integral quantities such as a number of records, a filter length, etc.
They consist of an optional plus or minus sign, followed by one or more digits. For example, +1, -12,
123 are all valid integers.
Hexadecimal integer data are used for the same purposes as integers. They consist of the two
characters “0x,” followed by one or more hexadecimal digits (0-9, A-F, a-f), which is the ‘C’ programming
language convention. No plus or minus sign is permitted. For example, 0x1, 0x12, 0x1234abcd are all
valid hexadecimal integers.
Floating-point numbers are used to specify continuously variable values such as temperature set points,
time intervals, warning limits, voltages, etc. They consist of an optional plus or minus sign, followed by
zero or more digits, an optional decimal point, and zero or more digits. (At least one digit must appear
before or after the decimal point.) Scientific notation is not permitted. For example, +1.0, 1234.5678, -
0.1, 1 are all valid floating-point numbers.
Boolean expressions are used to specify the value of variables or I/O signals that may assume only two
values. They are denoted by the keywords ON and OFF.
Text strings are used to represent data that cannot be easily represented by other data types, such as
data channel names, which may contain letters and numbers. They consist of a quotation mark,
followed by one or more printable characters, including spaces, letters, numbers, and symbols, and a
final quotation mark. For example, “a”, “1”, “123abc”, and “()[]<>” are all valid text strings. It is not
possible to include a quotation mark character within a text string.
Some commands allow you to access variables, messages, and other items, such as iDAS data
channels, by name. When using these commands, you must type the entire name of the item; you
cannot abbreviate any names.
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Operating Instructions
145
6.15.2.5. Status Reporting
Reporting of status messages as an audit trail is one of the three principal uses for the RS-232 interface (the
other two being the command line interface for controlling the instrument and the download of data in electronic
format). You can effectively disable the reporting feature by setting the interface to quiet mode (see Section
6.11.8., Table 6-14).
Status reports include iDAS data (when reporting is enabled), warning messages, calibration and diagnostic
status messages. Refer to Appendix A-3 for a list of the possible messages, and this section for information on
controlling the instrument through the RS-232 interface.
GENERAL MESSAGE FORMAT
All messages from the instrument (including those in response to a command line request) are in the format:
X DDD:HH:MM [Id] MESSAGE<CRLF>
Where
X is a command type designator, a single character indicating the message type, as
shown in the Table 6-31.
DDD:HH:MM is the time stamp, the date and time when the message was issued. It consists of the
Day-of-year (DDD) as a number from 1 to 366, the hour of the day (HH) as a number
from 00 to 23, and the minute (MM) as a number from 00 to 59.
[ID] is the analyzer ID, a number with 1 to 4 digits.
MESSAGE is the message content that may contain warning messages, test measurements, iDAS
reports, variable values, etc.
<CRLF> is a carriage return / line feed pair, which terminates the message.
The uniform nature of the output messages makes it easy for a host computer to parse them into an easy
structure. Keep in mind that the front panel display does not give any information on the time a message was
issued, hence it is useful to log such messages for trouble-shooting and reference purposes. Terminal
emulation programs such as HyperTerminal can capture these messages to text files for later review.
6.15.2.6. Remote Access by Modem
The M200EH/EM can be connected to a modem for remote access. This requires a cable between the
analyzer’s COM port and the modem, typically a DB-9F to DB-25M cable (available from Teledyne Instruments
with part number WR0000024).
Once the cable has been connected, check to make sure the DTE-DCE is in the correct position. Also make
sure the M200EH/EM COM port is set for a baud rate that is compatible with the modem, which needs to
operate with an 8-bit word length with one stop bit.
The first step is to turn on the MODEM ENABLE communication mode (Mode 64, Section 6.11.8). Once this is
completed, the appropriate setup command line for your modem can be entered into the analyzer. The default
setting for this feature is
AT Y0 &D0 &H0 &I0 S0=2 &B0 &N6 &M0 E0 Q1 &W0
This string can be altered to match your modem’s initialization and can be up to 100 characters long.
04521C (DCN5731)
Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
146
NOTE:
If Hessen Protocol Mode is active for a COMM port, operation via a modem is not
available on that port.
To change this setting press:
SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU
COMM VARS DIAG ALRM EXIT
SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT
SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL SETUP
SETUP X.X COM1 MODEM INIT:AT Y &D &H
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
SETUP X.X COM1 MODEM INIT:[A]T Y &D &H
<CH CH> INS DEL [A] ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X COM1 MODE:0
SET> EDIT EXIT
SETUP X.X COM1 BAUD RATE:19200
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
ENTR accepts the
new string and returns
to the previous menu.
EXIT ignores the new
string and returns to
the previous menu.
The <CH and CH> keys move
the [ ] cursor left and right
along the text string
The INS key
inserts a character
before the cursor
location.
Press the [?]
key repeatedly to cycle through the
available character set:
0-9
A-Z
space ’ ~ ! # $ % ^ & * ( ) - _ =
+[ ] { } < >\ | ; : , . / ?
The DEL key
deletes a character
at the cursor
location.
SETUP X.X COMMUNICATIONS MENU
ID COM1 COM2 EXIT
Select which
COM Port is
tested
EXIT returns
to the
previous
menu
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Operating Instructions
147
To Initialize the modem press:
Select which
COM Port is
tested
SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU
COMM VARS DIAG ALRM EXIT
SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT
SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL SETUP
SETUP X.X COMMUNICATIONS MENU
ID COM1 COM2 EXIT
EXIT returns
to the
previous
menu
SETUP X.X COM1 MODEM INIT:AT Y &D
&H
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
SETUP X.X COM1 INITIALIZE MODEM
<SET SET> INIT EXIT
SETUP X.X COM1 MODE:0
SET> EDIT EXIT
SETUP X.X COM1 BAUD RATE:19200
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
EXIT returns to the
Communications Menu.
SETUP X.X INITIALIZING MODEM
<SET SET> INIT EXIT
6.15.2.7. COM Port Password Security
In order to provide security for remote access of the M200EH/EM, a LOGON feature can be enabled to require a
password before the instrument will accept commands. This is done by turning on the SECURITY MODE (see
Section 6.11.8). Once the SECURITY MODE is enabled, the following items apply.
A password is required before the port will respond or pass on commands.
If the port is inactive for one hour, it will automatically logoff, which can also be achieved with the
LOGOFF command.
Three unsuccessful attempts to log on with an incorrect password will cause subsequent logins to be
disabled for 1 hour, even if the correct password is used.
If not logged on, the only active command is the '?' request for the help screen.
The following messages will be returned at logon:
o LOGON SUCCESSFUL - Correct password given
o LOGON FAILED - Password not given or incorrect
o LOGOFF SUCCESSFUL - Connection terminated successfully
To log on to the M200EH/EM analyzer with SECURITY MODE feature enabled, type:
LOGON 940331
940331 is the default password. To change the default password, use the variable RS232_PASS issued as
follows:
V RS232_PASS=NNNNNN
Where N is any numeral between 0 and 9.
04521C (DCN5731)
Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
148
6.15.2.8. APICOM Remote Control Program
APICOM is an easy-to-use, yet powerful interface program that allows to access and control any of Teledyne
Instruments’ main line of ambient and stack-gas instruments from a remote connection through direct cable,
modem or Ethernet. Running APICOM, a user can:
Establish a link from a remote location to the M200EH/EM through direct cable connection via RS-232
modem or Ethernet.
View the instrument’s front panel and remotely access all functions that could be accessed when
standing in front of the instrument.
Remotely edit system parameters and set points.
Download, view, graph and save data for predictive diagnostics or data analysis.
Retrieve, view, edit, save and upload iDAS configurations.
Check on system parameters for trouble-shooting and quality control.
APICOM is very helpful for initial setup, data analysis, maintenance and trouble-shooting. Figure 6-20 shows
examples of APICOM’s main interface, which emulates the look and functionality of the instruments actual front
panel
Figure 6-6-20: APICOM Remote Control Program Interface
APICOM is included free of cost with the analyzer and the latest versions can also be downloaded for free at
http://www.teledyne-api.com/software/apicom/.
6.15.3. ADDITIONAL COMMUNICATIONS DOCUMENTATION
Table 6-33: Serial Interface Documents
Interface / Tool Document Title Part Number Available Online*
APICOM APICOM User Manual 039450000 YES
Multi-drop RS-232 Multi-drop Documentation 021790000 YES
DAS Manual Detailed description of the iDAS. 028370000 YES
* These documents can be downloaded at http://www.teledyne-api.com/manuals/
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Operating Instructions
149
6.15.4. USING THE M200EH/EM WITH A HESSEN PROTOCOL NETWORK
6.15.4.1. General Overview of Hessen Protocol
The Hessen protocol is a multidrop protocol, in which several remote instruments are connected via a common
communications channel to a host computer. The remote instruments are regarded as slaves of the host
computer. The remote instruments are unaware that they are connected to a multidrop bus and never initiate
messages. They only respond to commands from the host computer and only when they receive a command
containing their own unique ID number.
The Hessen protocol is designed to accomplish two things: to obtain the status of remote instruments, including
the concentrations of all the gases measured; and to place remote instruments into zero or span calibration or
measure mode. API’s implementation supports both of these principal features.
The Hessen protocol is not well defined, therefore while API’s application is completely compatible with the
protocol itself, it may be different from implementations by other companies.
The following subsections describe the basics for setting up your instrument to operate over a Hessen Protocol
network. For more detailed information as well as a list of host computer commands and examples of command
and response message syntax, download the Manual Addendum for Hessen Protocol from the Teledyne
Instruments’ web site: http://www.teledyne-api.com/manuals/index.asp .
6.15.4.2. Hessen COMM Port Configuration
Hessen protocol requires the communication parameters of the M200EH/EM’s COMM ports to be set differently
than the standard configuration as shown in the table below.
Table 6-34: RS-232 Communication Parameters for Hessen Protocol
Parameter Standard Hessen
Data Bits 8 7
Stop Bits 1 2
Parity None Even
Duplex Full Half
To change the rest of the COMM port parameters and modes (see Section 6.11.8).
To change the baud rate of the M200EH/EM’s COMM ports (see Section 6.11.9.)
NOTES
Make sure that the communication parameters of the host computer are properly
set.
The instrument software has a 200 ms. latency before it responds to commands
issued by the host computer. Activating Hessen Protocol.
Operation via modem is not available over any COMM port on which HESSEN protocol
is active.
04521C (DCN5731)
Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
150
The first step in configuring the M200EH/EM to operate over a Hessen protocol network is to activate the
Hessen mode for COMM ports and configure the communication parameters for the port(s) appropriately.
Press:
SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT
SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL SETUP
SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU
COMM VARS DIAG ALRM EXIT
SETUP X.X COMMUNICATIONS MENU
ID COM1 COM2 EXIT
SETUP X.X COM1 MODE:0
SET> EDIT EXIT
Continue pressing next until …
Select which COMM
port to configure
SETUP X.X COM1 QUIET MODE: OFF
NEXT OFF ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X COM1 HESSEN PROTOCOL : ON
PREV NEXT ON ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X COM1 HESSEN PROTOCOL : OFF
PREV NEXT OFF ENTR EXIT
ENTR key accepts the
new settings
EXIT key ignores the new
settings
The sum of the mode
IDs of the selected
modes is displayed
here
SETUP X.X COM1 E,7,1 MODE: ON
PREV NEXT ON ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X COM1 E,7,1 MODE: OFF
PREV NEXT OFF ENTR EXIT
Toggle OFF/ON keys
to change
activate/deactivate
selected mode.
Repeat the
entire process to
set up the
COM2 port
6.15.4.3. Selecting a Hessen Protocol Type
Currently there are two version of Hessen Protocol in use. The original implementation, referred to as TYPE 1,
and a more recently released version, TYPE 2 that has more flexibility when operating with instruments that can
measure more than one type of gas. For more specific information about the difference between TYPE 1and
TYPE 2 download the Manual Addendum for Hessen Protocol from the Teledyne Instruments’ web site:
http://www.teledyne-api.com/manuals/index.asp .
To select a Hessen Protocol Type press:
SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU
COMM VARS DIAG ALRM EXIT
SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT
SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL SETUP
SETUP X.X COMMUNICATIONS MENU
ID HESN COM1 COM2
EXIT
SETUP X. HESSEN VARIATION: TYPE 1
SET> EDIT EXIT
SETUP X.X HESSEN VARIATION: TYPE 1
TYE1 TYPE 2 ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X HESSEN VARIATION: TYPE 2
PREV NEXT OFF ENTR EXIT
Press to change
protocol type.
ENTR key accepts the
new settings
EXIT key ignores the new
settings
NOTE
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Operating Instructions
151
While Hessen Protocol Mode can be activated independently for COM1 and COM2, The
TYPE selection affects both Ports.
6.15.4.4. Setting The Hessen Protocol Response Mode
The Teledyne Instruments’ implementation of Hessen Protocol allows the user to choose one of several different
modes of response for the analyzer.
Table 6-28: M200EH/EM Hessen Protocol Response Modes
MODE ID MODE DESCRIPTION
CMD This is the Default Setting. Reponses from the instrument are encoded as the traditional command format.
Style and format of responses depend on exact coding of the initiating command.
BCC Responses from the instrument are always delimited with <STX> (at the beginning of the response, <ETX>
(at the end of the response followed by a 2 digit Block Check Code (checksum), regardless of the command
encoding.
TEXT Responses from the instrument are always delimited with <CR> at the beginning and the end of the string,
regardless of the command encoding.
To Select a Hessen response mode, press:
SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU
COMM VARS DIAG ALRM EXIT
SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS : 818
8 1 8 ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT
SAMPLE RANGE = 500.000 PPB SO2 =XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL SETUP
SETUP X.X HESSEN RESPONSE MODE :CMD
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
SETUP X.X COMMUNICATIONS MENU
ID HESN COM1 COM2 EXIT
SETUP X.X HESSEN VARIATION: TYPE 1
SET> EDIT EXIT
SETUP X.X HESSEN RESPONSE MODE :CMD
BCC TEXT EDIT ENTR EXIT
Press to
change
response
mode.
ENTR key accepts the
new settings
EXIT key ignores the new
settings
04521C (DCN5731)
Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
152
6.15.4.5. Hessen Protocol Gas ID
Since the M200EH/EM measures both NO, NO2 NO and O2 (if the optional sensor is installed), all of these
gases are listed in the Hessen protocol gas list. In its default state the Hessen protocol firmware assigns each of
these gases a Hessen ID number and actively reports all of them even if the instrument is only measuring one
(see MEASURE_MODE, Section 6.12) .
To change or edit these settings press:
KEY FUNCTION
<PREV Moves to next gas entry in list
NEXT> Moves the cursor previous gas entry in list
INS Inserts a new gas entry into the list.
DEL Deletes the >>>>>.
ENTR Accepts the new setting and returns to the previous menu.
EXIT Ignores the new setting and returns to the previous menu.
SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU
COMM VARS DIAG ALRM EXIT
SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXI
SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL SETUP
SETUP X.X HESSEN RESPONSE MODE :CMD
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
SETUP X.X COMMUNICATIONS MENU
ID HESN COM1 COM2 EXIT
SETUP X.X HESSEN VARIATION: TYPE 1
SET> EDIT EXIT
SETUP X.X HESSEN GAS LIST
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
ENTR key accepts
the new settings
EXIT key ignores
the new settings
SETUP X.X NOX, 211, REPORTED
<PREV NEXT> INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT
SETUP X.X GAS TYPE NOX
<PREV NEXT> ENTR EXIT
Use the PREV & NEXT keys to cycle
through available gases
SETUP X.X GAS ID: 211
0 0 0 ENTR EXIT
Toggle these keys to change the gas ID
number for the chosen gas.
SETUP X.X REPORTED : ON
ON ENTR EXIT
Toggle this key to switch reporting Between
ON and OFF
Use the PREV & NEXT keys to cycle
existing entries in Hessen gas list
Table 6-35: M200EH/EM Hessen GAS ID List
GAS DEFAULT HESSEN GAS ID
NOx 211
NO 212
NO2 213
O2 214
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Operating Instructions
153
6.15.4.6. Setting Hessen Protocol Status Flags
Teledyne Instruments’ implementation of Hessen protocols includes a set of status bits that are included in
responses to inform the host computer of the M200EH/EM’s condition. The default settings for these bit/flags
are:
Table 6-36: Default Hessen Status Bit Assignments
NOTES:
It is possible to assign more than one flag to the same Hessen status bit. This allows
the grouping of similar flags, such as all temperature warnings, under the same status
bit.
Be careful not to assign conflicting flags to the same bit as each status bit will be
triggered if any of the assigned flags is active.
STATUS FLAG NAME DEFAULT BIT ASSIGNMENT
WARNING FLAGS
SAMPLE FLOW WARNING 0001
OZONE FLOW WARNING 0002
RCELL PRESS WARN 0004
BOX TEMP WARNING 0008
RCELL TEMP WARNING 0010
PMT TEMP WARNING 0040
CONVERTER TEMP WARNING 0080
WARMUP MODE 1000
INVALID CONC 8000
OPERATIONAL FLAGS
In Manual Calibration Mode 0200
In O2 Calibration Mode 0400
In Zero Calibration Mode 0400
In Low Span Calibration Mode 0800
In Span Calibration Mode 0800
UNITS OF MEASURE FLAGS
UGM 0000
MGM 2000
PPB 4000
PPM 6000
SPARE/UNUSED BITS 0020, 0100
UNASSIGNED FLAGS
Box Temp Warning Front Panel Warning
System Reset Analog Cal Warning
Rear Board Not Detected Cannot Dyn Zero
Relay Board Warning Cannot Dyn Span
Manifold Temp Warn O2 Cell Temp Warn
Ozone Gen Off AutoZero Warning
Conc Alarm 1 Conc Alarm 2
HVPS Warning In MP Calibration Mode
04521C (DCN5731)
Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
154
To assign or reset the status flag bit assignments, press:
SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU
COMM VARS DIAG ALRM EXIT
SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT
SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL SETUP
SETUP X. HESSEN STATUS FLAGS
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
SETUP X.X COMMUNICATIONS MENU
ID HESN COM1 COM2 EXIT
SETUP X. PMT DET WARNING: 0002
PREV NEXT EDIT PRNT EXIT
Repeat pressing SET> until …
SETUP X. SYSTEM RESET: 0000
PREV NEXT EDIT PRNT EXIT
The <CH and
CH> keys move
the [ ] cursor left
and right along
the bit string.
Repeat pressing NEXT or PREV until the desired
message flag is displayed. See Table 6-29.
For example …
ENTR key accepts the
new settings
EXIT key ignores the new
settings
SETUP X. SYSTEM RESET: [0]000
<CH CH> [0] ENTR EXIT
Press the [?] key repeatedly to cycle through the available character set: 0-9
Note: Values of A-F can also be set but are meaningless.
6.15.4.7. Instrument ID Code
Each instrument on a Hessen Protocol network must have a unique ID code. The M200EH/EM is programmed
with a default ID code of 200. To change this code see Section 6.11.1
User Notes:
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Calibration Procedures
155
7. CALIBRATION PROCEDURES
This chapter describes calibration procedures for the M200EH/EM. All of the methods described here can be
initiated and controlled through the front panel or the COM ports.
NOTE
CALIBRATION vs. CALIBRATION CHECK
Pressing the ENTR key during the following procedures re-calculates the stored
values for OFFSET and SLOPE and alters the instrument’s calibration.
If you wish to perform a calibration check, DO NOT press the ENTR button.
7.1. CALIBRATION PREPARATIONS
7.1.1. REQUIRED EQUIPMENT, SUPPLIES, AND EXPENDABLES
Calibration of the Model 200EH/EM analyzer requires a certain amount of equipment and supplies. These
include, but are not limited to, the following:
Zero-air source (defined in Section 7.1.2).
Span gas source (defined in Section 7.1.3).
Gas lines - all gas line materials should be stainless steel or Teflon-type (PTFE or FEP). High
concentration NO gas transported over long distances may require stainless steel to avoid oxidation of
NO with O2 diffusing into the tubing.
A recording device such as a strip-chart recorder and/or data logger (optional). For electronic
documentation, the internal data acquisition system can be used.
7.1.2. ZERO AIR
Zero air is similar in chemical composition to the Earth’s atmosphere but scrubbed of all components that might
affect the analyzer’s readings. For NOX measuring devices, zero air should be devoid of NOX and large amounts
of CO2, NH3 and water vapor. Water vapor and moderate amounts of NH3 can be removed using a sample gas
conditioner (Section 5.10).
Devices such as the API Model 701 zero air generator that condition ambient air by drying and removal of
pollutants are available. We recommend this type of device for generating zero air. Please contact our sales
department for more information on this.
04521C (DCN5731)
Calibration Procedures Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
156
7.1.3. SPAN CALIBRATION GAS STANDARDS & TRACEABILITY
NOTE
We strongly recommend that span calibration is carried out with NO span gas, although
it is possible to use NO2 or a gas phase titration (GPT) system.
Quick span checks may be done with either NO, NO2 or a mixture of NO and NO2 as is
used in GPT.
Span gas is specifically mixed to match the chemical composition of the gas being measured at about 80% of
the desired full measurement range. For example, if the measurement range is 120 ppm, the span gas should
have an NO concentration of about 96 ppm.
Span gases should be certified to a specific accuracy to ensure accurate calibration of the analyzer. Typical gas
accuracy for NOX gases is 1 or 2%. NO standards should be mixed in nitrogen (to prevent oxidation of NO to
NO2 over time), whereas NO2 standards should be mixed in air (to keep it oxidized).
For oxygen measurements, we recommend s reference gas of 21% O2 in N2. the user can either utilize the NOX
standards (if mixed in air). For quick checks. ambient air can be used at an assumed concentration of 20.8%.
Generally, O2 concentration in dry, ambient air varies by less than 1%.
7.1.3.1. Traceability
All equipment used to produce calibration gases should be verified against standards of the National Institute for
Standards and Technology (NIST). To ensure NIST traceability, we recommend to acquire cylinders of working
gas that are certified to be traceable to NIST standard reference materials (SRM). These are available from a
variety of commercial sources.
Table 7-1: NIST-SRM's Available for Traceability of NOx Calibration Gases
NIST-SRM4 TYPE NOMINAL
CONCENTRATION
2627a
2628a
2629a
Nitric Oxide (NO) in N2
Nitric Oxide (NO) in N2
Nitric Oxide (NO) in N2
5 ppm
10 ppm
20 ppm
1683b
1684b
1685b
1686b
1687b
Nitric Oxide (NO) in N2
Nitric Oxide (NO) in N2
Nitric Oxide (NO) in N2
Nitric Oxide (NO) in N2
Nitric Oxide (NO) in N2
50 ppm
100 ppm
250 ppm
5000 ppm
1000 ppm
2630
2631a
2635
2636a
Nitric Oxide (NO) in N2
Nitric Oxide (NO) in N2
Nitric Oxide (NO) in N2
Nitric Oxide (NO) in N2
1500 ppm
3000 ppm
800 ppm
2000 ppm
2656
2660a
Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx) in Air
Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx) in Air
2500 ppm
100 ppm
2659a Oxygen in Nitrogen (O2) 21 mol %
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Calibration Procedures
157
7.1.4. DATA RECORDING DEVICES
A strip chart recorder, data acquisition system or digital data acquisition system should be used to record data
from the serial or analog outputs of the M200EH/EM. If analog readings are used, the response of the recording
system should be checked against a NIST traceable voltage source or meter. Data recording devices should be
capable of bi-polar operation so that negative readings can be recorded. For electronic data recording, the
M200EH/EM provides an internal data acquisition system (iDAS), which is described in detail in Section 6.7.
APICOM, a remote control program, is also provided as a convenient and powerful tool for data handling,
download, storage, quick check and plotting.
7.1.5. NO2 CONVERSION EFFICIENCY
To ensure accurate operation of the M200EH/EM, it is important to check the NO2 conversion efficiency (CE)
periodically and to update this value as necessary.
The default setting for the NO2 converter efficiency is 1.0000. For the analyzer to function correctly, the
converter efficiency must be between 0.9600 and 1.0200 (96-102% conversion efficiency) as per US-EPA
requirements. If the converter’s efficiency is outside these limits, the NO2 converter should be replaced.
NOTE
The currently programmed CE is recorded along with the calibration data in the iDAS for
documentation and performance analysis
7.1.5.1. Determining / Updating the NO2 Converter Efficiency
The following procedure will cause the Model 200EH/EM to automatically calculate the current NO2 conversion
efficiency.
STEP ONE:
Connect a source of calibrated NO2 span gas as shown below.
Source of
SAMPLE GAS
Removed during
calibration
MODEL
200EH/EM
SAMPLE
EXHAUST
PUMP
MODEL 700
Gas Dilution
Calibrator
VENT
MODEL 701
Zero Gas
Generator
NOx Gas
(High Concentration)
VENT here if input
is pressurized
Figure 7-1: Gas Supply Setup for Determination of NO2 Conversion Efficiency
04521C (DCN5731)
Calibration Procedures Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
158
STEP TWO:
Set the expected NO2 span gas concentration:
SAMPLE GAS TO CAL:NOX
NOX O2 ENTR EXIT
SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL SETUP
M-P CAL A1:NXCNC1 =100PPM NOX=X.XXX
<TST TST> ZERO SPAN CONC EXIT
SAMPLE RANGE TO CAL:LOW
LOW HIGH ENTR EXIT
M-P CAL CONCENTRATION MENU
NOX NO CONV EXIT
M-P CAL NO2 CE CONC:80.0 Conc
0 0 8 0 .0 ENTR EXIT
The NOX & NO span concentration
values automatically default to
80.0 Conc.
If this is not the the concentration of
the span gas being used, toggle
these buttons to set the correct
concentration of the NOX and NO
calibration gases.
EXIT ignores the new
setting and returns to
the previous display.
ENTR accepts the new
setting and returns to
the
CONVERTER
EFFICIENCY
MENU.
If using NO span gas
in addition to NOX
repeat last step.
M-P CAL CONVERTER EFFICIENCY MENU
NO2 CAL SET EXIT
STEP THREE
Activate NO2 measurement stability function.
SETUP X.X STABIL_GAS:NO2
NO NO2 NOX O2 ENTR EXIT
Press EXIT 3
times to return
to SAMPLE
menu
SAMPLE RANGE = 50.000 PPM CO =X.XXX
< TST TST > CAL SETUP
SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT
SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU
COMM VARS DIAG ALRM EXIT
SETUP X.X ENTER PASSWORD:818
8 1 8 ENTREXIT
SETUP X.X 0) DAS_HOLD_OFF=15.0 Minutes
<PREV NEXT> JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT
SETUP X.X 2) STABIL_GAS=NOX
<PREV NEXT> JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT
SETUP X.X STABIL_GAS:NOX
NO NO2 NOX O2 ENTR EXIT
Continue pressing NEXT until ...
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Calibration Procedures
159
STEP FOUR:
Perform the converter efficiency calculation procedure:
SAMPLE NOX STB= XXX.X PPM NOX=XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL SETUP
SAMPLE GAS TO CAL:NOX
NOX O2 ENTR EXIT
M-P CAL NOX STB= XXX.X PPM OX=X.XXX
<TST TST> ZERO SPAN CONC EXIT
SAMPLE RANGE TO CAL:LOW
LOW HIGH ENTR EXIT
M-P CAL CONCENTRATION MENU
NOX NO CONV EXIT
M-P CAL CE FACTOR:1.000 Gain
1.00 0 0 ENTREXIT
Press EXIT 3 times
top return to the
SAMPLE display
M-P CAL CONVERTER EFFICIENCY MENU
NO2 CAL SET EXIT
SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL SETUP
Set the Display to show
the NOX STB test
function.
This function calculates
the stability of the NO/NOx
measurement
Toggle TST> button until ...
Allow NO2 to enter the sample port
at the rear of the analyzer.
Wait until NO2 STB
falls below 0.5 ppm
and the ENTR button
appears.
This may take several
minutes.
SAMPLE NOX STB= XXX.X PPM NOX=XXX.X
< TST TST > ENTR SETUP
M-P CAL CONVERTER EFFICIENCY MENU
NO2 CAL SET EXIT
M-P CAL CE FACTOR:1.012 Gain
1.00 1 2 ENTR EXIT
When ENTR is
pressed, the ratio of
observed NO2
concentration to
expected NO2
concentration is
calculated and
stored.
M-P CAL CONVERTER EFFICIENCY MENU
NO2 CAL SET EXIT
04521C (DCN5731)
Calibration Procedures Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
160
7.2. MANUAL CALIBRATION
The following section describes the basic method for manually calibrating the Model 200EH/EM NOX analyzer.
If both available iDAS parameters for a specific gas type are being reported via the instruments analog outputs
e.g. NXCNC1 and NXCNC2, separate calibrations should be carried out for each parameter.
Use the LOW button when calibrating for NXCNC1
Use the HIGH button when calibrating for NXCNC2.
See Section 6.13.3 & 6.13.4 for more information on analog output reporting ranges
STEP ONE: Connect the sources of zero air and span gas as shown below.
VENT here if input
is pressurized
Source of
SAMPLE Gas
PUMP
MODEL
200EH/EM
Sample
Exhaust
Span Point
Zero Air
Calibrated NO
at HIGH Span
Concentration
Filter
External Zero
Air Scrubber
VENT
MODEL 700
Gas Dilution
Calibrator
MODEL 701
Zero Gas
Generator
Figure 7-2: Pneumatic Connections–With Zero/Span Valve Option (50)
VENT here if input
is pressurized
Source of
SAMPLE Gas
PUMP
VENT
MODEL
200EH/EM
Sample
Exhaust
High Span Point
Low Span Point
Zero Air
Calibrated NO
at HIGH Span
Concentration
Calibrated NO
at LOW Span
Concentration
Filter
External Zero
Air Scrubber
VENT
On/Off
Valves
Figure 7-3: Pneumatic Connections–With 2-Span point Option (52) –Using Bottled Span Gas
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Calibration Procedures
161
STEP TWO: Set Expected NO and NOX Span Gas Concentrations
Set the expected NO and NOx span gas concentration. These should be 80% of range of concentration values
likely to be encountered in this application. The default factory setting is 100 ppm. If one of the configurable
analog outputs is to be set to transmit concentration values, use 80% of the reporting range set for that output
(see Section 6.13.4.5)
SAMPLE GAS TO CAL:NOX
NOX O2 ENTR EXIT
SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL SETUP
M-P CAL A1:NXCNC1 =100PPM NOX=X.XXX
<TST TST> ZERO SPAN CONC EXIT
SAMPLE RANGE TO CAL:LOW
LOW HIGH ENTR EXIT
M-P CAL CONCENTRATION MENU
NOX NO CONV EXIT
M-P CAL NOX SPAN CONC:80.0 Conc
0 0 8 0 .0 ENTR EXIT
The NOX & NO span concentration
values automatically default to
80.0 Conc.
If this is not the the concentration of
the span gas being used, toggle
these buttons to set the correct
concentration of the NOX and NO
calibration gases.
EXIT ignores the new
setting and returns to
the previous display.
ENTR accepts the new
setting and returns to
the
CONCENTRATION
MENU.
If using NO span gas
in addition to NOX
repeat last step.
NOTE
The expected concentrations for both NOX and NO are usually set to the same value
unless the conversion efficiency is not equal to 1.000 or not entered properly in the
conversion efficiency setting.
When setting expected concentration values, consider impurities in your span gas
source (NO often contains 1-3% NO2 and vice versa).
04521C (DCN5731)
Calibration Procedures Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
162
STEP THREE: Perform Zero/Span Calibration:
Press ENTR to changes
the OFFSET & SLOPE
values for both the NO
and NOx measurements.
Press EXIT to leave the
calibration unchanged and
return to the previous
menu.
SAMPLE GAS TO CAL:NOX
NOX O2 ENTR EXIT
SAMPLE NOX STB= XXX.X PPM NOX=XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL SETUP
M-P CAL NOX STB= XXX.X PPM NOX=XXX.X
<TST TST> ZERO CONC EXIT
SAMPLE RANGE TO CAL:LOW
LOW HIGH ENTR EXIT
EXIT at this point
returns to the
SAMPLE menu.
Press ENTR to changes
the OFFSET & SLOPE
values for both the NO
and NOx measurements.
Press EXIT to leave the
calibration unchanged and
return to the previous
menu.
SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL SETUP
Set the Display to show
the NOX STB test
function.
This function calculates
the stability of the NO/NOx
measurement
Toggle TST> button until ...
Allow zero gas to enter the sample port
at the rear of the analyzer.
Wait until NOX STB
falls below 0.5 ppm.
This may take several
minutes.
SAMPLE NOX STB= XXX.X PPM NOX=XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL SETUP
M-P CAL NOX STB= XXX.X PPM NOX=X.XXX
<TST TST> ENTR CONC EXIT
SAMPLE GAS TO CAL:NOX
NOX O2 ENTR EXIT
M-P CAL NOX STB= XXX.X PPM NOX=X.XXX
<TST TST> ZERO SPAN CONC EXIT
SAMPLE RANGE TO CAL:LOW
LOW HIGH ENTR EXIT
Allow span gas to enter the sample port
at the rear of the analyzer.
Wait until NOX STB
falls below 0.5 ppm.
This may take several
minutes.
SAMPLE NOX STB= XXX.X PPM NOX=XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL SETUP
M-P CAL NOX STB= XXX.X PPM NOX=X.XXX
<TST TST> ENTR CONC EXIT
M-P CAL NOX STB= XXX.X PPM NOX=X.XXX
<TST TST> ENTR CONC EXIT
The SPAN key now appears
during the transition from
zero to span.
You may see both keys.
If either the ZERO or SPAN
buttons fail to appear see
Section 11 for
troubleshooting tips.
Analyzer continues to
cycle through NOx,
NO, and NO2
measurements
throughout this
procedure.
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Calibration Procedures
163
7.3. CALIBRATION CHECKS
Informal calibration checks, which only evaluate but do not alter the analyzer’s response curve, are
recommended as a regular maintenance item and in order to monitor the analyzer’s performance. To carry out a
calibration check rather than a full calibration, follow these steps.
STEP ONE: Connect the sources of zero air and span gas as shown in Figure 7.2 or 7.3.
STEP TWO: Perform the zero/span calibration check procedure:
SAMPLE NOX STB= XXX.X PPM NOX=XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL SETUP
The ZERO and/or SPAN
keys will appear at various
points of this process.
It is not necessary to press
them.
SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL SETUP
Set the Display to show
the NOX STB test
function.
This function calculates
the stability of the NO/NOx
measurement
Toggle TST> button until ...
Allow zero gas to enter the sample port
at the rear of the analyzer.
Wait until NOX STB
falls below 0.5 ppm.
This may take several
minutes.
Allow span gas to enter the sample port
at the rear of the analyzer.
Wait until NOX STB
falls below 0.5 ppm.
This may take several
minutes.
Analyzer display
continues to cycle
through all of the
available gas
measurements
throughout this
procedure.
Record NOX, NO, NO2 or O2 zero point
readings
Record NOX, NO, NO2 or O2 span point
readings\
04521C (DCN5731)
Calibration Procedures Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
164
7.4. MANUAL CALIBRATION WITH ZERO/SPAN VALVES
Zero and Span calibrations using the Zero/Span Valve option are similar to that described in Section 7.2, except
that:
Zero air and span gas is supplied to the analyzer through the zero gas and span gas inlets rather than
through the sample inlet.
The zero and cal operations are initiated directly and independently with dedicated keys (CALZ &
CALS)
If both available iDAS parameters for a specific gas type are being reported via the instruments analog outputs
e.g. NXCNC1 and NXCNC2, separate calibrations should be carried out for each parameter.
Use the LOW button when calibrating for NXCNC1
Use the HIGH button when calibrating for NXCNC2.
See Section 6.13.3 & 6.13.4 for more information on analog output reporting ranges
STEP ONE: Connect the sources of zero air and span gas to the respective ports on the rear panel (Figure 3-1)
as shown below.
VENT here if input
is pressurized
Source of
SAMPLE Gas
PUMP
MODEL
200EH/EM
Sample
Exhaust
Span Point
Zero Air
Calibrated NO
at HIGH Span
Concentration
Filter
External Zero
Air Scrubber
VENT
MODEL 700
Gas Dilution
Calibrator
MODEL 701
Zero Gas
Generator
Figure7-4: Pneumatic Connections–With Zero/Span Valve Option (50)
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Calibration Procedures
165
STEP TWO: Set Expected NO and NOX Span Gas Concentrations.
Set the expected NO and NOx span gas concentration. These should be 80% of range of concentration values
likely to be encountered in this application. The default factory setting is 100 ppm. If one of the configurable
analog outputs is to be set to transmit concentration values, use 80% of the reporting range set for that output
(see Section 6.13.4.5)
SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL CALZ CALS SETUP
SAMPLE GAS TO CAL:NOX
NOX O2 ENTR EXIT
SPAN CAL M A1:NXCNC1 =100PPM NOX=X.XXX
<TST TST> ZERO SPAN CONC EXIT
SAMPLE RANGE TO CAL:LOW
LOW HIGH ENTR EXIT
SPAN CAL M CONCENTRATION MENU
NOX NO CONV EXIT
SPAN CAL M NOX SPAN CONC:80.0 Conc
0 0 8 0 .0 ENTR EXIT
The NOX & NO span concentration
values automatically default to
80.0 Conc.
If this is not the the concentration of
the span gas being used, toggle
these buttons to set the correct
concentration of the NOX and NO
calibration gases.
EXIT ignores the new
setting and returns to
the previous display.
ENTR accepts the new
setting and returns to
the
CONCENTRATION
MENU.
If using NO span gas
in addition to NOX
repeat last step.
NOTE
The expected concentrations for both NOX and NO are usually set to the same value
unless the conversion efficiency is not equal to 1.000 or not entered properly in the
conversion efficiency setting.
When setting expected concentration values, consider impurities in your span gas
source (NO often contains 1-3% NO2 and vice versa).
04521C (DCN5731)
Calibration Procedures Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
166
STEP THREE: Perform Zero/Span Calibration:
Press ENTR to changes
the OFFSET & SLOPE
values for both the NO
and NOx measurements.
Press EXIT to leave the
calibration unchanged and
return to the previous
menu.
SAMPLE GAS TO CAL:NOX
NOX O2 ENTR EXIT
ZERO CAL M NOX STB= XXX.X PPM NOX=XXX.X
<TST TST> ZERO CONC EXIT
SAMPLE RANGE TO CAL:LOW
LOW HIGH ENTR EXIT
EXIT at this point
returns to the
SAMPLE menu.
Press ENTR to changes
the OFFSET & SLOPE
values for both the NO
and NOx measurements.
Press EXIT to leave the
calibration unchanged and
return to the previous
menu.
Set the Display to show
the NOX STB test
function.
This function calculates
the stability of the NO/NOx
measurement
Toggle TST> button until ...
Allow zero gas to enter the sample port
at the rear of the analyzer.
Wait until NOX STB
falls below 0.5 ppm.
This may take several
minutes.
ZERO CAL M NOX STB= XXX.X PPM NOX=XXX.X
<TST TST> ENTR CONC EXIT
SAMPLE GAS TO CAL:NOX
NOX O2 ENTR EXIT
SPAN CAL M NOX STB= XXX.X PPM NOX=X.XXX
<TST TST> ZERO SPAN CONC EXIT
SAMPLE RANGE TO CAL:LOW
LOW HIGH ENTR EXIT
Allow span gas to enter the sample port
at the rear of the analyzer.
Wait until NOX STB
falls below 0.5 ppm.
This may take several
minutes.
SPAN CAL M NOX STB= XXX.X PPM NOX=X.XXX
<TST TST> ENTR CONC EXIT
SPAN CAL M NOX STB= XXX.X PPM NOX=X.XXX
<TST TST> ENTR CONC EXIT
Analyzers enters SPAN cal
mode and the SPAN key
appears.
You may see both
keysduring the transition
from ZERO to SPAN modes.
If either the ZERO or SPAN
buttons fail to appear see
Section 11 for
troubleshooting tips.
Analyzer continues to
cycle through NOx,
NO, and NO2
measurements
throughout this
procedure.
SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL CALZ CALS SETUP
SAMPLE NOX STB= XXX.X PPM NOX=XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL CALZ CALS SETUP
SAMPLE NOX STB= XXX.X PPM NOX=XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL CALZ CALS SETUP
Analyzers enters
ZERO cal
mode.
SAMPLE NOX STB= XXX.X PPM NOX=XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL CALZ CALS SETUP
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Calibration Procedures
167
7.5. CALIBRATION CHECKS WITH ZERO/SPAN VALVES
Zero and span checks using the zero/span valve option are similar to that described in Section 7.4, except that
zero air and span gas are supplied to the analyzer through the zero gas and span gas inlets from two different
sources.
Informal calibration checks, which only evaluate but do not alter the analyzer’s response curve, are
recommended as a regular maintenance item and in order to monitor the analyzer’s performance. To carry out a
calibration check rather than a full calibration, follow these steps.
To perform a manual calibration check with zero/span valve or IZS option installed:
STEP ONE: Connect the sources of Zero Air and Span Gas as shown in section 7-4.
STEP TWO: Perform the zero/span check.
The ZERO and/or SPAN
keys will appear at various
points of this process.
It is not necessary to press
them.
Set the Display to show
the NOX STB test
function.
This function calculates
the stability of the NO/NOx
measurement Toggle TST> button until ...
Allow zero gas to enter the sample port
at the rear of the analyzer.
Wait until NOX STB
falls below 0.5 ppm.
This may take several
minutes.
Allow span gas to enter the sample port
at the rear of the analyzer.
Wait until NOX STB
falls below 0.5 ppm.
This may take several
minutes.
Record NOX, NO, NO2 or O2 zero point
readings
Record NOX, NO, NO2 or O2 span point
readings\
SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL CALZ CALS SETUP
SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL CALZ CALS SETUP
SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL CALZ CALS SETUP
SAMPLE GAS TO CAL:NOX
NOX O2 ENTR EXIT
SAMPLE RANGE TO CAL:LOW
LOW HIGH ENTR EXIT
Analyzers enters
ZERO cal
mode.
SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL CALZ CALS SETUP
SAMPLE GAS TO CAL:NOX
NOX O2 ENTR EXIT
SAMPLE RANGE TO CAL:LOW
LOW HIGH ENTR EXIT Analyzers enters
SPAN cal
mode.
SPAN CAL M NOX STB= XXX.X PPM NOX=X.XXX
<TST TST> ZERO SPAN CONC EXIT
SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL CALZ CALS SETUP
ZERO CAL M NOX STB= XXX.X PPM NOX=XXX.X
<TST TST> ZERO CONC EXIT
ZERO CAL M NOX STB= XXX.X PPM NOX=XXX.X
<TST TST> ZERO CONC EXIT Return to
SAMPLE
Display
SPAN CAL M NOX STB= XXX.X PPM NOX=XXX.X
<TST TST> ZERO CONC EXIT Return to
SAMPLE
Display
04521C (DCN5731)
Calibration Procedures Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
168
7.6. CALIBRATION WITH REMOTE CONTACT CLOSURES
Contact closures for controlling calibration and calibration checks are located on the rear panel CONTROL IN
connector. Instructions for setup and use of these contacts can be found in Section 6.15.1.2.
When the appropriate contacts are closed for at least 5 seconds, the instrument switches into zero, low span or
high span mode and internal zero/span valves (if installed) will be automatically switched to the appropriate
configuration. The remote calibration contact closures may be activated in any order. It is recommended that
contact closures remain closed for at least 10 minutes to establish a reliable reading; the instrument will stay in
the selected mode for as long as the contacts remain closed.
If contact closures are used in conjunction with the analyzer’s AutoCal (Section 7.7) feature and the AutoCal
attribute CALIBRATE is enabled, the M200EH/EM will not re-calibrate the analyzer until the contact is opened.
At this point, the new calibration values will be recorded before the instrument returns to SAMPLE mode. If the
AutoCal attribute CALIBRATE is disabled, the instrument will return to SAMPLE mode, leaving the instrument’s
internal calibration variables unchanged.
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Calibration Procedures
169
7.7. AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION (AUTOCAL)
The AutoCal feature allows unattended, periodic operation of the zero/span valve options by using the analyzer’s
internal time of day clock. The AutoCal feature is only available on the front panel menu (ACAL) if either the
zero/span valve or the IZS option is installed.
AutoCal operates by executing user-defined sequences to initiate the various calibration modes of the analyzer
and to open and close valves appropriately. It is possible to program and run up to three separate sequences
(SEQ1, SEQ2 and SEQ3). Each sequence can operate in one of three modes or be disabled (Table 7-2).
Table 7-2: AutoCal Modes
MODE ACTION
DISABLED Disables the sequence
ZERO Causes the sequence to perform a zero calibration or check
ZERO-LO1 Causes the sequence to perform a zero calibration or check followed by a mid-span
concentration calibration or check
ZERO-LO-HI1 Causes the sequence to perform a zero calibration or check followed by a mid-span
concentration calibration or check and finally a high-span point calibration or check.
ZERO-HI Causes the sequence to perform a zero calibration or check followed by a high-span
point calibration or check.
LO1 Causes the sequence to perform a mid-span concentration calibration or check
LO-HI1 Causes the sequence to perform a mid-span concentration calibration or check
followed by a high-span point calibration or check
HI Causes the sequence to perform a high-span point calibration or check.
O2 –ZERO2 Causes the sequence to do a zero-point calibration for the O2 sensor.
O2 ZERO-SP2 Causes the sequence to perform a zero calibration of the or check O2 sensor followed
by a mid-span concentration calibration or check of the O2 sensor.
O2 SPAN2 Causes the sequence to perform a zero calibration or check of the O2 sensor.
1 Only applicable if analyzer is equipped with the second span point valve option (52)
2 Only applicable if instrument is equipped wit the O2 sensor option (65(.
Each mode has seven parameters that control operational details of the sequence(Table 7-3).
Table 7-3: AutoCal Attribute Setup Parameters
PARAMETER ACTION
TIMER
ENABLED
Turns on the sequence timer
STARTING DATE Sequence will operate on Starting Date
STARTING TIME Sequence will operate at Starting Time
DELTA DAYS Number of days between each sequence trigger. If set to 7, for example, the AutoCal feature
will be enabled once every week on the same day.
DELTA TIME Incremental delay on each delta day that the sequence starts. If set to 0, the sequence will start
at the same time each day. Delta Time is added to Delta Days for the total time between
cycles.
This parameter prevents the analyzer from being calibrated at the same daytime of each
calibration day and prevents a lack of data for one particular daytime on the days of calibration.
DURATION Duration of the each sequence step in minutes. This parameter needs to be set such that there
is enough time for the concentration signal to stabilize. The STABIL parameter shows if the
analyzer response is stable at the end of the calibration. This parameter is logged with
calibration values in the iDAS.
CALIBRATE Enable to do a true, dynamic zero or span calibration; disable to do a calibration check only.
RANGE TO CAL LOW calibrates the low range, HIGH calibrates the high range. Applies only to auto and remote
range modes; this property is not available in single and independent range modes.
04521C (DCN5731)
Calibration Procedures Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
170
The following example sets sequence #2 to carry out a zero-span calibration every other day starting at 14:00 on
01 January, 2003, lasting 30 minutes (15 for zero and 15 for span). This sequence will start 30 minutes later
each day.
Table 7-4: Example Auto-Cal Sequence
MODE AND ATTRIBUTE VALUE COMMENT
SEQUENCE 2
Define sequence #2
MODE ZERO-HI
Select zero and span mode
TIMER ENABLE ON Enable the timer
STARTING DATE 01-JAN-03 Start on or after 01 January 2003
STARTING TIME 14:00 First sequence starts at 14:00 (24-hour clock format)
DELTA DAYS 2 Repeat this sequence every 2 days
DELTA TIME 00:30 Repeat sequence 30 minutes later each time
(every 2 days and 30 minutes)
DURATION 15.0
Each sequence step will last 15 minutes (total of 30 minutes when
using zero-span mode)
CALIBRATE ON
The instrument will recalculate the slope and offset values for the
NO and NOX channel at the end of the AutoCal sequence.
Please note the following suggestions for programming the AutoCal feature.
The programmed
Starting Time must be 5 minutes later than the real time clock (Section 6.10).
Avoid setting two or more sequences at the same time of the day. Any new sequence which is initiated
from a timer, the COM ports, or the contact closures will override any sequence in progress. Note that
two sequences with different daily increments may eventually overlap.
If at any time an illegal entry is selected, (for example: Delta Days > 366) the ENTR key will disappear
from the display.
With
CALIBRATE turned on, the state of the internal setup variables DYN_SPAN and DYN_ZERO is
set to ON and the instrument will reset the slope and offset values for the NO and NOX response each
time the AutoCal program runs. This continuous re-adjustment of calibration parameters can often mask
subtle fault conditions in the analyzer. It is recommended that, if CALIBRATE is enabled, the analyzer’s
test functions, slope and offset values be checked frequently to assure high quality and accurate data
from the instrument.
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Calibration Procedures
171
To program the sample sequence shown above, follow this flow chart:
SETUP C.4 SEQ 2) ZERO
–
SPAN, 2:00:30
PREV NEXT MODE SET EXIT
SAMPLE RANGE = 500.0 PPB NOX=X.X
< TST TST > CAL CALZ CZLS SETUP
SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG ACAL DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT
SETUP X.X SEQ 1) DISABLED
NEXT MODE EXIT
SETUP X.X SEQ 2) DISABLED
PREV NEXT MODE EXIT
SETUP X.X MODE: DISABLED
NEXT ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X MODE: ZERO
–
HI
PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X SEQ 2) ZERO
–
HI, 1:00:00
PREV NEXT MODE SET EXIT
SETUP X.X STARTING DATE: 01
–
JAN
–
02
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
SETUP X.X STARTING DATE: 01–JAN–02
0 4 SEP 0 3 ENTR EXIT
Toggle
keys to
set day,
month &
year: DD-
MON-YY
SETUP X.X STARTING DATE: 04
–
SEP
–
03
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
Default
value
is ON
SETUP C.4 STARTING DATE: 04
–
SEP
–
03
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
Toggle keys to
set time:
HH:MM. This is
a 24 hr clock.
PM hours are
13-24.
Example: 2:15
PM = 14:15
Toggle keys
to set
number of
days
between
procedures
(1-367)
Toggle keys
to set
delay time for
each iteration
of the
sequence:
HH:MM
(0 – 24:00)
SETUP C.4 DELTA DAYS: 1
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
SETUP C.4 DELTA DAYS: 1
0 0 2 ENTR EXIT
SETUP C.4 DELTA DAYS:2
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
SETUP C.4 DELTA TIME00:00
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
SETUP C.4 DELTA TIME: 00:00
0 0 :3 0 ENTR EXIT
SETUP C.4 DELTA TIEM:00:30
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
SETUP C.4 STARTING TIME:14:15
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
EXIT returns
to the SETUP
Menu
SETUP C.4 DURATION:15.0 MINUTES
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
SETUP C.4 DURATION 15.0MINUTES
3 0 .0 ENTR EXIT
SETUP C.4 DURATION:30.0 MINUTES
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
Toggle keys
to set
duration for
each
iteration of
the
sequence:
Set in
Decimal
minutes
from
0.1 – 60.0
SETUP C.4 CALIBRATE: OFF
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
SETUP C.4 CALIBRATE: OFF
ON ENTR EXIT
SETUP C.4 CALIBRATE: ON
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
Toggle key
between
Off and
ON
Sequence # Delta Time
Mode Delta Days
SETUP C.4 STARTING TIME:00:00
1 4 : 1 5 ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X TIMER ENABLE: ON
SET> EDIT EXIT
SETUP C.4 STARTING TIME:00:00
<SET SET> EDIT EXIT
Toggle NEXT button until ...
04521C (DCN5731)
Calibration Procedures Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
172
7.8. CALIBRATION QUALITY ANALYSIS
After completing one of the calibration procedures described above, it is important to evaluate the analyzer’s
calibration SLOPE and OFFSET parameters. These values describe the linear response curve of the analyzer,
separately for NO and NOX. The values for these terms, both individually and relative to each other, indicate the
quality of the calibration. To perform this quality evaluation, you will need to record the values of the following
test functions (Section 6.2.1 or Appendix A-3), all of which are automatically stored in the iDAS channel
CALDAT for data analysis, documentation and archival.
NO OFFS
NO SLOPE
NOX OFFS
NOX SLOPE
Make sure that these parameters are within the limits listed in Table 7-5 and frequently compare them to those
values on the Final Test and Checkout Sheet that came attached to your manual, which should not be
significantly different. If they are, refer to the troubleshooting Chapter 11.
Table 7-5: Calibration Data Quality Evaluation
FUNCTION MINIMUM VALUE OPTIMUM VALUE MAXIMUM VALUE
NOX SLOPE -0.700 1.000 1.300
NO SLOPE -0.700 1.000 1.300
NOX OFFS -20.0 mV 0.0 mV 150.0 mV
NO OFFS -20.0 mV 0.0 mV 150.0 mV
The default iDAS configuration records all calibration values in channel CALDAT as well as all calibration check
(zero and span) values in its internal memory. Up to 200 data points are stored for up 4 years of data (on
weekly calibration checks) and a lifetime history of monthly calibrations. Review these data to see if the zero
and span responses change over time. These channels also store the STABIL value (standard deviation of NOX
concentration) to evaluate if the analyzer response has properly leveled off during the calibration procedure.
Finally, the CALDAT channel also stores the converter efficiency for review and documentation.
USER NOTES:
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual EPA Protocol Calibration
173
8. EPA PROTOCOL CALIBRATION
At the writing of this manual there is no EPA requirements for the monitoring of NOX or published calibration
protocols.
User Notes
04521C (DCN5731)
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Instrument Maintenance
175
9. INSTRUMENT MAINTENANCE
Predictive diagnostic functions, including data acquisition records, failure warnings and test functions built into
the analyzer, allow the user to determine when repairs are necessary without performing unnecessary,
preventative maintenance procedures. There is, however, a minimal number of simple procedures that, when
performed regularly, will ensure that the analyzer continues to operate accurately and reliably over its lifetime.
Repair and troubleshooting procedures are covered in Chapter 11 of this manual.
NOTE
A span and zero calibration check must be performed following some of the
maintenance procedures listed below. Refer to Chapter 0.
CAUTION
Risk of electrical shock. Disconnect power before performing any
operations that require entry into the interior of the analyzer.
NOTE
The operations outlined in this chapter must be performed by
qualified maintenance personnel only.
9.1. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Table 9-1 shows the recommended maintenance schedule for the M200EH/EM. Please note that in certain
environments with high levels of dust, humidity or pollutant levels some maintenance procedures may need to
be performed more often than shown.
04521C (DCN5731)
Instrument Maintenance Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
176
Table 9-1: M200EH/EM Preventive Maintenance Schedule
ITEM ACTION FREQUENCY
CAL
CHECK
MANUAL
SECTION DATE PERFORMED
1Particulate Filter Change filter Weekly No 9.3.1
Verify Test Functions Review and
evaluate Weekly No
9.2; Appendix
C
Zero/Span Check Evaluate offset and
slope Weekly -- 7.3, 7.5, 7.7
1Zero/Span
Calibration
Zero and span
calibration Every 3 months -- 7.2, 7.4, 7.6,
7.7, 7,8
NO2 Converter Replace converter
& check efficiency
Every 3 years or if
conversion efficiency
< 96%
Yes if CE
factor is
used
--
1External Zero Air
Scrubber (Optional) Exchange chemical Every 3 months No 9.3.5
External Dryer
(Optional) Replace chemical When indicator color
changes No
1Reaction Cell
Window
Clean optics,
Change O-rings
Annually or as
necessary Yes 9.3.7
1Air Inlet Filter Of
Perma Pure Dryer
Change particle
filter Annually No 9.3.2
Pneumatic Sub-
System
Check for leaks in
gas flow paths
Annually or after
repairs involving
pneumatics
Yes on
leaks, else
no
0, 0
1All Critical Flow
Orifice O-Rings &
Sintered Filters
Replace Annually Yes 9.3.8
1, 2 Pump Rebuild head Annually Yes 9.3.4
Inline Exhaust
Scrubber Replace Annually No
Pmt Sensor
Hardware Calibration
Low-level hardware
calibration
On PMT/ preamp
changes & if
0.7< SLOPE >1.3
Yes 11.6.5
1 These Items are required to maintain full warranty, all other items are strongly recommended.
2 A pump rebuild kit is available from Teledyne Instruments Customer Service including all instructions and required parts (see Appendix B for part numbers).
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Instrument Maintenance
177
9.2. PREDICTIVE DIAGNOSTICS
The analyzer’s test functions can be used to predict failures by looking at trends in their values. Initially it may
be useful to compare the state of these test functions to the values measured on your instrument at the factory
and recorded on the M200EH/EM Final Test and Validation Data Form (Teledyne Instruments part number
04490, attached to the manual). Table 9-2 can be used as a basis for taking action as these values change with
time. The internal data acquisition system (iDAS) is a convenient way to record and track these changes.
APICOM control software can be used to download and review these data even from remote locations (Section
6.15.2.8 describes APICOM).
Table 9-2: Predictive Uses for Test Functions
FUNCTION EXPECTED ACTUAL INTERPRETATION & ACTION
Fluctuating Developing leak in pneumatic system. Check for leaks
RCEL
pressure
Constant to
within ± 0.5 Slowly increasing Pump performance is degrading. Replace pump head
when pressure is above 10 in-Hg-A
Fluctuating Developing leak in pneumatic system. Check for leaks
Slowly increasing Flow path is clogging up. Replace orifice filters
SAMPLE
pressure
Constant within
atmospheric
changes Slowly decreasing Developing leak in pneumatic system to vacuum
(developing valve failure). Check for leaks
Ozone Flow Constant to
within ± 15 Slowly decreasing Flow path is clogging up. Replace orifice filters
Developing AZERO valve failure. Replace valve
PMT cooler failure. Check cooler, circuit, and power
supplies
Developing light leak. Leak check.
AZERO
Constant within
±20 of check-out
value
Significantly
increasing
O3 air filter cartridge is exhausted. Change chemical
NO2 CONC
Constant for
constant
concentrations
Slowly decreasing
signal for same
concentration
Converter efficiency may be degrading. Replace
converter.
Change in instrument response. Low level (hardware)
calibrate the sensor
NO2 CONC
(IZS)
Constant
response from
day to day
Decreasing over time Degradation of IZS permeation tube. Change
permeation tube
NO2 CONC
(IZS)
Constant
response from
day to day
Heavily fluctuating
from day to day
Ambient changes in moisture are affecting the
performance. Add a dryer to the zero air inlet.
NO CONC
Constant for
constant
concentration
Decreasing over time Drift of instrument response; clean RCEL window,
change O3 air filter chemical.
9.3. MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The following procedures need to be performed regularly as part of the standard maintenance of the Model
200EH/EM.
04521C (DCN5731)
Instrument Maintenance Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
178
9.3.1. CHANGING THE SAMPLE PARTICULATE FILTER
The particulate filter should be inspected often for signs of plugging or excess dirt. It should be replaced
according to the service interval in Table 9-1 even without obvious signs of dirt. Filters with 1 and 5 µm pore
size can clog up while retaining a clean look. We recommend to handle the filter and the wetted surfaces of the
filter housing with gloves and tweezers. We recommend not to touch any part of the housing, filter element,
PTFE retaining ring, glass cover and the O-ring with bare hands as this may cause the pores to clog quicker and
surfaces to become dirty due to possible oils from your hands.
Figure 9-1: Sample Particulate Filter Assembly
To change the filter according to the service interval in Table 9-1, follow this procedure:
1. Turn OFF the pump to prevent drawing debris into the sample line.
2. Remove the CE Mark locking screw in the center of the front panel and open the hinged front panel and
unscrew the knurled retaining ring of the filter assembly.
3. Carefully remove the retaining ring, glass window, PTFE O-ring and filter element. We recommend to
clean the glass and O-rings at least once monthly, weekly in very polluted areas.
4. Install a new filter element, carefully centering it in the bottom of the holder.
5. Re-install the PTFE O-ring with the notches facing up (important!), the glass cover, then screw on the
hold-down ring and hand-tighten the assembly. Inspect the (visible) seal between the edge of the glass
window and the O-ring to assure proper gas tightness.
6. To fulfill CE Mark safety requirements, the front panel locking screw must be installed at all times during
operation of the analyzer.
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Instrument Maintenance
179
7. Re-start the analyzer.
9.3.2. CHANGING THE O3 DRYER PARTICULATE FILTER
The air for the O3 generator passes through a Perma Pure© dryer, which is equipped with a small particulate
filter at its inlet. This filter prevents dust from entering the Perma Pure© dryer and degrading the dryer’s
performance over time. To change the filter according to the service interval in Table 9-1:
1. Check and write down the average RCEL pressure and the OZONE flow values.
2. Turn off the analyzer, unplug the power cord and remove the cover.
3. Unscrew the nut around the port of the filter using 5/8” and 9/16” wrenches and by holding the actual
fitting body steady with a 7/16” wrench.
CAUTION
Risk of significant leak. Make sure to use proper wrenches and to not turn the fitting
against the Perma Pure© dryer. This may loosen the inner tubing and cause large leaks.
4. Take off the old filter element and replace it with a suitable equivalent
(TAPI part# FL-3).
Figure 9-2: Particle Filter on O3 Supply Air Dryer
5. Holding the fitting steady with a 5/8” wrench, tighten the nut with your hands. If necessary use a second
wrench but do not over-tighten the nut.
6. Replace the cover, plug in the power cord and restart the analyzer.
7. Check the O3 flow rate, it should be around 80 cm³/min ± 15. Check the RCEL pressure, it should be
the same value as before.
04521C (DCN5731)
Instrument Maintenance Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
180
9.3.3. MAINTAINING THE EXTERNAL SAMPLE PUMP
9.3.3.1. Rebuilding the Pump
The sample pump head periodically wears out and must be replaced when the RCEL pressure exceeds 10 in-
Hg-A (at sea level, adjust this value accordingly for elevated locations). A pump rebuild kit is available from the
factory. Appendix B of this manual lists the part numbers of the pump rebuild kit. Instructions and diagrams are
included in the kit.
A flow and leak check after rebuilding the sample pump is recommended. A span check and re-calibration after
this procedure is necessary as the response of the analyzer changes with the RCEL pressure.
9.3.3.2. Changing the Inline Exhaust Scrubber
1. Through the SETUP>MORE>DIAG menu turn OFF the OZONE GEN OVERRIDE. Wait 10 minutes to
allow pump to pull room air through scrubber before proceeding to step 2.
2. Disconnect exhaust line from analyzer.
3. Turn off (unplug) analyzer sample pump.
4. Disconnect tubing from (NOx or charcoal) scrubber cartridge.
5. Remove scrubber from system.
6. Dispose of according to local laws.
7. Install new scrubber into system.
8. Reconnect tubing to scrubber and analyzer.
9. Turn on pump.
10. Through the SETUP menu (per Step 1 above) turn ON the OZONE GEN OVERRIDE.
NOTE:
The inline exhaust scrubber is strictly intended for Nitric Acid and NO2 only.
9.3.4. CHANGING THE PUMP AND IZS DUST FILTERS
The exhaust air from the analyzer passes a small particle filter (DFU filter, part # FL3) before entering the pump.
When this particle filter becomes visibly dirty or the pressure drop between SAMP and RCEL pressure
increases significantly, it needs replacement in order to prevent a large pressure drop with degraded analyzer
performance.
CAUTION!
Do NOT attempt to change the contents of the inline exhaust scrubber cartridge; change the entire cartridge.
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Instrument Maintenance
181
1. Power down the analyzer and pump.
2. For internally mounted filters, skip the next two steps.
3. For externally mounted filters on the pump housing, remove the analyzer exhaust tube from the dust
filter. Remove the particle filter from the pump. To do so, push the white plastic ring into the fitting and
pull the filter out of the fitting. If necessary, use needle-nose pliers to pry the filter out of the fittings.
4. Push a new filter into the pump fitting and make sure that the arrow on the filter points towards the
pump. Push the exhaust tubing onto the filter. Skip the next two steps.
5. For internally mounted filters at the inside rear panel, remove the chassis and locate the filter between
the vacuum manifold and the exhaust port fitting.
6. Disconnect the clear tubing from the filter body and change the filter with the arrow pointing against the
gas flow. To remove the hose clamps, slide the two clamp ends in opposite directions with a needle-
nose pliers until the clamp comes apart. Reconnect the tubing by using the same or new clamps and
pushing tightening them until a good seal is achieved.
7. Restart the pump and clear any error warnings from the front panel display.
8. After about 5 minutes, check the RCEL pressure reading and ensure that it is similar to its value before
changing the filter but less than 10 in-Hg-A.
04521C (DCN5731)
Instrument Maintenance Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
182
9.3.5. CHANGING THE EXTERNAL ZERO AIR SCRUBBER
The external zero air scrubber contains two chemicals, pink Purafil© (Part # CH 9) and black, charcoal (Part #
CH 1). The Purafil© converts NO in the ambient air to NO2 and the following charcoal absorbs any NO2. The
chemicals need to be replaced periodically according to Table 9-1 or as needed. This procedure can be carried
out while the instrument is running. Make sure that the analyzer is not in ZERO calibration mode.
CAUTION!
The following procedures apply only to the External Zero Air Scrubber and NOT to the inline exhaust
scrubber cartridge (Section 9.3.3.2) that is part of the pump pack assembly.
1. Locate the scrubber on the outside rear panel (for location, see Scrubber Cartridge in Figure 3-2).
Figure 9-3 shows the exploded scrubber assembly.
2. Remove the old scrubber by disconnecting the 1/4” plastic tubing from the particle filter using 9/16” and
1/2" wrenches.
3. Remove the particle filter from the cartridge using 9/16” wrenches.
4. Unscrew the top of the scrubber canister and discard the Purafil© and charcoal contents. Make sure to
abide to local laws about discarding these chemicals. The rebuild kit (listed in Appendix B) comes with a
Material and Safety Data Sheet, which contains more information on these chemicals.
5. Refill the scrubber with charcoal at the bottom and with the Purafil© chemical at the top, and use three
white retainer pads (Figure 9-3) to separate the chemicals.
6. Replace the screw-top cap and tighten the cap - hand-tight only.
7. If necessary, replace the DFU filter with a new unit and discard the old. The bottom retainer pad should
catch most of the dust, the filter should not be visibly dirty (on the inside)
8. Replace the scrubber assembly into its clips on the rear panel.
9. Reconnect the plastic tubing to the fitting of the particle filter.
10. Adjust the scrubber cartridge such that it does not protrude above or below the analyzer in case the
instrument is mounted in a rack. If necessary, squeeze the clips for a tighter grip on the cartridge.
Figure 9-3: Zero Air Scrubber Assembly
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Instrument Maintenance
183
9.3.6. CHANGING THE NO2 CONVERTER
The NO2 converter is located in the center of the instrument, see Figure 3-1 for location, and Figure 9-4 for the
assembly. The converter is designed for replacement of the cartridge only, the heater with built-in thermocouple
can be reused.
1. Turn off the analyzer power, remove the cover and allow the converter to cool.
2. Remove the top lid of the converter as well as the top layers of the insulation until the converter cartridge
can be seen.
CAUTION
THE CONVERTER OPERATES AT 315º C. SEVERE BURNS CAN RESULT IF THE
ASSEMBLY IS NOT ALLOWED TO COOL. DO NOT HANDLE THE ASSEMBLY UNTIL
IT IS AT ROOM TEMPERATURE. THIS MAY TAKE SEVERAL HOURS.
3. Remove the tube fittings from the converter.
4. Disconnect the power and the thermocouple of the converter. Unscrew the grounding clamp of the
power leads with a Phillips-head screw driver.
5. Remove the converter assembly (cartridge and band heater) from the can. Make a note of the
orientation of the tubes relative to the heater cartridge.
6. Unscrew the band heater and loosen it, take out the old converter cartridge.
Figure 9-4: NO2
Converter Assembly
7. Wrap the band heater
around the new
replacement cartridge
and tighten the screws
using a high-
temperature anti-seize
agent such as copper
paste. Make sure to
use proper alignment
of the heater with
respect to the
converter tubes.
8. Replace the converter assembly, route the cables through the holes in the can and reconnect them
properly. Reconnect the grounding clamp around the heater leads for safe operation.
9. Re-attach the tube fittings to the converter and replace the insulation and cover.
10. Replace the instrument cover and power up the analyzer.
11. Allow the converter to burn-in for 24 hours, then re-calibrate the instrument.
04521C (DCN5731)
Instrument Maintenance Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
184
9.3.7. CLEANING THE REACTION CELL
The reaction cell should be cleaned whenever troubleshooting suggests. A dirty reaction cell will cause
excessive noise, drifting zero or span values, low response or a combination of all. To clean the reaction cell, it
is necessary to remove it from the sensor housing. refer to Section 11.6.6. for an overview of the entire sensor
assembly. Use the following guide to clean the reaction cell:
1. Turn off the instrument power and vacuum pump. Refer to the Figure 9-5 for the following procedure.
2. Disconnect the black 1/4" exhaust tube and the 1/8” sample and ozone air tubes from the reaction cell.
Disconnect the heater/thermistor cable.
3. Remove four screws holding the reaction cell to the PMT housing and lift the cell and manifold out as
shown in the inset of Figure 9-5.
000940500 – Ozone Critical Flow Orifice
Figure 9-5: Reaction Cell Assembly
4. The reaction cell will separate into two halves, the stainless steel manifold assembly and the black
plastic reaction cell with window, stainless steel cylinder and O-rings.
5. The reaction cell (both plastic part and stainless steel cylinder) and optical glass filter should be cleaned
with methanol and a clean tissue and dried thereafter.
6. Usually it is not necessary to clean the ozone flow orifice since it is protected by a sintered filter. If tests
show that cleaning is necessary, refer to Section 9.3.8 on how to clean the critical flow orifice.
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Instrument Maintenance
185
7. Do not remove the sample and ozone nozzles. They are Teflon threaded and require a special tool for
reassembly. If necessary, the manifold with nozzles attached can be cleaned in an ultrasonic bath.
8. Reassemble in proper order and re-attach the reaction cell to the sensor housing. Reconnect
pneumatics and heater connections, then re-attach the pneumatic sensor assembly and the cleaning
procedure is complete.
9. After cleaning the reaction cell, it is also recommended to exchange the ozone supply air filter chemical
10. After cleaning, the analyzer span response may drop 10 - 15% in the first 10 days as the reaction cell
window conditions. This is normal and does not require another cleaning.
9.3.8. CHANGING CRITICAL FLOW ORIFICES
There are several critical flow orifices installed in the M200EH/EM, Figure 9-5 shows one of the two most
important orifice assemblies, located on the reaction cell. Refer to Section 10.3.3 for a detailed description on
functionality and locations. Despite the fact that these flow restrictors are protected by sintered stainless steel
filters, they can, on occasion, clog up, particularly if the instrument is operated without sample filter or in an
environment with very fine, sub-micron particle-size dust.
The M200EH/EM introduces an orifice holder that makes changing the orifice very easy. In fact, it is
recommended to keep spare orifice holder assemblies at hand to minimize downtime and swap orifices in a
matter of a few minutes. Appendix B lists several complete spare part kits for this purpose.
To replace a critical flow orifice, do the following:
1. Turn off power to the instrument and vacuum pump. Remove the analyzer cover and locate the reaction
cell (Figure 9-5, Figure 11- and Figure 3-4).
2. Unscrew the 1/8” sample and ozone air tubes from the reaction cell
3. For orifices on the reaction cell (Figure 9-5): Unscrew the orifice holder with a 9/16” wrench. This part
holds all components of the critical flow assembly as shown in
Figure 9-6. Appendix B contains a list of spare part numbers.
4. For orifices in the vacuum manifold: the assembly is similar to the one shown in
Figure 9-6, but without the orifice holder, part number 04090, and bottom O-ring OR34 and with an NPT
fitting in place of the FT 10 fitting. After taking off the connecting tube, unscrew the NPT fitting.
04521C (DCN5731)
Instrument Maintenance Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
186
Figure 9-6: Critical Flow Orifice Assembly
5. Take out the components of the assembly: a spring, a sintered filter, two O-rings and the orifice. For the
vacuum manifold only, you may need to use a scribe or pressure from the vacuum port to get the parts
out of the manifold.
6. Discard the two O-rings and the sintered filter and the critical flow orifice.
7. Re-assemble the flow control assembly with new the parts (see Appendix B for part number or
replacement kit) as shown in Figure 9-6 and re-connect them to the reaction cell manifold or the
vacuum manifold.
8. Reconnect all tubing, power up the analyzer and pump and - after a warm-up period of 30 minutes, carry
out a leak test as described in Section 0.
9.3.9. CHECKING FOR LIGHT LEAKS
When re-assembled or operated improperly, the M200EH/EM can develop small leaks around the PMT, which
let stray light from the analyzer surrounding into the PMT housing. To find such light leaks, follow the below
procedures. CAUTION: this procedure can only be carried out with the analyzer running and its cover removed.
This procedure should only be carried out by qualified personnel.
1. Scroll the TEST functions to PMT.
2. Supply zero gas to the analyzer.
3. With the instrument still running, carefully remove the analyzer cover. Take extra care not to touch any
of the inside wiring with the metal cover or your body. Do not drop screws or tools into a running
analyzer!
4. Shine a powerful flashlight or portable incandescent light at the inlet and outlet fitting and at all of the
joints of the reaction cell as well as around the PMT housing. The PMT value should not respond to the
light, the PMT signal should remain steady within its usually noise.
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Instrument Maintenance
187
5. If there is a PMT response to the external light, symmetrically tighten the reaction cell mounting screws
or replace the 1/4” vacuum tubing with new, black PTFE tubing (this tubing will fade with time and
become transparent). Often, light leaks are also caused by O-rings being left out of the assembly.
6. Carefully replace the analyzer cover.
7. If tubing was changed, carry out a leak check (Section 0).
USER NOTES:
04521C (DCN5731)
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Theory of Operation
189
10. THEORY OF OPERATION
The M200EH/EM Nitrogen Oxides Analyzer is a microprocessor controlled instrument that determines the
concentration of nitric oxide (NO), total nitrogen oxides (NOX, the sum of NO and NO2) and nitrogen dioxide
(NO2) in a sample gas drawn through the instrument. It requires that sample and calibration gases are supplied
at ambient atmospheric pressure in order to establish a constant gas flow through the reaction cell where the
sample gas is exposed to ozone (O3), initiating a chemical reaction that gives off light (chemiluminescence). The
instrument measures the amount of chemiluminescence to determine the amount of NO in the sample gas. A
catalytic-reactive converter converts any NO2 in the sample gas to NO, which is then – including the NO in the
sample gas – is then reported as NOX. NO2 is calculated as the difference between NOX and NO.
Calibration of the instrument is performed in software and usually does not require physical adjustments to the
instrument. During calibration, the microprocessor measures the sensor output signal when gases with known
amounts of NO or NO2 are supplied and stores these results in memory. The microprocessor uses these
calibration values along with the signal from the sample gas and data of the current temperature and pressure of
the gas to calculate a final NOX concentration.
The concentration values and the original information from which it was calculated are stored in the unit’s
internal data acquisition system (iDAS Section 6.7.2) and are reported to the user through a vacuum
fluorescence display or several output ports.
10.1. MEASUREMENT PRINCIPLE
10.1.1. CHEMILUMINESCENCE
The principle of the M200EH/EM’s measurement method is the detection of chemiluminescence, which occurs
when nitrogen oxide (NO) reacts with ozone (O3). This reaction is a two-step process. In the first step, one
molecule of NO and one molecule of O3 collide and chemically react to produce one molecule of oxygen (O2)
and one molecule of nitrogen dioxide (NO2). Some of the NO2 retains a certain amount of excess energy from
the collision and, hence, remains in an excited state, which means that one of the electrons of the NO2 molecule
resides in a higher energy state than is normal (denoted by an asterisk in Equation 10-1).
223 +→+ONOONO *
(Equation 10-1)
Thermodynamics requires that systems seek the lowest stable energy state, hence, the NO2 molecule quickly
returns to its ground state in a subsequent step, releasing the excess energy in form of a quantum of light (h)
with wavelengths between 600 and 3000 nm, with a peak at about 1200 nm (Equation 10-2, Figure 10-10-1).
νhNONO +
2
*
2→
(Equation 10-2)
All things being constant, the relationship between the amount of NO present in the reaction cell and the amount
of light emitted from the reaction is very linear. More NO produces more light, which can be measured with a
light-sensitive sensor in the near-infrared spectrum (Figure 10-10-1). In order to maximize the yield of reaction
(1), the M200EH/EM supplies the reaction cell with a large, constant excess of ozone (about 3000-5000 ppm)
from the internal ozone generator.
04521C (DCN5731)
Theory of Operation Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
190
Model 200E Instrument Response
0 a.u.
20 a.u.
40 a.u.
60 a.u.
80 a.u.
100 a.u.
120 a.u.
140 a.u.
0.5µm 0.7µm 0.9µm 1.1µm 1.3µm 1.5µm 1.7µm 1.9µm
Wavelength
Intensit
y
Optical Hi-Pass Filter Performance
NO + O3 Emission Spectrum
PMT
Response
M200EH/EM
Sensitivity Window
Figure 10-10-1: M200EH/EM Sensitivity Spectrum
However, only about 20% of the NO2 that is formed through reaction 10-1 is in the excited state. In addition, the
excited NO2 can collide with another collision partner M in the reaction cell (mostly other molecules but also cell
walls) and transfer its excess energy to its collision partner without emitting any light at all (Equation 10-3). In
fact, by far the largest portion of the NO2* returns to the ground state this way, leaving only a few percent yield of
usable chemiluminescence.
MNOMNO ++ 2
*
2→
(Equation 10-3)
In order to enhance the light yield of the reaction, the reaction cell is maintained at reduced pressure. The
probability of a collision between the NO2* molecule and a collision partner M increases proportionally with the
reaction cell pressure. This non-radiating collision with the NO2* molecules is usually referred to as quenching,
an unwanted process further described in Section 10.2.4.2.
10.1.2. NOX AND NO2 DETERMINATION
The only gas that is truly measured in the M200EH/EM is NO. Any NO2 contained in the gas is not detected in
the above process since NO2 does not react with O3 to undergo chemiluminescence.
In order to measure the concentration of NO or NOX (which is defined here as the sum of NO and NO2 in the
sample gas), the M200EH/EM periodically switches the sample gas stream through a converter cartridge filled
with molybdenum (Mo, “moly”) chips heated to a temperature of 315° C. The heated molybdenum reacts with
NO2 in the sample gas and produces a variety of molybdenum oxides and NO according to Equation 10-4.
)°315(++
2CatOMxNOyMoxNO zy
→
(Equation 10-4)
Once the NO2 in the sample gas has been converted to NO, it is routed to the reaction cell where it undergoes
the chemiluminescence reaction described in Equations 10-1 and 10-2.
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Theory of Operation
191
Figure 10-10-2: NO2 Conversion Principle
By converting the NO2 in the sample gas into NO, the analyzer can measure the total NOX (NO+NO2) content of
the sample gas. By switching the NO2 converter in and out of the sample gas stream every 6 - 10 seconds, the
M200EH/EM analyzer is able to quasi-continuously measure both the NO and the total NOX content.
The NO2 concentration, finally, is not measured but calculated by simply subtracting the known NO content of
the sample gas from the known NOX content.
10.2. CHEMILUMINESCENCE DETECTION
10.2.1. THE PHOTO MULTIPLIER TUBE
The M200EH/EM uses a photo-multiplier tube (PMT) to detect the amount of light created by the NO and O3
reaction in the reaction cell.
A PMT is typically a vacuum tube containing a variety of specially designed electrodes. Photons enter the PMT
and strike a negatively charged photo cathode causing it to emit electrons. These electrons are accelerated by
an applied high voltage and multiply through a sequence of such acceleration steps (dynodes) until a useable
current signal is generated. This current increases or decreases with the amount of detected light (Section
10.4.3 for more details), is converted to a voltage and amplified by the preamplifier board and then reported to
the motherboard’s analog inputs.
04521C (DCN5731)
Theory of Operation Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
192
Figure 10-10-3: Reaction Cell with PMT Tube
10.2.2. OPTICAL FILTER
Another critical component in the method by which your M200EH/EM detects chemiluminescence is the optical
filter that lies between the reaction cell and the PMT (Figure: 10-3). This filter is a high pass filter that is only
transparent to wavelengths of light above 645 nm. In conjunction with the response characteristics of the PMT,
this filter creates a very narrow window of wavelengths of light to which the M200EH/EM will respond (Figure 10-
10-1).
The narrow band of sensitivity allows the M200EH/EM to ignore extraneous light and radiation that might
interfere with the M200EH/EM’s measurement. For instance, some oxides of sulfur can also undergo
chemiluminescence when in contact with O3 but emit light at shorter wavelengths (usually around 260 nm to 480
nm).
10.2.3. AUTO ZERO
Inherent in the operation of any PMT is a certain amount of noise. This is due to a variety of factors such as
black body infrared radiation given off by the metal components of the reaction cell, unit to unit variations in the
PMT units and even the constant universal background radiation that surrounds us at all times. In order to
reduce this amount of noise and offset, the PMT is kept at a constant 7° C (45° F) by a thermo-electric cooler
(TEC).
While this intrinsic noise and offset is significantly reduced by cooling the PMT, it is not eradicated. To
determine how much noise remains, the M200EH/EM diverts the sample gas flow directly to the vacuum
manifold without passing the reaction cell once every minute for about 5 seconds (Figure 10-10-4). During this
time, only O3 is present in the reaction cell, effectively turning off the chemiluminescence reaction. Once the
chamber is completely dark, the M200EH/EM records the output of the PMT and keeps a running average of
these AZERO values. This average offset value is subtracted from the raw PMT readings while the instrument
is measuring NO and NOX to arrive at a auto-zero corrected reading.
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Theory of Operation
193
Figure 10-10-4: Reaction Cell During the AutoZero Cycle.
10.2.4. MEASUREMENT INTERFERENCES
It should be noted that the chemiluminescence method is subject to interferences from a number of sources.
The M200EH/EM has been successfully tested for its ability to reject interference from most of these sources.
Table 10-1 lists the most important gases, which may interfere with the detection of NO in the M200EH/EM.
10.2.4.1. Direct Interference
Some gases can directly alter the amount of light detected by the PMT due to chemiluminescence in the reaction
cell. This can either be a gas that undergoes chemiluminescence by reacting with O3 in the reaction cell or a
gas that reacts with other compounds and produces excess NO upstream of the reaction cell.
10.2.4.2. Third Body Quenching
As shown in Equation 10-3, other molecules in the reaction cell can collide with the excited NO2
*, preventing the
chemiluminescence of Equation 10-2, a process known as quenching. CO2 and H2O are the most common
quenching interferences, but N2 and O2 also contribute to this interference type.
Quenching is an unwanted phenomenon and the extent to which it occurs depends on the properties of the
collision partner. larger, more polarized molecules such as H2O and CO2 quench NO chemiluminescence more
effectively than smaller, less polar and electronically “harder” molecules such as N2 and O2.
The influence of water vapor on the M200EH/EM measurement can be eliminated with an optional, internal
sample gas dryer. The concentrations of N2 and O2 are virtually constant in ambient air measurements, hence
provide a constant amount of quenching and the interference of varying CO2 amounts is negligible at low
concentrations.
04521C (DCN5731)
Theory of Operation Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
194
The M200EH and 200EM analyzers are typically used in high CO2 concentration environments. The pneumatic
setup of these two analyzer models minimizes the interference from CO2 such that the analyzers conform to the
standards set forth by the US-EPA in Method 20 - NOx from Stationary Gas Turbines, available at
http://www.epa.gov/ttn/emc/promgate.html
Table 10-1: List of Interferents
GAS INTERFERENCE TYPE REJECTION METHOD
Dilution: Viscosity of CO2 molecules causes them to
collect in aperture of Critical Flow Orifice altering flow
rate of NO.
CO2 3rd Body Quenching: CO2 molecules collide with
NO2* molecules absorbing excess energy kinetically
and preventing emission of photons.
If high concentrations of CO2 are suspected,
special calibration methods must be performed to
account for the affects of the CO2.
Contact Teledyne Instruments Customer Service
department for details.
Some SOX variants can also initiate a
chemiluminescence reaction upon exposure to O3
producing excess light.
Wavelengths of light produced by
chemiluminescence of SOX are screened out by
the Optical Filter.
Chemically reacts with NH3, O2 and H2O in O3
generator to create (NH3)2SO4 (ammonium sulfate)
and NH3NO2 (ammonium nitrate) which form opaque
white deposits on optical filter window. Also forms
highly corrosive HNO3 (Nitric Acid)
Most of the ammonium sulfate and ammonium
nitrate produced is removed from the sample gas
by an air purifier located between the O3
Generator and the reaction cell.
SOX
3rd Body quenching: SOX molecules collide with NO2*
molecules absorbing excess energy kinetically and
preventing emission of photons.
If high concentrations of SOX are suspected,
special calibration methods must be performed to
account for the affects of the SO2.
Contact Teledyne Instruments Customer Service
department for details.
3rd Body quenching: H2O molecules collide with NO2*
molecules absorbing excess energy kinetically and
preventing emission of photons.
Analyzer’s operating in high humidity areas must
have some method of drying applied to the
sample gas supply (Section 5.10 for more details).
H20 Chemically reacts with NH3 and SOX in O3 generator
to create (NH3)2SO4 (ammonium sulfate) and
NH3NO2 (ammonium nitrate) which form opaque
white deposits on optical filter Window. Also forms
highly corrosive HNO3 (nitric acid)
Removed from the O3 gas stream by the Perma
Pure® Dryer (Section 10.3.7 for more details).
NH3
Direct Interference: NH3 is converted to H2O and NO
by the NO2 converter. Excess NO reacts with O3 in
reaction cell creating excess chemiluminescence.
If a high concentration of NH3 is suspected, steps
must be taken to remove the NH3 from the sample
gas prior to its entry into the NO2 converter.
Chemically reacts with H2O, O2 and SOX in O3
generator to create (NH3)2SO4 (ammonium sulfate)
and NH3NO2 (ammonium nitrate) which form opaque
white deposits on optical filter window. Also forms
highly corrosive HNO3 (nitric acid).
The Perma Pure® dryer built into the M200EH/EM
is sufficient for removing typical ambient
concentration levels of NH3.
In cases with excessively high CO2 concentrations (larger than 0.5%), the effect can be calibrated out by using
calibration gases with a CO2 content equal to the measured air. Only very high and highly variable CO2
concentrations will then be cause of measurable interference. For those applications, we recommend to use
other analyzer models. Please consult sales or our website.
10.2.4.3. Light Leaks
The M200EH/EM sensitivity curve includes a small portion of the visible light spectrum
(Figure 10-1), hence, it is important to make sure than the reaction cell is completely sealed with respect to light.
To ensure this, all pneumatic tubing leading into the reaction cell is either opaque (vacuum exit tubing) in order
to prevent light from entering the cell or light penetration is prevented by stainless steel filters and orifices (gas
entries).
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Theory of Operation
195
10.3. PNEUMATIC OPERATION
CAUTION
It is important that the sample airflow system is leak-tight and not pressurized over
ambient pressure. Regular leak checks should be performed on the analyzer as
described in the maintenance schedule, Table 9-1. Procedures for correctly performing
leak checks can be found in Section 11.5.
10.3.1. PUMP AND EXHAUST MANIFOLD
NOTE
Relative Pressure versus absolute pressure. In this manual vacuum readings are given
in inches of mercury absolute pressure (in-Hg-A), i.e. indicate an absolute pressure
referenced against zero (a perfect vacuum).
The gas flow for the M200EH/EM is created by an external pump (Figure 10-10-5) that is pneumatically
connected through a 6.4 mm / 0.25” tube to the analyzer’s exhaust port located on the rear panel (Figure 3-1).
This pump creates a vacuum of approximately 5 in-Hg-A at one standard liter/minute, which is provided to
various pneumatic components by a vacuum manifold located just in front of the rear panel (Figure 3-1). Gas
flow is created by keeping the analyzer’s sample gas inlet near ambient pressure, usually by means of a small
vent installed in the sample line at the inlet, in effect pulling the gas through the instrument’s pneumatic systems.
There are several advantages to this external pump / pull-through configuration.
By using an external pump, it is possible to remove a significant source of acoustic noise and vibration
from the immediate vicinity of the sensor. The PMT can act as a “microphone”, amplifying noise and
vibration within the chassis. This is one of the main reasons, why the M200EH/EM has an external
pump.
Pumping heats and compresses the sample air, complicating the measurement process if the pump is
upstream.
Most importantly, however, certain physical parts of the pump itself are made of materials that might
chemically react with the sample gas. Placing the pump downstream of the reaction cell avoids these
problems.
To M200EH/EM
Exhaust Port
Figure 10-10-5: External Pump Pack
04521C (DCN5731)
Theory of Operation Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
196
Finally, the M200EH/EM requires a steady, high under-pressure, which cannot be achieved reliably over
extended periods of time with small vacuum pumps. The external pump used for the M200EH/EM has a very
long lifetime and duty cycle and provides a very good vacuum for its entire lifetime. However, the pump is too
large to fit into the chassis of the analyzer.
10.3.2. SAMPLE GAS FLOW
The sample gas is the most critical flow path in the analyzer, as the medium has to be routed through a variety
of valves and tubes for the measurement of zero offset and concentrations of both NO and NOX (and possibly
the drying of the gas if the optional sample dryer is installed). At any point before and in the reaction cell, the
integrity of the sample gas cannot be compromised.
Sample gas flow in the M200EH/EM analyzer is not a directly measured value, but is rather calculated from the
sample pressure using the flow principle across a critical orifice. In general, the differential pressure ratio
between sample pressure and reaction cell pressure needs to exceed 2:1 to allow critical flow. The actual flow
rate is then only dependent on the size of the orifice and the upstream pressure. Refer to Section 10.3.3 for a
detailed description of the instrument’s method of gas flow rate control.
10.3.2.1. NO/NOx and AutoZero cycles
For the routing of the sample gas flow, the analyzer uses a variety of valves. The NO/NOX valve directs the
sample gas either directly to the reaction cell or through the unit’s NO2 converter, alternating every ~4 s. The
AutoZero valve directs the sample gas stream to completely bypass the reaction cell for dark noise
measurement once every minute, which is then subtracted as a measurement offset from the raw concentration
signal. The valve cycle phases are summarized in the following table.
Table 10-2: M200EH/EM Valve Cycle Phases
PHASE
NO/ NOX
VALVE
STATUS
AUTOZERO
VALVE
STATUS
TIME
INDEX ACTIVITY FIGURE
0 - 2 s
Wait period (NO dwell time).
Ensures reaction cell has been
flushed of previous gas.
NO
Measure
Open to
AutoZero
valve
Open to
reaction cell
2 - 4 s Analyzer measures chemilumi-
nescence in reaction cell.
Figure 10-10-2
4 – 6 s
Wait period (NOX dwell time).
Ensures reaction cell has been
flushed of previous gas.
NOX
Measure
Open to
NO2
converter
Open to
reaction cell
6 – 8 s Analyzer measures NO + O3 chemi-
luminescence in reaction cell.
Figure 10-10-2
Cycle repeats every ~8 seconds
0 – 4 s
Wait period (AZERO dwell time).
Ensures reaction cell has been
flushed of sample gas and chemi-
luminescence reaction is stopped.
AutoZero
Open to
AutoZero
valve
Open to
vacuum
manifold
4 - 6 s Analyzer measures background
noise without sample gas
Figure 10-10-4
Cycle repeats every minute
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Theory of Operation
197
10.3.3. FLOW RATE CONTROL - CRITICAL FLOW ORIFICES
The Model M200EH/EM analyzers use special flow control assemblies located at various locations around the
instrument to maintain constant flow rates for both the O3 supply air and the sample gas. These assemblies
consists of:
A critical flow orifice.
Two o-rings: Located just before and after the critical flow orifice, the o-rings seal the gap between the
walls of assembly housing and the critical flow orifice.
A spring: Applies mechanical force needed to form the seal between the o-rings, the critical flow orifice
and the assembly housing.
See Figures 10-6 through 10-9 For the location of these flow control assemblies:
GAS FLOW
CONTROL
ASSEMBLIES
SAMPLE
PRESSURE
SENSOR
VACUUM
PRESSURE
SENSOR
Figure 10-10-6: Location of Gas Flow Control Assemblies for M200EH
04521C (DCN5731)
Theory of Operation Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
198
GAS FLOW
CONTROL
ASSEMBLIES
SAMPLE
PRESSURE
SENSOR
VACUUM
PRESSURE
SENSOR
Figure 10-10-7: Location of Gas Flow Control Assemblies for M200EM
GAS FLOW
CONTROL
ASSEMBLIES
SAMPLE
PRESSURE
SENSOR
VACUUM
PRESSURE
SENSOR
Figure 10-10-8: Location of Gas Flow Control Assemblies for M200EH with O2 sensor Option 65
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Theory of Operation
199
GAS FLOW
CONTROL
ASSEMBLIES
SAMPLE
PRESSURE
SENSOR
VACUUM
PRESSURE
SENSOR
Figure 10-10-9: Location of Gas Flow Control Assemblies for M200EH with Second Span Point Option 52
NOTE:
Location of flow control assemblies in the M200EH/EM with zero/span option 50
installed are the same as shown in Figures 10-6 and 10-7.
10.3.3.1. Critical Flow Orifice
The most important component of the flow control assemblies is the critical flow orifice.
Critical flow orifices are a remarkably simple way to regulate stable gas flow rates. They operate without moving
parts by taking advantage of the laws of fluid dynamics. By restricting the flow of gas though the orifice, a
pressure differential is created. This pressure differential combined with the action of the analyzer’s pump draws
the gas through the orifice.
As the pressure on the downstream side of the orifice (the pump side) continues to drop, the speed that the gas
flows though the orifice continues to rise. Once the ratio of upstream pressure to downstream pressure is
greater than 2:1, the velocity of the gas through the orifice reaches the speed of sound. As long as that ratio
stays at least 2:1 the gas flow rate is unaffected by any fluctuations, surges, or changes in downstream pressure
because such variations only travel at the speed of sound themselves and are therefore cancelled out by the
sonic shockwave at the downstream exit of the critical flow orifice.
04521C (DCN5731)
Theory of Operation Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
200
Figure 10-10-10: Flow Control Assembly & Critical Flow Orifice
The actual flow rate of gas through the orifice (volume of gas per unit of time), depends on the size and shape of
the aperture in the orifice. The larger the hole, the more gas molecules, moving at the speed of sound, pass
through the orifice.
With nominal pressures of 28 and 4 in-Hg-A for the sample and reaction cell pressures, respectively the
necessary ratio of sample to reaction cell pressure of 2:1 is largely exceeded and accommodates a wide range
of possible variability in atmospheric pressure and pump degradation extending the useful life of the pump.
Once the pump does degrades to the point where the vacuum pressure exceeds 14 in-Hg-A so that the ratio
between sample and vacuum pressures is less than 2:1 a critical flow rate can no longer be maintained. At this
point, the instrument will display “XXXX" indicating an invalid sample flow rate.
The following table lists the gas flow rates of the critical flow orifices in the standard M200EH/EM
Table 10-3: M200EH/EM Critical Flow Orifice Diameters and Gas Flow Rates
ORIFICE DIAMETER NOMINAL FLOWRATE
(cm³/min)
LOCATION PURPOSE
M200EH M200EM M200EH M200EM
Bypass Manifold out to
No/NOx valve and NO2
converter
Controls rate of flow of sample gas into the NO2
converter and reaction cell. 0.003” 0.007” 40 250
Vacuum Manifold:
Bypass Manifold Port
Controls rate of sample gas flow that bypasses
the analyzer when bypassing the reaction cell
during the auto-zero cycle.
0.007” N/A 250 N/A
TOTAL INLET GAS FLOW – Standard Configuration 290 250
Vacuum manifold: O2
sensor port
Controls rate of flow of zero purge gas through
the O2 sensor (when installed and enabled) when
inactive.
0.004" 0.004" 80 80
TOTAL INLET GAS FLOW – With O2 Sensor Option 370 330
O3 supply inlet of
reaction cell.
Controls rate of flow of ozone gas into the
reaction cell. 0.007” 0.007” 250 250
Dry air return of Perma
Pure® dryer
Controls flow rate of dry air return / purge air of
the dryer. 0.004" 0.004" 80 80
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Theory of Operation
201
In addition to controlling the gas flows, the two critical flow orifices at the inlets of the reaction cell also maintain
an under-pressure inside the reaction cell, effectively reducing the number of molecules in the chamber and
therefore increasing the chemiluminescence yield as the likelihood of third body quenching is reduced (Section
10.2.4.1). The M200EH/EM sensitivity reaches a peak at about 2 in-Hg-A, below which the sensitivity drops due
to a low number of molecules and decreased yield in the chemiluminescence reaction.
EFFECT OF TEMPERATURE ON CRITICAL FLOW
Changes in temperature will cause the critical flow orifice materials to expand or contract. Even though these
changes are extremely small, they can alter the diameter of the critical flow orifice enough to cause noticeable
changes in the flow rate though the orifice. To alleviate this problem the two most important of the flow
assemblies (those controlling the sample gas an O3 gas flow)in the M200EH/EM are maintained at a constant
temperature.
10.3.4. SAMPLE PARTICULATE FILTER
To remove particles in the sample gas, the analyzer is equipped with a 5PTFE membrane filter of 47 mm
diameter (also referred to as the sample filter) with a 1 µm pore size. The filter is accessible through the front
panel, which folds down (after removal of the CE Mark safety screw), and should be changed according to the
maintenance schedule in Table 9-1.
10.3.5. OZONE GAS AIR FLOW
The excess ozone needed for reaction with NO in the reaction cell is generated inside the analyzer because of
the instability and toxicity of ozone. Besides the ozone generator itself, this requires a dry air supply and filtering
of the gas before it is introduced into the reaction cell. Due to its toxicity and aggressive chemical behavior, O3
must also be removed from the gas stream before it can be vented through the exhaust outlet.
In contrast to the sample flow, the ozone flow is measured with a mass flow sensor, which is mounted on the
pneumatic sensor board (Figure 11-), just behind the PMT sensor assembly. This mass flow sensor has a full
scale range of 0-1000 cm³/min and can be calibrated through software to its span point (Section 6.13.7.5). As
the flow value displayed on the front panel is an actual measurement (and not a calculated value), the flow
variability may be higher than that of the sample flow, which is based on a calculation from (more stable)
differential pressures. On the other hand, the drift, i.e. long-term change, in the ozone flow rate may be higher
and usually indicates a flow problem. As with all other test parameters, we recommend to monitor the ozone
flow over time for predictive diagnostics and maintenance evaluation.
CAUTION
Ozone (O3) is a toxic gas. Obtain a Material and Safety Data Sheet
(MSDS) for this gas. Read and rigorously follow the safety guide-
lines described there. Always make sure that the plumbing of the
O3 generation and supply system is maintained and leak-free.
04521C (DCN5731)
Theory of Operation Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
202
10.3.6. O3 GENERATOR
The M200EH/EM uses a corona discharge (CD) tube for creating its O3. Corona discharge generation is
capable of producing high concentrations of ozone efficiently and with low excess heat. Although there are
many cell designs, the fundamental principle remains the same (Figure 10-10-11).
Figure 10-10-11: Ozone Generator Principle
The M200EH/EM utilizes a dual-dielectric design. This method utilizes a glass tube with hollow walls. The
outermost and innermost surfaces are coated with electrically conductive material. The air flows through the
glass tube, between the two conductive coatings, in effect creating a capacitor with the air and glass acting as
the dielectric. The layers of glass also separate the conductive surfaces from the air stream to prevent reaction
with the O3. As the capacitor charges and discharges, electrons are created and accelerated across the air gap
and collide with the O2 molecules in the air stream splitting them into elemental oxygen. Some of these oxygen
atoms recombine with O2 to O3.
The quantity of ozone produced is dependent on factors such as the voltage and frequency of the alternating
current applied to the CD cells. When enough high-energy electrons are produced to ionize the O2 molecules, a
light emitting, gaseous plasma is formed, which is commonly referred to as a corona, hence the name corona
discharge generator.
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Theory of Operation
203
10.3.7. PERMA PURE® DRYER
The air supplied to the O3 generation system needs to be as dry as possible. Normal room air contains a certain
amount of water vapor, which greatly diminishes the yield of ozone produced by the ozone generator. Also,
water can react with other chemicals inside the O3 Generator to produce chemicals that damage the optical filter
located in the reaction cell (Table 10-1) such as ammonium sulfate or highly corrosive nitric acid.
To accomplish this task the M200EH/EM uses a Perma Pure® single tube permeation dryer. The dryer consists
of a single tube of Nafion® , a co-polymer similar to Teflon® that absorbs water very well but not other chemicals.
The Nafion® tube is mounted within an outer, flexible plastic tube. As gas flows through the inner Nafion® tube,
water vapor is absorbed into the membrane walls. The absorbed water is transported through the membrane
wall and evaporates into the dry, purge gas flowing through the outer tube, countercurrent to the gas in the inner
tube (Figure 10-10-12).
Figure 10-10-12: Semi-Permeable Membrane Drying Process
This process is called per-evaporation and is driven by the humidity gradient between the inner and outer tubes
as well as the flow rates and pressure difference between inner and outer tubing. Unlike micro-porous
membrane permeation, which transfers water through a relatively slow diffusion process, per-evaporation is a
simple kinetic reaction. Therefore, the drying process occurs quickly, typically within milliseconds. The first step
in this process is a chemical reaction between the molecules of the Nafion® material and water, other chemical
components of the gases to be dried are usually unaffected. The chemical reaction is based on hydrogen bonds
between the water molecule and the Nafion material. Other small polar gases that are capable of hydrogen
bonds can be absorbed this way, too, such as ammonia (NH3) and some low molecular amines. The gases of
interest, NO and NO2, do not get absorbed and pass the dryer unaltered.
To provide a dry purge gas for the outer side of the Nafion tube, the M200EH/EM returns some of the dried air
from the inner tube to the outer tube (Figure 10-10-13). When the analyzer is first started, the humidity gradient
between the inner and outer tubes is not very large and the dryer’s efficiency is low at first but improves as this
cycle reduces the moisture in the sample gas and settles at a minimum humidity.
04521C (DCN5731)
Theory of Operation Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
204
Figure 10-10-13: M200EH/EM Perma Pure® Dryer
Just like on startup, if the instrument is turned on after having been off for more than 30 minutes, it takes a
certain amount of time for the humidity gradient to become large enough for the Perma Pure® Dryer to
adequately dry the air. In this case, called a cold start, the O3 Generator is not turned on for 30 minutes. When
rebooting the instrument within less than 30 minutes of power-down, the generator is turned on immediately.
The Perma Pure® Dryer used in the M200EH/EM is capable of adequately drying ambient air to a dew point of ≤
-5˚C (~4000 ppm residual H2O) at a flow rate of 1 standard liter per minute (slpm) or down to ≤ -15˚C (~1600
ppm residual H2O) at 0.5 slpm. The Perma Pure® Dryer is also capable of removing ammonia from the sample
gas up to concentrations of approximately 1 ppm.
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Theory of Operation
205
10.3.8. OZONE SUPPLY AIR FILTER
The M200EH/EM uses ambient air as the supply gas for the O3 generator and may produce a variety of
byproducts. Small amounts of water, ammonia and various sulfur oxides can combine to create ammonium
sulfate, ammonium nitrate, nitric acid and other compounds. Whereas sulfates and nitrates can create powdery
residues inside the reaction cell causing sensitivity drift, nitric acid is a very aggressive compound, which can
deteriorate the analyzer’s components. In order to remove these chemical byproducts from the O3 gas stream,
the output of the O3 generator flows through a special filter between the generator and the reaction cell.
Any NOX that may be produced in the generator (from reaction of O2 or O3 and N2 in the air) and may cause an
artifact in the measurement, is calibrated out through the Auto-zero functionality, which checks the background
signal of the O3 stream only once per minute.
10.3.9. OZONE SCRUBBER
Even though ozone is unstable and typically reacts to form O2, the break-down is not quite fast enough to ensure
that it is completely removed from the exhaust gas stream of the M200EH/EM by the time the gas exits the
analyzer. Due to the high toxicity and reactivity of O3, a special catalytic ozone scrubber is used to remove all of
the O3 exiting the reaction cell. Besides its efficient destruction of O3, this catalyst does not produce any toxic or
hazardous gases as it only converts ozone to oxygen.
The O3 scrubber is located inside the NO2 converter housing next to the NO2 converter in order to utilize residual
heat given of by the converter heater. Even though the catalyst is 100% efficient at scrubbing ozone at room
temperature, heating it significantly reduces the necessary residence time (the amount of time the gas must be
in contact with the catalyst) for 100% efficiency and full efficiency can be maintained at higher gas flow rates. As
this is a true catalytic converter, there are no maintenance requirements as would be required for charcoal-
based scrubbers.
A certain amount of fine, black dust may exit the catalyst, particularly if the analyzer is subjected to sudden
pressure drops (for example, when disconnecting the running pump without letting the analyzer properly and
slowly equilibrate to ambient pressure). To avoid the dust from entering the reaction cell or the pump, the
scrubber is equipped with sintered stainless steel filters of 20 µm pore size on either end and on some models,
an additional dust filter may be attached to the exhaust port.
04521C (DCN5731)
Theory of Operation Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
206
10.3.10. PNEUMATIC SENSORS
NOTE
The M200EH/EM displays all pressures in inches of mercury absolute (in-Hg-A), i.e.
absolute pressure referenced against zero (a perfect vacuum).
The M200EH/EM uses three pneumatic sensors to verify gas streams. These sensors are located on a printed
circuit assembly, called the pneumatic pressure/flow sensor board, located just behind the sensor assembly.
10.3.10.1. Vacuum Manifold
The vacuum manifold is the central exit port for all analyzer pneumatics. All gas streams of the analyzer exit
through this assembly and connect to the instrument’s pump. Figure 10-10-14 shows the standard
configuration. Configurations will vary depending on the optional equipment that is installed. An IZS option, for
example, will add another FT8 connector and orifice assembly to the manifold, an optional sample dryer may
add a Tee-fitting so that two ¼” tubes can be connected to the same port.
At this time, the vacuum manifold does not yet support the orifice holder shown in Figure 9-6. To exchange the
critical orifice installed in the vacuum manifold, the user needs to either blow the orifice out with reversed
pressure or remove the entire manifold for this task. However, orifices installed in the vacuum manifold should
not have to be cleaned under normal circumstances.
Figure 10-10-14: Vacuum Manifold
10.3.10.2. Sample Pressure Sensor
An absolute pressure transducer connected to the input of the NO/NOX valve is used to measure the pressure of
the sample gas before it enters the analyzer’s reaction cell. This is the “upstream” pressure mentioned above,
which is used to compute sample flow rate. In conjunction with the vacuum pressure sensor, it is also used to
validate the critical flow condition (2:1 pressure ratio) through the sample gas critical flow orifice (Section 10.3.3).
If the temperature/pressure compensation (TPC) feature is turned on (Section 10.7.3), the output of this sensor
is also used to supply pressure data for that calculation.
The actual pressure value is viewable through the analyzer’s front panel display as the test function SAMP. The
flow rate of the sample gas is displayed as SAMP FLW.
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Theory of Operation
207
10.3.10.3. Vacuum Pressure Sensor
An absolute pressure transducer connected to the exhaust manifold is used to measure the pressure
downstream from and inside the instrument’s reaction cell. The output of the sensor is used by the CPU to
calculate the pressure differential between the gas upstream of the reaction cell and the gas downstream from it
and is also used as the main diagnostic for proper pump operation. If the ratio between the upstream pressure
and the downstream pressure falls below 2:1, a warning message (SAMPLE FLOW WARN) is displayed on the
analyzer’s front panel (Section6.2.2) and the sample flow rate will display XXXX instead of an actual value. If
this pressure exceeds 10 in-Hg-A, an RCEL PRESSURE WARNING Is issued, even though the analyzer will
continue to calculate a sample flow up to ~14 in Hg.
Also, if the temperature/pressure compensation (TPC) feature is turned on (Section 10.7.3), the output of this
sensor is used to supply pressure data for that calculation. This measurement is viewable through the
analyzer’s front panel as the test function RCEL.
10.3.10.4. O3 Supply Air Flow Sensor
A mass flow meter connected between the Perma Pure® dryer and the O3 generator measures the flow rate of
O3 supply air through the analyzer. This information is used to validate the O3 gas flow rate. If the flow rate
exceeds ±15% of the nominal flow rate (80 cm³/min), a warning message OZONE FLOW WARNING is
displayed on the analyzer’s front panel (Section 6.2.2) and the O3 generator is turned off. As second warning,
OZONE GEN OFF, is displayed. This flow measurement is viewable through instrument’s front panel display as
the test function OZONE FL.
10.3.11. DILUTION MANIFOLD
Certain applications require to measure NOX in sample gases that do not contain any oxygen. However, the
molybdenum NO2 converter requires a minimum amount of oxygen to operate properly and to ensure constant
conversion efficiency. For these special applications, the M200E analyzer may be equipped with a dilution
manifold (Figure 10-10-15) to provide the instrument with an internal sample stream that contains about 2.5%
O2. This manifold is mounted between converter housing and vacuum manifold on a small mounting bracket. If
the dilution manifold is to be mounted in the M200EH/EM analyzer, it will fit on the back of the shown bracket as
the front of the bracket is occupied by the bypass manifold.
The manifold is equipped with two orifice holders that control the flow of the O2-free sample gas and the bleeds
in a small amount of zero air before the combined sample stream goes to the NO/NOX valve for measurement.
The zero air is produced by an external zero air scrubber cartridge, mounted on the rear panel (Figure 3-2 and
)LJXUH).
The dilution manifold is not temperature controlled, although the residual heat of the NO2 converter housing
provides some temperature stability. Tight temperature stability is not critical to the dilution application.
04521C (DCN5731)
Theory of Operation Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
208
Figure 10-10-15: Dilution Manifold
Please inquire with Teledyne-API sales if the M200E can be modified to fit your application.
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Theory of Operation
209
10.4. ELECTRONIC OPERATION
Figure 10-10-16 shows a block diagram of the major electronic components of the M200EH/EM.
Back Panel
Connectors
Optional
Ethernet
Interface
Pneumatic
Sensor
Board
Sample
Pressure
Sensor
Vacuum
Pressure
Sensor
O3 Flow Sensor
Analog Outputs
Status Outputs:
1 – 8
Control Inputs:
1 – 6
PC 104
CPU Card
Disk On
Chip
Flash Chip
RS–232 ONLY
RS–232 or RS–485
Power-Up
Circuit
I2C Bus
Analog
Sensor Inputs
Box
Temp
Thermistor
Interface
REACTION CELL
TEMPERATURE
MOLYBDENUM CONVERTER
TEMPERATURE
PMT
Temperature
Sensor
A1
A2
A3
Optional
4-20 mA
MOTHER
BOARD
A/D
Converter(
V/F)
PC 104
Bus
External
Digital I/O)
COM1
Analog
Outputs
(D/A)
Keybd &
Display
RELAY
BOARD
I
2
C Status
LED
PUMP
(Externally Powered)
A4
COM2
CPU STATUS
LED
NO/NOx
Valve
IZS OPTION
PERMEATION TUBE
TEMPERATURE
Autozero
Valve
Sample Cal
Valve Option
Option
IZS Valve
Option
Reaction Cell
Heater
Molybdenum
Converter Heater
IZS Option
Permeation Tube
Heater
PMT TEC
PMT
MOLYBDENUM CONVERTER
TEMPERATURE SIGNAL
TEC Drive
PCA
Internal
Digital I/O
ELECTRIC TEST CONTROL
OPTIC TEST CONTROL
PMT OUTPUT (PMT DET)
O2 Sensor
Option
HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY LEVEL
PMT TEMPERATURE
PMT
PREAMP PCA
O2 OPTION
TEMPERATURE
Figure 10-10-16: M200EH/EM Electronic Block Diagram
The core of the analyzer is a microcomputer (CPU) that controls various internal processes, interprets data,
calculates data, and reports results using specialized firmware developed by Teledyne Instruments. It
communicates with the user, receives data from and issues commands to a variety of peripheral devices through
the motherboard, the main printed circuit assembly on the rear panel (Figure 3-1).
04521C (DCN5731)
Theory of Operation Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
210
10.4.1. CPU
The CPU is a low power (5 VDC, 0.8A max), high performance, 386-based microcomputer running a version of
the DOS operating system. Its operation and assembly conform to the PC-104 specification, version 2.3 for
embedded PC and PC/AT applications. It has 2 MB of DRAM memory on board and operates at 40 MHz clock
rate over an internal, 32-bit data and address bus. Chip to chip data handling is performed by two 4-channel,
direct memory access (DMA) devices over data busses of either 8-bit or 16-bit bandwidth. The CPU supports
both RS-232 and RS-485 serial protocols. Figure 10-10-17 shows the CPU board.
The CPU communicates with the user and the outside world in a variety of ways:
Through the analyzer’s keyboard and vacuum fluorescence display over a clocked, digital, serial I/O bus
using the I2C protocol (read I-square-C bus)
RS-232 and/or RS-485 serial ports (one of which can be connected to an Ethernet converter)
Various analog voltage and current outputs
Several digital I/O channels
Figure 10-10-17: M200EH/EM CPU Board Annotated
Finally, the CPU issues commands (also over the I2C bus) to a series of relays and switches located on a
separate printed circuit assembly, the relay board (located in the right rear of the chassis on its own mounting
bracket) to control the function of heaters and valves. The CPU includes two types of non-volatile data storage,
one disk-on-chip and one or two flash chips.
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Theory of Operation
211
10.4.1.1. Disk On Chip
Technically, the disk-on-chip is an EEPROM, but appears to the CPU as, behaves as, and performs the same
functions in the system as an 8 mb disk drive, internally labeled as DOS drive C:\. It is used to store the
computer’s operating system files, the Teledyne Instruments firmware and peripheral files, and the operational
data generated by the analyzer’s internal data acquisition system (iDAS - Sections 10.7.5 and 6.7).
10.4.1.2. Flash Chip
The flash chip is another, smaller EEPROM with about 64 kb of space, internally labeled as DOS drive B:\. The
M200EH/EM CPU board can accommodate up to two EEPROM flash chips. The M200EH/EM standard
configuration is one chip with 64 kb of storage capacity, which is used to store the analyzer configuration as
created during final checkout at the factory. Separating these data onto a less frequently accessed chip
significantly decreases the chance of data corruption through drive failure.
In the unlikely event that the flash chip should fail, the analyzer will continue to operate with just the DOC.
However, all configuration information will be lost, requiring the unit to be recalibrated.
10.4.2. SENSOR MODULE, REACTION CELL
Electronically, the M200EH/EM sensor assembly (see Figure 9-6) consists of several subassemblies with
different tasks: to detect the intensity of the light from the chemiluminescence reaction between NO and O3 in
the reaction cell, to produce a current signal proportional to the intensity of the chemiluminescence, to control
the temperature of the PMT to ensure the accuracy and stability of the measurements and to drive the high
voltage power supply that is needed for the PMT. The individual functions are described individually below,
Section 11.6.6 shows the sensor assembly and its components.
10.4.2.1. Reaction Cell Heating Circuit
The stability of the chemiluminescence reaction between NO and O3 can be affected by changes in the
temperature and pressure of the O3 and sample gases in the reaction cell. In order to reduce temperature
effects, the reaction cell is maintained at a constant 50 C, just above the high end of the instrument’s operation
temperature range.
Two AC heaters, one embedded into the bottom of the reaction cell, the other embedded directly above the
chamber’s exhaust fitting, provide the heat source. These heaters operate off of the instrument’s main AC
power and are controlled by the CPU through a power relay on the relay board (Section 10.4.7). A thermistor,
also embedded in the bottom of the reaction cell, reports the cell’s temperature to the CPU through the
thermistor interface circuitry of the motherboard (Section 0).
04521C (DCN5731)
Theory of Operation Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
212
10.4.3. PHOTO MULTIPLIER TUBE (PMT)
The M200EH/EM uses a photo multiplier tube (PMT) to detect the amount of chemiluminescence created in the
sample chamber.
PMT Housing End Plate
This is the entry to the PMT Exchange
PMT Preamp PCA
High voltage Power Supply
(HVPS)
PMT
PMT Cold Block
Connector to PMT
Pre Amp PCA
12V Power
Connector
Cooling Fan
Housing
TEC Driver PCA
PMT Heat Exchange Fins
Li
g
ht from Reaction
Chamber shines
throu
g
h hole in side
of Cold Block
Insulation Gasket
PMT Power Supply
& Aux. Signal
Connector
PMT Output
Connector
Thermo-Electric Cooler
(TEC)
PMT Temperature
Senso
r
O-Test LED
Figure 10-10-18: PMT Housing Assembly
A typical PMT is a vacuum tube containing a variety of specially designed electrodes. Photons from the reaction
are filtered by an optical high-pass filter, enter the PMT and strike a negatively charged photo cathode causing it
to emit electrons. A high voltage potential across these focusing electrodes directs the electrons toward an
array of high voltage dynodes. The dynodes in this electron multiplier array are designed so that each stage
multiplies the number of emitted electrons by emitting multiple, new electrons. The greatly increased number of
electrons emitted from one end of electron multiplier are collected by a positively charged anode at the other
end, which creates a useable current signal. This current signal is amplified by the preamplifier board and then
reported to the motherboard.
Figure 10-10-19: Basic PMT Design
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Theory of Operation
213
A significant performance characteristic of the PMT is the voltage potential across the electron multiplier. The
higher the voltage, the greater is the number of electrons emitted from each dynode of the electron multiplier,
making the PMT more sensitive and responsive to small variations in light intensity but also more noisy (dark
noise). The gain voltage of the PMT used in the M200EH/EM is usually set between 450 V and 800 V. This
parameter is viewable through the front panel as test function HVPS (see Section 6.2.1). For information on
when and how to set this voltage, see Section 11.6.3.8.
The PMT is housed inside the PMT module assembly (see Figure 10-18). This assembly also includes the high
voltage power supply required to drive the PMT, an LED used by the instrument’s optical test function, a
thermistor that measures the temperature of the PMT and various components of the PMT cooling system
including the thermo-electric cooler (TEC).
10.4.4. PMT COOLING SYSTEM.
The performance of the analyzer’s PMT is significantly affected by temperature. Variations in PMT temperature
are directly reflected in the signal output of the PMT. Also the signal to noise ratio of the PMT output is radically
influenced by temperature as well. The warmer The PMT is, the noisier its signal becomes until the noise
renders the concentration signal useless. To alleviate this problem a special cooling system exists that
maintains the PMT temperature at a stable, low level
TEC
Control
PCA
PMT Preamp
PCA
Thermistor
out
p
uts tem
p
of
cold block to
preamp PCA
Preamp PCA sends
buffered and
amplified thermistor
signal to TEC PCA
TEC PCA sets
appropriate
drive voltage
for cooler
Heat form PMT is absorbed
by the cold block and
transferred to the heat sink
via the TEC then bled off
into the cool air stream.
PMT
Cold Block
Heat Sink
Cooling Fan
ThermoElectric Cooler
Figure 10-10-20: PMT Cooling System
10.4.4.1. TEC Control Board
The TEC control printed circuit assembly is located ion the sensor housing assembly, under the slanted shroud,
next to the cooling fins and directly above the cooling fan. Using the amplified PMT temperature signal from the
PMT preamplifier board (see Section 10.4.5), it sets the drive voltage for the thermoelectric cooler. The warmer
the PMT gets, the more current is passed through the TEC causing it to pump more heat to the heat sink.
A red LED located on the top edge of this circuit board indicates that the control circuit is receiving power. Four
test points are also located at the top of this assembly. For the definitions and acceptable signal levels of these
test points see Chapter 11.
04521C (DCN5731)
Theory of Operation Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
214
10.4.5. PMT PREAMPLIFIER
The PMT preamplifier board amplifies the PMT signal into a useable analog voltage (PMT) that can be
processed by the motherboard into a digital signal to be used by the CPU to calculate the NO, NO2 and NOx
concentrations of the gas in the sample chamber.
The output signal of the PMT is controlled by two different adjustments. First, the voltage across the electron
multiplier array of the PMT is adjusted with a set of two hexadecimal switches. Adjusting this voltage directly
affects the HVPS voltage and, hence, the signal from the PMT. Secondly, the gain of the amplified signal can
further be adjusted through a potentiometer. These adjustments should only be performed when encountering
problems with the software calibration that cannot be rectified otherwise. See Section 11.6.3.8 for this hardware
calibration.
To
Motherboard
PMT Preamp PCA
Low
Pass Noise
Filter
E Test Control
From CPU
MUX
Amp to
Voltage
Converter/
Amplifier
D-A
Converter
PMT
Coarse
Gain Set
(Rotary
PMT Fine
Gain Set
(Rotary
Switch)
PMT
Signal
Offset
E-Test
Generator
O-Test
Generator
O Test Control
From CPU
PMT Temp
Sensor PMT
Temperature
Feedback
Circuit
TEC Control
PCA
PMT Output
PMT HVPS
Drive Voltage
PMT Temp Analog Signal
to Motherboard
PMT Output Signal
(PMT) to Motherboard
O Test
LED
Figure 10-10-21: PMT Preamp Block Diagram
The PMT temperature control loop maintains the PMT temperature around 7° C and can be viewed as test
function PMT TEMP on the front panel (see Section 6.2.1).
The electrical test (ETEST) circuit generates a constant, electronic signal intended to simulate the output of the
PMT (after conversion from current to voltage). By bypassing the detector’s actual signal, it is possible to test
most of the signal handling and conditioning circuitry on the PMT preamplifier board. See section 6.9.6 for
instructions on performing this test.
The optical test (OTEST) feature causes an LED inside the PMT cold block to create a light signal that can be
measured with the PMT. If zero air is supplied to the analyzer, the entire measurement capability of the sensor
module can be tested including the PMT and the current to voltage conversion circuit on the PMT preamplifier
board. See section 6.9.5 for instructions on performing this test.
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Theory of Operation
215
10.4.6. PNEUMATIC SENSOR BOARD
The flow and pressure sensors of the M200EH/EM are located on a printed circuit assembly just behind the PMT
sensor. Refer to Section 11.5.15 for information on how to test this assembly. The signals of this board are
supplied to the motherboard for further signal processing. All sensors are linearized in the firmware and can be
span calibrated from the front panel.
10.4.7. RELAY BOARD
The relay board is the central switching and power distribution unit of the analyzer. It contains power relays,
valve drivers and status LEDs for all heated zones and valves, as well as thermocouple amplifiers, power
distribution connectors and the two switching power supplies of the analyzer. The relay board communicates
with the motherboard over the I2C bus and can be used for detailed trouble-shooting of power problems and
valve or heater functionality. See Figure 11-4 for an annotated view of the relay board.
10.4.7.1. Relay PCA Location and Layout
Generally the relay PCA is located in the right-rear quadrant of the analyzer and is mounted vertically on the
back side of the same bracket as the instrument’s DC power supplies, however the exact location of the relay
PCA may differ from model to model (see Figure 3-1)
10.4.7.2. Heater Control
The heater control loop is illustrated in Figure 10-22. Two T/C inputs can be configured for either type-T or type-
K thermocouples. Additionally:
Both T/C’s can be configured as either grounded or ungrounded thermocouples.
Standard configuration of the both type of thermocouples is 10 mV/°C. In order to accommodate the
M200EH’s Mini High-Con converter option, a type-K; 5mV/°C output configuration has been added.
Thermistor(s) – Low Temperature Sensing:
(e.g. Sample Chamber and Reaction
Cell temperatures)
RELAY PCA
DC
Control
Logic
Solid State
AC Relays
Preamplifiers
and Signal
Conditioning
MOTHER BOARD
A/D
Converter
(V/F)
CPU
Themocouple(s)
(High Temperature Sensing;
e.g. Moly and HiCon
Converter temperatures)
AC HEATERSDC HEATERS
THERMOCOUPLE
CONFIGURATION
JUMPER
(JP5)
Cold Junction
Compensation
Figure 10-10-22: Heater Control Loop Block Diagram.
04521C (DCN5731)
Theory of Operation Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
216
10.4.7.3. Thermocouple Inputs and Configuration Jumper (JP5)
Although the relay PCA supports two thermocouple inputs, the current M200EH/EM series analyzers only utilize
one. By default, this single thermocouple input is plugged into the TC1 input (J15). TC2 (J16) is currently not
used. See Figure 11-4 for location of J15 and J16
Table 10-4: Thermocouple Configuration Jumper (JP5) Pin-Outs
TC INPUT JUMPER PAIR DESCRIPTION FUNCTION
1 – 11 Gain Selector
Selects preamp gain factor for J or K TC
- IN = J TC gain factor
- OUT = K TC gain factor
2 – 12 Output Scale Selector
Selects preamp gain factor for J or K TC
- IN = 5 mV / °C
- OUT = 10 mV / °C
3 – 13 Type J Compensation When present, sets Cold Junction
Compensation for J type Thermocouple
4 – 14 Type K Compensation When present, sets Cold Junction
Compensation for K type Thermocouple
TC1
5 – 15 Termination Selector
Selects between Isolated and grounded TC
- IN = Isolate TC
- OUT = Grounded TC
6 – 16 Gain Selector Same as Pins 1 – 11 above.
7 – 17 Output Scale Selector Same as Pins 2 – 12 above.
8 – 18 Type J Compensation Same as Pins 3 – 13 above.
9 – 19 Type K Compensation Same as Pins 4 – 14 above.
TC2
10 – 20 Termination Selector Same as Pins 5 – 15 above.
TC2
TC1
Input Gain Selector 1 – 11
Type J Compensation 4 – 14
Output Scale Selector 2 – 12
Type J Compensation 3 – 13
Termination Selector 5 – 15
Input Gain Selector 6 – 16
Type J Compensation 9 – 19
Output Scale Selector 7 – 17
Type J Compensation 8 – 18
Termination Selector 10 – 20
Figure 10-10-23: Thermocouple Configuration Jumper (JP5) Pin-Outs
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Theory of Operation
217
Table 10-5: Typical Thermocouple Settings For M200E Series Analyzers
TC
TYPE
TERMINATION
TYPE
OUTPUT
SCALE TYPE
JUMPER
BETWEEN
PINS
USED ON JUMPER
COLOR
INPUT TC1 (J15)
K GROUNDED 5mV / °C 2 – 12
4 – 14 M200EH/EM with Mini HiCon Converter BROWN
K ISOLATED 5mV / °C
2 – 12
4 – 14
5 – 15
M200EH/EM with Mini HiCon Converter GREY
K ISOLATED 10mV / °C 4 – 14
5 – 15
M200EH/EM models with Moly
Converter PURPLE
J ISOLATED 10mV / °C
1 – 11
3 – 13
5 – 15
M200EH/EM models with Moly
Converter RED
J GROUNDED 10mV / °C 1 – 11
3 – 13
M200EH/EM models with Moly
Converter GREEN
10.4.7.4. Valve Control
The relay board also hosts two valve driver chips, each of which can drive up four valves. The main valve
assembly in the M200EH/EM is the NO/NOX - Auto-zero solenoid valve component mounted right in front of the
NO2 converter housing. These two valves are actuated with 12 V supplied from the relay board and driven by
the CPU through the I2Z bus.
A second set of valves may be installed if the zero/span valve or the IZS option is enabled in the analyzer.
Specialty manifold valves may be present in the analyzer.
04521C (DCN5731)
Theory of Operation Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
218
10.4.8. STATUS LEDS & WATCH DOG CIRCUITRY
Thirteen LEDs are located on the analyzer’s relay board to indicate the status of the analyzer’s heating zones
and valves as well as a general operating watchdog indicator. Table 11-2 shows the states of these LEDs and
their respective functionality.
D3 (Yellow) – NO2 Converter Heate
r
D4 (Yellow) – Manifold Heate
r
D2 (Yellow) – Reaction Cell Heate
r
D5(Yellow)
D6 (Yellow) – O2 Sensor Heate
r
D7 (Green) – Zero / Span Val
v
D8 (Green) – Sample / Cal
D9 (Green ) – Auto /
Z
D10 (Green) – NO
x
D1 (RED)
Watchdog
Indicator
Figure 10-10-24: Status LED Locations – Relay PCA
10.4.8.1. Watchdog Indicator (D1)
The most important of the status LED’s on the relay board is the red I1C Bus watch-dog LED. It is controlled
directly analyzer’s CPU over the I2C bus. Special circuitry on the relay PCA watches the status of D1. Should
this LED ever stay ON or OFF for 30 seconds, indicating that the CPU or I2C bus has stopped functioning, this
Watchdog Circuit automatically shuts all valves and turn off all heaters and lamps.
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Theory of Operation
219
10.4.9. MOTHERBOARD
This is the largest electronic assembly in the analyzer and is mounted to the rear panel as the base for the CPU
board and all I/O connectors. This printed circuit assembly provides a multitude of functions including A/D
conversion, digital input/output, PC-104 to I2C translation, temperature sensor signal processing and is a pass
through for the RS-232 and RS-485 signals.
10.4.9.1. A to D Conversion
Analog signals, such as the voltages received from the analyzer’s various sensors, are converted into digital
signals that the CPU can understand and manipulate by the analog to digital converter (A/D).Under the control of
the CPU, this functional block selects a particular signal input and then coverts the selected voltage into a digital
word.
The A/D consists of a voltage-to-frequency (V-F) converter, a programmable logic device (PLD), three
multiplexers, several amplifiers and some other associated devices. The V-F converter produces a frequency
proportional to its input voltage. The PLD counts the output of the V-F during a specified time period, and sends
the result of that count, in the form of a binary number, to the CPU.
The A/D can be configured for several different input modes and ranges but in the is used in uni-polar mode with
a +5V full scale. The converter includes a 1% over and under-range. This allows signals from -0.05V to +5.05V
to be fully converted.
For calibration purposes, two reference voltages are supplied to the A/D converter: Reference ground and
+4.096 VDC. During calibration, the device measures these two voltages, outputs their digital equivalent to the
CPU. The CPU uses these values to compute the converter’s offset and slope and uses these factors for
subsequent conversions. See Section 6.13.5.4 for instructions on performing this calibration.
10.4.9.2. Sensor Inputs
The key analog sensor signals are coupled to the A/D converter through the master multiplexer from two
connectors on the motherboard. Terminating resistors (100 kΩ ) on each of the inputs prevent cross-talk
between the sensor signals.
PMT DETECTOR OUTPUT: This signal, output by the PMT preamp PCA, is used in the computation of the NO,
NO2 and NOx concentrations displayed at the top right hand corner of the front panel display and output through
the instruments analog outputs and COMM ports.
PMT HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY LEVEL: This input is based on the drive voltage output by the PMT
pram board to the PMT’s high voltage power supply (HVPS). It is digitized and sent to the CPU where it is used
to calculate the voltage setting of the HVPS and stored in the instruments memory as the test function HVPS.
HVPS is viewable as a test function (see Section 6.2.1) through the analyzer’s front panel.
PMT TEMPERATURE: This signal is the output of the thermistor attached to the PMT cold block amplified by the
PMT temperature feedback circuit on the PMT preamp board. It is digitized and sent to the CPU where it is used
to calculate the current temperature of the PMT.
This measurement is stored in the analyzer. Memory as the test function PMT TEMP and is viewable as a test
function (see Section 6.2.1) through the analyzer’s front panel.
04521C (DCN5731)
Theory of Operation Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
220
NO2 CONVERTER TEMPERATURE: This parameter is measured with a Type-K thermocouple attached to the
NO2 converter heater and its analog signal is amplified by the circuitry on the relay board. It is sent to the CPU
and then digitized and is used to calculate the current temperature of the NO2 converter. It is also stored in the
iDAS and reported as test function MOLY TEMP.
SAMPLE GAS PRESSURE: This is measured upstream of the reaction cell, stored in the iDAS and reported as
SAMPLE. The vacuum gas pressure is measured downstream of the reaction cell and is stored in the iDAS and
reported as RCEL. For more information on these sensor’s functions see Section 10.3.10.
O3 GAS FLOW This sensor measures the gas flow upstream of the ozone generator, stored in the iDAS and
reported as test function OZONE FL. For more information on this sensor’s function see Section 10.3.10.
10.4.9.3. Thermistor Interface
This circuit provides excitation, termination and signal selection for several negative-coefficient, thermistor
temperature sensors located inside the analyzer. They are:
REACTION CELL TEMPERATURE SENSOR A thermistor embedded in the reaction cell manifold. This
temperature is used by the CPU to control the reaction cell heating circuit and as a parameter in the
temperature/pressure compensation algorithm. This measurement is stored in the analyzer’s iDAS and reported
as test function RCEL TEMP.
BOX TEMPERATURE SENSOR: A thermistor is attached to the motherboard. It measures the analyzer’s inside
temperature. This information is stored by the CPU and can be viewed by the user for troubleshooting purposes
through the front panel display. It is also used as part of the NO, NOX and NO2 calculations when the
instrument’s Temperature/Pressure Compensation feature is enabled. This measurement is stored in the
analyzer. Memory as the test function BOX TEMP and is viewable as a test function (Section 6.2.1) through the
analyzer’s front panel.
The thermistor inside the PMT cold block as well as the thermistor located on the preamplifier board are both
converted to analog signals on the preamplifier board before being sent to the motherboard’s A/D converter.
O2 SENSOR TEMPERATURE: For instruments with the oxygen sensor option installed, the thermistor
measuring the temperature of the heating block mounted to the sensor is reported as test function O2 TEMP on
the front panel. This temperature is maintained at 50° C.
10.4.10. ANALOG OUTPUTS
The analyzer comes equipped with four Analog Outputs: A1, A2, A3 and a fourth that is a spare.
A1 and A2 Outputs: The first two, A1 and A2 are normally set up to operate in parallel so that the same data can
be sent to two different recording devices. While the names imply that one should be used for sending data to a
chart recorder and the other for interfacing with a datalogger, either can be used for both applications.
Output Loop-back: All of the functioning analog outputs are connected back to the A/D converter through a
Loop-back circuit. This permits the voltage outputs to be calibrated by the CPU without need for any additional
tools or fixtures (see Section 6.13.5.4)
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Theory of Operation
221
10.4.11. EXTERNAL DIGITAL I/O
The external digital I/O performs two functions.
The STATUS outputs carry logic-level (5V) signals through an optically isolated 8-pin connector on the rear
panel of the analyzer. These outputs convey on/off information about certain analyzer conditions such as CONC
VALID. They can be used to interface with certain types of programmable devices (Section 6.15.1.1).
The CONTROL inputs can be initiated by applying 5V DC power from an external source such as a PLC or data
logger (Section 6.15.1.2). Zero and span calibrations can be initiated by contact closures on the rear panel.
10.4.12. I2C DATA BUS
I2C is a two-wire, clocked, digital serial I/O bus that is used widely in commercial and consumer electronic
systems. A transceiver on the motherboard converts data and control signals from the PC-104 bus to I2C. The
data are then fed to the keyboard/display interface and finally onto the relay board.
Interface circuits on the keyboard/display interface and relay board convert the I2C data to parallel inputs and
outputs. An additional interrupt line from the keyboard to the motherboard allows the CPU to recognize and
service key strokes on the keyboard.
10.4.13. POWER-UP CIRCUIT
This circuit monitors the +5V power supply during analyzer start-up and sets the analog outputs, external digital
I/O ports, and I2C circuitry to specific values until the CPU boots and the instrument software can establish
control.
04521C (DCN5731)
Theory of Operation Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
222
10.5. POWER DISTRIBUTION &CIRCUIT BREAKER
The analyzer operates in two main AC power ranges: 100-120 VAC and 220-240 VAC (both ± 10%) between 47
and 63 Hz. A 5 ampere circuit breaker is built into the ON/OFF switch. In case of a wiring fault or incorrect
supply power, the circuit breaker will automatically turn off the analyzer.
CAUTION
Should the power circuit breaker trip correct the condition causing
this situation before turning the analyzer back on.
SENSOR SUITES
LOGIC DEVICES
(e.g. CPU, I2C bus,
Keyboard, Display,
MotherBoard, etc.)
RELAY PCA
ON / OFF
SWITCH
PS 2
(+12 VDC)
OPTIONAL
VALVES
(e.g. Sample/Cal,
Zero/Spans, etc.)
MODEL SPECIFIC
VALVES
(e.g. NOX – NO Valves,
Auto-zero valves, etc.)
TEC and
Cooling Fan(s)
PUMP
AC HEATERS
AC HEATERS for
O2 SENSOR
PS 1
ANALOG
SENSORS
(e.g. UV sensors,
Temp Sensors,
Flow Sensors,
PMT HVPS,
etc.)
Pre-Amplifiers
& Amplifiers
Sensor Control
& I/O Logic
Solenoid
Drivers
KEY
AC POWER
DC POWER
AC
POWER IN
+5 VDC
±15 VDC
Configuration
Jumpers
Configuration
Jumpers
Configuration
Jumpers
UV Lamp
P/S
Figure 10-10-25: Power Distribution Block Diagram
Under normal operation, the M200EH/EM draws about 1.5 A at 115 V and 2.0 A during start-up.
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Theory of Operation
223
10.6. COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE
The analyzer has several ways to communicate the outside world, see Figure 10-26. Users can input data and
receive information directly through the front panel keypad and display. Direct, two-way communication with the
CPU is also available by way of the analyzer’s RS232 & RS485 I/O ports (see Section 6.11 and 6.15).
Alternatively, an Ethernet communication option can be substituted for one of the COMM ports.
The analyzer can also send status information and data via the eight digital status output lines (see Section
6.15.1.1) and the three analog outputs (see Section 6.7) located on the rear panel as well as receive commands
by way of the six digital control inputs also located on the rear pane (see Section 6.15.1.2).
Figure 10-10-26: Interface Block Diagram
04521C (DCN5731)
Theory of Operation Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
224
10.6.1. FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
POWER
FAULT
CAL
SAMPLE
CHEMILUMINESENCE NOx ANALYZER – M200EH
?? ?? ?? ??????????????????????????????????
MODE FIELD
KEY
DEFINITIONS
MESSAGE FIELD CONCENTRATION FIELD
STATUS
LED’s
KEYBOARD
ON / OFF
SWITCH
FASTENERFASTENER
HINGE
SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL SETUP
Figure 10-10-27: M200EH/EM Front Panel Layout
The most commonly used method for communicating with the M200EH/EM UV Chemiluminescence NOx
Analyzer is via the instrument’s front panel which includes a set of three status LEDs, a vacuum florescent
display and a keyboard with 8 context sensitive keys.
10.6.1.1. Analyzer Status LED’s
Three LEDS are used to inform the user of the instruments basic operating status
Table 10-6: Front Panel Status LED’s
NAME COLOR STATE DEFINITION
SAMPLE Green
Off
On
Blinking
Unit is not operating in sample mode, iDAS is disabled.
Sample Mode active; Front Panel Display being updated, iDAS data being stored.
Unit is operating in sample mode, front panel display being updated, iDAS hold-off mode is
ON, iDAS disabled
CAL Yellow
Off
On
Blinking
Auto Cal disabled
Auto Cal enabled
Unit is in calibration mode
FAULT Red Off
Blinking
No warnings exist
Warnings exist
10.6.1.2. Keyboard
A row of eight keys just below the vacuum florescent display (see Figure 10-27) is the main method by which the
user interacts with the analyzer. As the software is operated, labels appear on the bottom row of the display
directly above each active key, defining the function of that key as it is relevant for the operation being
performed. Pressing a key causes the associated instruction to be performed by the analyzer.
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Theory of Operation
225
Note that the keys do not auto-repeat. In circumstances where the same key must be activated for two
consecutive operations, it must be released and re-pressed.
10.6.1.3. Display
The main display of the analyzer is a vacuum florescent display with two lines of 40 text characters each.
Information is organized in the following manner (see Figure 10-27):
MODE FIELD: Displays the name of the analyzer’s current operating mode.
MESSAGE FIELD: Displays a variety of informational messages such as warning messages, operation
data and response messages during interactive tasks.
CONCENTRATION FIELD: Displays the actual concentration of the sample gas currently being
measured by the analyzer
KEYPAD DEFINITION FIELD: Displays the definitions for the row of keys just below the display. These
definitions dynamic, context sensitive and software driven.
10.6.1.4. Keyboard/Display Interface Electronics
FRONT PANEL
Keypad
Decoder
Key Press
Detect
KEYBOARD
Beeper
Sample LED
(Green)
Cal LED
(Yellow)
Fault LED
(Red)
Display Data
Decoder
Display Power
Watchdog
From 5 VDC
Power Supply
I
2
C to Relay Board
Parallel Data
2 x 40 CHAR. VACUUM
FLUORESCENT DISPLAY
Display
Controller
Display Write
Clock
Serial
Data
I2C to/from CPU
Keyboard Interrupt Status Bit
I2C Interface
2n
d
Lang.
Switch
Maint.
Switch
Optional
Maintenance
LED
Figure 10-10-28: Keyboard and Display Interface Block Diagram
The keyboard/display interface electronics of the M200EH/EM Analyzer watches the status of the eight front
panel keys, alerts the CPU when keys are depressed, translates data from parallel to serial and back and
manages communications between the keyboard, the CPU and the front panel display. Except for the Keyboard
interrupt status bit, all communication between the CPU and the keyboard/display is handle by way of the
instrument’s I2C buss. The CPU controls the clock signal and determines when the various devices on the bus
are allowed to talk or required to listen. Data packets are labeled with addresses that identify for which device
the information is intended.
04521C (DCN5731)
Theory of Operation Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
226
KEYPAD DECODER
Each key on the front panel communicates with a decoder IC via a separate analog line. When a key is
depressed the decoder chip notices the change of state of the associated signal; latches and holds the state of
all eight lines (in effect creating an 8-bit data word); alerts the key-depress-detect circuit (a flip-flop IC);
translates the 8-bit word into serial data and; sends this to the I2C interface chip.
KEY-DEPRESS-DETECT CIRCUIT
This circuit flips the state of one of the inputs to the I2C interface chip causing it to send an interrupt signal to the
CPU
I2C INTERFACE CHIP
This IC performs several functions:
Using a dedicated digital status bit, it sends an interrupt signal alerting the CPU that new data from the
keyboard is ready to send.
Upon acknowledgement by the CPU that it has received the new keyboard data, the I2C interface chip
resets the key-depress-detect flip-flop.
In response to commands from the CPU, it turns the front panel status LEDs on and off and activates
the beeper.
Informs the CPU when the optional maintenance and second language switches have been opened or
closed (see Chapter 5 for information on these options).
DISPLAY DATA DECODER
This decoder translates the serial data sent by the CPU (in TTY format) into a bitmapped image which is sent
over a parallel data bus to the display.
DISPLAY CONTROLLER
This circuit manages the interactions between the display data decoder and the display itself. It generates a
clock pulse that keeps the two devices synchronized. It can also, in response to commands from the CPU turn
off and/or reset the display.
Additionally, for analyzers with the optional maintenance switch is installed (See Chapter 5), the display
controller turns on an LED located on the back of the keyboard interface PCA whenever the instrument is placed
in maintenance mode.
DISPLAY POWER WATCHDOG
The Model 200EH/EM’s display can begin to show garbled information or lock-up if the DC voltage supplied to it
falls too low, even momentarily. To alleviate this, a brown-out watchdog circuit monitors the level of the power
supply and in the event that the voltage level falls below a certain level resets the display by turning it off, then
back on.
I2C LINK TO THE RELAY PCA
While the CPU’s I2C communication with the relay board is also routed through the keyboard/display interface,
information passed to and from the relay board via this channel is not recognized by, acted upon or affected by
the circuitry of the keyboard.
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Theory of Operation
227
10.7. SOFTWARE OPERATION
The M200EH/EM NOX analyzer’s core module is a high performance, 386-based microcomputer running a
version of DOS. On top of the DOS shell, special software developed by Teledyne Instruments interprets user
commands from various interfaces, performs procedures and tasks, stores data in the CPU’s memory devices
and calculates the concentrations of NOX in the sample gas. Figure 10-10-29 shows a block diagram of this
software functionality.
Figure 10-10-29: Schematic of Basic Software Operation
04521C (DCN5731)
Theory of Operation Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
228
10.7.1. ADAPTIVE FILTER
The M200EH/EM NOX analyzer software processes sample gas concentration data through a built-in adaptive
filter. Unlike other analyzers that average the output signal over a fixed time period, the M200EH/EM averages
over a defined number of samples, with samples being about 8 seconds apart (reflecting the switching time of 4
s each for NO and NOX). This technique is known as boxcar filtering. During operation, the software may
automatically switch between two different filters lengths based on the conditions at hand.
During constant or nearly constant concentrations, the software, by default, computes an average of the last 42
samples, or approximately 5.6 minutes. This provides smooth and stable readings and averages out a
considerable amount of random noise for an overall less noisy concentration reading.
If the filter detects rapid changes in concentration the filter reduces the averaging to only 6 samples or about 48
seconds to allow the analyzer to respond more quickly. Two conditions must be simultaneously met to switch to
the short filter. First, the instantaneous concentration must differ from the average in the long filter by at least 50
ppb. Second, the instantaneous concentration must differ from the average in the long filter by at least 10% of
the average in the long filter.
If necessary, these boxcar filter lengths can be changed between 1 (no averaging) and 1000 samples but with
corresponding tradeoffs in rise time and signal-to-noise ratio. Signal noise increases accordingly when in
adaptive filter mode, but remains within the official M200EH/EM specifications as long as the filter size remains
at or above 3 samples.
In order to avoid frequent switching between the two filter sizes, the analyzer has a delay of 120 s before
switching out of adaptive filter mode, even if the two threshold conditions are no longer met.
Note that the filter settings in NOX only or NO only
10.7.2. CALIBRATION - SLOPE AND OFFSET
Aside from the hardware calibration of the preamplifier board (Section 11.6.5) upon factory checkout, calibration
of the analyzer is usually performed in software. During instrument calibration (Chapters 7) the user enters
expected values for span gas concentration through the front panel keypad and supplies the instrument with
sample gas of know NO and NOX concentrations. The readings are then compared to the expected values and
the software computes values for the new instrument slope and offset for both NO and NOX response. These
values are stored in memory for use in calculating the NO, NOX and NO2 concentration of the sample gas. By
default, the iDAS stores 200 software calibration settings for documentation, review and data analysis.
Instrument slope and offset values recorded during the last calibration can be viewed on the front panel. NO
SLOPE, NOX SLOPE, NO OFFS and NOX OFFS are four of the test parameters accessible through the <TST
TST> buttons.
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Theory of Operation
229
10.7.3. TEMPERATURE/PRESSURE COMPENSATION (TPC)
The software features a compensation of some temperature and pressure changes critical in the measurement
of NO and NOX concentration. When the TPC feature is enabled (default setting), the analyzer divides the value
of the PMT output signal (PMTDET) by a value called TP_FACTOR. TP_FACTOR is calculated according to
the following equation.
)(
)(
×
)(
(
×
)(
)(7
×
)(
)(
=_ K298
KTEMPBOX
D
Hgin29.92
HginSAMP
C
HginRCEL
Hgin
B
K323
KTEMPRCELL
AFACTORTP
(Equation 10-5)
Where A, B, C, D are gain functions. The four parameters used to compute TP_FACTOR are:
RCELL TEMP: The temperature of the reaction cell, measured in K.
RCEL: The pressure of the gas in the vacuum manifold, measured in in-Hg-A.
SAMP: The pressure of the sample gas before it reaches the reaction cell, measured in in-Hg-A. This
measurement is ~1 in-Hg-A lower than atmospheric pressure.
BOX TEMP: The temperature inside the analyzer’s case measured in K. This is typically about 5 K
higher than room temperature.
The current value of all four of these measurements are viewable as TEST FUNCTIONS through the
instrument’s front panel display.
Note that, as RCEL TEMP, BOX TEMP and SAMP pressure increase, the value of TP_FACTOR increases
and, hence, the PMTDET value decreases. Conversely, increases in the reaction cell pressure (RCEL)
decrease TP_FACTOR and, hence increase the PMTDET value. These adjustments are meant to counter-act
changes in the concentrations caused by these parameters.
Each of the terms in the above equation is attenuated by a gain function with a numerical value based on a
preset gain parameter (shown below in CAPITALIZED ITALICS) normalized to the current value of the
parameter being attenuated. The gain functions A, B, C and D are defined as:
]__×)1
)(323
)(_
[(+1= GAINTPCRCTEMP
K
Ktemprcell
A
(Equation 10-6)
]__×)1
)("_
)("5
[(+1= GAINTPCRCPRESS
Hgpressurercell
Hg
B
(Equation 10-7)
]__×)1
)(323
)(_
[(+1= GAINTPCSPRESS
K
Ktemprcell
C
(Equation 10-8)
]__×)1
)(298
)(_
[(+1= GAINTPCBXTEMP
K
Ktempbox
D
(Equation 10-9)
The preset gain parameters are set at the factory and may vary from analyzer to analyzer. Section 6.12
describes the method for enabling/disabling the TPC feature.
04521C (DCN5731)
Theory of Operation Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
230
10.7.4. NO2 CONVERTER EFFICIENCY COMPENSATION
Over time, the molybdenum in the NO2 converter oxidizes and looses its original capacity of converting NO2 into
NO, eventually resulting in a decreased converter efficiency (CE). Even though we recommend to replace the
converter if CE drops below 96%, the analyzer’s firmware allows adjusting minor deviations of the CE from 1.000
and enables reporting the true concentrations of NO2 and NOX. Converter efficiency is stored in the instrument’s
memory as a decimal fraction that is multiplied with the NO2 and NOX measurements to calculate the final
concentrations for each. Periodically, this efficiency factor must be measured and - if it has changed from
previous measurements - entered into the analyzer’s memory (Section 7.1.5).
10.7.5. INTERNAL DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM (IDAS)
The iDAS is designed to implement predictive diagnostics that stores trending data for users to anticipate when
an instrument will require service. Large amounts of data can be stored in non-volatile memory and retrieved in
plain text format for further processing with common data analysis programs. The iDAS has a consistent user
interface among all Teledyne Instruments A- and E-series instruments. New data parameters and triggering
events can be added to the instrument as needed. Section 6.7 describes the iDAS and its default configuration
in detail, Chapter 8 shows the parameters that can be used for predictive diagnostics.
Depending on the sampling frequency and the number of data parameters, the iDAS can store several months
of data, which are retained even when the instrument is powered off. However, if new firmware or a new iDAS
configuration are uploaded to the analyzer, we recommend retrieving data before doing so to avoid data loss.
The iDAS permits users to access the data through the instrument’s front panel or the remote interface. The
latter can automatically report stored data for further processing. APICOM, a user-friendly remote control
program is the most convenient way to view, retrieve and store iDAS data (Section 6.15.2.8)
USER NOTES:
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Troubleshooting & Repair
231
11. TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
This section contains a variety of methods for identifying and solving performance problems with the analyzer.
NOTE
The operations outlined in this chapter must be performed by qualified
maintenance personnel only.
CAUTION
Risk of electrical shock. Some operations need to be carried out with
the analyzer open and running. Exercise caution to avoid electrical
shocks and electrostatic or mechanical damage to the analyzer. Do not
drop tools into the analyzer or leave those after your procedures. Do
not shorten or touch electric connections with metallic tools while
operating inside the analyzer. Use common sense when operating
inside a running analyzer.
11.1. GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING
The analyzer has been designed so that problems can be rapidly detected, evaluated and repaired. During
operation, the analyzer continuously performs diagnostic tests and provides the ability to evaluate its key
operating parameters without disturbing monitoring operations.
A systematic approach to troubleshooting will generally consist of the following five steps:
Note any warning messages and take corrective action as necessary.
Examine the values of all TEST functions and compare them to factory values. Note any major
deviations from the factory values and take corrective action.
Use the internal electronic status LED’s to determine whether the electronic communication channels
are operating properly. Verify that the DC power supplies are operating properly by checking the
voltage test points on the relay board. Note that the analyzer’s DC power wiring is color-coded and
these colors match the color of the corresponding test points on the relay board.
Suspect a leak first! Customer service data indicate that the majority of all problems are eventually
traced to leaks in the pneumatic system of the analyzer (including the external pump), the source of zero
air or span gases or the sample gas delivery system. Check for gas flow problems such as clogged or
blocked internal/external gas lines, damaged seals, punctured gas lines, a damaged pump diaphragm,
etc.
Follow the procedures defined in Section 3.2.4. to confirm that the analyzer’s vital functions are working
(power supplies, CPU, relay board, keyboard, PMT cooler, etc.). See Figure 3-1, Figure 3-2, and Figure
3-3 for general layout of components and sub-assemblies in the analyzer. See the wiring interconnect
diagram (document 04504) and interconnect list (document 04496) in Appendix D.
04521C (DCN5731)
Troubleshooting & Repair Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
232
11.1.1. WARNING MESSAGES
The most common and/or serious instrument failures will result in a warning message displayed on the front
panel. Table A-2 in Appendix A.3 contains a list of warning messages, along with their meaning and
recommended corrective action.
It should be noted that if more than two or three warning messages occur at the same time, it is often an
indication that some fundamental analyzer sub-system (power supply, relay board, motherboard) has failed
rather than an indication of the specific failures referenced by the warnings. In this case, a combined-error
analysis needs to be performed.
The analyzer will alert the user that a warning is active by displaying the keypad labels MSG and CLR on the
front panel and a text message in the top center line of the display as shown in this example:
SAMPLE
A
ZERO WARNING NOX =123.4
< TST TST > CAL MSG CLR SETUP
The analyzer will also issue a message to the serial port and cause the red FAULT LED on the front panel to
blink.
To view or clear a warning messages press:
SAMPLE SYSTEM RESET NOX = XXX.X
TEST CAL MSG CLR SETUP
If warning messages re-appear,
the cause needs to be found. Do
not repeatedly clear warnings
without corrective action.
Press CLR to clear the current
warning message.
If more than one warning is
active, the next message will
take its place.
Once the last warning has been
cleared, the analyzer returns to
SAMPLE Mode.
SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL MSG CLR SETUP
SAMPLE SYSTEM RESET NOX = XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL MSG CLR SETUP
<TST TST> keys replaced with
TEST key. Pressing TEST
deactivates warning messages
until new warning(s) are activated.
MSG indicates that warning
messages are active.
All Warning messages are hidden,
but MSG button appears
Figure 11-1: Viewing and Clearing Warning Messages
11.1.2. FAULT DIAGNOSIS WITH TEST FUNCTIONS
Besides being useful as predictive diagnostic tools, the TEST functions, viewable from the front panel, can be
used to isolate and identify many operational problems when combined with a thorough understanding of the
analyzer’s theory of operation (Chapter 10). We recommend to use the APICOM remote control program to
download, graph and archive TEST data for analysis and long-term monitoring of diagnostic data ( Section
6/15.2.8).
The acceptable ranges for these test functions are listed in Appendix A-3. The actual values for these test
functions on checkout at the factory were also listed in the Final Test and Validation Data Sheet, which was
shipped with the instrument. Values outside the acceptable ranges indicate a failure of one or more of the
analyzer’s subsystems. Functions with values that are within the acceptable range but have significantly
changed from the measurements recorded on the factory data sheet may also indicate a failure or a
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Troubleshooting & Repair
233
maintenance item. A problem report worksheet has been provided in Appendix C (Teledyne Instruments part
number 04503) to assist in recording the value of these test functions. The following table contains some of the
more common causes for these values to be out of range.
Table 11-1: Test Functions - Possible Causes for Out-Of-Range Values
TEST FUNCTION INDICATED FAILURE(S)
NOX STB Unstable concentrations; leaks
SAMPLE FL Leaks; clogged critical flow orifice
OZONE FL Leaks; clogged critical flow orifice
PMT Calibration off; HVPS problem; no flow (leaks)
NORM PMT AutoZero too high
AZERO Leaks; malfunctioning NO/NOx or AutoZero valve; O3 air filter cartridge exhausted
HVPS HVPS broken; calibration off; preamp board circuit problems
RCELL TEMP Malfunctioning heater; relay board communication (I2C bus); relay burnt out
BOX TEMP Environment out of temperature operating range; broken thermistor
PMT TEMP TEC cooling circuit broken; relay board communication (I2C bus); 12 V power supply
IZS TEMP (OPTION) Malfunctioning heater; relay board communication (I2C bus); relay burnt out
MOLY TEMP Malfunctioning heater; disconnected or broken thermocouple; relay board communication
(I2Z bus); relay burnt out; incorrect AC voltage configuration
RCEL (PRESSURE) Leak; malfunctioning valve; malfunctioning pump; clogged flow orifices
SAMP (PRESSURE) Leak; malfunctioning valve; malfunctioning pump; clogged flow orifices; sample inlet
overpressure;
NOX SLOPE HVPS out of range; low-level (hardware) calibration needs adjustment; span gas
concentration incorrect; leaks
NOX OFF Incorrect span gas concentration; low-level calibration off
NO SLOPE HVPS out of range; low-level calibration off; span gas concentration incorrect; leaks
NO OFFS Incorrect span gas concentration; low-level calibration off
TIME OF DAY Internal clock drifting; move across time zones; daylight savings time?
11.1.3. USING THE DIAGNOSTIC SIGNAL I/O FUNCTION
The signal I/O parameters found under the diagnostics (DIAG) menu combined with a thorough understanding of
the instrument’s theory of operation (Chapter 10) are useful for troubleshooting in three ways:
The technician can view the raw, unprocessed signal level of the analyzer’s critical inputs and outputs.
All of the components and functions that are normally under instrument control can be manually
changed.
Analog and digital output signals can be manually controlled.
This allows to systematically observe the effect of these functions on the operation of the analyzer. Figure 11-2
shows an example of how to use the signal I/O menu to view the raw voltage of an input signal or to control the
state of an output voltage or control signal. The specific parameter will vary depending on the situation.
04521C (DCN5731)
Troubleshooting & Repair Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
234
SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL SETUP
SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT
SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU
COMM VARS DIAG ALRM EXIT
SETUP X.X ENTER PASSWORD:818
8 1 8 ENTREXIT
DIAG SIGNAL I/O
NEXT ENTR EXIT
DIAG I/O 0) EXT_ZERO_CAL =OFF
NEXT JUMP ENTR EXIT
DIAG I/O JUMP TO:0
0 0 ENTR EXIT
DIAG I/O JUMP TO:7
0 7 ENTR EXIT
DIAG AIO 7) CAL LED=OFF
PREV NEXT JUMP OFF PRNT EXIT
Enter 07 to Jump
to Signal 7:
(CAL_LED)
Toggle this Key to
turn the CAL LED
ON/OFF
Figure 11-2: Switching Signal I/O Functions
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Troubleshooting & Repair
235
11.1.4. STATUS LED’S
Several color-coded, light-emitting diodes (LED) are located inside the instrument to determine if the analyzer’s
CPU, I2C communications bus and the relay board are functioning properly.
11.1.4.1. Motherboard Status Indicator (Watchdog)
A red LED labeled DS5 in the upper portion of the motherboard (Figure 11-3), just to the right of the CPU board,
flashes when the CPU is running the main program. After power-up, DS5 should flash on and off about once per
second. If characters are visible on the front panel display but DS5 does not flash then the program files have
become corrupted. Contact customer service because it may be possible to recover operation of the analyzer.
If 30 - 60 seconds after a restart neither DS5 is flashing nor any characters are visible on the front panel display,
the firmware may be corrupted or the CPU may be defective. If DS5 is permanently off or permanently on, the
CPU board is likely locked up and the analyzer should not respond (either with locked-up or dark front panel).
Figure 11-3: Motherboard Watchdog Status Indicator
11.1.4.2. CPU Status Indicator
The CPU board has two red LEDs, the lower of which is the watchdog timer (the device that pulses the
motherboard watchdog). This LED is labeled LED2 and blinks about twice per second (twice as fast as the
motherboard LED) when operating normally. LED1 above LED2 should always be on. However, both CPU
LEDs only indicate if the CPU is powered up properly and generally working. The lower LED can continue to
blink even if the CPU or firmware are locked up.
11.1.4.3. Relay Board and Status LEDs
The most important status LED on the relay board is the red I2C Bus watch-dog LED, labeled D1, which
indicates the health of the I2C communications bus. This LED is the left-most in LED row 1 in the center of the
relay board when looking at the electronic components. If D1 is blinking, then the other LEDs can be used in
04521C (DCN5731)
Troubleshooting & Repair Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
236
conjunction with the DIAG menu I/O functions to test hardware functionality by manually switching devices on
and off and watching the corresponding LED go on or off.
Figure 11-4 illustrates the relay board layout including the two rows of LEDs,
Table 11-2 lists the individual LED functions and the menu tree below shows how to access the manual control
of the I/O functions. Note that only some or the LEDs may be functional in your analyzer model; the relay board
layout is conceptualized for spare, future functionality and is also common to many of the E-series analyzers.
Power
Connection
for DC
Heaters
Status LED’s
(D2 through D16)
DC Power Supply
Test Points
Watchdog
Status LED (D1)
(JP5)
Thermocouple
Configuration
Jumpers
Thermocouple
Signal Output
I2C Connector
Shutter Control
Connector
(M100E Series
Only)
V
alve Control
Drivers
Pump Power
Output
(JP7)
Pump AC
Configuration
Jumper
AC Power
IN
AC Heater
Power Output
A
C Power Output for
Optional IZS Valve
Heaters & 02 sensors
(JP6)
Main AC Heater
Configuration Jumpers
(JP2)
AC Configuration Jumpers
for Optional IZS Valve
Heaters & 02Sensors
Solid State AC
Power Relays
(Not Present on
P/N 45230100)
DC Power
Distribution
Connectors
V
alve Option
Control
Connector
(J15)
TC1 Input
(J16)
TC2 Input
Figure 11-4: Relay Board PCA
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Troubleshooting & Repair
237
Table 11-2: Relay Board Status LEDs
LED COLOR FUNCTION FAULT
STATUS INDICATED FAILURE(S)
LED ROW 1
D1 Red
Watchdog Circuit; I2C bus
operation.
Continuously
ON or OFF
Failed or halted CPU; faulty motherboard,
keyboard, relay board; wiring between
motherboard, keyboard or relay board; +5
V power supply
D2 Yellow Relay 0 - reaction cell heater Continuously
ON or OFF Heater broken, thermistor broken
D3 Yellow Relay 1 - NO2 converter heater Continuously
ON or OFF Heater broken, thermocouple broken
D4 Yellow Relay 2 - manifold heater Continuously
ON or OFF Heater broken, thermistor broken
D7 1 Green Valve 0 - zero/span valve status Continuously
ON or OFF
Valve broken or stuck, valve driver chip
broken
D8 1 Green Valve 1 - sample/cal valve status Continuously
ON or OFF
Valve broken or stuck, valve driver chip
broken
D9 Green Valve 2 - auto-zero valve status Continuously
ON or OFF
Valve broken or stuck, valve driver chip
broken
D10 Green Valve 3 - NO/NOx valve status Continuously
ON or OFF
Valve broken or stuck, valve driver chip
broken
LED ROW 2
D5 Yellow Relay 3 - IZS heater Continuously
ON or OFF Heater broken, thermistor broken
D6 Yellow
Relay 4 – (O2 sensor heater
200EH/EM) N/A N/A
D11- 16 Green Spare N/A N/A
1 Only active for instruments with Z/S valve options installed
To enter the signal I/O test mode to manually control I/O functions such as valves and heaters, press the
following keys while observing the relay board LEDs when toggling:
SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL SETUP
SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT
SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU
COMM VARS DIAG ALRM EXIT
SETUP X.X ENTER PASSWORD:818
8 1 8 ENTREXIT
DIAG SIGNAL I/O
NEXT ENTR EXIT
DIAG I/O 0) EXT_ZERO_CAL =OFF
NEXT JUMP ENTR EXIT
DIAG I/O JUMP TO:0
0 0 ENTREXIT
DIAG I/O JUMP TO:25
0 7 ENTREXIT
DIAG AIO 25) RELAY_WATCHDOG=ON
PREV NEXT JUMP ON PRNT EXIT
Enter 07 to Jump
to Signal 7:
(CAL_LED)
Toggle this Key to
turn the CAL LED
ON/OFF
See Menu Tree
A-6 in Appendix
A.1 for a list of
I/O Signals
04521C (DCN5731)
Troubleshooting & Repair Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
238
11.2. GAS FLOW PROBLEMS
The M200EH/EM has two main flow paths, the sample flow and the flow of the ozone supply air. With IZS or
zero/span valve option installed, there is a third (zero air) and a fourth (span gas) flow path, but either one of
those is only controlled by critical flow orifices and not displayed on the front panel or stored to the iDAS. The
full flow diagrams of the standard configuration and with options installed (Appendix D, document 04574) help in
trouble-shooting flow problems. In general, flow problems can be divided into three categories:
Flow is too high
Flow is greater than zero, but is too low, and/or unstable
Flow is zero (no flow)
When troubleshooting flow problems, it is essential to confirm the actual flow rate without relying on the
analyzer’s flow display. The use of an independent, external flow meter to perform a flow check as described in
Section 6.13.7.5 is essential.
The flow diagrams found in a variety locations within this manual depicting the M200EH and M200EM in their
standard configuration and with options installed can help in trouble-shooting flow problems. For your
convenience they are colleted here in Sections 11.2.1 (M200EH) and 11.2.2 (M200EM)
11.2.1. M200EH INTERNAL GAS FLOW DIAGRAMS
Figure 11-5: M200EH – Basic Internal Gas Flow
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Troubleshooting & Repair
239
Figure 11-6: M200EH – Internal Gas Flow With OPT 50
Figure 11-7: M200EH – Internal Gas Flow With OPT 52
04521C (DCN5731)
Troubleshooting & Repair Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
240
Figure 11-8: M200EH – Internal Gas Flow With OPT 65
Figure 11-9: M200EH – Internal Gas Flow With OPT 50 + OPT 65
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Troubleshooting & Repair
241
11.2.2. M200EM INTERNAL GAS FLOW DIAGRAMS
Figure 11-10: M200EM – Basic Internal Gas Flow
Figure 11-11: M200EM – Internal Gas Flow With OPT 50
04521C (DCN5731)
Troubleshooting & Repair Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
242
Figure 11-12: M200EM – Internal Gas Flow With OPT 52
Figure 11-13: M200EM – Internal Gas Flow With OPT 65
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Troubleshooting & Repair
243
VACUUM
PRESSURE
SENSOR
SAMPLE
PRESSURE
SENSOR
O3 FLOW
SENSOR
FLOW PRESSURE
SENSOR PCA
INSTRUMENT CHASSIS
PMT
PERMAPURE
DRYER
NO/NOX
VALVE
AUTOZERO
VALVE
O3
Scrubber
O3
GENERATOR
O3
Purifier
PUMP
EXHAUST
GAS
OUTLET
Filter
NO2
Converter
BYPASS
MANIFOLD
SAMPLE
GAS
INLET
ZERO GAS
INLET
SPAN
GAS
INLET
EXHAUST MANIFOLD
O2
Sensor
SAMPLE/ CAL
VALVE
ZERO/SPAN
VALVE
REACTION
CELL
Orifice Dia.
0.003"
Orifice Dia.
0.007"
Orifice Dia.
0.004"
Orifice Dia.
0.004"
NOX Exhaust
Scrubber
Figure 11-14: M200EM – Internal Gas Flow With OPT 50 + OPT 65
11.2.3. ZERO OR LOW FLOW PROBLEMS
11.2.3.1. Sample Flow is Zero or Low
The M200EH/EM does not actually measure the sample flow but rather calculates it from a differential pressure
between sample and vacuum manifold. On flow failure, the unit will display a SAMPLE FLOW WARNING on
the front panel display and the respective test function reports XXXX instead of a value “0”. This message
applies to both a flow rate of zero as well as a flow that is outside the standard range (200-600 cm³/min; 300-700
cm³/min with O2 option installed).
If the analyzer displays XXXX for the sample flow, confirm that the external sample pump is operating and
configured for the proper AC voltage. Whereas the M200EH/EM can be internally configured for two different
power regimes (100-120 V and 220-240 V, either 50 or 60 Hz), the external pump is physically different for each
of three power regimes (100 V / 50 Hz, 115 V / 60 Hz and 230 V / 50 Hz). If the pump is not running, use an AC
Voltmeter to make sure that the pump is supplied with the proper AC power. If AC power is supplied properly,
but the pump is not running, replace the pump.
NOTE
Sample and vacuum pressures mentioned in this chapter refer to operation of the
analyzer at sea level. Pressure values need to be adjusted for elevated locations, as the
ambient pressure decreases by about 1 in-Hg per 300 m / 1000 ft.
If the pump is operating but the unit reports a XXXX gas flow, do the following three steps:
04521C (DCN5731)
Troubleshooting & Repair Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
244
Check for actual sample flow. To check the actual sample flow, disconnect the sample tube from the
sample inlet on the rear panel of the instrument. Make sure that the unit is in basic SAMPLE mode.
Place a finger over the inlet and see if it gets sucked in by the vacuum or, more properly, use a flow
meter to measure the actual flow. If there is proper flow (see Table 10-3 for flow rates), contact
customer service. If there is no flow or low flow, continue with the next step.
Check pressures. Check that the sample pressure is at or around 28 in-Hg-A at sea level (adjust as
necessary when in elevated location, the pressure should be about 1” below ambient atmospheric
pressure) and that the RCEL pressure is below 10 in-Hg-A. The M200EH/EM will calculate a sample
flow up to about 14 in-Hg-A RCEL pressure but a good pump should always provide less than 10 in.
If both pressures are the same and around atmospheric pressure, the pump does not operate
properly or is not connected properly. The instrument does not get any vacuum.
If both pressures are about the same and low (probably under 10 in-Hg-A, or ~20” on sample and 15”
on vacuum), there is a cross-leak between sample flow path and vacuum, most likely through the
Perma Pure dryer flow paths. See troubleshooting the Perma Pure dryer later in this chapter.
If the sample and vacuum pressures are around their nominal values (28 and <10 in-Hg-A,
respectively) and the flow still displays XXXX, carry out a leak check as described in Section 0
If gas flows through the instrument during the above tests but goes to zero or is low when it is connected
to zero air or span gas, the flow problem is not internal to the analyzer but likely caused by the gas
source such as calibrators/generators, empty gas tanks, clogged valves, regulators and gas lines.
If an IZS or Zero/Span valve option is installed in the instrument, press CALZ and CALS. If the sample
flow increases, suspect a bad Sample/Cal valve.
If none of these suggestions help, carry out a detailed leak check of the analyzer as described in Section
0.
11.2.3.2. Ozone Flow is Zero or Low
If there is zero or a low (<200 cm³/min) ozone flow, the unit displays an OZONE FLOW WARNING message on
the front panel and a value between 0.0 and 200 cm³/min for the actual ozone flow as measured by the internal
mass flow meter. In this case, carry out the following steps:
Check the actual flow rate through the ozone dryer by using an external flow meter to the inlet port of the
dryer. This inlet port is inside the analyzer at the end of the plastic particle filter (Section 9.3.2 for
illustration). If there is nominal flow (see Table 10-3 for flow rates), consult customer service as there is
a problem with the firmware or electronics.
If the actual flow is low or zero, check if the pump operates properly. The RCEL pressure should be
below 10 in-Hg-A at sea level. If it is above 10”, rebuild the pump (Section 9.3.3). Check the spare
parts list in Appendix B on how to order pump rebuild kits.
Check if the particle filter is clogged. Briefly remove the particle filter to see if this improves the flow.
Be very cautious about handling the Perma Pure dryer fittings - refer to Section 9.3.2 on proper handling
instructions. If the filter is clogged, replace it with a new unit. If taking off this filter does not solve the
problem, continue to the next step. Do not leave the Perma Pure dryer without filter for more than a few
seconds, as you may draw in dust, which will reduce the performance of the dryer.
A leak between the flow meter and the reaction cell (where the flow-determining critical orifice is located)
may cause a low flow (the system draws in ambient air through a leak after the flow meter). Check for
leaks as described in Section 0. Repair the leaking fitting, line or valve and re-check.
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Troubleshooting & Repair
245
The most likely cause for zero or low ozone flow is a clogged critical flow orifice or sintered filter within
the orifice assembly. The orifice that sets the ozone flow is located on the reaction cell. Check the
actual ozone flow by disconnecting the tube from the reaction cell and measuring the flow going into the
cell. If this flow is correct (see Table 10-3 for flow rates), the orifice works properly. If this flow is low,
replace or clean the orifice. The orifice holder assembly allows a quick and easy replacement of the
orifice, refer to Section 9.3.8 on how to do this. Appendix B lists a spare part kit with a complete orifice
assembly that allows a quick replacement with minimum instrument down-time. The clogged orifice can
then be cleaned while the instrument is running with the replacement.
11.2.4. HIGH FLOW
Flows that are significantly higher than the allowed operating range (typically ±10-11% of the nominal flow)
should not occur in the M200EH/EM unless a pressurized sample, zero or span gas is supplied to the inlet ports.
Ensure to vent excess pressure and flow just before the analyzer inlet ports.
When supplying sample, zero or span gas at ambient pressure, a high flow would indicate that one or more of
the critical flow orifices are physically broken (very unlikely case), allowing more than nominal flow, or were
replaced with an orifice of wrong specifications. If the flows are within 15% higher than normal, we recommend
to re-calibrate the flow electronically using the procedure in Section 6.13.7.5, followed by a regular review of
these flows over time to see if the new setting is retained properly.
11.2.5. SAMPLE FLOW IS ZERO OR LOW BUT ANALYZER REPORTS
CORRECT FLOW
Note that the M200EH/EM analyzer can report a correct flow rate even if there is no or a low actual sample flow
through the reaction cell. The sample flow on the M200EH/EM is only calculated from the sample pressure and
critical flow condition is verified from the difference between sample pressure and vacuum pressure. If the
critical flow orifice is partially or completely clogged, both the sample and vacuum pressures are still within their
nominal ranges (the pump keeps pumping, the sample port is open to the atmosphere), but there is no flow
possible through the reaction cell.
Although measuring the actual flow is the best method, in most cases, this fault can also be diagnosed by
evaluating the two pressure values. Since there is no longer any flow, the sample pressure should be equal to
ambient pressure, which is about 1 in-Hg-A higher than the sample pressure under normal operation. The
reaction cell pressure, on the other hand, is significantly lower than under normal operation, because the pump
no longer has to remove 500 cm³/min of sample gas and evacuates the reaction cell much better. Those two
indicators, taken together with a zero or low actual flow, indicate a clogged sample orifice.
The M200EH/EM features a new orifice holder, which makes switching sample and ozone flow orifices very
easy, refer to Section 9.3.8 on how to change the sample orifices and Appendix B for part numbers of these
assemblies. Again, monitoring the pressures and flows regularly will reveal such problems, because the
pressures would slowly or suddenly change from their nominal, mean values. Teledyne Instruments
recommends to review all test data once per week and to do an exhaustive data analysis for test and
concentration values once per month, paying particular attention to sudden or gradual changes in all parameters
that are supposed to remain constant, such as the flow rates.
04521C (DCN5731)
Troubleshooting & Repair Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
246
11.3. CALIBRATION PROBLEMS
11.3.1. NEGATIVE CONCENTRATIONS
Negative concentration values can be caused for several reasons:
A slight, negative signal is normal when the analyzer is operating under zero gas and the signal is
drifting around the zero calibration point. This is caused by the analyzer’s zero noise and may cause
reported concentrations to be negative for a few seconds at a time down to -0.2 ppm, but should
randomly alternate with similarly high, positive values. The M200EH/EM has a built-in Auto-zero
function, which should take care of most of these deviations from zero, but may yield a small, residual,
negative value. If larger, negative values persist continuously, check if the Auto-zero function was
accidentally turned off using the remote variables in Appendix A-2. In this case, the sensitivity of the
analyzer may be drifting negative.
A corruption of the Auto-zero filter may also cause negative concentrations. If a short, high noise value
was detected during the AutoZero cycle, that higher reading will alter the Auto-zero filter value. As the
value of the Auto-zero filter is subtracted from the current PMT response, it will produce a negative
concentration reading. High AutoZero readings can be caused by
a leaking or stuck AutoZero valve (replace the valve),
by an electronic fault in the preamplifier causing it to have a voltage on the PMT output pin during the
AutoZero cycle (replace the preamplifier),
by a reaction cell contamination causing high background (>40 mV) PMT readings (clean the reaction
cell),
by a broken PMT temperature control circuit, allowing high zero offset (repair the faulty PMT cooler).
After fixing the cause of a high Auto-zero filter reading, the M200EH/EM will take 15 minutes for the
filter to clear itself, or
by an exhausted chemical in the ozone scrubber cartridge (Section 
Mis-calibration is the most likely explanation for negative concentration values. If the zero air contained
some NO or NO2 gas (contaminated zero air or a worn-out zero air scrubber) and the analyzer was
calibrated to that concentration as “zero”, the analyzer may report negative values when measuring air
that contains little or no NOx. The same problem occurs, if the analyzer was zero-calibrated using zero
gas that is contaminated with ambient air or span gas (cross-port leaks or leaks in supply tubing or user
not waiting long enough to flush pneumatic systems).
If the response offset test functions for NO (NO OFFS) or NOX (NOX OFFS) are greater than 150 mV, a
reaction cell contamination is indicated. Clean the reaction cell according to Section 9.3.7.
11.3.2. NO RESPONSE
If the instrument shows no response (display value is near zero) even though sample gas is supplied properly
and the instrument seems to perform correctly.
Check if the ozone generator is turned on. Usually, the analyzer issues a warning whenever the ozone
generator is turned off. Go to SETUP-MORE-DIAG-ENTR, then scroll to the OZONE GEN OVERRIDE
and see if it shows ON. If it shows OFF, turn it ON and EXIT the DIAG menu. If this is done and the
ozone flow is correct, the analyzer should be properly supplied with ozone unless the generator itself is
broken. A more detailed description of the ozone generator subsystem checks are in Section 11.5.17.
Confirm the lack of response by supplying NO or NO2 span gas of about 80% of the range value to the
analyzer.
Check the sample flow and ozone flow rates for proper values.
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Troubleshooting & Repair
247
Check for disconnected cables to the sensor module.
Carry out an electrical test with the ELECTRICAL TEST procedure in the diagnostics menu, see Section
6.13.7.3. If this test produces a concentration reading, the analyzer’s electronic signal path is correct.
Carry out an optical test using the OPTIC TEST procedure in the diagnostics menu, see Section
6.13.6.2. If this test results in a concentration signal, then the PMT sensor and the electronic signal path
are operating properly. If the M200EH/EM passes both ETEST and OTEST, the instrument is capable
of detecting light and processing the signal to produce a reading. Therefore, the problem must be in the
pneumatics or the ozone generator.
If NO2 signal is zero while NO signal is correct, check the NO/NOX valve and the NO2 converter for
proper operation.
11.3.3. UNSTABLE ZERO AND SPAN
Leaks in the M200EH/EM or in the external gas supply and vacuum systems are the most common source of
unstable and non-repeatable concentration readings.
Check for leaks in the pneumatic systems as described in Section 0. Consider pneumatic components
in the gas delivery system outside the M200EH/EM such as a change in zero air source (ambient air
leaking into zero air line or a worn-out zero air scrubber) or a change in the span gas concentration due
to zero air or ambient air leaking into the span gas line.
Once the instrument passes a leak check, do a flow check (this chapter) to make sure that the
instrument is supplied with adequate sample and ozone air.
Confirm the sample pressure, sample temperature, and sample flow readings are correct and steady.
Verify that the sample filter element is clean and does not need to be replaced.
11.3.4. INABILITY TO SPAN - NO SPAN KEY
In general, the M200EH/EM will not display certain keyboard choices whenever the actual value of a parameter
is outside of the expected range for that parameter. If the calibration menu does not show a SPAN key when
carrying out a span calibration, the actual concentration must be outside of the range of the expected span gas
concentration, which can have several reasons.
Verify that the expected concentration is set properly to the actual span gas concentration in the CONC
sub-menu.
Confirm that the NOx span gas source is accurate. This can be done by comparing the source with
another calibrated analyzer, or by having the NOx source verified by an independent traceable
photometer.
Check for leaks in the pneumatic systems as described in Section 0. Leaks can dilute the span gas and,
hence, the concentration that the analyzer measures may fall short of the expected concentration
defined in the CONC sub-menu.
If the low-level, hardware calibration has drifted (changed PMT response) or was accidentally altered by
the user, a low-level calibration may be necessary to get the analyzer back into its proper range of
expected values. One possible indicator of this scenario is a slope or offset value that is outside of its
allowed range (0.7-1.3 for slope, -20 to 150 for offsets). See Section 11.6.5 on how to carry out a low-
level hardware calibration.
04521C (DCN5731)
Troubleshooting & Repair Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
248
11.3.5. INABILITY TO ZERO - NO ZERO KEY
In general, the M200EH/EM will not display certain keyboard choices whenever the actual value of a parameter
is outside of the expected range for that parameter. If the calibration menu does not show a ZERO key when
carrying out a zero calibration, the actual gas concentration must be significantly different from the actual zero
point (as per last calibration), which can have several reasons.
Confirm that there is a good source of zero air. If the IZS option is installed, compare the zero reading
from the IZS zero air source to a zero air source using NOX-free air. Check any zero air scrubber for
performance. It may need to be replaced (Section 9.3.5).
Check to make sure that there is no ambient air leaking into zero air line. Check for leaks in the
pneumatic systems as described in Section 11.5.
11.3.6. NON-LINEAR RESPONSE
The M200EH/EM was factory calibrated to a high level of NO and should be linear to within 1% of full scale.
Common causes for non-linearity are:
Leaks in the pneumatic system. Leaks can add a constant of ambient air, zero air or span gas to the
current sample gas stream, which may be changing in concentrations as the linearity test is performed.
Check for leaks as described in Section 11.5.
The calibration device is in error. Check flow rates and concentrations, particularly when using low
concentrations. If a mass flow calibrator is used and the flow is less than 10% of the full scale flow on
either flow controller, you may need to purchase lower concentration standards.
The standard gases may be mislabeled as to type or concentration. Labeled concentrations may be
outside the certified tolerance.
The sample delivery system may be contaminated. Check for dirt in the sample lines or reaction cell.
Calibration gas source may be contaminated (NO2 in NO gas is common).
Dilution air contains sample or span gas.
Ozone concentration too low because of wet air in the generator. Generator system needs to be
cleaned and dried with dry supply air. Check the Perma Pure dryer for leaks. This mostly affects
linearity at the low end.
Sample inlet may be contaminated with NOX exhaust from this or other analyzers. Verify proper venting
of the pump exhaust.
Span gas overflow is not properly vented and creates a back-pressure on the sample inlet port. Also, if
the span gas is not vented at all and does not supply enough sample gas, the analyzer may be
evacuating the sample line. Make sure to create and properly vent excess span gas.
Diffusion of oxygen into Teflon-type tubing over long distances. 5PTFE or related materials can act as
permeation devices. In fact, the permeable membrane of NO2 permeation tubes is made of 5PTFE.
When using very long supply lines (> 1 m) between high concentrations span gases and the dilution
system, oxygen from ambient air can diffuse into the line and react with NO to form NO2. This reaction
is dependent on NO concentration and accelerates with increasing NO concentration, hence, affects
linearity only at high NO levels. Using stainless steel for long span gas supply lines avoids this problem.
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Troubleshooting & Repair
249
11.3.7. DISCREPANCY BETWEEN ANALOG OUTPUT AND DISPLAY
If the concentration reported through the analog outputs does not agree with the value reported on the front
panel, you may need to re-calibrate the analog outputs. This becomes more likely when using a low
concentration or low analog output range. Analog outputs running at 0.1 V full scale should always be calibrated
manually. See Section 6.13.4.4 for a detailed description of this procedure.
11.3.8. DISCREPANCY BETWEEN NO AND NOX SLOPES
If the slopes for NO and NOX are significantly different after software calibration (more than 1%), consider the
following two problems
NO2 impurities in the NO calibration gas. NO gases often exhibit NO2 on the order of 1-2% of the NO
value. This will cause differences in the calibration slopes. If the NO2 impurity in NO is known, it can
easily be accounted for by setting the expected values for NO and NO2 accordingly to different values,
e.g., 0.448 ppm NO and 0.45 ppm NOX. This problem is worse if NO gas is stored in a cylinder with
balance air instead of balance gas nitrogen or large amounts of nitrous oxide (N2O). The oxygen in the
air slowly reacts with NO to yield NO2, increasing over time.
The expected concentrations for NO and NOX in the calibration menu are set to different values. If a gas
with 100% pure NO is used, this would cause a bias. See Section 7.2 on how to set expected
concentration values.
The converter efficiency parameter has been set to a value not equal to 1.000 even though the
conversion efficiency is 1.0. The actual conversion efficiency needs to match the parameter set in the
CAL menu. See Section 7.1.5 for more information on this feature.
An instrument calibration with the IZS option (and expected concentrations set to the same amount) will always
yield identical slopes for NO and NOX, as the instrument measures only NOX and assumes NO to be the same
(with NO2 being zero).
11.4. OTHER PERFORMANCE PROBLEMS
Dynamic problems (i.e. problems which only manifest themselves when the analyzer is monitoring sample gas)
can be the most difficult and time consuming to isolate and resolve. The following section provides an itemized
list of the most common dynamic problems with recommended troubleshooting checks and corrective actions.
11.4.1. EXCESSIVE NOISE
Excessive noise levels under normal operation usually indicate leaks in the sample supply or the analyzer itself.
Make sure that the sample or span gas supply is leak-free and carry out a detailed leak check as described
earlier in this chapter.
Another possibility of excessive signal noise may be the preamplifier board, the high voltage power supply
and/or the PMT detector itself. Contact the factory on trouble-shooting these components.
11.4.2. SLOW RESPONSE
If the analyzer starts responding too slow to any changes in sample, zero or span gas, check for the following:
Dirty or plugged sample filter or sample lines.
Sample inlet line is too long.
Leaking NO/NOX valve. Carry out a leak check.
04521C (DCN5731)
Troubleshooting & Repair Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
250
Dirty or plugged critical flow orifices. Check flows, pressures and, if necessary, change orifices (Section
9.3.8).
Wrong materials in contact with sample - use glass, stainless steel or Teflon materials only. Porous
materials, in particular, will cause memory effects and slow changes in response.
Dirty reaction cell. Clean the reaction cell.
Insufficient time allowed for purging of lines upstream of the analyzer. Wait until stability is low.
Insufficient time allowed for NO or NO2 calibration gas source to become stable. Wait until stability is
low.
NO2 converter temperature is too low. Check for proper temperature.
11.4.3. AUTO-ZERO WARNINGS
Auto-zero warnings occur if the signal measured during an auto-zero cycle is lower than –20 mV or higher than
200 mV. The Auto-Zero warning displays the value of the auto-zero reading when the warning occurs.
If this value is higher than 150 mV, check that the auto-zero valve is operating properly. To do so, use
the SIGNAL I/O functions in the DIAG menu to toggle the valve on and off. Listen if the valve is
switching, see if the respective LED on the relay board is indicating functionality. Scroll the TST
functions until PMT is displayed and observe the PMT value change between the two valve states.
If the valve is operating properly, you should be able to hear it switch (once a minute under normal
operation or when manually activated from the SIGNAL I/O menu), the PMT value should drop from its
nominal reading for span gas level measurements to less than 150 mV and the LED on the relay board
should light up when the valve is activated. If the PMT value drops significantly but not to less than 150
mV, the valve is probably leaking across its ports. In this case, replace the valve. If the PMT value does
not change at all, the valve is probably not switching at all. Check the power supply to the valve (12 V to
the valve should turn on and off when measured with a voltmeter).
Note that it takes only a small leak across the ports of the valve to show excessive auto-zero values
when supplying high concentrations of span gas.
Another reason for high (although not necessarily out-of-range) values for AutoZero could be the ozone
air filter cartridge, if its contents has been exhausted and needs to be replaced. This filter cartridge
(Figure 3-1) filters chemicals that can cause chemiluminescence and, if saturated, these chemicals can
break through to the reaction cell, causing an erroneously high AutoZero value (background noise).
A dirty reaction cell can cause high AutoZero values. Clean the reaction cell according to Section 9.3.7.
Finally, a high HVPS voltage value may cause excess background noise and a high AZERO value. The
HVPS value changes from analyzer to analyzer and could show nominal values between 450 and 800
V. Check the low-level hardware calibration of the preamplifier board and, if necessary, recalibrate
exactly as described in Section 11.6.5 in order to minimize the HVPS.
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Troubleshooting & Repair
251
11.5. SUBSYSTEM CHECKOUT
The preceding sections of this manual discussed a variety of methods for identifying possible sources of failures
or performance problems within the analyzer. In most cases this included a list of possible causes and, in some
cases, quick solutions or at least a pointer to the appropriate sections describing them. This section describes
how to determine if a certain component or subsystem is actually the cause of the problem being investigated.
11.5.1. SIMPLE VACUUM LEAK AND PUMP CHECK
Leaks are the most common cause of analyzer malfunction; This section presents a simple leak check, whereas
Section 0 details a more thorough procedure. The method described here is easy, fast and detects, but does
not locate, most leaks. It also verifies the sample pump condition.
Turn the analyzer ON, and allow at least 30 minutes for flows to stabilize.
Cap the sample inlet port (cap must be wrench-tight).
After several minutes, when the pressures have stabilized, note the SAMP (sample pressure) and the
RCEL (vacuum pressure) readings.
If both readings are equal to within 10% and less than 10 in-Hg-A, the instrument is free of large leaks.
It is still possible that the instrument has minor leaks.
If both readings are < 10 in-Hg-A, the pump is in good condition. A new pump will create a pressure
reading of about 4 in-Hg-A (at sea level).
11.5.2. DETAILED PRESSURE LEAK CHECK
If a leak cannot be located by the above procedure, obtain a leak checker similar to Teledyne Instruments part
number 01960, which contains a small pump, shut-off valve, and pressure gauge to create both over-pressure
and vacuum. Alternatively, a tank of pressurized gas, with the two stage regulator adjusted to ≤ 15 psi, a shutoff
valve and pressure gauge may be used.
CAUTION
Once tube fittings have been wetted with soap solution under a pressurized system, do
not apply or re-apply vacuum as this will cause soap solution to be sucked into the
instrument, contaminating inside surfaces.
Do not exceed 15 psi when pressurizing the system.
Turn OFF power to the instrument and remove the instrument cover.
Install a leak checker or a tank of gas (compressed, oil-free air or nitrogen) as described above on the
sample inlet at the rear panel.
Disconnect the pump tubing on the outside rear panel and cap the pump port. If IZS or zero/span valves
are installed, disconnect the tubing from the zero and span gas ports and plug them (Figure 3-2). Cap
the DFU particle filter on the Perma Pure dryer (Figure 9-2).
04521C (DCN5731)
Troubleshooting & Repair Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
252
Pressurize the instrument with the leak checker or tank gas, allowing enough time to fully pressurize the
instrument through the critical flow orifice. Check each tube connection (fittings, hose clamps) with soap
bubble solution, looking for fine bubbles. Once the fittings have been wetted with soap solution, do not
re-apply vacuum as it will draw soap solution into the instrument and contaminate it. Do not exceed 15
psi pressure.
If the instrument has the zero and span valve option, the normally closed ports on each valve should
also be separately checked. Connect the leak checker to the normally closed ports and check with soap
bubble solution.
If the analyzer is equipped with an IZS Option Connect the leak checker to the Dry Air inlet and check
with soap bubble solution.
Once the leak has been located and repaired, the leak-down rate of the indicated pressure should be
less than 1 in-Hg-A (0.4 psi) in 5 minutes after the pressure is turned off.
Clean surfaces from soap solution, re-connect the sample and pump lines and replace the instrument
cover. Restart the analyzer.
11.5.3. PERFORMING A SAMPLE FLOW CHECK
CAUTION
Use a separate, calibrated flow meter capable of measuring flows between 0 and 1000
cm³/min to measure the gas flow rate though the analyzer. Do not use the built in flow
measurement viewable from the front panel of the instrument. This value is only
calculated, not measured.
Sample flow checks are useful for monitoring the actual flow of the instrument, as the front panel display shows
only a calculated value. A decreasing, actual sample flow may point to slowly clogging pneumatic paths, most
likely critical flow orifices or sintered filters. To perform a sample flow check:
Disconnect the sample inlet tubing from the rear panel SAMPLE port shown in Figure 3-2.
Attach the outlet port of a flow meter to the sample inlet port on the rear panel. Ensure that the inlet to
the flow meter is at atmospheric pressure.
The sample flow measured with the external flow meter should be within 10% of the nominal values
shown in Table 10-3.
Low flows indicate blockage somewhere in the pneumatic pathway. ]
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Troubleshooting & Repair
253
11.5.4. AC POWER CONFIGURATION
The E-Series digital electronic systems will operate with any of the specified power regimes. As long as
instrument is connected to 100-120 VAC or 220-240 VAC at either 50 or 60 Hz it will turn on and after about 30
seconds show a front panel display. Internally, the status LEDs located on the Relay PCA, Motherboard and
CPU should turn on as soon as the power is supplied.
On the other hand, some of the analyzer’s non-digital components, such as the pump and the various AC
powered heaters must be properly configured for the type of power being supplied to the instrument. Figure 11-
16shows the location of the various sets of AC Configuration jumpers.
JP2
Main AC Heater
Configuration
JP6
IZS Permeation
Tube Heater and O2
Sensor Connection.
(optional)
JP7
Pump
Configuration
Figure 11-15: Location of AC power Configuration Jumpers
There are several changes between the Relay PCA 04523 and previous version regarding AC power
configuration and distribution.
Previously, in analyzer models with internal pumps, the AC power for the pump came directly from the
instrument back panel. The 04523 version handles all AC and DC power distribution including power to
the pump.
Prior to this change, configuring the pump for compatibility with various line voltages and frequencies
was done with a set of hard-wired, in-line connections. The Relay PCA 04523, now includes a set of
jumpers that perform this function. This change increase reliability and simplifies troubleshooting and
repair operations.
04521C (DCN5731)
Troubleshooting & Repair Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
254
The Relay PCA 04523, includes a set of jumpers that connect AC power to heaters included in several
optional items, such as the zero/span valve options and the O2 sensor option available on the
M200EH/EM analyzers. In earlier versions of the relay PCA this was also handled by in-line
connections.
11.5.4.1. AC configuration – Internal Pump (JP7)
AC power configuration for internal pumps is set using Jumper set JP7 (see Figure 11-4 for the location of JP7).
Table 11-3: AC Power Configuration for Internal Pumps (JP7)
LINE
POWER
LINE
FREQUENCY
JUMPER
COLOR FUNCTION
JUMPER
BETWEEN
PINS
Connects pump pin 3 to 110 / 115 VAC power line 2 to 7
Connects pump pin 3 to 110 / 115 VAC power line 3 to 8
60 HZ WHITE
Connects pump pins 2 & 4 to Neutral 4 to 9
Connects pump pin 3 to 110 / 115 VAC power line 2 to 7
Connects pump pin 3 to 110 / 115 VAC power line 3 to 8
110VAC
115 VAC
50 HZ1 BLACK
Connects pump pins 2 & 4 to Neutral 4 to 9
Connects pump pins 3 and 4 together 1 to 6
60 HZ BROWN Connects pump pin 1 to 220 / 240VAC power line 3 to 8
Connects pump pins 3 and 4 together 1 to 6
220VAC
240 VAC
50 HZ1 BLUE Connects pump pin 1 to 220 / 240VAC power line 3 to 8
1 A jumper between pins 5 and 10 may be present on the jumper plug assembly, but is only functional on the M300E and
has no function on the M200EH/EM analyzers.
110 VAC /115 VAC 220 VAC /240 VAC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Present on 50 Hz version of jumper set,
and functional for M300E but not
Models M100E, M200E & M400E
Figure 11-16: Pump AC Power Jumpers (JP7)
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Troubleshooting & Repair
255
11.5.4.2. AC Configuration – Standard Heaters (JP2)
Power configuration for the AC the standard heaters is set using Jumper set JP2 (see Figure 11-4 for the
location of JP2).
Table 11-4: Power Configuration for Standard AC Heaters (JP2)
LINE VOLTAGE JUMPER
COLOR HEATER(S)
JUMPER
BETWEEN
PINS
FUNCTION
1 to 8 Common
Reaction Cell / Sample
Chamber Heaters
2 to 7 Neutral to Load
3 to 10 Common
Mini Hi-Con
Converter 4 to 9 Neutral to Load
3 to 10 Common
Moly Converter 4 to 9 Neutral to Load
5 to 12 Common
110 VAC / 115 VAC
50Hz & 60 Hz WHITE
Bypass Manifold 6 to 11 Neutral to Load
Reaction Cell / Sample
Chamber Heaters2 1 to 7 Load
Hi Concentration
Converter 3 to 9 Load
Moly Converter 3 to 9 Load
220 VAC / 240 VAC
50Hz & 60 Hz BLUE
Bypass Manifold 5 to 11 Load
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Reaction Cell or
Sample Chamber
Heaters
Mini Hi-Con or
Moly Converter
Heaters
200EM/EH
By Pass Manifold
Heater
110 VAC /115 VAC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Reaction Cell or
Sample Chamber
Heaters
Mini Hi-Con or
Moly Converter
Heaters
200EM/EH
By Pass Manifold
Heater
220 VAC / 240 VAC
Figure 11-17: Typical Set Up of AC Heater Jumper Set (JP2)
04521C (DCN5731)
Troubleshooting & Repair Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
256
11.5.4.3. AC Configuration –Heaters for Option Packages (JP6)
Both the IZS valve option or an O2 sensor options include AC heaters that maintain an optimum operating
temperature for key components of those options. Jumper set JP6 is used to connect the heaters associated
with those options to AC power. Since these heaters work with either 110/155 VAC or 220/240 VAC, there is
only one jumper configuration.
Table 11-5: Power Configuration for Optional AC Heaters (JP6)
JUMPER
COLOR HEATER(S) MODEL’S
USED ON1
JUMPER
BETWEEN
PINS
FUNCTION
1 to 8 Common
IZS1 Permeation Tube
Heater
M100E’s,
M200E’s &
M400E 2 to 7 Neutral to Load
3 to 10 Common
RED
O2 Sensor Heater M100E’s &
M200E’s 4 to 9 Neutral to Load
1 This Option Not Available on the M200EH/EM
6 5 4 3 2 1
IZS
Permeation Tube
Heater O2Sensor
Heater
10 9
12 11 8 7
Figure 11-18: Typical Set Up of AC Heater Jumper Set (JP2)
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Troubleshooting & Repair
257
11.5.5. DC POWER SUPPLY TEST POINTS
Table 11-6: DC Power Test Point and Wiring Color Code
NAME TEST POINT# COLOR DEFINITION
DGND 1 Black Digital ground
+5V 2 Red
AGND 3 Green Analog ground
+15V 4 Blue
-15V 5 Yellow
+12R 6 Purple 12 V return (ground) line
+12V 7 Orange
Table 11-7: DC Power Supply Acceptable Levels
CHECK RELAY BOARD TEST POINTS
FROM
Test Point
TO
Test Point
POWER
SUPPLY
VOLTAG
E
NAME # NAME #
MIN V MAX V
PS1 +5 DGND 1 +5 2 +4.80 +5.25
PS1 +15 AGND 3 +15 4 +13.5 +16.0
PS1 -15 AGND 3 -15V 5 -14.0 -16.0
PS1 AGND AGND 3 DGND 1 -0.05 +0.05
PS1 Chassis DGND 1 Chassis N/A -0.05 +0.05
PS2 +12 +12V Ret 6 +12V 7 +11.8 +12.5
PS2 DGND +12V Ret 6 DGND 1 -0.05 +0.05
The test points are located at the top, right-hand corner of the PCA (see Figure 11-4)
11.5.6. I2C BUS
Operation of the I2C bus can be verified by observing the behavior of the LED labeled D1 on the relay board in
conjunction with the performance of the front panel display. Assuming that the DC power supplies are operating
properly and the wiring from the motherboard to the keyboard as well as from the keyboard to the relay board is
intact, the I2C bus is operating properly if:
D1 on the relay board is flashing or
D1 is not flashing but pressing a key on the front panel results in a change to the display.
If the display is locked up or if the analyzer is not booting up at all, the I2C bus may be the cause. Contact
customer service if you suspect a problem with the I2C bus.
04521C (DCN5731)
Troubleshooting & Repair Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
258
11.5.7. KEYBOARD / DISPLAY INTERFACE
The front panel keyboard, the display and the keyboard/display circuit board can be verified by observing the
operation of the display when power is applied to the instrument and when a key is pressed on the front panel.
Assuming that there are no wiring problems and that the DC power supplies are operating properly:
The vacuum fluorescence display is working properly if, on power-up, a “-“ character is visible on the
upper left hand corner of the display.
If there is no “-“ character on the display at power-up but the D1 LED on the relay board is flashing, the
keyboard/display circuit may be bad.
If the analyzer starts operation with a normal display but pressing a key on the front panel does not
change the display, then there are three possible problems:
One or more of the keys is bad,
The interrupt signal between the keyboard and the motherboard is broken or
The keyboard circuit is bad.
You can verify this failure by logging on to the instrument using APICOM or a terminal program. If the analyzer
responds to remote commands and the display changes accordingly, the display wiring or the I2C bus may be
faulty.
11.5.8. GENREAL RELAY BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
The relay board circuit can most easily be checked by observing the condition of its status LEDs as described in
Section 11.1.4.3, and the associated output when toggled on and off through the SIGNAL I/O function in the
DIAG menu, see Section 6.13.1.
If the front panel display responds to key presses and D1 on the relay board is not flashing, then either the wiring
between the keyboard and the relay board is bad, or the relay board itself is bad.
If D1 on the Relay board is flashing and the status indicator for the output in question (heater, valve, etc.) does
not toggle properly using the Signal I/O function, then the associated device (valve or heater) or its control
device (valve driver, heater relay) is malfunctioning. Several of the control devices are in sockets and can easily
be replaced. The table below lists the control device associated with a particular function:
Table 11-8: Relay Board Control Devices
Function Control Device Socketed
All valves U5 Yes
All heaters K1-K5 Yes
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Troubleshooting & Repair
259
11.5.9. MOTHERBOARD
11.5.9.1. A/D functions
A basic check of the analog to digital (A/D) converter operation on the motherboard is to use the Signal I/O
function under the DIAG menu. Check the following two A/D reference voltages and input signals that can be
easily measured with a voltmeter.
Using the
Signal I/O function (Section 6.13.1 Appendix D), view the value of REF_4096_MV and
REF_GND. If both are within 3 mV of their nominal values (4096 and 0) and are stable to within ±0.5
mV, the basic A/D converter is functioning properly. If these values fluctuate largely or are off by more
than 3 mV, one or more of the analog circuits may be overloaded or the motherboard may be faulty.
Choose one parameter in the Signal I/O function such as SAMPLE_PRESSURE (see previous section
on how to measure it). Compare its actual voltage with the voltage displayed through the SIGNAL I/O
function. If the wiring is intact but there is a difference of more than ±10 mV between the measured and
displayed voltage, the motherboard may be faulty.
11.5.9.2. Analog Output Voltages
To verify that the analog outputs are working properly, connect a voltmeter to the output in question and perform
an analog output step test as described in Section 6.13.3.
For each of the steps, taking into account any offset that may have been programmed into the channel (Section
6.13.4.4), the output should be within 1% of the nominal value listed in the table below except for the 0% step,
which should be within 2-3 mV. If one or more of the steps is outside of this range, a failure of one or both D/A
converters and their associated circuitry on the motherboard is likely.
Table 11-9: Analog Output Test Function - Nominal Values
FULL SCALE OUTPUT VOLTAGE
100mV 1V 5V 10V
STEP % NOMINAL OUTPUT VOLTAGE
1 0 0 mV 0 0 0
2 20 20 mV 0.2 1 2
3 40 40 mV 0.4 2 4
4 60 60 mV 0.6 3 6
5 80 80 mV 0.8 4 8
6 100 100 mV 1.0 5 10
04521C (DCN5731)
Troubleshooting & Repair Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
260
11.5.9.3. Status Outputs
The procedure below can be used to test the Status outputs.
V
+DC Gnd
Figure 11-19: Typical Set Up of Status Output Test
1. Connect a cable between the “D“ pin and the “” pin on the status output connector.
2. Connect a 1000 Ω resistor between the “+” pin and the pin for the status output that is being tested.
3. Connect a voltmeter between the “D“ pin and the pin of the output being tested (Table 11-10).
4. Under the
DIAG / SIGNAL I/O menu (Section 6.13.1), scroll through the inputs and outputs until you get
to the output in question. Alternately turn the output on and off.
The Voltmeter will read approximately 5 VDC when the output is OFF.
The Voltmeter will read approximately 0 VDC when the output is ON.
Table 11-10: Status Outputs Pin Assignments
PIN # STATUS
1 SYSTEM OK
2 CONC VALID
3 HIGH RANGE
4 ZERO CAL
5 SPAN CAL
6 DIAG MODE
7 LOW
8 SPARE
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Troubleshooting & Repair
261
11.5.9.4. Control Inputs
The control input bits can be tested by the following procedure:
Connect a jumper from the +5 V pin on the STATUS connector to the +5 V on the CONTROL IN
connector.
Connect a second jumper from the ‘-‘ pin on the STATUS connector to the A pin on the CONTROL IN
connector. The instrument should switch from SAMPLE mode to ZERO CAL R mode.
Connect a second jumper from the ‘-‘ pin on the STATUS connector to the B pin on the CONTROL IN
connector. The instrument should switch from SAMPLE mode to
SPAN CAL R mode.
In each case, the M200EH/EM should return to SAMPLE mode when the jumper is removed.
11.5.10. CPU
There are two major types of CPU board failures, a complete failure and a failure associated with the Disk-On-
Chip (DOC). If either of these failures occur, contact the factory.
For complete failures, assuming that the power supplies are operating properly and the wiring is intact, the CPU
is faulty if on power-on:
The vacuum fluorescence display does not show a dash in the upper left hand corner
There is no activity from the primary RS-232 port (COM1) on the rear panel even if “? <RETURN>” is
pressed.
In some rare circumstances, this failure may be caused by a bad IC on the motherboard, specifically U57, the
large, 44 pin device on the lower right hand side of the board. If this is true, removing U57 from its socket will
allow the instrument to start up but the measurements will be incorrect.
If the analyzer stops during initialization (the vacuum fluorescence display shows some text), it is likely
that the DOC, the firmware or the configuration and data files have been corrupted or that the wrong
firmware was uploaded or does not have the correct filename.
04521C (DCN5731)
Troubleshooting & Repair Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
262
11.5.11. RS-232 COMMUNICATION
11.5.11.1. General RS-232 Troubleshooting
Teledyne Instruments analyzers use the RS-232 protocol as the standard, serial communications protocol. RS-
232 is a versatile standard, which has been used for many years but, at times, is difficult to configure. Teledyne
Instruments conforms to the standard pin assignments in the implementation of RS-232. Problems with RS-232
connections usually center around 4 general areas:
Incorrect cabling and connectors. This is the most common problem. See 6.11.3 for connector and pin-
out information.
The communications (baud) rate and protocol parameters are incorrectly configured. See Section
6.11.9 on how to set the baud rate.
The COM port communications mode is set incorrectly (Section 6.11.8).
If a modem is used, additional configuration and wiring rules must be observed. See Section 6.15.2.6.
Incorrect setting of the DTE - DCE switch. Typically, the red LED is on as soon as you power up the
analyzer. If not, contact the factory, as this indicates a problem with the motherboard. As the analyzer
is connected to the computer with a cable, the green LED should also illuminate. If not, set the
DCE/DTE switch to the other position. See also Section 6.11.5.
Note that some laptops do not enable their RS-232 port when in power-saving mode. In this case,
connect the laptop and start either APICOM or a Hyperterminal window and start communicating with
the analyzer. This will enable the serial port on the laptop and the green LED should illuminate. You
may have to switch back and forth while communicating to get the right setting.
11.5.11.2. Modem or Terminal Operation
These are the general steps for troubleshooting problems with a modem connected to a Teledyne Instruments
analyzer.
Check cables for proper connection to the modem, terminal or computer.
Check the correct position of the DTE/DCE as described in Section 6.11.5.
Check the correct setup command (Section 6.15.2.6).
Verify that the Ready to Send (RTS) signal is at logic high. The M200EH/EM sets pin 7 (RTS) to greater
than 3 volts to enable modem transmission.
Make sure the baud rate, word length, and stop bit settings between modem and analyzer match, see
Section 6.15.2.6 and 6.11.8.
Use the RS-232 test function to send “w” characters to the modem, terminal or computer; See Section
6.11.10.
Get your terminal, modem or computer to transmit data to the analyzer (holding down the space bar is
one way). The green LED on the rear panel should flicker as the instrument is receiving data.
Make sure that the communications software is functioning properly.
Further help with serial communications is available in a separate manual “RS-232 Manual”, Teledyne
Instruments part number 013500000, available online at http://www.Teledyne-api.com/manuals/.
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Troubleshooting & Repair
263
11.5.12. PMT SENSOR
The photo multiplier tube detects the light emitted by the reaction of NO with ozone. It has a gain of about 1:
500000 to 1:1000000. It is not possible to test the detector outside of the instrument in the field. The best way
to determine if the PMT is working properly is by using the optical test (OTEST), which is described in Section
6.13.6.2. The basic method to diagnose a PMT fault is to eliminate the other components using ETEST, OTEST
and specific tests for other sub-assemblies.
11.5.13. PMT PREAMPLIFIER BOARD
To check the correct operation of the preamplifier board, we suggest to carry out the optical and electrical tests
described in Sections 6.13.6.2 and 6.13.7.3. If the ETEST fails, the preamplifier board may be faulty. Refer to
Section 11.6.5 on hardware calibration through the preamplifier board.
11.5.14. HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY
The HVPS is located in the interior of the sensor module and is plugged into the PMT tube (Section 10.4.2). It
requires 2 voltage inputs. The first is +15 V, which powers the supply. The second is the programming voltage
which is generated on the preamplifier board. Adjustment of the HVPS is covered in the factory calibration
procedure in Section 11.6.5. This power supply has 10 independent power supply steps, one to each pin of the
PMT. The following test procedure below allows you to test each step.
Turn off the instrument.
Remove the cover and disconnect the 2 connectors at the front of the NOX sensor module.
Remove the end cap from the sensor (4 screws).
Remove the HVPS/PMT assembly from the cold block inside the sensor (2 plastic screws).
Re-connect the 7 pin connector to the sensor end cap, and power-up the instrument. Scroll the front
panel display to the HVPS test parameter. Divide the displayed HVPS voltage by 10 and test the pairs
of connector points as shown in Table 11-11.
Check the overall voltage (should be equal to the HVPS value displayed on the front panel, for example
700 V) and the voltages between each pair of pins of the supply (should be 1/10th of the overall voltage,
in this example 70 V):
Table 11-11: Example of HVPS Power Supply Outputs
If HVPS reading = 700 VDC
PIN PAIR NOMINAL READING
1 2 70 VDC
2 3 70 VDC
3 4 70 VDC
4 5 70 VDC
5 6 70 VDC
6 7 70 VDC
7 8 70 VDC
KEY
5
6
7
8
9
10
11 1
2
3
4
Turn off the instrument power, and reconnect the PMT, then reassemble the sensor.
If any faults are found in the test, you must obtain a new HVPS as there are no user serviceable parts inside the
supply.
04521C (DCN5731)
Troubleshooting & Repair Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
264
11.5.15. PNEUMATIC SENSOR ASSEMBLY
The pressure/flow sensor circuit board, located behind the sensor assembly, can be checked with a voltmeter
using the following procedure, which assumes that the wiring is intact and that the motherboard and the power
supplies are operating properly. Refer to Figure 11- for trouble-shooting.
Measure the voltage across TP1 and TP2, it should be 10.0 0.25 V. If not, the board is faulty. Measure the
voltage across the leads of capacitor C2. It should be 5.0 ± 0.25 V, if not, the board may be faulty.
11.5.15.1. Reaction Cell Pressure
Measure the voltage across test points TP1 and TP5. With the sample pump disconnected or turned off, the
voltage should be 4500 250 mV. With the pump running, it should be 800-1700 mV depending on the
performance of the vacuum pump. The lower the reaction cell pressure, the lower the resulting voltage is. If this
voltage is significantly different, the pressure transducer S1 or the board may be faulty. If this voltage is
between 2 and 5 V, the pump may not be performing well, check that the reaction cell pressure is less than
10 in-Hg-A (at sea level). Ensure that the tubing is connected to the upper port, which is closer to the sensor’s
contacts; the lower port does not measure pressure.
11.5.15.2. Sample Pressure
Measure the voltage across test points TP1 and TP4. With the sample pump disconnected or turned off, this
voltage should be 4500 250 mV. With the pump running, it should be about 0.2 V less as the sample pressure
drops by about 1 in-Hg-A below ambient pressure. If this voltage is significantly different, the pressure
transducer S2 or the board may be faulty. A leak in the sample system to vacuum may also cause this voltage
to be between about 0.6 and 4.5. Make sure that the front panel reading of the sample pressure is at about 1 in-
Hg-A less than ambient pressure. Ensure that the tubing is connected to the upper port, which is closer to the
sensor’s contacts; the lower port does not measure pressure.
Figure 11-20: Pressure / Flow Sensor Assembly
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Troubleshooting & Repair
265
11.5.15.3. Ozone Flow
Measure the voltage across TP1 and TP3. With proper ozone flow (250 cm3/min), this should be approximately
3.0 ± 0.3 V (this voltage will vary with altitude). With flow stopped (pump turned off), the voltage should be
approximately 0 V. If the voltage is incorrect, the flow sensor or the board may be faulty. A cross-leak to
vacuum inside the Perma Pure dryer may also cause this flow to increase significantly, and the voltage will
increase accordingly. Also, make sure that the gas flows from P1 to P2 as labeled on the flow sensor (“high”
pressure P1 to “low” pressure P2 or “Port” 1 to “Port” 2).
11.5.16. NO2 CONVERTER
The NO2 converter assembly can fail in two ways, an electrical failure of the band heater and/or the
thermocouple control circuit and a performance failure of the converter itself.
1) NO2 converter heater failures can be divided into two possible problems:
Temperature is reported properly but heater does not heat to full temperature. In this case, the heater is
either disconnected or broken or the power relay is broken.
Disconnect the heater cable coming from the relay board and measure the resistance between any
two of the three heater leads with a multi-meter. The resistance between A and B should be about
1000 Ω and that between A and C should be the same as between B and C, about 500 Ω each. If
any of these resistances is near zero or without continuity, the heater is broken.
Temperature reports zero or overload (near 500° C). This indicates a disconnected or failing
thermocouple or a failure of the thermocouple circuit.
First, check that the thermocouple is connected properly and the wire does not show signs of a
broken or kinked pathway. If it appears to be properly connected, disconnect the yellow
thermocouple plug (marked K) from the relay board and measure the voltage (not resistance)
between the two leads with a multi-meter capable of measuring in the low mV range. The voltage
should be about 12 mV (ignore the sign) at 315° C and about 0 mV at room temperature.
Measure the continuity with an Ohm-meter. It should read close to zero Ω. If the thermocouple does
not have continuity, it is broken. If it reads zero voltage at elevated temperatures, it is broken. To
test the thermocouple at room temperature, heat up the converter can (e.g., with a heat gun) and see
if the voltage across the thermocouple leads changes. If the thermocouple is working properly, the
electronic circuit is broken. In both cases, consult the factory.
2) If the converter appears to have performance problems (conversion efficiency is outside of allowed range of
96-102%), check the following:
Conversion efficiency setting in the CAL menu. If this value is different from 1.000, this correction needs
to be considered. Section 7.1.5 describes this parameter in detail.
Accuracy of NO2 source (GPT or gas tank standard). NO2 gas standards are typically certified to only
±2% and often change in concentrations over time. You should get the standard re-certified every year.
If you use GPT, check the accuracy of the ozone source.
Age of the converter. The NO2 converter has a limited operating life and may need to be replaced every
~3 years or when necessary (e.g., earlier if used with continuously high NO2 concentrations). We
estimate a lifetime of about 10000 ppm-hours (a cumulative product of the NO2 concentration times the
exposure time to that concentration). However, this lifetime heavily depends on many factors such as
absolute concentration (temporary or permanent poisoning of the converter is possible), sample flow
rate and pressure inside the converter, converter temperature, duty cycle etc. This lifetime is only an
estimated reference and not a guaranteed lifetime.
04521C (DCN5731)
Troubleshooting & Repair Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
266
In some cases with excessive sample moisture, the oxidized molybdenum metal chips inside the
converter cartridge may bake together over time and restrict air flow through the converter, in which
case it needs to be replaced. To avoid this problem, we recommend the use of a sample gas
conditioner (Section 5.10). Section 9.3.6 describes how to replace the NO2 converter cartridge.
With no NO2 in the sample gas and a properly calibrated analyzer, the NO reading is negative, while the
NO2 reading remains around zero. The converter destroys NO and needs to be replaced.
With no NO2 in the sample gas and a properly calibrated analyzer, the NOX reading is significantly
higher than the actual (gas standard) NO concentration. The converter produces NO2 and needs to be
replaced.
11.5.17. O3 GENERATOR
The ozone generator can fail in two ways, electronically (printed circuit board) and functionally (internal
generator components). Assuming that air is supplied properly to the generator, the generator should
automatically turn on 30 minutes after the instrument is powered up or if the instrument is still warm. See
Section 10.3.6 for ozone generator functionality. Accurate performance of the generator can only be determined
with an ozone analyzer connected to the outlet of the generator. However, if the generator appears to be
working properly but the sensitivity or calibration of the instrument is reduced, suspect a leak in the ozone
generator supply air.
A leak in the dryer or between the dryer and the generator can cause moist, ambient air to leak into the air
stream, which significantly reduces the ozone output. The generator will produce only about half of the nominal
O3 concentration when run with moist, ambient air instead of dried air. In addition, moist supply air will produce
large amounts of nitric acid in the generator, which can cause analyzer components downstream of the
generator to deteriorate and/or causes significant deposit of nitrate deposits on the reaction cell window,
reducing sensitivity and causing performance drift. Carry out a leak check as described earlier in this chapter.
11.5.18. BOX TEMPERATURE
The box temperature sensor (thermistor) is mounted on the motherboard below the bottom edge of the CPU
board when looking at it from the front. It cannot be disconnected to check its resistance. Box temperature will
vary with, but will usually read about 5° C higher than, ambient (room) temperature because of the internal
heating zones from the NO2 converter, reaction cell and other devices.
To check the box temperature functionality, we recommend to check the BOX_TEMP signal voltage
using the SIGNAL I/O function under the DIAG Menu (Section 6.13.1). At about 30° C, the signal
should be around 1500 mV.
We recommend to use a certified or calibrated external thermometer / temperature sensor to verify the
accuracy of the box temperature by placing it inside the chassis, next to the thermistor labeled XT1
(above connector J108) on the motherboard.
11.5.19. PMT TEMPERATURE
PMT temperature should be low and constant. It is more important that this temperature is maintained constant
than it is to maintain it low. The PMT cooler uses a Peltier, thermo-electric cooler element supplied with 12 V
DC power from the switching power supply PS2. The temperature is controlled by a proportional temperature
controller located on the preamplifier board. Voltages applied to the cooler element vary from 0.1 to 12 VDC.
The temperature set point (hard-wired into the preamplifier board) will vary by ±1C due to component
tolerances. The actual temperature will be maintained to within 0.1° C around that set point. On power-up of
the analyzer, the front panel enables the user to watch that temperature drop from about ambient temperature
down to its set point of 6-8° C. If the temperature fails to adjust after 30 minutes, there is a problem in the cooler
circuit. If the control circuit on the preamplifier board is faulty, a temperature of –1° C is reported.
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Troubleshooting & Repair
267
11.6. REPAIR PROCEDURES
This section contains some procedures that may need to be performed when a major component of the analyzer
requires repair or replacement. Note that maintenance procedures (e.g., replacement of regularly changed
expendables) are discussed in Chapter 8 (Maintenance) are not listed here. Also note that Teledyne-API
customer service may have a more detailed service note for some of the below procedures. Contact customer
service.
11.6.1. DISK-ON-CHIP REPLACEMENT
Replacing the Disk-on-Chip (DOC) will cause all of the instrument configuration parameters to be lost unless the
replacement chip carries the exact same firmware version. iDAS data will always be lost and, if possible, should
be downloaded prior to changing the DOC. If the analyzer is equipped with at least one EEPROM flash chip
(standard configuration), the configuration settings are stored on the EEPROM. It is recommended to document
all analyzer parameters that may have been changed, such as calibration, range, auto-cal, analog output, serial
port and other settings before replacing the CPU chip. Refer to Figure 10-10-17 for locating the DOC and other
CPU components.
1. Ground yourself to prevent electrostatic damage to electronic components.
2. Turn off power to the instrument.
3. Fold down the rear panel by loosening the mounting screws.
You may have to lift up the analyzer cover to prevent some connectors on the CPU board to brush
against the cover.
4. Locate the Disk-on-Chip on the CPU board.
The chip should carry a label with analyzer model number (M200EH/EM), firmware revision
(example: M200EH/EM_C7.EXE), date and initials of the programmer.
5. Remove the IC with a dedicated IC removal tool or by gently prying it up from the socket.
Do not bend the connector pins.
6. Reinstall the new Disk-on-Chip, making sure the notch at the end of the chip matches the notch in the
socket.
It may be necessary to straighten the pins somewhat to fit them into the socket. Gently but firmly
press the chip all the way in. Do not bend the pins.
7. Close the rear panel, replace the cover and turn on power to the machine.
Generally, all of the setup information will need to be re-entered, including analog input and output calibration
unless the firmware revision has not changed and the analyzer is equipped and properly configured with an
EEPROM chip. Note especially that the A/D converter must be re-calibrated, and all information collected in
step 1 above must be re-entered before the instrument will function correctly. The analyzer typically issues an
ANALOG CALIBRATION WARNING if the analog circuitry was not calibrated within 10 minutes after restart.
04521C (DCN5731)
Troubleshooting & Repair Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
268
11.6.2. FLASH CHIP REPLACEMENT OR UPGRADE
The M200EH/EM CPU board can accommodate up to two EEPROM flash chips. The standard configuration is
one chip with 64 kb of storage capacity, which is used to store the analyzer configuration as created during final
checkout at the factory. Replacing this chip will erase that configuration, which will be recreated with a new copy
when restarting the analyzer. However, if the firmware and/or the DOC is changed at the same time, all
analyzer configuration settings and iDAS data will be lost. Adding a second EEPROM chip to the existing chip
will double memory but this procedure will require a BIOS configuration and is not a standard sales option. Also
make sure that you receive a fully formatted EEPROM chip for replacement. Contact the factory for details.
1. Ground yourself to prevent electrostatic damage to electronic components.
2. Turn off power to the instrument, fold down the rear panel by loosening the mounting screws.
If necessary, lift the cover to prevent the rear panel connectors from brushing against it.
3. Locate the EEPROM chip in the left-most socket of the CPU board.
The chip is almost square with one corner cut off, the socket is shaped accordingly and the chip is
recessed into the socket.
4. Remove the old chip by using a special tool or gently pry the chip out using a very fine screwdriver.
Make sure not to bend or destroy any of the contacts of the socket.
When upgrading the CPU with a second chip, no removal is necessary as the second socket should
be empty.
5. Reinstall the new or additional EEPROM chip, making sure the cut-off edge matches that of the socket.
Press the chip symmetrically and straight all the way in.
6. Close the rear panel and cover and turn on power to the machine.
If a front panel message Flash Format INVALID appears on start-up, the EEPROM was not properly
formatted. Contact the factory for a proper replacement.
11.6.3. O3 GENERATOR REPLACEMENT
The ozone generator is a black, brick-shaped device with printed circuit board attached to its rear and two tubes
extending out the right side in the front of the analyzer. To replace the ozone generator:
1. Turn off the analyzer power, remove the power cord and the analyzer cover.
2. Disconnect the 1/8” black tube from the ozone scrubber cartridge and the ¼” clear tube from the plastic
extension tube at the brass fitting nearest to the ozone generator.
3. Unplug the electrical connection on the rear side of the brick.
4. Unscrew the two mounting screws that attach the ozone generator to the chassis and take out the entire
assembly.
5. If you received a complete replacement generator with circuit board and mounting bracket attached,
simply reverse the above steps to replace the current generator.
6. Make sure to carry out a leak check and a recalibration after the analyzer warmed up for about 30
minutes.
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Troubleshooting & Repair
269
11.6.4. SAMPLE AND OZONE DRYER REPLACEMENT
The M200EH/EM standard configuration is equipped with a dryer for the ozone supply air. An optional dryer is
available for the sample stream and a combined dryer for both gas streams can also be purchased. To change
one or all of these options:
1. Turn off power to the analyzer and pump, remove the power cord and the analyzer cover.
2. Locate the dryers in the center of the instrument, between sensor and NO2 converter.
They are mounted to a bracket, which can be taken out when unscrewing the two mounting screws (if
necessary).
3. Disconnect all tubing that extends out of the dryer assembly,
These are usually the purge tube connecting to the vacuum manifold, the tube from the exit to the
ozone flow meter (ozone dryer) or to the NO/NOx valve (sample dryer) or two tubes to the ozone flow
meter and the NO/NOX valve (combo-dryer).
Take extra care not to twist any of the white plastic fittings on the dryer, which connect the inner
drying tube to the outer purge tube. See Section 9.3.2 and Figure 9-2.
4. Note the orientation of the dryer on the bracket.
5. Cut the tie wraps that hold the dryer to the mounting bracket and take out the old dryer.
If necessary, unscrew the two mounting screws on the bracket and take out the entire assembly.
6. Attach the replacement dryer to the mounting bracket in the same orientation as the old dryer.
7. Fix the dryer to the bracket using new tie wraps.
8. Cut off excess length of the wraps.
9. Put the assembly back into the chassis and tighten the mounting screws.
10. Re-attach the tubes to vacuum manifold, flow meter and/or NO/NOx valve using at least two wrenches.
Ttake extra care not to twist the dryer’s white plastic fittings, as this will result in large leaks that are
difficult to trouble-shoot and fix.
11. Carry out a detailed leak check (Section 0),
12. Close the analyzer.
13. Power up pump and analyzer and re-calibrate the instrument after it stabilizes
04521C (DCN5731)
Troubleshooting & Repair Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
270
11.6.5. PMT SENSOR HARDWARE CALIBRATION
The sensor module hardware calibration is used in the factory to adjust the slope and offset of the PMT output
and to optimize the signal output and HVPS. If the instrument’s slope and offset values are outside of the
acceptable range and all other more obvious causes for this problem have been eliminated, the hardware
calibration can be used to adjust the sensor as has been done in the factory. This procedure is also
recommended after replacing the PMT or the preamplifier board.
1. Perform a full zero calibration using zero air (Section 7.2, 7.4, or 7.6).
2. Locate the preamplifier board (Figure 3-1).
3. Locate the following components on the preamplifier board (Figure 11-):
HVPS coarse adjustment switch (Range 0-9, then A-F).
HVPS fine adjustment switch (Range 0-9, then A-F).
Gain adjustment potentiometer (Full scale is 10 turns).
4. Turn the gain adjustment potentiometer 12 turns clockwise to its maximum setting.
5. Feed NO to the analyzer:
For the M200EH use 450 ppm NO.
For the M200Em use 18 ppm NO.
6. Wait until the STABIL value is below 0.5 ppm
7. Scroll to the NORM PMT value on the analyzer’s front panel.
8. With the NO gas concentrations mentioned instep 5 above, the NORM PMT value should be 3600 mV.
9. Set the HVPS coarse adjustment to its minimum setting (0). Set the HVPS fine adjustment switch to its
maximum setting (F).
10. Set the HVPS coarse adjustment switch to the lowest setting that will give you just above 3600 mV
NORM PMT signal. The coarse adjustment typically increments the NORM PMT signal in 100-300 mV
steps.
Figure 11-22: Pre-Amplifier Board Layout
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Troubleshooting & Repair
271
11. Adjust the HVPS fine adjustment such that the NORM PMT value is 3600-3700 mV.
The fine adjustment typically increments the NORM PMT value by about 30 mV.
It may be necessary to go back and forth between coarse and fine adjustments if the proper value is
at the threshold of the min/max coarse setting.
NOTE
Do not overload the PMT by accidentally setting both adjustment switches to their
maximum setting. Start at the lowest setting and increment slowly. Wait 10 seconds
between adjustments.
12. If the NORM PMT value set above is now between 3560-3640 mV, skip this step. Otherwise, adjust the
NORM PMT value with the gain potentiometer down to 3600±10 mV.
his is the final very-fine adjustment.
13. Note that during adjustments, the NORM PMT value may be fluctuating, as the analyzer continues to
switch between NO and NOX streams as well as between measure and AutoZero modes.
You may have to mentally average the values of NO and NOX response for this adjustment.
14. Perform a software span calibration (Section 7.2, 7.4, or 7.6) to normalize the sensor response to its
new PMT sensitivity.
15. Review the slope and offset values, the slopes should be 1.000±0.300 and the offset values should be
0.0±20 mV (-20 to +150 mV is allowed).
11.6.6. REPLACING THE PMT, HVPS OR TEC
The photo multiplier tube (PMT) should last for the lifetime of the analyzer. However, in some cases, the high
voltage power supply (HVPS) or the thermo-electric cooler (TEC) may fail. In case of PMT, HVPS or TEC
failure, the sensor assembly needs to be opened in order to change one of these components. Refer to Figure
11- for the structure of the 200EH/EM sensor assembly and follow the steps below for replacement of one of its
components. We recommend to ensure that the PMT, HVPS or TEC modules are, indeed, faulty to prevent
unnecessary opening of the sensor.
NOTE
Whereas it is possible for a skilled technician to change the PMT or HVPS through the
front panel with the sensor assembly mounted to the analyzer, we recommend to
remove the entire assembly and carry this procedure out on a clean, anti-static table
with the user wearing an anti-static wrist strap to prevent static discharge damage to
the assembly or its circuits.
1. Power down the analyzer, disconnect the power cord.
2. Remove the cover and disconnect all pneumatic and electrical connections from the sensor assembly.
04521C (DCN5731)
Troubleshooting & Repair Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
272
3. If the TEC is to be replaced, remove the reaction cell assembly at this point by unscrewing two holding
screws. This is necessary only if the PMT cold block is to be removed.
This step is not necessary if the HVPS or the PMT only are exchanged.
Figure 11-22: M200EH/EM Sensor Assembly
4. Remove the two connectors on the PMT housing end plate facing towards the front panel.
5. Remove the end plate itself (4 screws with plastic washers).
6. Remove the dryer packages inside the PMT housing.
7. Along with the plate, slide out the OPTIC TEST LED and the thermistor that measures the PMT
temperature.
Both may be coated with a white, thermal conducting paste.
Do not contaminate the inside of the housing with this grease, as it may contaminate the PMT glass
tube on re-assembly.
8. Unscrew the PMT assembly, which is held to the cold block by two plastic screws.
9. Discard the plastic screws and replace with new screws at the end of this procedure (the threads get
stripped easily and it is recommended to use new screws).
10. Carefully take out the assembly consisting of the HVPS, the gasket and the PMT.
11. Change the PMT or the HVPS or both, clean the PMT glass tube with a clean, anti-static wipe and do
not touch it after cleaning.
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Troubleshooting & Repair
273
12. If the cold block or TEC is to be changed:
a) Disconnect the TEC driver board from the preamplifier board, remove the cooler fan duct (4 screws
on its side) including the driver board.
b) Disconnect the driver board from the TEC and set the sub-assembly aside.
13. Remove the end plate with the cooling fins (4 screws) and slide out the PMT cold block assembly, which
contains the TEC.
14. Unscrew the TEC from the cooling fins and the cold block and replace it with a new unit.
15. Re-assemble this TEC subassembly in reverse order.
Make sure to use thermal grease between TEC and cooling fins as well as between TEC and cold
block and that the side opening in the cold block will face the reaction cell when assembled.
Evenly tighten the long mounting screws for good thermal conductivity.
CAUTION
The thermo-electric cooler needs to be mounted flat to the heat sink. If there is any
significant gap, the TEC might burn out. Make sure to apply heat sink paste before
mounting it and tighten the screws evenly and cross-wise.
16. Re-insert the TEC subassembly in reverse order.
Make sure that the O-ring is placed properly and the assembly is tightened evenly.
17. Re-insert the PMT/HVPS subassembly in reverse order and don’t forget the gasket between HVPS and
PMT.
Use new plastic screws to mount the PMT assembly on the PMT cold block.
18. Insert the LED and thermistor into the cold block, insert new drying packages and carefully replace the
end plate by making sure that the O-ring is properly in place.
Improperly placed O-rings will cause leaks, which – in turn – cause moisture to condense on the
inside of the cooler and likely cause a short in the HVPS.
19. Reconnect the cables and the reaction cell (evenly tighten these screws).
20. Replace the sensor assembly into the chassis and fasten with four screws and washers.
21. Reconnect all electrical and pneumatic connections.
22. leak check the system.
23. Power up the analyzer.
24. Verify the basic operation of the analyzer using the ETEST and OTEST features or zero and span
gases, then carry out a hardware calibration of the analyzer (Section 11.6.5) followed by a software
calibration.
04521C (DCN5731)
Troubleshooting & Repair Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
274
11.7. REMOVING / REPLACING THE RELAY PCA FROM THE
INSTRUMENT
This is the most commonly used version of the Relay PCA. It includes a bank of solid state AC relays. This
version is installed in analyzers where components such as AC powered heaters must be turned ON & OFF. A
retainer plate is installed over the relay to keep them securely seated in their sockets.
AC Relay
Retainer Plate
Retainer
Mounting
Screws
Figure 11-23: Relay PCA with AC Relay Retainer In Place
The Relay retainer plate installed on the relay PCA covers the lower right mounting screw of the relay PCA.
Therefore, when removing the relay PCA, the retainer plate must be removed first.
A
C Relay Retain Occludes
Mounting Screw on
P/N 045230200
Mounting
Screws
Figure 11-24: Relay PCA Mounting Screw Locations
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual Troubleshooting & Repair
275
11.8. TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE
If this manual and its trouble-shooting / repair sections do not solve your problems, technical assistance may be
obtained from Teledyne-API, Customer Service, 9480 Carroll Park Drive, San Diego, CA 92121. Phone: +1 858
657 9800 or 1-800 324 5190. Fax: +1 858 657 9816. Email: api-customerservice@teledyne.com. Before you
contact customer service, fill out the problem report form in Appendix C, which is also available online for
electronic submission at http://www.teledyne-api.com/forms/.
USER NOTES:
04521C (DCN5731)
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge
277
12. A PRIMER ON ELECTRO-STATIC DISCHARGE
Teledyne Instruments considers the prevention of damage caused by the discharge of static electricity to be
extremely important part of making sure that your analyzer continues to provide reliable service for a long time.
This section describes how static electricity occurs, why it is so dangerous to electronic components and
assemblies as well as how to prevent that damage from occurring.
12.1. HOW STATIC CHARGES ARE CREATED
Modern electronic devices such as the types used in the various electronic assemblies of your analyzer, are very
small, require very little power and operate very quickly. Unfortunately, the same characteristics that allow them
to do these things also make them very susceptible to damage from the discharge of static electricity. Controlling
electrostatic discharge begins with understanding how electro-static charges occur in the first place.
Static electricity is the result of something called triboelectric charging which happens whenever the atoms of the
surface layers of two materials rub against each other. As the atoms of the two surfaces move together and
separate, some electrons from one surface are retained by the other.
+
+
Materials
Makes
Contact
PROTONS = 3
ELECTRONS = 3
NET CHARGE = 0
PROTONS = 3
ELECTRONS = 3
NET CHARGE = 0
Materials
Separate
+
PROTONS = 3
ELECTRONS = 2
NET CHARGE = -1
+
PROTONS = 3
ELECTRONS = 4
NET CHARGE = +1
Figure 12-1: Triboelectric Charging
If one of the surfaces is a poor conductor or even a good conductor that is not grounded, the resulting positive or
negative charge cannot bleed off and becomes trapped in place, or static. The most common example of
triboelectric charging happens when someone wearing leather or rubber soled shoes walks across a nylon carpet
or linoleum tiled floor. With each step, electrons change places and the resulting electro-static charge builds up,
quickly reaching significant levels. Pushing an epoxy printed circuit board across a workbench, using a plastic
handled screwdriver or even the constant jostling of StyrofoamTM pellets during shipment can also build hefty
static charges
Table 12-1: Static Generation Voltages for Typical Activities
MEANS OF GENERATION 65-90% RH 10-25% RH
Walking across nylon carpet 1,500V 35,000V
Walking across vinyl tile 250V 12,000V
Worker at bench 100V 6,000V
Poly bag picked up from bench 1,200V 20,000V
Moving around in a chair padded
with urethane foam 1,500V 18,000V
04521C (DCN5731)
A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
278
12.2. HOW ELECTRO-STATIC CHARGES CAUSE DAMAGE
Damage to components occurs when these static charges come into contact with an electronic device. Current
flows as the charge moves along the conductive circuitry of the device and the typically very high voltage levels of
the charge overheat the delicate traces of the integrated circuits, melting them or even vaporizing parts of them.
When examined by microscope the damage caused by electro-static discharge looks a lot like tiny bomb craters
littered across the landscape of the component’s circuitry.
A quick comparison of the values in Table 12-1 with the those shown in the Table 12-2, listing device
susceptibility levels, shows why Semiconductor Reliability News estimates that approximately 60% of device
failures are the result of damage due to electro-static discharge.
Table 12-2: Sensitivity of Electronic Devices to Damage by ESD
DAMAGE SUSCEPTIBILITY VOLTAGE
RANGE
DEVICE DAMAGE BEGINS
OCCURRING AT
CATASTROPHIC
DAMAGE AT
MOSFET 10 100
VMOS 30 1800
NMOS 60 100
GaAsFET 60 2000
EPROM 100 100
JFET 140 7000
SAW 150 500
Op-AMP 190 2500
CMOS 200 3000
Schottky Diodes 300 2500
Film Resistors 300 3000
This Film Resistors 300 7000
ECL 500 500
SCR 500 1000
Schottky TTL 500 2500
Potentially damaging electro-static discharges can occur:
Any time a charged surface (including the human body) discharges to a device. Even simple contact of a
finger to the leads of a sensitive device or assembly can allow enough discharge to cause damage. A
similar discharge can occur from a charged conductive object, such as a metallic tool or fixture.
When static charges accumulated on a sensitive device discharges from the device to another surface
such as packaging materials, work surfaces, machine surfaces or other device. In some cases, charged
device discharges can be the most destructive.
A typical example of this is the simple act of installing an electronic assembly into the connector or wiring
harness of the equipment in which it is to function. If the assembly is carrying a static charge, as it is
connected to ground a discharge will occur.
Whenever a sensitive device is moved into the field of an existing electro-static field, a charge may be
induced on the device in effect discharging the field onto the device. If the device is then momentarily
grounded while within the electrostatic field or removed from the region of the electrostatic field and
grounded somewhere else, a second discharge will occur as the charge is transferred from the device to
ground.
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge
279
12.3. COMMON MYTHS ABOUT ESD DAMAGE
I didn’t feel a shock so there was no electro-static discharge: The human nervous system isn’t able
to feel a static discharge of less than 3500 volts. Most devices are damaged by discharge levels much
lower than that.
I didn’t touch it so there was no electro-static discharge: Electro-static charges are fields whose lines
of force can extend several inches or sometimes even feet away from the surface bearing the charge.
It still works so there was no damage: Sometimes the damaged caused by electro-static discharge can
completely sever a circuit trace causing the device to fail immediately. More likely, the trace will be only
partially occluded by the damage causing degraded performance of the device or worse, weakening the
trace. This weakened circuit may seem to function fine for a short time, but even the very low voltage and
current levels of the device’s normal operating levels will eat away at the defect over time causing the
device to fail well before its designed lifetime is reached.
These latent failures are often the most costly since the failure of the equipment in which the damaged
device is installed causes down time, lost data, lost productivity, as well as possible failure and damage to
other pieces of equipment or property.
Static Charges can’t build up on a conductive surface: There are two errors in this statement.
Conductive devices can build static charges if they are not grounded. The charge will be equalized
across the entire device, but without access to earth ground, they are still trapped and can still build to
high enough levels to cause damage when they are discharged.
A charge can be induced onto the conductive surface and/or discharge triggered in the presence of a
charged field such as a large static charge clinging to the surface of a nylon jacket of someone walking up
to a workbench.
As long as my analyzer is properly installed, it is safe from damage caused by static discharges:
It is true that when properly installed the chassis ground of your analyzer is tied to earth ground and its
electronic components are prevented from building static electric charges themselves. This does not
prevent discharges from static fields built up on other things, like you and your clothing, from discharging
through the instrument and damaging it.
12.4. BASIC PRINCIPLES OF STATIC CONTROL
It is impossible to stop the creation of instantaneous static electric charges. It is not, however difficult to prevent
those charges from building to dangerous levels or prevent damage due to electro-static discharge from
occurring.
04521C (DCN5731)
A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
280
12.4.1. General Rules
Only handle or work on all electronic assemblies at a properly set up ESD station. Setting up an ESD safe
workstation need not be complicated. A protective mat properly tied to ground and a wrist strap are all that is
needed to create a basic anti-ESD workstation (see figure 12-2).
Wrist Strap
P rote ctive M a t
Ground Point
Figure 12-2: Basic anti-ESD Work Station
For technicians that work in the field, special lightweight and portable anti-ESD kits are available from most
suppliers of ESD protection gear. These include everything needed to create a temporary anti-ESD work area
anywhere.
Always wear an Anti-ESD wrist strap when working on the electronic assemblies of your analyzer.
An anti-ESD wrist strap keeps the person wearing it at or near the same potential as other grounded
objects in the work area and allows static charges to dissipate before they can build to dangerous levels.
Anti-ESD wrist straps terminated with alligator clips are available for use in work areas where there is no
available grounded plug.
Also, anti-ESD wrist straps include a current limiting resistor (usually around one meg-ohm) that protects
you should you accidentally short yourself to the instrument’s power supply.
Simply touching a grounded piece of metal is insufficient. While this may temporarily bleed off static
charges present at the time, once you stop touching the grounded metal new static charges will
immediately begin to re-build. In some conditions, a charge large enough to damage a component can
rebuild in just a few seconds.
Always store sensitive components and assemblies in anti-ESD storage bags or bins: Even when
you are not working on them, store all devices and assemblies in a closed anti-Static bag or bin. This will
prevent induced charges from building up on the device or assembly and nearby static fields from
discharging through it.
Use metallic anti-ESD bags for storing and shipping ESD sensitive components and assemblies
rather than pink-poly bags. The famous, “pink-poly” bags are made of a plastic that is impregnated with
a liquid (similar to liquid laundry detergent) which very slowly sweats onto the surface of the plastic
creating a slightly conductive layer over the surface of the bag.
While this layer may equalizes any charges that occur across the whole bag, it does not prevent the build
up of static charges. If laying on a conductive, grounded surface, these bags will allow charges to bleed
away but the very charges that build up on the surface of the bag itself can be transferred through the bag
by induction onto the circuits of your ESD sensitive device. Also, the liquid impregnating the plastic is
eventually used up after which the bag is as useless for preventing damage from ESD as any ordinary
plastic bag.
Anti-Static bags made of plastic impregnated with metal (usually silvery in color) provide all of the charge
equalizing abilities of the pink-poly bags but also, when properly sealed, create a Faraday cage that
completely isolates the contents from discharges and the inductive transfer of static charges.
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge
281
Storage bins made of plastic impregnated with carbon (usually black in color) are also excellent at
dissipating static charges and isolating their contents from field effects and discharges.
Never use ordinary plastic adhesive tape near an ESD sensitive device or to close an anti-ESD
bag. The act of pulling a piece of standard plastic adhesive tape, such as Scotch® tape, from its roll will
generate a static charge of several thousand or even tens of thousands of volts on the tape itself and an
associated field effect that can discharge through or be induced upon items up to a foot away.
12.4.2. Basic anti-ESD Procedures for Analyzer Repair and Maintenance
12.4.2.1. Working at the Instrument Rack
When working on the analyzer while it is in the instrument rack and plugged into a properly grounded power
supply.
1. Attach your anti-ESD wrist strap to ground before doing anything else.
Use a wrist strap terminated with an alligator clip and attach it to a bare metal portion of the instrument
chassis. This will safely connect you to the same ground level to which the instrument and all of its
components are connected.
2. Pause for a second or two to allow any static charges to bleed away.
3. Open the casing of the analyzer and begin work. Up to this point, the closed metal casing of your analyzer
has isolated the components and assemblies inside from any conducted or induced static charges.
4. If you must remove a component from the instrument, do not lay it down on a non-ESD preventative surface
where static charges may lie in wait.
5. Only disconnect your wrist strap after you have finished work and closed the case of the analyzer.
12.4.2.2. Working at an Anti-ESD Work Bench.
When working on an instrument of an electronic assembly while it is resting on an anti-ESD work bench:
1. Plug your anti-ESD wrist strap into the grounded receptacle of the work station before touching any items
on the work station and while standing at least a foot or so away. This will allow any charges you are
carrying to bleed away through the ground connection of the workstation and prevent discharges due to
field effects and induction from occurring.
2. Pause for a second or two to allow any static charges to bleed away.
3. Only open any anti-ESD storage bins or bags containing sensitive devices or assemblies after you have
plugged your wrist strap into the workstation.
Lay the bag or bin on the workbench surface.
Before opening the container, wait several seconds for any static charges on the outside surface of the
container to be bled away by the workstation’s grounded protective mat.
4. Do not pick up tools that may be carrying static charges while also touching or holding an ESD Sensitive
Device.
Only lay tools or ESD-sensitive devices and assemblies on the conductive surface of your workstation.
Never lay them down on any non-ESD preventative surface.
5. Place any static sensitive devices or assemblies in anti-static storage bags or bins and close the bag or
bin before unplugging your wrist strap.
04521C (DCN5731)
A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
282
6. Disconnecting your wrist strap is always the last action taken before leaving the workbench.
12.4.2.3. Transferring Components from Rack to Bench and Back
When transferring a sensitive device from an installed Teledyne Instruments analyzer to an Anti-ESD workbench
or back:
1. Follow the instructions listed above for working at the instrument rack and workstation.
2. Never carry the component or assembly without placing it in an anti-ESD bag or bin.
3. Before using the bag or container allow any surface charges on it to dissipate:
If you are at the instrument rack, hold the bag in one hand while your wrist strap is connected to a ground
point.
If you are at an anti-ESD workbench, lay the container down on the conductive work surface.
In either case wait several seconds.
4. Place the item in the container.
5. Seal the container. If using a bag, fold the end over and fastening it with anti-ESD tape.
Folding the open end over isolates the component(s) inside from the effects of static fields.
Leaving the bag open or simply stapling it shut without folding it closed prevents the bag from forming a
complete protective envelope around the device.
6. Once you have arrived at your destination, allow any surface charges that may have built up on the bag or bin
during travel to dissipate:
Connect your wrist strap to ground.
If you are at the instrument rack, hold the bag in one hand while your wrist strap is connected to a ground
point.
If you are at a anti-ESD work bench, lay the container down on the conductive work surface
In either case wait several seconds
7. Open the container.
12.4.2.4. Opening Shipments from Teledyne Instruments Customer Service.
Packing materials such as bubble pack and Styrofoam pellets are extremely efficient generators of static electric
charges. To prevent damage from ESD, Teledyne Instruments ships all electronic components and assemblies in
properly sealed anti-ESD containers.
Static charges will build up on the outer surface of the anti-ESD container during shipping as the packing
materials vibrate and rub against each other. To prevent these static charges from damaging the components or
assemblies being shipped make sure that you always unpack shipments from Teledyne Instruments Customer
Service by:
1. Opening the outer shipping box away from the anti-ESD work area.
2. Carry the still sealed ant-ESD bag, tube or bin to the anti-ESD work area.
3. Follow steps 6 and 7 of Section 12.4.2.3 above when opening the anti-ESD container at the work station.
04521C (DCN5731)
Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge
283
4. Reserve the anti-ESD container or bag to use when packing electronic components or assemblies to be
returned to Teledyne Instruments.
12.4.2.5. Packing Components for Return to Teledyne Instruments Customer Service.
Always pack electronic components and assemblies to be sent to Teledyne Instruments Customer Service in anti-
ESD bins, tubes or bags.
WARNING
DO NOT use pink-poly bags.
NEVER allow any standard plastic packaging materials to touch the
electronic component/assembly directly
This includes, but is not limited to, plastic bubble-pack, Styrofoam
peanuts, open cell foam, closed cell foam, and adhesive tape
DO NOT use standard adhesive tape as a sealer. Use ONLY anti-ESD
tape
1. Never carry the component or assembly without placing it in an anti-ESD bag or bin.
2. Before using the bag or container allow any surface charges on it to dissipate:
If you are at the instrument rack, hold the bag in one hand while your wrist strap is connected to a ground
point.
If you are at an anti-ESD workbench, lay the container down on the conductive work surface.
In either case wait several seconds.
3. Place the item in the container.
4. Seal the container. If using a bag, fold the end over and fastening it with anti-ESD tape.
Folding the open end over isolates the component(s) inside from the effects of static fields.
Leaving the bag open or simply stapling it shut without folding it closed prevents the bag from forming a
complete protective envelope around the device.
NOTE
If you do not already have an adequate supply of anti-ESD bags or containers available,
Teledyne Instruments’ Customer Service department will supply them. Follow the
instructions listed above for working at the instrument rack and workstation.
User Notes:
04521C (DCN5731)
A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
284
USER NOTES:
04521C (DCN5731)
Addendum to the M200EM/EH Operators Manual (P/N 04521) (Ref: 06116A)
Addendum-1
ADDENDUM TO THE M200EM/EH OPERATORS
MANUAL (P/N 04521)
1. PREFACE
This addendum is an update to the Model M200EM/EH Operators Manual. It documents the
following improvements:
STAINLESS STEEL OZONE DESTRUCT P/N 051210000: The Ozone Destruct now resides
down stream of the vacuum manifold. Previously, it was located downstream of the
reaction cell.
BYPASS MANIFOLD ASSEMBLY P/N 044430100: As a cost reduction, the bypass manifold is
now incorporated into the three port reaction cell.
2. CHANGES AND UPDATES
2.1. OZONE DESTRUCT
The following photograph identifies the Ozone Destruct assembly and pneumatic connections.
FIGURE 1.0 - OZONE DESTRUCT ASSY P/N 05121
04521C (DCN5731)
(Ref: 06116A) Addendum to the M200EM/EH Operators Manual (P/N 04521)
Addendum-2
2.2. THREE PORT REACTION CELL
By incorporating the bypass flow orifice into the reaction cell, the bypass manifold assembly,
which previously resided between the vacuum manifold and Molycon container, is no longer
required.
FIGURE 2.0 – THREE PORT REACTION CELL ASSY P/N 06028
Bypass Flow Orifice:
7 Mil for M200EM
3 Mil for M200EH
Ozone Flow Orifice:
7 Mil for M200EM Or EH
Sample Flow:
No Orifice
04521C (DCN5731)
Model 200EH/EM (Ref: 05147F) APPENDIX A - Version Specific Software Documentation
A-1
APPENDIX A - Version Specific Software Documentation
APPENDIX A-1: Model 200EH/EM Software Menu Trees
APPENDIX A-2: Model 200EH/EM Setup Variables Available Via Serial I/O
APPENDIX A-3: Model 200EH/EM Warnings and Test Measurements Via Serial I/O
APPENDIX A-4: Model 200EH/EM Signal I/O Definitions
APPENDIX A-5: Model 200EH/EM iDAS Functions
APPENDIX A-6: Model 200EH/EM Terminal Command Designators
04521C (DCN5731)
APPENDIX A-1: M200EH/EM Software Menu Trees, Revision F.0 Model 200EH/EM (Ref: 05147F)
A-2
APPENDIX A-1: M200EH/EM Software Menu Trees, Revision F.0
PRIMARY SETUP
MENU
SAMPLE
MSG1
CALZ4CALS4CLR1SETUP
A1: User Selectable Range2
A2: User Selectable Range2
A3: User Selectable Range2
A4: User Selectable Range2
NOX STB
SAMP FLOW
0ZONE FLOW
PMT
NORM PMT
AZERO
HVPS
RCELL TEMP
BOX TEMP
PMT TEMP
MF TEMP
O2 CELL TEMP3
MOLY TEMP
RCEL
SAMP
NOX SLOPE
NOX OFFSET
NO SLOPE
NO OFFSET
O2 SLOPE3
O2 OFFSET3
TIME
O23
LOW
<TST TST>
CALTEST1
NOX
HIGH
CONCZERO SPAN
HIGH
ZERO
LOW LOW HIGH
CONCSPAN
CONVNOX NO
SETNO2 CAL
DASCFG ACAL4CLKRANGE PASS MORE
DIAGCOMM VARS ALAR
1 Only appears when warning messages are active.
2 User selectable analog outputs A1 – A4 (see Section X.X.X)
3 Only appears if analyzer is equipped with O2 sensor option.
4 Only appears if analyzer is equipped with Zero/Span or IZS valve
options.
SECONDARY
SETUP MENU
Press to cycle
through the
active warning
messages.
Press to clear
an active
warning
messages.
Figure A-1: Basic Sample Display Menu
04521C (DCN5731)
APPENDIX A-1: M200EH/EM Software Menu Trees, Revision F.0 Model 200EH/EM (Ref: 05147F)
A-3
SETUP
PASS
DAS RNGE CLK MORE
ACAL1
CFG
<TST TST>
MODEL TYPE AND
NUMBER
PART NUMBER
SERIAL NUMBER
SOFTWARE REVISION
LIBRARY REVISION
iCHIP SOFTWARE
REVISION
HESSEN PROTOCOL
REVISION2
CPU TYPE & OS
REVISION
DATE FACTORY
CONFIGURATION SAVED
Go to iDAS
Menu Tree
TIME DATE
ON
OFF
UNIT DIL3
PPM MGM
PREV MODENEXT
SEQ 1)
SEQ 2)
SEQ 3)
PREV NEXT
DISABLED
ZERO
ZERO-LO
ZERO-LO-HI
ZERO-HI
LO
LO-HI
HI
O2 ZERO4
O2 ZERO-SP4
O2 SPAN4
SET
<SET SET>
LOW5HIGH5
RANGE TO CAL5
DURATION
CALIBRATE
STARTING DATE
STARTING TIME
DELTA DAYS
DELTA TIME
TIMER ENABLE
SAMPLE
OFF
ON
1 ACAL menu and its submenus only appear if
analyzer is equipped with Zero/Span or IZS
valve options.
2 Only appears if Dilution option is active
3 Only appears if Hessen protocol is active.
4 O2 Modes only appear if analyzer is
equipped with O2 sensor option.
5 DOES NOT appear if one of the three O2
modes is selected
Go to
SECONDARY SETUP
Menu Tree
Figure A-2: Primary Setup Menu (Except iDAS)
04521C (DCN5731)
APPENDIX A-1: M200EH/EM Software Menu Trees, Revision F.0 Model 200EH/EM (Ref: 05147F)
A-4
SETUP
PASS
DAS RNGE CLK MOREACAL1
CFG
SAMPLE
1 ACAL menu only appear if analyzer is equipped with
Zero/Span or IZS valve options.
2 Editing an existing iDAS channel will erase any
data stored on the channel options.
3 Changing the event for an existing iDAS
channel DOES NOT erase the data stored on
the channel.
EDITVIEW
PREV NEXT
CONC
CALDAT
CALCHE
DIAG
HIRES
VIEW
Selects the data point to be viewed
Cycles through
parameters
assigned to this
iDAS channel
<PRM PRM>NX10NEXTPREVPV10
EDIT2PRNTDELINSNEXTPREV
ENTER PASSWORD: 818
CONC
CALDAT
CALCHE
DIAG
HIRES
NO
NX10NEXTSET><SET
YES
NAME
EVENT
PARAMETERS
NUMBER OF RECORDS
REPORT PERIOD
RS-232 REPORT
CAL MODE
CHANNEL ENABLE
ON
OFF NO
YES2
Sets the maximum number of
records recorded by this
channel
Sets the time lapse between
each report
Create/edit the name of the channel
PREV NEXT
Cycles through
list of available
trigger events3
NOYES2
EDIT2PRNTDELINSNEXTPREV
NO
PRNTEDITSET><SET
YES
Cycles through list of
currently active
parameters for this
channel
MAXMINAVGINST
PRECISIONSAMPLE MODEPARAMETER
Cycles through list of available &
currently active parameters for
this channel
NEXTPREV
Figure A-3: Primary Setup Menu iDAS Submenu
04521C (DCN5731)
APPENDIX A-1: M200EH/EM Software Menu Trees, Revision F.0 Model 200EH/EM (Ref: 05147F)
A-5
SETUP
PASSDAS RNGE CLK MORE
ACAL
CFG
SAMPLE
COMM VARS DIAG
EDIT PRNTJUMPNEXTPREV
0) DAS_HOLD_OFF
1) TPC_ENABLE
2) RCELL_SET
3) DYN_ZERO
4) DYN_SPAN
5) CONC_PRECISION
6) CLOCK_ADJ
Go to DIAG Menu Tree
HESN2
INET1
ID
EDITSET><SET
COM1 COM21
TEST PORTBAUD RATEMODE
TEST
300
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
38400
57600
115200
QUIET
COMPUTER
SECURITY
HESSEN PROTOCOL
E, 7, 1
RS-485
MULTIDROP PROTOCOL
ENABLE MODEM
ERROR CHECKING
XON/XOFF HANDSHAKE
HARDWARE
HANDSHAKE
HARDWARE FIFO
COMMAND PROMPT
ON
OFF
ENTER PASSWORD: 818
ENTER PASSWORD: 818
Go to
COMM / Hessen
Menu Tree
ENTER PASSWORD: 818
EDITSET><SET
DHCP
ON OFF
INSTRUMENT IP3
GATEWAY IP3
SUBNET MASK3
TCP PORT4
HOSTNAME5
1Only appears if optional Ethernet PCA is installed.
NOTE: When Ethernet PCA is present COM2
submenu disappears.
2Only appears if HESSEN PROTOCOL mode is ON
(See COM1 & COM2 – MODE submenu above).
3INSTRUMENT IP, GATEWAY IP & SUBNET MASK
are only editable when DHCP is OFF.
4Although TCP PORT is editable regardless of the
DHCP state, do not change the setting for this
property.
5HOST NAME is only editable when DHCP is ON.
EDITEDIT
Figure A-4: Secondary Setup Menu COMM and VARS Submenus
04521C (DCN5731)
APPENDIX A-1: M200EH/EM Software Menu Trees, Revision F.0 Model 200EH/EM (Ref: 05147F)
A-6
SETUP
PASSDAS RNGE CLK MORE
ACAL
CFG
SAMPLE
COMM VARS DIAG
Go to DIAG Menu Tree
HESN2
INET1
ID ENTER PASSWORD: 818
ENTER PASSWORD: 818ENTER PASSWORD: 818
1Only appears if Ethernet Option is installed.
2Only appears if HESSEN PROTOCOL mode is ON.
Go to COMM / VARS
Menu Tree
Go to COMM / VARS
Menu Tree
COM1 COM2
EDITSET><SET
GAS LISTRESPONSE MODEVARIATION STATUS FLAGS
TYPE2TYPE1 CMDTEXTBCC
EDIT PRNTDELINSNEXTPREV
NOYES GAS TYPE
GAS ID
REPORTED
ON
OFF
Set/create unique gas ID number
NOX
NO
NO2
O2
SET><SET
NOX, 211, REPORTED
NO, 212, REPORTED
NO2, 213 REPORTED
O2, 214, REPORTED
Figure A-5: Secondary Setup Menu Hessen Protocol Submenu
04521C (DCN5731)
APPENDIX A-1: M200EH/EM Software Menu Trees, Revision F.0 Model 200EH/EM (Ref: 05147F)
A-7
DISPLAY
SEQUENCE
CONFIGURATION
ANALOG
OUTPUT
SETUP
PASSDAS RNGE CLK MORE
ACAL
CFG
SAMPLE
COMM VARS
DIAG
NEXTPREV
SIGNAL
I/O
ANALOG
CONFIGURATION
OPTIC
TEST
ELECTRICAL
TEST
OZONE GEN
OVERRIDE
FLOW
CALIBRATION
Press ENTR
to start test
Press ENTR
to start test OZONESAMP
ON
OFF
Press ENTR
to start test
ENTER PASSWORD: 818
EDIT PRNTDELINSNEXTPREV
NOYES
Cycles through list of
already programmed
display sequences
NEXTPREV
NOX
NXL
NXH
NO
NOL
NOH
NO2
N2L
N2H
O2
DISPLAY DATA
DISPLAY DURATION
ENTR
NEXTPREV 0) EXT ZERO CAL
1) EXT SPAN CAL
2) EXT LOW SPAN
3) REMOTE RANGE HI
4) MAINT MODE
5) LANG2 SELECT
6) SAMPLE LED
7) CAL LED
8) FAULT LED
9) AUDIBLE BEEPER
10) ELEC TEST
11) OPTIC TEST
12) PREAMP RANGE HIGH
13) O3GEN STATUS
14) ST SYSTEM OK
15) ST CONC VALID
16) ST HIGH RANGE
17) ST ZERO CAL
18) ST SPAN CAL
19) ST DIAG MODE
20) ST LOW SPAN CAL
21) ST O2 CAL
22) ST SYSTEM OK2
23) ST CONC ALARM 1
24) ST CONC ALARM 2
25) RELAY WATCHDOG
26) RCELL HEATER
27) CONV HEATER
28) MANIFOLD HEATER
29) O2 CELL HEATER
30) ZERO VALVE
31) CAL VALVE
32) AUTO ZERO VALVE
33) NOX VALVE
34) LOW SPAN VALVE
35) HIGH SPAN VALVE
36 INTERNAL ANALOG
to VOLTAGE SIGNALS
61 (see Appendix A)
ON
OFF CAL
EDITSET><SET
AOUTS CALIBRATED
DATA OUT 11
DATA OUT 21
DATA OUT 31
DATA OUT 41
AIN CALIBRATED
10V CURR5V1V0.1V
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
CAL2
Auto Cal
Sets time lapse
between data
updates on
selected output
Sets the scale
width of the
reporting range.
RANGE OVER
RANGE
CALIBRATED OUTPUT DATA SCALE UPDATE
Cycles
through the
list of iDAS
data types.
RANGE
OFFSET2
AUTO2
CAL
Sets the
degree of
offset
ON
OFF
U100 UP10 UP DOWN DN10 D100
Manual Cal3
1Correspond to analog Output A1 – A4 on back of analyzer
2Only appears if one of the voltage ranges is selected.
3Manual adjustment menu only appears if either the Auto Cal feature is OFF or the
range is set for CURRent.
Figure A-6: DIAG Menu
04521C (DCN5731)
APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O, Revision F.0 Model 200EH/EM (Ref: 05147F)
A-8
APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O, Revision F.0
Table A-1: M200EH/EM Setup Variables, Revision F.0
Setup Variable Numeric
Units Default Value Value Range Description
DAS_HOLD_OFF Minutes 15 0.5–20
Duration of DAS hold off period.
MEASURE_MODE — NO-NOX,
NO, NOX,
NOX-NO,
NON-OX
Gas measure mode. Enclose value in
double quotes (") when setting from
the RS-232 interface.
TPC_ENABLE — ON OFF, ON
ON enables temperature/ pressure
compensation; OFF disables it.
DYN_ZERO — OFF ON, OFF
ON enables remote dynamic zero
calibration; OFF disables it.
DYN_SPAN — OFF ON, OFF
ON enables remote dynamic span
calibration; OFF disables it.
CONC_PRECISION — 3
AUTO, 0, 1, 2, 3,
4
Number of digits to display to the
right of the decimal point for
concentrations on the display.
Enclose value in double quotes (")
when setting from the RS-232
interface.
CLOCK_ADJ Sec./Day 0 -60–60
Time-of-day clock speed adjustment.
LANGUAGE_SELECT — ENGL
ENGL, SECD,
EXTN
Selects the language to use for the
user interface. Enclose value in
double quotes (") when setting from
the RS-232 interface.
MAINT_TIMEOUT Hours 2 0.1–100
Time until automatically switching out
of software-controlled maintenance
mode.
BXTEMP_TPC_GAIN — 0 0–10
Box temperature compensation
attenuation factor.
RCTEMP_TPC_GAIN — 0 0–10
Reaction cell temperature
compensation attenuation factor.
RCPRESS_TPC_GAIN — 1 0–10
Reaction cell pressure compensation
attenuation factor.
SPRESS_TPC_GAIN — 1 0–10
Sample pressure compensation
attenuation factor.
CE_FACTOR1 — 1 0.8–1.2
Moly converter efficiency factor for
range 1.
CE_FACTOR2 — 1 0.8–1.2
Moly converter efficiency factor for
range 2.
CONV_TIME — 1 SEC
33 MS,
66 MS,
133 MS,
266 MS,
533 MS, 1 SEC,
2 SEC
Conversion time for PMT detector
channel. Enclose value in double
quotes (") when setting from the RS-
232 interface.
SG_CONV_TIME — 33 MS
Same as above.
Conversion time for PMT detector
channel in single-gas measure
modes. Enclose value in double
quotes (") when setting from the RS-
232 interface.
NEG_NO2_SUPPRESS — ON ON, OFF
ON suppresses negative NO2 in
during switching mode;
OFF does not suppress negative NO2
readings
FILT_SIZE Samples 5
1, 10 2 1–500
Moving average filter size.
04521C (DCN5731)
Model 200EH/EM (Ref: 05147F) APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O, Revision F.0
A-9
Setup Variable Numeric
Units Default Value Value Range Description
SG_FILT_SIZE Samples 60 1–500
Moving average filter size in single-
gas measure modes.
FILT_ADAPT — ON ON, OFF
ON enables adaptive filter; OFF
disables it.
FILT_OMIT_DELTA PPM 10
1, 0.8 2 5–100 1,
0.1–100 2
Absolute change in concentration to
omit readings.
FILT_OMIT_PCT % 10 1–100
Percent change in concentration to
omit readings.
FILT_SHORT_DELT PPM 5
1, 0.5 2 5–100 1,
0.1–100 2
Absolute change in concentration to
shorten filter.
FILT_SHORT_PCT % 51, 7 2 1–100
Percent change in concentration to
shorten filter.
FILT_ASIZE Samples 2
1, 3 2 1–500
Moving average filter size in adaptive
mode.
SG_FILT_ASIZE Samples 10 1–500
Moving average filter size in adaptive
mode, in single-gas measure modes.
FILT_DELAY Seconds
60 1,80 2 0–200
Delay before leaving adaptive filter
mode.
SG_FILT_DELAY Seconds 60 0–200
Delay before leaving adaptive filter
mode in single-gas measure modes.
O2_FILT_ADAPT 4 — ON ON, OFF
ON enables O2 adaptive filter; OFF
disables it.
O2_FILT_SIZE 4 Samples 60 1–500
O2 moving average filter size in
normal mode.
O2_FILT_ASIZE 4 Samples 10 1–500
O2 moving average filter size in
adaptive mode.
O2_FILT_DELTA 4 % 2 0.1–100
Absolute change in O2 concentration
to shorten filter.
O2_FILT_PCT 4 % 2 0.1–100
Relative change in O2 concentration
to shorten filter.
O2_FILT_DELAY 4 Seconds 20 0–300
Delay before leaving O2 adaptive
filter mode.
NOX_DWELL Seconds 4.2
1, 3.5 2 0.1–30
Dwell time after switching valve to
NOX position.
SG_NOX_DWELL Seconds 1 0.1–30
Dwell time after switching valve to
NOX position in single-gas measure
modes.
NOX_SAMPLE Samples 2 1–30
Number of samples to take in NOX
mode.
SG_NOX_SAMPLE Samples 2 1–30
Number of samples to take in NOX
mode in single-gas measure modes.
NO_DWELL Seconds 4.21, 3.0 2 0.1–30
Dwell time after switching valve to
NO position.
SG_NO_DWELL Seconds 1 0.1–30
Dwell time after switching valve to
NO position in single-gas measure
modes.
NO_SAMPLE Samples 2 1–30
Number of samples to take in NO
mode.
SG_NO_SAMPLE Samples 2 1–30
Number of samples to take in NO
mode in single-gas measure modes.
USER_UNITS — PPM PPM, MGM
Concentration units for user
interface. Enclose value in double
quotes (") when setting from the RS-
232 interface.
04521C (DCN5731)
APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O, Revision F.0 Model 200EH/EM (Ref: 05147F)
A-10
Setup Variable Numeric
Units Default Value Value Range Description
DIL_FACTOR — 1 1–1000
Dilution factor. Used only if is dilution
enabled with FACTORY_OPT
variable.
AZERO_ENABLE — ON ON, OFF
ON enables auto-zero; OFF disables
it.
AZERO_FREQ Minutes 2 0–60
Auto-zero frequency.
AZERO_DWELL Seconds 4 0.1–60
Dwell time after opening auto-zero
valve.
AZERO_POST_DWELL Seconds 4 0–60
Dwell time after closing auto-zero
valve.
AZERO_SAMPLE Samples 2 1–10
Number of auto-zero samples to
average.
SG_AZERO_SAMP Samples 2 1–10
Number of auto-zero samples to
average in single-gas measure
modes.
AZERO_FSIZE Samples 8 1–50
Moving average filter size for auto-
zero samples.
AZERO_LIMIT mV 200 0–1000
Maximum auto-zero offset allowed.
NOX_SPAN1 Conc. 80
1, 16 2 1–5000
Target NOX concentration during
span calibration of range 1.
NO_SPAN1 Conc. 80
1, 16 2 1–5000
Target NO concentration during span
calibration of range 1.
NO2_SPAN1 Conc. 80
1, 16 2 1–5000
Target NO2 concentration during
converter efficiency calibration of
range 1.
NOX_SLOPE1 PPM/mV 1 0.25–4
NOX slope for range 1.
NOX_OFFSET1 mV 0 -10000–10000
NOX offset for range 1.
NO_SLOPE1 PPM/mV 1 0.25–4
NO slope for range 1.
NO_OFFSET1 mV 0 -10000–10000
NO offset for range 1.
NOX_SPAN2 Conc. 80
1, 16 2 1–5000
Target NOX concentration during
span calibration of range 2.
NO_SPAN2 Conc. 80
1, 16 2 1–5000
Target NO concentration during span
calibration of range 2.
NO2_SPAN2 Conc. 80
1, 16 2 1–5000
Target NO2 concentration during
converter efficiency calibration of
range 2.
NOX_SLOPE2 PPM/mV 1 0.25–4
NOX slope for range 2.
NOX_OFFSET2 mV 0 -10000–10000
NOX offset for range 2.
NO_SLOPE2 PPM/mV 1 0.25–4
NO slope for range 2.
NO_OFFSET2 mV 0 -10000–10000
NO offset for range 2.
O2_TARG_SPAN_CONC 4 % 20.95 0–100
Target O2 concentration during span
calibration.
O2_SLOPE 4 — 1 0.5–2
O2 slope.
O2_OFFSET 4 % 0 -10–10
O2 offset.
O2_RANGE 4 % 100 0.1–500
O2 concentration range.
STD_O2_CELL_TEMP 4 ºK 323 1–500
Standard O2 cell temperature for
temperature compensation.
PHYS_RANGE1 PPM 500
1, 20 2 5–5000
Low pre-amp range.
PHYS_RANGE2 PPM 5000
1, 200 2 5–5000
High pre-amp range.
CONC_RANGE1 Conc. 100 1, 20 2 5–5000 1,
1–500 2
D/A concentration range 1 or range
for NOX.
04521C (DCN5731)
Model 200EH/EM (Ref: 05147F) APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O, Revision F.0
A-11
Setup Variable Numeric
Units Default Value Value Range Description
RCELL_SET ºC
50
Warnings:
45–55
30–70
Reaction cell temperature set point
and warning limits.
MANIFOLD_SET ºC
50
Warnings:
45–55
30–70
Manifold temperature set point and
warning limits.
O2_CELL_SET 4 ºC
50
Warnings:
45–55
30–70
O2 sensor cell temperature set point
and warning limits.
CONV_TYPE — MOLY
NONE, MOLY,
CONV, O3KL
Converter type. “CONV” is mini-
hicon. Enclose value in double
quotes (") when setting from the RS-
232 interface.
CONV_SET ºC
315
Warnings:
305–325
0–800
Converter temperature set point and
warning limits.
CONV_TEMP_TRIG Cycles 10 0–100
Number of converter temperature
errors required to trigger warning.
BOX_SET ºC
30
Warnings:
7–48
0–70
Nominal box temperature set point
and warning limits.
PMT_SET ºC
7
Warnings:
5–12
0–40
PMT temperature warning limits. Set
point is not used.
SFLOW_SET cc/m
290 1, 360 1+4,
250 2, 320 2+4
Warnings:
350–600,
200–600 1,2,
300–700 1+4, 2+4
100–1000
Sample flow warning limits. Set point
is not used.
SAMP_FLOW_SLOPE — 1 0.001–100
Slope term to correct sample flow
rate.
OFLOW_SET cc/m
250
Warnings:
200–600
100–1000
Ozone flow warning limits. Set point
is not used.
OZONE_FLOW_SLOPE — 1 0.001–100
Slope term to correct ozone flow rate.
RCELL_SAMP_RATIO — 0.53 0.1–2
Maximum reaction cell pressure /
sample pressure ratio for valid
sample flow calculation.
STD_BOX_TEMP ºK
298
Valid limits:
278–338
1–500
Standard box temperature and valid
limits for temperature compensation.
STD_RCELL_TEMP ºK
323
Valid limits:
278–338
1–500
Standard reaction cell temperature
and valid limits for temperature
compensation.
04521C (DCN5731)
APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O, Revision F.0 Model 200EH/EM (Ref: 05147F)
A-12
Setup Variable Numeric
Units Default Value Value Range Description
STD_RCELL_PRESS "Hg
5
Valid limits:
0.5–12
0.1–50
Standard reaction cell pressure and
valid limits for pressure
compensation.
STD_SAMP_PRESS "Hg
29.92
Valid limits:
0.5–32
0.1–50
Standard sample pressure and valid
limits for pressure compensation.
RS232_MODE — 0 0–65535
RS-232 COM1 mode flags. Add
values to combine flags.
1 = quiet mode
2 = computer mode
4 = enable security
16 = enable Hessen protocol 3
32 = enable multidrop
64 = enable modem
128 = ignore RS-232 line errors
256 = disable XON / XOFF support
512 = reserved
1024 = enable RS-485 mode
2048 = even parity, 7 data bits, 1
stop bit
4096 = enable command prompt
BAUD_RATE — 19200
300, 1200, 2400,
4800, 9600,
19200, 38400,
57600, 115200
RS-232 COM1 baud rate. Enclose
value in double quotes (") when
setting from the RS-232 interface.
MODEM_INIT —
“AT Y0 &D0
&H0 &I0 S0=2
&B0 &N6 &M0
E0 Q1 &W0”
Any character in
the allowed
character set. Up
to 100
characters long.
RS-232 COM1 modem initialization
string. Sent verbatim plus carriage
return to modem on power up or
manually. Enclose value in double
quotes (") when setting from the RS-
232 interface.
RS232_MODE2 BitFlag 0, 0–65535
RS-232 COM2 mode flags.
(Same settings as RS232_MODE)
BAUD_RATE2 — 19200
300, 1200, 2400,
4800, 9600,
19200, 38400,
57600, 115200
RS-232 COM2 baud rate. Enclose
value in double quotes (") when
setting from the RS-232 interface.
MODEM_INIT2 —
“AT Y0 &D0
&H0 &I0 S0=2
&B0 &N6 &M0
E0 Q1 &W0”
Any character in
the allowed
character set. Up
to 100
characters long.
RS-232 COM2 modem initialization
string. Sent verbatim plus carriage
return to modem on power up or
manually. Enclose value in double
quotes (") when setting from the RS-
232 interface.
RS232_PASS Password 940331 0–999999
RS-232 log on password.
MACHINE_ID ID 200 0–9999
Unique ID number for instrument.
COMMAND_PROMPT — “Cmd> ”
Any character in
the allowed
character set. Up
to 100
characters long.
RS-232 interface command prompt.
Displayed only if enabled with
RS232_MODE variable. Enclose
value in double quotes (") when
setting from the RS-232 interface.
04521C (DCN5731)
Model 200EH/EM (Ref: 05147F) APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O, Revision F.0
A-13
Setup Variable Numeric
Units Default Value Value Range Description
REMOTE_CAL_MODE — LOW LOW, HIGH
Range to calibrate during remote
calibration. Enclose value in double
quotes (") when setting from the RS-
232 interface.
PASS_ENABLE — OFF ON, OFF
ON enables passwords; OFF
disables them.
STABIL_GAS — NOX NO, NO2, NOX
Selects gas for stability
measurement. Enclose value in
double quotes (") when setting from
the RS-232 interface.
STABIL_FREQ Seconds 10 1–300
Stability measurement sampling
frequency.
STABIL_SAMPLES Samples 25 2–40
Number of samples in concentration
stability reading.
HVPS_SET Volts
550 1, 600 2
Warnings:
400–700 1,
450–750 2
0–2000
High voltage power supply warning
limits. Set point is not used.
RCELL_PRESS_SET In-Hg
6
Warnings:
0.5–15
0–100
Reaction cell pressure warning limits.
Set point is not used.
RCELL_CYCLE Seconds 10 0.5–30
Reaction cell temperature control
cycle period.
RCELL_PROP 1/ºC 1 0–10
Reaction cell PID temperature control
proportional coefficient.
RCELL_INTEG — 0.1 0–10
Reaction cell PID temperature control
integral coefficient.
RCELL_DERIV — 0 (disabled) 0–10
Reaction cell PID temperature control
derivative coefficient.
MANIFOLD_CYCLE Seconds 5 0.5–30
Manifold temperature control cycle
period.
MANIFOLD_PROP 1/ºC 0.2 0–10
Manifold PID temperature control
proportional coefficient.
MANIFOLD_INTEG — 0.1 0–10
Manifold PID temperature control
integral coefficient.
MANIFOLD_DERIV — 0.5 0–10
Manifold PID temperature control
derivative coefficient.
O2_CELL_CYCLE 4 Seconds 10 0.5–30
O2 cell temperature control cycle
period.
O2_CELL_PROP 4 — 1 0–10
O2 cell PID temperature control
proportional coefficient.
O2_CELL_INTEG 4 — 0.1 0–10
O2 cell PID temperature control
integral coefficient.
O2_CELL_DERIV 4 — 0 (disabled) 0–10
O2 cell PID temperature control
derivative coefficient.
SLOPE_CONST — 8 0.1–100
Slope constant factor to keep visible
slope near 1.
SERIAL_NUMBER — “00000000 ”
Any character in
the allowed
character set. Up
to 100
characters long.
Unique serial number for instrument.
Enclose value in double quotes (")
when setting from the RS-232
interface.
DISP_INTENSITY — HIGH
HIGH,MED,
LOW, DIM
Front panel display intensity. Enclose
value in double quotes (") when
setting from the RS-232 interface.
04521C (DCN5731)
APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O, Revision F.0 Model 200EH/EM (Ref: 05147F)
A-14
Setup Variable Numeric
Units Default Value Value Range Description
I2C_RESET_ENABLE — ON OFF, ON
I2C bus automatic reset enable.
ALARM_TRIGGER Cycles 10 1–100
Number of valve cycles to trigger
concentration alarm.
CLOCK_FORMAT — “TIME=%H:%M:
%S”
Any character in
the allowed
character set. Up
to 100
characters long.
Time-of-day clock format flags.
Enclose value in double quotes (")
when setting from the RS-232
interface.
“%a” = Abbreviated weekday name.
“%b” = Abbreviated month name.
“%d” = Day of month as decimal
number (01 – 31).
“%H” = Hour in 24-hour format (00 –
23).
“%I” = Hour in 12-hour format (01 –
12).
“%j” = Day of year as decimal
number (001 – 366).
“%m” = Month as decimal number
(01 – 12).
“%M” = Minute as decimal number
(00 – 59).
“%p” = A.M./P.M. indicator for 12-
hour clock.
“%S” = Second as decimal number
(00 – 59).
“%w” = Weekday as decimal number
(0 – 6; Sunday is 0).
“%y” = Year without century, as
decimal number (00 – 99).
“%Y” = Year with century, as decimal
number.
“%%” = Percent sign.
FACTORY_OPT — 0, 512 0–65535
Factory option flags. Add values to
combine flags.
1 = enable dilution factor
2 = display units in concentration field
4 = zero/span valves installed
8 = low span valve installed
16 = IZS and zero/span valves
installed
32 = enable software-controlled
maintenance mode
64 = display temperature in converter
warning message
128 = enable switch-controlled
maintenance mode
256 = enable simultaneous display of
all gas concentrations
512 = enable manifold temperature
control
1024 = enable O2 sensor cell
temperature control (temporarily
removed)
2048 = enable Internet option
04521C (DCN5731)
Model 200EH/EM (Ref: 05147F) APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O, Revision F.0
A-15
Setup Variable Numeric
Units Default Value Value Range Description
1 M200EH.
2 M200EM.
3 Must power-cycle instrument for these options to fully take effect.
4 O
2 option.
04521C (DCN5731)
APPENDIX A-3: Warnings and Test Functions, Revision F.0 Model 200EH/EM (Ref: 05147F)
A-16
APPENDIX A-3: Warnings and Test Functions, Revision F.0
Table A-2: M200EH/EM Warning Messages, Revision F.0
Name Message Text Description
WSYSRES SYSTEM RESET Instrument was power-cycled or the CPU was reset.
WDATAINIT DATA INITIALIZED Data storage was erased.
WCONFIGINIT CONFIG INITIALIZED Configuration storage was reset to factory configuration or erased.
WSAMPFLOW SAMPLE FLOW WARN Sample flow outside of warning limits specified by SFLOW_SET
variable.
WOZONEFLOW OZONE FLOW WARNING Ozone flow outside of warning limits specified by OFLOW_SET
variable.
WOZONEGEN OZONE GEN OFF Ozone generator is off. This is the only warning message that
automatically clears itself. It clears itself when the ozone generator
is turned on.
WRCELLPRESS RCELL PRESS WARN Reaction cell pressure outside of warning limits specified by
RCELL_PRESS_SET variable.
WBOXTEMP BOX TEMP WARNING Chassis temperature outside of warning limits specified by
BOX_SET variable.
WRCELLTEMP RCELL TEMP WARNING Reaction cell temperature outside of warning limits specified by
RCELL_SET variable.
WMANIFOLDTEMP 4 MANIFOLD TEMP WARN Bypass or dilution manifold temperature outside of warning limits
specified by MANIFOLD_SET variable.
WO2CELLTEMP 5 O2 CELL TEMP WARN O2 sensor cell temperature outside of warning limits specified by
O2_CELL_SET variable.
WIZSTEMP IZS TEMP WARNING IZS temperature outside of warning limits specified by IZS_SET
variable.
WCONVTEMP CONV TEMP WARNING Converter temperature outside of warning limits specified by
CONV_SET variable.
WPMTTEMP PMT TEMP WARNING PMT temperature outside of warning limits specified by PMT_SET
variable.
WAUTOZERO AZERO WRN XXX.X MV Auto-zero reading above limit specified by AZERO_LIMIT variable.
Value shown in message indicates auto-zero reading at time
warning was displayed.
WHVPS HVPS WARNING High voltage power supply output outside of warning limits
specified by HVPS_SET variable.
WDYNZERO CANNOT DYN ZERO Contact closure zero calibration failed while DYN_ZERO was set to
ON.
WDYNSPAN CANNOT DYN SPAN Contact closure span calibration failed while DYN_SPAN was set
to ON.
WREARBOARD REAR BOARD NOT DET Rear board was not detected during power up.
WRELAYBOARD RELAY BOARD WARN Firmware is unable to communicate with the relay board.
WFRONTPANEL FRONT PANEL WARN Firmware is unable to communicate with the front panel.
WANALOGCAL ANALOG CAL WARNING The A/D or at least one D/A channel has not been calibrated.
1 O
2 option.
04521C (DCN5731)
Model 200EH/EM (Ref: 05147F) APPENDIX A-3: Warnings and Test Functions, Revision F.0
A-17
Table A-3: M200EH/EM Test Functions, Revision F.0
TEST Function Message Text Description
RNG_DATA_OUT_1 “A1:<data point>=<range> <units>” D/A #1 range.
RNG_DATA_OUT_2 “A2:<data point>=<range> <units>” D/A #2 range.
RNG_DATA_OUT_3 “A3:<data point>=<range> <units>” D/A #3 range.
RNG_DATA_OUT_4 “A4:<data point>=<range> <units>” D/A #4 range.
NONOXCONC 1 NO=396.5 NOX=396.5 3 Simultaneously displays NO and NOX
concentrations.
RANGE RANGE=500.0 PPB 3 D/A range in single or auto-range modes.
RANGE1 RANGE1=500.0 PPB 3 D/A #1 range in independent range mode.
RANGE2 RANGE2=500.0 PPB 3 D/A #2 range in independent range mode.
RANGE3 RANGE3=500.0 PPB 3 D/A #3 range in independent range mode.
O2RANGE 2 O2 RANGE=200.00 % D/A #4 range for O2 concentration.
STABILITY NOX STB=0.0 PPB 3 Concentration stability (standard deviation
based on setting of STABIL_FREQ and
STABIL_SAMPLES). Select gas with
STABIL_GAS variable.
RESPONSE 2 RSP=8.81(1.30) SEC Instrument response. Length of each signal
processing loop. Time in parenthesis is
standard deviation.
SAMPFLOW SAMP FLW=460 CC/M Sample flow rate.
OZONEFLOW OZONE FL=87 CC/M Ozone flow rate.
PMT PMT=800.0 MV Raw PMT reading.
NORMPMT NORM PMT=793.0 MV PMT reading normalized for temperature,
pressure, auto-zero offset, but not range.
AUTOZERO AZERO=1.3 MV Auto-zero offset.
HVPS HVPS=650 V High voltage power supply output.
RCELLTEMP RCELL TEMP=50.8 C Reaction cell temperature.
BOXTEMP BOX TEMP=28.2 C Internal chassis temperature.
PMTTEMP PMT TEMP=7.0 C PMT temperature.
MANIFOLDTEMP MF TEMP=50.8 C Bypass or dilution manifold temperature.
O2CELLTEMP 2 O2 CELL TEMP=50.8 C O2 sensor cell temperature.
IZSTEMP IZS TEMP=50.8 C IZS temperature.
CONVTEMP MOLY TEMP=315.0 C Converter temperature. Converter type is
MOLY, CONV, or O3KL.
RCELLPRESS RCEL=7.0 IN-HG-A Reaction cell pressure.
SAMPPRESS SAMP=29.9 IN-HG-A Sample pressure.
NOXSLOPE NOX SLOPE=1.000 NOX slope for current range, computed during
zero/span calibration.
NOXOFFSET NOX OFFS=0.0 MV NOX offset for current range, computed during
zero/span calibration.
NOSLOPE NO SLOPE=1.000 NO slope for current range, computed during
zero/span calibration.
NOOFFSET NO OFFS=0.0 MV NO offset for current range, computed during
zero/span calibration.
NO2 NO2=0.0 PPB 3 NO2 concentration for current range.
NOX NOX=396.5 PPB 3 NOX concentration for current range.
04521C (DCN5731)
APPENDIX A-3: Warnings and Test Functions, Revision F.0 Model 200EH/EM (Ref: 05147F)
A-18
TEST Function Message Text Description
NO NO=396.5 PPB 3 NO concentration for current range.
O2SLOPE 2 O2 SLOPE=1.000 O2 slope computed during zero/span
calibration.
O2OFFSET 2 O2 OFFSET=0.00 % O2 offset computed during zero/span
calibration.
O2 2 O2=0.00 % O2 concentration.
TESTCHAN TEST=3627.1 MV Value output to TEST_OUTPUT analog
output, selected with TEST_CHAN_ID
variable.
CLOCKTIME TIME=10:38:27 Current instrument time of day clock.
1 Factory option.
2 O
2 option.
04521C (DCN5731)
Model 200EH/EM (Ref: 05147F) APPENDIX A-4: M200EH/EM Signal I/O Definitions, Revision F.0
A-19
APPENDIX A-4: M200EH/EM Signal I/O Definitions, Revision F.0
Table A-4: M200EH/EM Signal I/O Definitions, Revision F.0
SIGNAL NAME BIT OR CHANNEL
NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
Internal inputs, U7, J108, pins 9–16 = bits 0–7, default I/O address 322 hex
0–7 Spare
Internal outputs, U8, J108, pins 1–8 = bits 0–7, default I/O address 322 hex
ELEC_TEST 0 1 = electrical test on
0 = off
OPTIC_TEST 1 1 = optic test on
0 = off
PREAMP_RANGE_HI 2 1 = select high preamp range
0 = select low range
O3GEN_STATUS 3 0 = ozone generator on
1 = off
4–5 Spare
I2C_RESET 6 1 = reset I2C peripherals
0 = normal
I2C_DRV_RST 7 0 = hardware reset 8584 chip
1 = normal
Control inputs, U11, J1004, pins 1–6 = bits 0–5, default I/O address 321 hex
EXT_ZERO_CAL 0 0 = go into zero calibration
1 = exit zero calibration
EXT_SPAN_CAL 1 0 = go into span calibration
1 = exit span calibration
EXT_LOW_SPAN 2 0 = go into low span calibration
1 = exit low span calibration
REMOTE_RANGE_HI 3 0 = remote select high range
1 = default range
4–5 Spare
6–7 Always 1
Control inputs, U14, J1006, pins 1–6 = bits 0–5, default I/O address 325 hex
0–5 Spare
6–7 Always 1
Control outputs, U17, J1008, pins 1–8 = bits 0–7, default I/O address 321 hex
0–7 Spare
Control outputs, U21, J1008, pins 9–12 = bits 0–3, default I/O address 325 hex
0–3 Spare
Alarm outputs, U21, J1009, pins 1–12 = bits 4–7, default I/O address 325 hex
ST_SYSTEM_OK2 2 4 1 = system OK
0 = any alarm condition or in diagnostics mode
ST_CONC_ALARM_1 5 1 = conc. limit 1 exceeded
0 = conc. OK
ST_CONC_ALARM_2 6 1 = conc. limit 2 exceeded
0 = conc. OK
04521C (DCN5731)
APPENDIX A-4: M200EH/EM Signal I/O Definitions, Revision F.0 Model 200EH/EM (Ref: 05147F)
A-20
SIGNAL NAME BIT OR CHANNEL
NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
7 Spare
A status outputs, U24, J1017, pins 1–8 = bits 0–7, default I/O address 323 hex
ST_SYSTEM_OK 0 0 = system OK
1 = any alarm condition
ST_CONC_VALID 1 0 = conc. valid
1 = hold off or other conditions
ST_HIGH_RANGE 2 0 = high auto-range in use
1 = low auto-range
ST_ZERO_CAL 3 0 = in zero calibration
1 = not in zero
ST_SPAN_CAL 4 0 = in span calibration
1 = not in span
ST_DIAG_MODE 5
0 = in diagnostic mode
1 = not in diagnostic mode
ST_LOW_SPAN_CAL 6 0 = in low span calibration
1 = not in low span
ST_O2_CAL 1 7 0 = in O2 calibration mode
1 = in NOX calibration mode
B status outputs, U27, J1018, pins 1–8 = bits 0–7, default I/O address 324 hex
0–7 Spare
Front panel I2C keyboard, default I2C address 4E hex
MAINT_MODE 5 (input) 0 = maintenance mode
1 = normal mode
LANG2_SELECT 6 (input) 0 = select second language
1 = select first language (English)
SAMPLE_LED 8 (output) 0 = sample LED on
1 = off
CAL_LED 9 (output) 0 = cal. LED on
1 = off
FAULT_LED 10 (output) 0 = fault LED on
1 = off
AUDIBLE_BEEPER 14 (output) 0 = beeper on (for diagnostic testing only)
1 = off
Relay board digital output (PCF8575), default I2C address 44 hex
RELAY_WATCHDOG 0
Alternate between 0 and 1 at least every 5 seconds to keep
relay board active
RCELL_HEATER 1 0 = reaction cell heater on
1 = off
CONV_HEATER 2 0 = converter heater on
1 = off
MANIFOLD_HEATER 3 0 = bypass or dilution manifold heater on
1 = off
IZS_HEATER 4 0 = IZS heater on
1 = off
04521C (DCN5731)
Model 200EH/EM (Ref: 05147F) APPENDIX A-4: M200EH/EM Signal I/O Definitions, Revision F.0
A-21
SIGNAL NAME BIT OR CHANNEL
NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
O2_CELL_HEATER 1 5 0 = O2 sensor cell heater on
1 = off
ZERO_VALVE 6 0 = let zero gas in
1 = let sample gas in
SPAN_VALVE 6 0 = let span gas in
1 = let zero gas in
CAL_VALVE 7 0 = let cal. gas in
1 = let sample gas in
AUTO_ZERO_VALVE 8 0 = let zero air in
1 = let sample gas in
NOX_VALVE 9 0 = let NOX gas into reaction cell
1 = let NO gas into reaction cell
LOW_SPAN_VALVE 10 0 = let low span gas in
1 = let sample gas in
HIGH_SPAN_VALVE 11 0 = let high span gas in
1 = let sample gas in
12–15 Spare
Rear board primary MUX analog inputs, MUX default I/O address 32A hex
PMT_SIGNAL 0 PMT detector
HVPS_VOLTAGE 1 HV power supply output
PMT_TEMP 2 PMT temperature
3 Spare
4 Temperature MUX
5 Spare
O2_SENSOR 1 6 O2 concentration sensor
SAMPLE_PRESSURE 7 Sample pressure
RCELL_PRESSURE 8 Reaction cell pressure
REF_4096_MV 9 4.096V reference from MAX6241
OZONE_FLOW 10 Ozone flow rate
TEST_INPUT_11 11 Diagnostic test input
CONV_TEMP 12 Converter temperature
TEST_INPUT_13 13 Diagnostic test input
14 DAC loopback MUX
REF_GND 15 Ground reference
Rear board temperature MUX analog inputs, MUX default I/O address 326 hex
BOX_TEMP 0 Internal box temperature
RCELL_TEMP 1 Reaction cell temperature
IZS_TEMP 2 IZS temperature
3 Spare
O2_CELL_TEMP 1 4 O2 sensor cell temperature
TEMP_INPUT_5 5 Diagnostic temperature input
TEMP_INPUT_6 6 Diagnostic temperature input
MANIFOLD_TEMP 7 Bypass or dilution manifold temperature
04521C (DCN5731)
APPENDIX A-4: M200EH/EM Signal I/O Definitions, Revision F.0 Model 200EH/EM (Ref: 05147F)
A-22
SIGNAL NAME BIT OR CHANNEL
NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
Rear board DAC MUX analog inputs, MUX default I/O address 327 hex
DAC_CHAN_1 0 DAC channel 0 loopback
DAC_CHAN_2 1 DAC channel 1 loopback
DAC_CHAN_3 2 DAC channel 2 loopback
DAC_CHAN_4 3 DAC channel 3 loopback
Rear board analog outputs, default I/O address 327 hex
CONC_OUT_1,
DATA_OUT_1
0 Concentration output #1 (NOX),
Data output #1
CONC_OUT_2,
DATA_OUT_2
1 Concentration output #2 (NO) ,
Data output #2
CONC_OUT_3,
DATA_OUT_3
2 Concentration output #3 (NO2) ,
Data output #3
TEST_OUTPUT,
CONC_OUT_4 1,
DATA_OUT_4
3 Test measurement output,
Concentration output #4 (O2) ,
Data output #4
1 O
2 option.
2 Optional
04521C (DCN5731)
Model 200EH/EM (Ref: 05147F) APPENDIX A-5: M200EH/EM iDAS Functions, Revision F.0
A-23
APPENDIX A-5: M200EH/EM iDAS Functions, Revision F.0
Table A-5: M200EH/EM DAS Trigger Events, Revision F.0
NAME DESCRIPTION
ATIMER Automatic timer expired
EXITZR Exit zero calibration mode
EXITLS Exit low span calibration mode
EXITHS Exit high span calibration mode
EXITMP Exit multi-point calibration mode
EXITO2 1 Exit O2 calibration mode
SLPCHG Slope and offset recalculated
O2SLPC 1 O2 slope and offset recalculated
EXITDG Exit diagnostic mode
CONC1W Concentration exceeds limit 1 warning
CONC2W Concentration exceeds limit 2 warning
AZEROW Auto-zero warning
OFLOWW Ozone flow warning
RPRESW Reaction cell pressure warning
RTEMPW Reaction cell temperature warning
MFTMPW Bypass or dilution manifold temperature
warning
O2TMPW 1 O2 sensor cell temperature warning
IZTMPW IZS temperature warning
CTEMPW Converter temperature warning
PTEMPW PMT temperature warning
SFLOWW Sample flow warning
BTEMPW Box temperature warning
HVPSW HV power supply warning
1 O
2 option.
04521C (DCN5731)
APPENDIX A-5: M200EH/EM iDAS Functions, Revision F.0 Model 200EH/EM (Ref: 05147F)
A-24
Table A-6: M200EH/EM iDAS Data Types, Revision F.0
NAME DESCRIPTION UNITS
PMTDET PMT detector reading mV
NXSLP1 NOX slope for range #1 —
NXSLP2 NOX slope for range #2 —
NOSLP1 NO slope for range #1 —
NOSLP2 NO slope for range #2 —
NXOFS1 NOX offset for range #1 mV
NXOFS2 NOX offset for range #2 mV
NOOFS1 NO offset for range #1 mV
NOOFS2 NO offset for range #2 mV
O2SLPE 1 O2 slope —
O2OFST 1 O2 offset Weight %
NXZSC1 Concentration for NOX reporting range #1 during zero/span
calibration, just before computing new slope and offset
PPB
NXZSC2 Concentration for NOX reporting range #2 during zero/span
calibration, just before computing new slope and offset
PPB
NOZSC1 Concentration for NO reporting range #1 during zero/span calibration,
just before computing new slope and offset
PPB
NOZSC2 Concentration for NO reporting range #2 during zero/span calibration,
just before computing new slope and offset
PPB
N2ZSC1 Concentration for NO2 reporting range #1 during zero/span
calibration, just before computing new slope and offset
PPB
N2ZSC2 Concentration for NO2 reporting range #2 during zero/span
calibration, just before computing new slope and offset
PPB
O2ZSCN 1 O2 concentration during zero/span calibration of the O2 sensor, just
before computing new slope and offset
Weight %
NXCNC1 Concentration for NOX reporting range #1 PPB
NXCNC2 Concentration for NOX reporting range #2 PPB
NOCNC1 Concentration for NO reporting range #1 PPB
NOCNC2 Concentration for NO reporting range #2 PPB
N2CNC1 Concentration for NO2 reporting range #1 PPB
N2CNC2 Concentration for NO2 reporting range #2 PPB
O2CONC 1 O2 concentration Weight %
STABIL Concentration stability PPB
AZERO Auto zero offset (range de-normalized) mV
O3FLOW Ozone flow rate cc/m
RCPRES Reaction cell pressure "Hg
RCTEMP Reaction cell temperature °C
MFTEMP Bypass or dilution manifold temperature °C
O2TEMP 1 O2 sensor cell temperature °C
IZTEMP IZS block temperature °C
CNVEF1 Converter efficiency factor for range #1 —
CNVEF2 Converter efficiency factor for range #2 —
CNVTMP Converter temperature °C
PMTTMP PMT temperature °C
04521C (DCN5731)
Model 200EH/EM (Ref: 05147F) APPENDIX A-5: M200EH/EM iDAS Functions, Revision F.0
A-25
NAME DESCRIPTION UNITS
SMPFLW Sample flow rate cc/m
SMPPRS Sample pressure "Hg
BOXTMP Internal box temperature °C
HVPS High voltage power supply output Volts
REFGND Ground reference (REF_GND) mV
RF4096 4096 mV reference (REF_4096_MV) mV
TEST11 Diagnostic test input (TEST_INPUT_11) mV
TEST13 Diagnostic test input (TEST_INPUT_13) mV
TEMP5 Diagnostic temperature input (TEMP_INPUT_5) °C
TEMP6 Diagnostic temperature input (TEMP_INPUT_6) °C
1 O
2 option.
04521C (DCN5731)
APPENDIX A-6: Terminal Command Designators, Revision F.0 Model 200EH/EM (Ref: 05147F)
A-26
APPENDIX A-6: Terminal Command Designators, Revision F.0
Table A-7: Terminal Command Designators, Revision F.0
COMMAND ADDITIONAL COMMAND SYNTAX DESCRIPTION
? [ID] Display help screen and this list of commands
LOGON [ID] password Establish connection to instrument
LOGOFF [ID] Terminate connection to instrument
SET ALL|name|hexmask Display test(s)
LIST [ALL|name|hexmask] [NAMES|HEX] Print test(s) to screen
name Print single test
T [ID]
CLEAR ALL|name|hexmask Disable test(s)
SET ALL|name|hexmask Display warning(s)
LIST [ALL|name|hexmask] [NAMES|HEX] Print warning(s)
name Clear single warning
W [ID]
CLEAR ALL|name|hexmask Clear warning(s)
ZERO|LOWSPAN|SPAN [1|2] Enter calibration mode
ASEQ number Execute automatic sequence
COMPUTE ZERO|SPAN Compute new slope/offset
EXIT Exit calibration mode
C [ID]
ABORT Abort calibration sequence
LIST Print all I/O signals
name[=value] Examine or set I/O signal
LIST NAMES Print names of all diagnostic tests
ENTER name Execute diagnostic test
EXIT Exit diagnostic test
RESET [DATA] [CONFIG] [exitcode] Reset instrument
PRINT ["name"] [SCRIPT] Print iDAS configuration
RECORDS ["name"] Print number of iDAS records
REPORT ["name"] [RECORDS=number]
[FROM=<start date>][TO=<end
date>][VERBOSE|COMPACT|HEX] (Print DAS
records)(date format: MM/DD/YYYY(or YY)
[HH:MM:SS]
Print iDAS records
D [ID]
CANCEL Halt printing iDAS records
LIST Print setup variables
name[=value [warn_low [warn_high]]] Modify variable
name="value" Modify enumerated variable
CONFIG Print instrument configuration
MAINT ON|OFF Enter/exit maintenance mode
V [ID]
MODE Print current instrument mode
DASBEGIN [<data channel definitions>]
DASEND Upload iDAS configuration
CHANNELBEGIN propertylist CHANNELEND Upload single iDAS channel
CHANNELDELETE ["name"] Delete iDAS channels
04521C (DCN5731)
Model 200EH/EM (Ref: 05147F) APPENDIX A-6: Terminal Command Designators, Revision F.0
A-27
The command syntax follows the command type, separated by a space character. Strings in [brackets] are
optional designators. The following key assignments also apply.
TERMINAL KEY ASSIGNMENTS
ESC Abort line
CR (ENTER) Execute command
Ctrl-C Switch to computer mode
COMPUTER MODE KEY ASSIGNMENTS
LF (line feed) Execute command
Ctrl-T Switch to terminal mode
USER NOTES:
04521C (DCN5731)
APPENDIX A-6: Terminal Command Designators, Revision F.0 Model 200EH/EM (Ref: 05147F)
A-28
04521C (DCN5731)
Model 200EH/EM Instruction Manual APPENDIX B: Spare Parts and Expendables
APPENDIX B: Spare Parts and Expendables
NOTE
Use of replacement parts other than those supplied by Teledyne-API may result in
non-compliance with European standard EN 61010-1.
The following lists contain spare parts recommended for the proper care and maintenance of your
M200EH/EM:
05480 – Spare Parts List, M200EH
04416 – Recommended Spare Parts Stocking Level, M200EH
05483 – Spare Parts List, M200EM
04415 – Recommended Spare Parts Stocking Level, M200EM
04715 – Expendables Kit M200E/EH/EM
04521C (DCN5731)
B-1
APPENDIX B: Spare Parts and Expendables Model 200EH/EM Instruction Manual
04521C (DCN5731)
B-2
M200EH Spare Parts List (Ref: 05480S)
Part Numbe
r
Description
000940100 ORIFICE, 3 MIL, BYPASS MANIFOLD, SAMPLE FLOW
000940300 CD, ORIFICE, .020 VIOLET
000940400 ORIFICE, 4 MIL, OZONE DRYER FLOW, O2 OPTION
000940500 ORIFICE, 7 MIL, OZONE FLOW/BYPASS FLOW
001761800 ASSY, FLOW CTL, 90CC, OZONE DRYER
002270100 AKIT, GASKETS, WINDOW, (12)
002730000 CD, FILTER, 665NM (KB)
003290000 THERMISTOR, BASIC (VENDOR ASSY)(KB)
005960000 AKIT, EXPEND, 6LBS ACT CHARCOAL
005970000 AKIT, EXPENDABLE, 6LB PURAFIL
008830000 COLD BLOCK (KB)
009690200 AKIT, TFE FLTR (FL19) ELEM, 47MM, (100)
009690300 AKIT, TFE FLTR ELEM (FL19), 47MM, 1UM (3
009810300 ASSY, PUMP PK, 115V/60HZ w/FL34/NO/SO
009810600 ASSY, PUMP PACK, 100V/60HZ w/FL34
009810700 ASSY, PUMP, 220-240V/50-60HZ (wo)
010680100 BAND HTR W/TC, 50W @115V, CE/VDE *
010820000 ASSY, THERMOCOUPLE, HICON, M501
011630000 HVPS INSULATOR GASKET (KB)
011930100 CD, PMT (R928), NOX, M200AH, M200EM/EH *
013140000 ASSY, COOLER FAN (NOX/SOX)
014080100 ASSY, HVPS, SOX/NOX
016290000 WINDOW, SAMPLE FILTER, 47MM (KB)
016301400 ASSY, SAMP FILT, 47MM, ANG BKT, 1UM, TEE
016680600 PCA, O3 GEN DRIVER, NOX, E SERIES
018080000 AKIT, DESSICANT BAGGIES, (12)
018720100 ASSY, MOLY CONVERTER W/03 DESTRUCTOR
02190020A ASSY, TC, TYPE K, LONG, WELDED MOLY
022630200 PCA, TEMP CONTROL BOARD, W/PS, M501
037860000 ORING, TFE RETAINER, SAMPLE FILTER
040010000 ASSY, FAN REAR PANEL, E SERIES
040030800 PCA, PRESS SENSORS (2X), FLOW, E (NOX)
040400000 ASSY, HEATERS/THERMAL SWITCH, RX CELL
040410200 ASSY, VACUUM MANIFOLD, M200EH
040420200 ASSY, O3 GEN BRK, M200E, HIGH-O/P
040900000 ORIFICE HOLDER, M200E REACTION CELL (KB)
041800500 PCA, PMT PREAMP, VR, M200E/EM/EH
041920000 ASSY, THERMISTOR, REACTION CELL
042580000 PCA, KEYBOARD, E-SERIES, W/V-DETECT
042680100 ASSY, VALVE (SS), M200E
042900100 PROGRAMMED FLASH, E SERIES
043170000 MANIFOLD, RCELL, M200E, (KB) *
043220100 THERMOCOUPLE INSULATING SLEEVE, M501NH *
043420000 ASSY, HEATER/THERM, O2 SEN, "E" SERIES
043940000 PCA, INTERFACE, ETHERNET, E-SERIES
044340000 ASSY, HTR, BYPASS MANIFOLD, M200EH
044430100 ASSY, BYPASS MANIFOLD, M200EH (KB)
044440000 ASSY, HI-CON CONVERTER W/03 DESTRUCTOR
04521C (DCN5731)
B-3
M200EH Spare Parts List (Ref: 05480S)
Part Numbe
r
Description
044530000 OPTION, O2 SENSOR ASSY, M200EX (KB)
044540000 ASSY, THERMISTOR, BYPASS MANIFOLD
044610100 ASSY, VALVES, MOLY/HICON, M200EM/H
045210000 MANUAL, OPERATORS, M200EH/EM
045230200 PCA, RELAY CARD, M100E/200E
045500200 ASSY, ORIFICE HOLDER, 7 MIL, OZONE FLOW
045500400 ASSY, ORIFICE HOLDER, 3 MIL
045500500 ASSY, ORIFICE HOLDER, NOX ORIFICE
046030000 AKIT, CH-43, 3 REFILLS
047050100 ASSY, ORIFICE HOLDER, BYPASS MANIFOLD
047210000 ASSY, MINI-HICON GUTS, GROUNDED, M200EH
048830000 AKIT, EXP KIT, EXHAUST CLNSR, SILCA GEL
049310100 PCA, TEC CONTROL, E SERIES
049760300 ASSY, TC PROG PLUG, MOLY,TYP K, TC1
050610700 CONFIGURATION PLUGS, 115V, M200E
050610900 CONFIGURATION PLUGS, 220-240V, M200E
050611100 CONFIGURATION PLUGS, 100V, M200E
051210000 ASSY, OZONE DESTRUCTOR
051990000 ASSY, SCRUBBER, INLINE, PUMP PACK
052930200 ASSY, BAND HEATER TYPE K, M200EX
054250000 OPTION, CO2 SENSOR (20%)
055740000 ASSY, PUMP, NOx PUMP PACK, 115V/60HZ
055740100 ASSY, PUMP, NOx PUMP PACK, 220V/60HZ
055740200 ASSY, PUMP, NOx PUMP PACK, 220V/50HZ
058021100 PCA, E-SERIES MOTHERBD, GEN 5-ICOP
059940000 OPTION, SAMPLE GAS CONDITIONER, M200A/E
061400000 ASSY, DUAL HTR, MINI-HICON, 120/240VAC
062390000 ASSY, MOLY GUTS w/WOOL, M101E/M200EX
062420200 PCA, SER INTRFACE, ICOP CPU, E- (OPTION)
062870000 CPU, PC-104, VSX-6150E, ICOP *(KB)
063540100 DOM, w/SOFTWARE, M200EH *
064540000 ASSY, PUMP NOX INTERNAL, 115V/60HZ
064540100 ASSY, PUMP NOX INTERNAL, 230V/60HZ
064540200 ASSY, PUMP NOX INTERNAL, 230V/50HZ
065190100 ASSY, NOX CELL TOP-FLO, M200EH >S/N612
065200100 ASSY SENSOR, TOP-FLOW, M200EH
CN0000458 PLUG, 12, MC 1.5/12-ST-3.81 (KB)
CN0000520 PLUG, 10, MC 1.5/10-ST-3.81 (KB)
CP0000014 CONTROLLER, TEMP, W/PG-08 (CN262)
DS0000025 DISPLAY, E SERIES (KB)
FL0000001 FILTER, FLOW CONTROL
FL0000003 FILTER, DFU (KB)
FL0000034 FILTER, DISPOSABLE, PENTEK (IC-101L)(KB)
FM0000004 FLOWMETER (KB)
FT0000010 FITTING, FLOW CONTROL
HW0000005 FOOT, CHASSI/PUMP PACK
HW0000020 SPRING, FLOW CONTROL
HW0000030 ISOLATOR, SENSOR ASSY
HW0000036 TFE TAPE, 1/4" (48 FT/ROLL)
HW0000041 STNOFF,#6-32X3/4"
04521C (DCN5731)
B-4
M200EH Spare Parts List (Ref: 05480S)
Part Numbe
r
Description
HW0000099 STANDOFF, #6-32X.5, HEX SS M/F
HW0000101 ISOLATOR, PUMP PACK
HW0000453 SUPPORT, CIRCUIT BD, 3/16" ICOP
KIT000095 AKIT, REPLACEMENT COOLER, A/E SERIES
KIT000219 KIT, 4-20MA CURRENT OUTPUT (E SERIES)
KIT000231 KIT, RETROFIT, M200E/EM/EH Z/S VALVE
KIT000253 ASSY & TEST, SPARE PS37, E SERIES
KIT000254 ASSY & TEST, SPARE PS38, E SERIES
OP0000030 OXYGEN TRANSDUCER, PARAMAGNETIC
OP0000033 CO2 MODULE, 0-20%
OR0000001 ORING, FLOW CONTROL
OR0000002 ORING, REACTION CELL SLEEVE
OR0000025 ORING, 2-133V
OR0000027 ORING, COLD BLOCK/PMT HOUSING & HEATSINK
OR0000034 ORING, (USED W/FT10)
OR0000039 ORING, FLOW CONTROL
OR0000044 ORING, REACTION CELL MANIFOLD
OR0000083 ORING, PMT SIGNAL & OPTIC LED
OR0000086 ORING, 2-006, CV-75 COMPOUND(KB)
OR0000094 ORING, SAMPLE FILTER
OR0000101 ORING, CO2 OPTION
PU0000005 PUMP, THOMAS 607, 115V/60HZ (KB)
PU0000011 REBUILD KIT, THOMAS 607(KB)
PU0000052 PUMP, THOMAS 688, 220/240V 50HZ/60HZ
PU0000054 PUMP, THOMAS 688, 100V, 50/60HZ
PU0000083 KIT, REBUILD, PU80, PU81, PU82
RL0000009 SSRT RELAY
RL0000015 RELAY, DPDT, (KB)
SW0000006 SWITCH, THERMAL, 60 C
SW0000040 PWR SWITCH/CIR BRK, VDE CE (KB)
SW0000051 SWITCH, POWER CIRC BREAK VDE/CE, w/RG(KB
SW0000058 SWITCH, THERMAL/450 DEG F
SW0000059 PRESSURE SENSOR, 0-15 PSIA, ALL SEN
WR0000008 POWER CORD, 10A
04521C (DCN5731)
B-5
M200EH Recommended Spare Parts Stocking Levels (Ref: 04416N)
Part Number Description 1 2-5 6-10 11-20 21-30 UNITS
011310000 ASSY, DRYER, NOX 12 3 4
011930000 CD, PMT (R928), NOX, M200A, M200E(KB) 11
014080100 ASSY, HVPS, SOX/NOX 11
040010000 ASSY, FAN REAR PANEL, E SERIES 11 2 4 4
040030800 PCA, PRESS SENSORS (2X), FLOW, E (NOX) 12 3
040400000 ASSY, HEATERS/THERMAL SWITCH, RX CELL 11 2 2 3
040420200 ASSY, O3 GEN BRK, M200E, HIGH-O/P 1
041800500 PCA, PMT PREAMP, VR, M200E/EH, (KB) 11
042580000 PCA, KEYBOARD, E-SERIES, W/V-DETECT 11
042680100 ASSY, VALVE (SS), M200E 12 4
With IZS,
ZS Option
044440000 ASSY, HICON w/O3 DEST, M200EH/EM 12
044610000 ASSY, VALVES, MOLY/HICON, M200E 12
045230200 PCA, RELAY CARD, M100E/200E 11 2*
045500200 ASSY, ORIFICE HOLDER, 7 MIL 11 2 2 4
045500400 ASSY, ORIFICE HOLDER, 3 MIL 11 2 2 4
058021100 PCA, E-SERIES MOTHERBOARD, GEN 5-I 12
059940000 OPTION, SAMPLE GAS CONDITIONER, M200A/E 11 2
062870000 CPU, PC-104, VSX-6150E, ICOP *(KB) 11
DS0000025 DISPLAY, E SERIES (KB) 11
FM0000004 FLOWMETER (KB) 12 3
HE0000017 HTR, 12W/120V (50W/240V), CE AP (KB) 12 3 3
KIT000095 AKIT, REPLACEMENT COOLER, A/E SERIES 12 3 3
KIT000129 REPLACEMENT, MOLY CONV WELDED CARTRIDGE 11
OP0000030 OXYGEN TRANSDUCER, PARAMAGNETIC 2510
With O2
Option
OR0000034 ORING, 2-011V FT10 2510
OR0000044 ORING, 2-125V 2510
OR0000045 ORING, 2-226V 11 1 2
PS0000037 PS, 40W SWITCHING, +5V, +/-15V(KB) * 11 1 2
PS0000038 PS, 60W SWITCHING, 12V(KB) * 1
PU0000005 PUMP, THOMAS 607, 115V/60HZ (KB) *1 11 1 2 3*1
RL0000015 RELAY, DPDT, (KB) 11 1 2 3
* Use KIT000208 To upgrade from 039550200 to 045230200 Relay Board:
*1 PU0000005 Use PU0000006 for 220V / 50Hz applications
04521C (DCN5731)
B-6
M200EM Spare Parts List (Ref: 05483S)
Part Numbe
r
Description
000940300 CD, ORIFICE, .020 VIOLET
000940400 ORIFICE, 4 MIL, OZONE DRYER FLOW, O2 OPTION
000940500 ORIFICE, 7 MIL, OZONE FLOW/SAMPLE FLOW
000941200 CD, ORIFICE, .008, RED/NONE
001761800 ASSY, FLOW CTL, 90CC, 1/4" TEE-TMT, B
002270100 AKIT, GASKETS, WINDOW, (12)
002730000 CD, FILTER, 665NM (KB)
009690200 AKIT, TFE FLTR (FL19) ELEM, 47MM, (100)
009690300 AKIT, TFE FLTR ELEM (FL19), 47MM, 1UM (3
009810300 ASSY, PUMP PK, 115V/60HZ w/FL34/NO/SO
009810600 ASSY, PUMP PACK, 100V/60HZ w/FL34
009810700 ASSY, PUMP, 220-240V/50-60HZ (wo)
011630000 HVPS INSULATOR GASKET (KB)
011930100 CD, PMT (R928), NOX, M200AH, M200EM/EH *
013140000 ASSY, COOLER FAN (NOX/SOX)
014080100 ASSY, HVPS, SOX/NOX
016290000 WINDOW, SAMPLE FILTER, 47MM (KB)
016301400 ASSY, SAMP FILT, 47MM, ANG BKT, 1UM, TEE
018080000 AKIT, DESSICANT BAGGIES, (12)
018720100 ASSY, MOLY CONVERTER W/03 DESTRUCTOR
037860000 ORING, TFE RETAINER, SAMPLE FILTER
040010000 ASSY, FAN REAR PANEL, E SERIES
040030800 PCA, FLOW/PRESSURE
040400000 ASSY, HEATERS/THERMAL SWITCH, RX CELL
040410300 ASSY, VACUUM MANIFOLD, M200EM
040420200 ASSY, O3 GEN BRK, M200E, HIGH-O/P
040900000 ORIFICE HOLDER, M200E REACTION CELL (KB)
041800500 PCA, PMT PREAMP, VR, M200E/EM/EH
041920000 ASSY, THERMISTOR, REACTION CELL
042580000 PCA, KEYBOARD, E-SERIES, W/V-DETECT
042680100 ASSY, VALVE (SS), M200E
042900100 PROGRAMMED FLASH, E SERIES
043170000 MANIFOLD, RCELL, M200E, (KB) *
043420000 ASSY, HEATER/THERM, O2 SEN, "E" SERIES
043940000 PCA, INTERFACE, ETHERNET, E-SERIES
044340000 ASSY, HTR, BYPASS MANIFOLD, M200EH
044430200 ASSY, BYPASS MANIFOLD, M200EM (KB)
044530000 OPTION, O2 SENSOR ASSY, M200EX (KB)
044540000 ASSY, THERMISTOR, BYPASS MANIFOLD
044610100 ASSY, VALVES, MOLY/HICON, M200EM/H
045210000 MANUAL, OPERATORS, M200EH/EM
045230200 PCA, RELAY CARD, M100E/200E
045500200 ASSY, ORIFICE HOLDER, 7 MIL, OZONE FLOW
047050500 ASSY, ORIFICE HOLDER, BYPASS MANIFOLD
048830000 AKIT, EXP KIT, EXHAUST CLNSR, SILCA GEL
049310100 PCA, TEC CONTROL, E SERIES
04521C (DCN5731)
B-7
M200EM Spare Parts List (Ref: 05483S)
Part Numbe
r
Description
049760300 ASSY, TC PROG PLUG, MOLY,TYP K, TC1
050610700 CONFIGURATION PLUGS, 115V, M200E
050610900 CONFIGURATION PLUGS, 220-240V, M200E
050611100 CONFIGURATION PLUGS, 100V, M200E
051210000 ASSY, OZONE DESTRUCTOR
051990000 ASSY, SCRUBBER, INLINE, PUMP PACK
052930200 ASSY, BAND HEATER TYPE K, M200EX
054250000 OPTION, CO2 SENSOR (20%)
055740000 ASSY, PUMP, NOx PUMP PACK, 115V/60HZ
055740100 ASSY, PUMP, NOx PUMP PACK, 220V/60HZ
055740200 ASSY, PUMP, NOx PUMP PACK, 220V/50HZ
057660000 ASSY, DFU FILTER, M703E
058021100 PCA, E-SERIES MOTHERBD, GEN 5-ICOP
059940000 OPTION, SAMPLE GAS CONDITIONER, M200A/E
061400000 ASSY, DUAL HTR, MINI-HICON, 120/240VAC
062390000 ASSY, MOLY GUTS w/WOOL, M101E/M200EX
062420200 PCA, SER INTRFACE, ICOP CPU, E- (OPTION)
062870000 CPU, PC-104, VSX-6150E, ICOP *(KB)
063530100 DOM, w/SOFTWARE, M200EM *
064540000 ASSY, PUMP NOX INTERNAL, 115V/60HZ
064540100 ASSY, PUMP NOX INTERNAL, 230V/60HZ
064540200 ASSY, PUMP NOX INTERNAL, 230V/50HZ
065190000 ASSY, NOX CELL TOP-FLO, M200EM >S/N417
CN0000458 CONNECTOR, REAR PANEL, 12 PIN
CN0000520 CONNECTOR, REAR PANEL, 10 PIN
DS0000025 DISPLAY, E SERIES (KB)
FL0000001 FILTER, FLOW CONTROL
FL0000003 FILTER, DFU (KB)
FM0000004 FLOWMETER (KB)
FT0000010 FITTING, FLOW CONTROL
HW0000005 FOOT, CHASSI/PUMP PACK
HW0000020 SPRING, FLOW CONTROL
HW0000030 ISOLATOR, SENSOR ASSY
HW0000036 TFE TAPE, 1/4" (48 FT/ROLL)
HW0000099 STANDOFF, #6-32X.5, HEX SS M/F
HW0000101 ISOLATOR, PUMP PACK
HW0000453 SUPPORT, CIRCUIT BD, 3/16" ICOP
KIT000095 AKIT, REPLACEMENT COOLER, A/E SERIES
KIT000219 KIT, 4-20MA CURRENT OUTPUT (E SERIES)
KIT000231 KIT, RETROFIT, M200E/EM/EH Z/S VALVE
KIT000253 ASSY & TEST, SPARE PS37, E SERIES
KIT000254 ASSY & TEST, SPARE PS38, E SERIES
OP0000030 OXYGEN TRANSDUCER, PARAMAGNETIC
OP0000033 CO2 MODULE, 0-20%
OR0000001 ORING, FLOW CONTROL
OR0000002 ORING, REACTION CELL SLEEVE
OR0000025 ORING, 2-133V
OR0000027 ORING, COLD BLOCK/PMT HOUSING & HEATSINK
OR0000034 ORING, (USED W/FT10)
04521C (DCN5731)
B-8
M200EM Spare Parts List (Ref: 05483S)
Part Numbe
r
Description
OR0000039 ORING, FLOW CONTROL
OR0000044 ORING, REACTION CELL MANIFOLD
OR0000083 ORING, PMT SIGNAL & OPTIC LED
OR0000086 ORING, 2-006, CV-75 COMPOUND(KB)
OR0000094 ORING, SAMPLE FILTER
OR0000101 ORING, CO2 OPTION
PU0000005 PUMP, THOMAS 607, 115V/60HZ (KB)
PU0000011 REBUILD KIT, THOMAS 607(KB)
PU0000052 PUMP, THOMAS 688, 220/240V 50HZ/60HZ
PU0000054 PUMP, THOMAS 688, 100V, 50/60HZ
PU0000083 KIT, REBUILD, PU80, PU81, PU82
RL0000015 RELAY, DPDT, (KB)
SW0000051 SWITCH, POWER CIRC BREAK VDE/CE, w/RG(KB
SW0000059 PRESSURE SENSOR, 0-15 PSIA, ALL SEN
WR0000008 POWER CORD, 10A
04521C (DCN5731)
B-9
M200EM Recommended Spare Parts Stocking Levels (Ref: 04415N)
Part Number Description 1 2-5 6-10 11-20 21-30 UNITS
011310000 ASSY, DRYER, NOX 12 3 4
011930000 CD, PMT (R928), NOX, M200A, M200E(KB) 11
014080100 ASSY, HVPS, SOX/NOX 11
040010000 ASSY, FAN REAR PANEL, E SERIES 11 2 4 4
040030800 PCA, PRESS SENSORS (2X), FLOW, E (NOX) 12 3
040400000 ASSY, HEATERS/THERMAL SWITCH, RX CELL 11 2 2 3
040420200 ASSY, O3 GEN BRK, M200E, HIGH-O/P 1
041800500 PCA, PMT PREAMP, VR, M200E/EM/EH 11
042580000 PCA, KEYBOARD, E-SERIES, W/V-DETECT 11
042680100 ASSY, VALVE (SS), M200E 12 4
With IZS,
ZS Option
044440000 ASSY, HICON w/O3 DEST, M200EH/EM 12
044610000 ASSY, VALVES, MOLY/HICON, M200E 12
045230200 PCA, RELAY CARD, M100E/200E 11 2
045500200 ASSY, ORIFICE HOLDER, 7 MIL 11 2 2 4
058021100 PCA, E-SERIES MOTHERBD, GEN 5-ICOP 12
059940000 OPTION, SAMPLE GAS CONDITIONER, M200A/E 11 2
062870000 CPU, PC-104, VSX-6150E, ICOP *(KB) 11
DS0000025 DISPLAY, E SERIES (KB) 11
FM0000004 FLOWMETER (KB) 12 3
KIT000095 AKIT, REPLACEMENT COOLER, A/E SERIES 12 3 3
KIT000129 REPLACEMENT, MOLY CONV WELDED CARTRIDGE 11
OP0000030 OXYGEN TRANSDUCER, PARAMAGNETIC 11
With O2
Option
OR0000034 ORING, 2-011V FT10 2510
OR0000044 ORING, 2-125V 2510
OR0000045 ORING, 2-226V 2510
PS0000037 PS, 40W SWITCHING, +5V, +/-15V(KB) * 11 1 2
PS0000038 PS, 60W SWITCHING, 12V(KB) * 11 1 2
PU0000005 PUMP, THOMAS 607, 115V/60HZ (KB) 11
RL0000015 RELAY, DPDT, (KB) 11 1 2 3
04521C (DCN5731)
B-10
Part Numbe
r
Description Quantit
y
M200E M200EM/EH
"00" "01"
018080000 KIT, DESSICANT BAGGIES (12) 1 1
002270100 KIT, WINDOW GASKET (12) 11
009690300 KIT, TFE FILTER ELEMENTS, 47MM, 1UM (30) 1 1
046030000 KIT, CH-43, 3 REFILLS 1
FL0000001 FILTER, SS 44
FL0000003 FILTER, DFU 1 1
HW0000020 SPRING 44
OR0000086 ORING, FLOW CONTROL 88
OR0000034 ORING, FLOW CONTROL 2 2
OR0000039 ORING, FLOW CONTROL 2 2
04521C (DCN5731)
B-11
This page intentionally left blank.
04521C (DCN5731)
B-12
Appendix C
(Ref: 05149A)
Warranty/Repair
Questionnaire Model
200EH/EM
TELEDYNE
INSTRUMENTS
Advanced Pollution Instrumentation
A Teledyne Technologies Company
TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS CUSTOMER SERVICE
EMAIL: api-customerservice@teledyne.com
PHONE: (858) 657-9800 TOLL FREE: (800) 324-5190 FAX: (858) 657-9816
C-1
CUSTOMER:_____________________________________ PHONE: ________________________________
CONTACT NAME: ________________________________ FAX NO. _______________________________
SITE ADDRESS:_____________________________________________________________________________
MODEL TYPE: ______________ SERIAL NO.:_________________ FIRMWARE REVISION: ___________
1. Are there any failure messages? ______________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________ (Continue on back if necessary)
PLEASE COMPLETE THE FOLLOWING TABLE:
TEST FUNCTION RECORDED VALUE UNITS ACCEPTABLE VALUE
NOx STAB PPB/PPM 1 PPB WITH ZERO AIR
SAMPLE FLOW CM3 500 ± 50
OZONE FLOW CM3 80 ± 15
PMT SIGNAL WITH ZERO AIR MV -20 to 150
PMT SIGNAL AT SPAN GAS CONC MV
PPB
0-5000MV
0-5,000 PPM1, 200 PPM2
NORM PMT SIGNAL AT SPAN
GAS CONC MV
PPB
0-5000MV
0-5,000 PPM1, 200 PPM2
AZERO MV
-20 to 150
HVPS V
400 to 900
RCELL TEMP ºC 50 ± 1
BOX TEMP ºC AMBIENT ± 5ºC
PMT TEMP ºC 7 ± 2ºC
O2 CELL TEMP3 ºC 30ºC to 70ºC
IZS TEMP3 ºC
50 ± 1ºC
MOLY TEMP ºC 315 ± 5ºC
RCEL IN-HG-A
<10
SAMP IN-HG-A AMBIENT ± 1
NOx SLOPE 1.0 ± 0.3
NOx OFFSET mV 50 to 150
NO SLOPE 1.0 ± 0.3
NO OFFSET mV 50 to 150
O2 SLOPE3 0.5 to 2.0
O2 OFFSET3 % -10 to + 10
PMT SIGNAL DURING ETEST MV 2000 ± 1000
PMT SIGNAL DURING OTEST MV 2000 ± 1000
REF_4096_MV4 MV
4096mv ±2mv and Must be
Stable
REF_GND4 MV
0± 0.5 and Must be Stable
1 M200EH 2 M200EM 3 If option is installed
4 Located in Signal I/O list under DIAG menu
04521C (DCN5731)
Appendix C
(Ref: 05149A)
Warranty/Repair
Questionnaire Model
200EH/EM
TELEDYNE
INSTRUMENTS
Advanced Pollution Instrumentation
A Teledyne Technologies Company
TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS CUSTOMER SERVICE
EMAIL: api-customerservice@teledyne.com
PHONE: (858) 657-9800 TOLL FREE: (800) 324-5190 FAX: (858) 657-9816
C-2
2. What is the rcell & sample pressures with the sample inlet on rear of machine capped?
RCELL PRESS - __________________ IN-HG-A SAMPLE PRESSURE: _______________ IN-HG-A
3. What are the failure symptoms? ______________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
4. What test have you done trying to solve the problem? _____________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
5. If possible, please include a portion of a strip chart pertaining to the problem. Circle pertinent data.
Thank you for providing this information. Your assistance enables Teledyne Instruments to respond faster to the
problem that you are encountering.
OTHER NOTES: ____________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
04521C (DCN5731)
Model 200EH/EM (Ref 05150D) APPENDIX D: Diagrams and Schematics
APPENDIX D: Diagrams and Schematics
Table D-1: List of Included Diagrams and Schematics
DOCUMENT # DOCUMENT TITLE
04504 Document, M200EH/EM Electronic Interconnect Diagram
04496 Document, M200EH/EM Electronic Interconnect Listing
01669 PCA 016680300, Ozone generator board
01840 PCA Thermo-electric cooler board
03632 PCA 03631, 0-20mA Driver
03956 PCA 039550200, Relay Board
05703 PCA 05702, Motherboard, E-series, Gen 4
04259 PCA 04258, Keyboard & Display Driver
04354 PCA 04003, Pressure/Flow Transducer Interface
04395 PCA 4394, Ethernet board (optional equipment)
04181 PCA 041800200, PMT pre-amplifier board
04468 PCA, 04467, Analog Output E-Series
USER NOTES:
04521C (DCN5731)
D-1
APPENDIX D: Diagrams and Schematics Model 200EH/EM (05150D)
D-1
04521C (DCN5731)
M200E INTERCONNECT LIST (Ref: 04496D)
Cable Part
#
Signal Assembly PN J/P Pin Assembly PN J/P Pin
00729 CBL, KEYBOARD/DISPLA
Y
D7 Display DS0000025 CN1 1 Keyboard/Interface 042580000 J3 1
D6 Display DS0000025 CN1 2 Keyboard/Interface 042580000 J3 2
D5 Display DS0000025 CN1 3 Keyboard/Interface 042580000 J3 3
D4 Display DS0000025 CN1 4 Keyboard/Interface 042580000 J3 4
D3 Display DS0000025 CN1 5 Keyboard/Interface 042580000 J3 5
D2 Display DS0000025 CN1 6 Keyboard/Interface 042580000 J3 6
D1 Display DS0000025 CN1 7 Keyboard/Interface 042580000 J3 7
D0 Display DS0000025 CN1 8 Keyboard/Interface 042580000 J3 8
DISP WRITE Display DS0000025 CN1 9 Keyboard/Interface 042580000 J3 9
DGND Display DS0000025 CN1 10 Keyboard/Interface 042580000 J3 10
Spare Display DS0000025 CN1 11 Keyboard/Interface 042580000 J3 11
DISP_BUSY Display DS0000025 CN1 12 Keyboard/Interface 042580000 J3 12
DISP_RETURN Display DS0000025 CN1 13 Keyboard/Interface 042580000 J3 13
DISP_RETURN Display DS0000025 CN1 14 Keyboard/Interface 042580000 J3 14
DISP_PWR Display DS0000025 CN1 15 Keyboard/Interface 042580000 J3 15
DISP_PWR Display DS0000025 CN1 16 Keyboard/Interface 042580000 J3 16
0364901 CBL, AC Power, E-serie
s
AC Line Power Entry CN0000073 L Power Switch SW0000051 L
AC Neutral Power Entry CN0000073 N Power Switch SW0000051 N
Power Grnd Power Entry CN0000073 Shield SW0000051
Power Grnd Power Entry CN0000073 Chassis 042190000
AC Line Switched Power Switch SW0000051 L PS2 (+12) PS0000038 SK2 1
AC Neutral Switched Power Switch SW0000051 N PS2 (+12) PS0000038 SK2 3
Power Grnd Power Entry CN0000073 PS2 (+12) PS0000038 SK2 2
AC Line Switched Power Switch SW0000051 L PS1 (+5, ±15) PS0000037 SK2 1
AC Neutral Switched Power Switch SW0000051 N PS1 (+5, ±15) PS0000037 SK2 3
Power Grnd Power Entry CN0000073 PS1 (+5, ±15) PS0000037 SK2 2
AC Line Switched Power Switch SW0000051 L Relay Board 045230100 J1 1
AC Neutral Switched Power Switch SW0000051 N Relay Board 045230100 J1 3
Power Grnd Power Entry CN0000073 Relay Board 045230100 J1 2
03829 CBL, DC
p
ower to motherboard, E-series
DGND Relay Board 045230100 P7 1 Motherboard 057020100 P15 1
+5V Relay Board 045230100 P7 2 Motherboard 057020100 P15 2
AGND Relay Board 045230100 P7 3 Motherboard 057020100 P15 3
+15V Relay Board 045230100 P7 4 Motherboard 057020100 P15 4
AGND Relay Board 045230100 P7 5 Motherboard 057020100 P15 5
-15V Relay Board 045230100 P7 6 Motherboard 057020100 P15 6
+12V RET Relay Board 045230100 P7 7 Motherboard 057020100 P15 7
+12V Relay Board 045230100 P7 8 Motherboard 057020100 P15 8
Chassis Gnd Relay Board 045230100 P7 10 Motherboard 057020100 P15 9
04021 CBL, Pream
p
, O2 sensor, O3
g
enerator, fan, rela
y
board, motherboard, M200
E
DGND Relay Board 045230100 P12 1 Ethernet board 043940000 P102 1
+5V Relay Board 045230100 P12 2 Ethernet board 043940000 P102 2
+15V Relay Board 045230100 P12 4 Ozone generator 040420200 P1 4
AGND Relay Board 045230100 P12 3 Ozone generator 040420200 P1 5
+12V Relay Board 045230100 P12 8 PMT cooling fan 013140000 P1 1
+12V RET Relay Board 045230100 P12 7 PMT cooling fan 013140000 P1 2
O3GEN enable signal Ozone generator 040420200 P1 6 Motherboard 057020100 P108 15
ETEST Motherboard 057020100 P108 8 Preamplifier board 041800500 P6 1
OTEST Motherboard 057020100 P108 16 Preamplifier board 041800500 P6 2
PHYSICAL RANGE Motherboard 057020100 P108 7 Preamplifier board 041800500 P6 4
PMT TEMP Preamplifier board 041800500 P6 5 Motherboard 057020100 P109 4
HVPS Preamplifier board 041800500 P6 6 Motherboard 057020100 P109 5
PMT SIGNAL+ Preamplifier board 041800500 P6 7 Motherboard 057020100 P109 6
AGND Preamplifier board 041800500 P6 S Motherboard 057020100 P109 11
AGND Motherboard 057020100 P109 9 O2 Sensor (optional) OP0000030 P1 S
O2 SIGNAL - Motherboard 057020100 P109 7 O2 Sensor (optional) OP0000030 P1 9
O2 SIGNAL + Motherboard 057020100 P109 1 O2 Sensor (optional) OP0000030 P1 10
DGND O2 Sensor (optional) OP0000030 P1 5 Relay Board 045230100 P5 1
+5V O2 Sensor (optional) OP0000030 P1 6 Relay Board 045230100 P5 2
CONNECTION FROM CONNECTION TO
04521C (DCN5731)
D-3
M200E INTERCONNECT LIST (Ref: 04496D)
Cable Part
#
Signal Assembly PN J/P Pin Assembly PN J/P Pin
CONNECTION FROM CONNECTION TO
04022 CBL, DC Power, fan, ke
y
board, TEC, sensor board, M200
E
TEC +12V TEC board 049310100 P1 1 Relay Board 045230100 P10 8
TEC +12V RET TEC board 049310100 P1 2 Relay Board 045230100 P10 7
DGND Relay Board 045230100 P10 1 Keyboard 042580000 P1 8
+5V Relay Board 045230100 P10 2 Keyboard 042580000 P1 1
DGND Keyboard 042580000 P1 2 Relay Board 045230100 P11 1
+5V Keyboard 042580000 P1 3 Relay Board 045230100 P11 2
+12V RET Relay Board 045230100 P11 7 Chassis fan 040010000 P1 1
+12V Relay Board 045230100 P11 8 Chassis fan 040010000 P1 2
P/Flow Sensor AGND Relay Board 045230100 P11 3 P/Flow Sensor board 040030800 P1 3
P/Flow Sensor +15V Relay Board 045230100 P11 4 P/Flow Sensor board 040030800 P1 6
Pressure signal 1 P/Flow Sensor board 040030800 P1 2 Motherboard 057020100 P110 6
Pressure signal 2 P/Flow Sensor board 040030800 P1 4 Motherboard 057020100 P110 5
Flow signal 1 P/Flow Sensor board 040030800 P1 5 Motherboard 057020100 P110 4
Flow signal 2 P/Flow Sensor board 040030800 P1 1 Motherboard 057020100 P110 3
Shield P/Flow Sensor board 040030800 P1 S Motherboard 057020100 P110 12
Shield Motherboard 057020100 P110 9 Relay Board 045230100 P17 S
Thermocouple signal 1 Motherboard 057020100 P110 2 Relay Board 045230100 P17 1
TC 1 signal DGND Motherboard 057020100 P110 8 Relay Board 045230100 P17 2
Thermocouple signal 2 Motherboard 057020100 P110 1 Relay Board 045230100 P17 3
TC 2 signal DGND Motherboard 057020100 P110 7 Relay Board 045230100 P17 4
04023 CBL, I2C, rela
y
board to motherboard, E-serie
s
I2C Serial Clock Motherboard 057020100 P107 3 Relay Board 045230100 P3 1
I2C Serial Data Motherboard 057020100 P107 5 Relay Board 045230100 P3 2
I2C Reset Motherboard 057020100 P107 2 Relay Board 045230100 P3 4
I2C Shield Motherboard 057020100 P107 6 Relay Board 045230100 P3 5
0402
4
CBL, Nox, zero/s
p
an, IZS valves, M200
E
Zero/Span valve +12V Relay Board 045230100 P4 1 Zero/Span valve 042680100 P1 1
Zero/Span valve +12V RET Relay Board 045230100 P4 2 Zero/Span valve 042680100 P1 2
Sample valve +12V Relay Board 045230100 P4 3 Sample valve 042680100 P1 1
Sample valve +12V RET Relay Board 045230100 P4 4 Sample valve 042680100 P1 2
AutoZero valve +12V Relay Board 045230100 P4 5 AutoZero valve 042680100 P1 1
AutoZero valve +12V RET Relay Board 045230100 P4 6 AutoZero valve 042680100 P1 2
NONOx valve +12V Relay Board 045230100 P4 7 NONOx valve 042680100 P1 1
NONOx valve +12V RET Relay Board 045230100 P4 8 NONOx valve 042680100 P1 2
040260
3
CBL, IZS & O2 sensor heaters/thermistors; reaction cell & manifold thermistors, M200
E
Rcell thermistor A Reaction cell thermistor 041920000 P1 2 Motherboard 057020100 P27 7
Rcell thermistor B Reaction cell thermistor 041920000 P1 1 Motherboard 057020100 P27 14
IZS thermistor A Motherboard 057020100 P27 6 IZS thermistor/heater 003290000 P1 2
IZS thermistor B Motherboard 057020100 P27 13 IZS thermistor/heater 003290000 P1 3
IZS heater L IZS thermistor/heater 003290000 P1 4 Relay Board 045230100 P18 1
IZS heater N IZS thermistor/heater 003290000 P1 1 Relay Board 045230100 P18 2
Shield Relay Board 045230100 P18 11
O2 sensor heater Relay Board 045230100 P18 6 O2 sensor therm./heater 043420000 P1 4
O2 sensor heater Relay Board 045230100 P18 7 O2 sensor therm./heater 043420000 P1 2
Shield Relay Board 045230100 P18 12 O2 sensor therm./heater 043420000 P1
O2 sensor thermistor A O2 sensor therm./heater 043420000 P1 3 Motherboard 057020100 P27 4
O2 sensor thermistor B O2 sensor therm./heater 043420000 P1 1 Motherboard 057020100 P27 11
Byp/dil. man. thermistor A Motherboard 057020100 P27 1 Manifold thermistor 044530000 P1 1
Byp/dil. man. thermistor B Motherboard 057020100 P27 8 Manifold thermistor 044530000 P1 2
Configuration jumper intern. Relay Board 045230100 P18 3 Relay Board 045230100 P18 4
Configuration jumper intern. Relay Board 045230100 P18 8 Relay Board 045230100 P18 9
04027 CBL, NO2 converter, reaction cell & manifold heaters, M200
E
Bypass/dil. manifold heater L Manifold heater 1 044340000 P1 1 Relay Board 045230100 P2 11
Bypass/dil. manifold heater N Manifold heater 1 044340000 P1 2 Relay Board 045230100 P2 12
Bypass/dil. manifold heater L Relay Board 045230100 P2 11 Manifold heater 2 044340000 P1 1
Bypass/dil. manifold heater N Relay Board 045230100 P2 15 Manifold heater 2 044340000 P1 2
Moly heater A Relay Board 045230100 P2 7 Moly heater A 039700100 P1 1
Moly heater C Relay Board 045230100 P2 6 Moly heater C 039700100 P1 2
Moly heater B Relay Board 045230100 P2 10 Moly heater B 039700100 P1 3
Configuration jumper intern. Relay Board 045230100 P2 13 Relay Board 045230100 P2 14
Configuration jumper intern. Relay Board 045230100 P2 8 Relay Board 045230100 P2 9
Reaction cell heater/switch Relay Board 045230100 P2 1 Reaction cell heater 1B 040400000 P1 4
Reaction cell heater/switch Relay Board 045230100 P2 1 Reaction cell heater 2B 040400000 P1 6
Reaction cell heater/switch Relay Board 045230100 P2 2 Reaction cell heater 1A 040400000 P1 3
Reaction cell heater/switch Relay Board 045230100 P2 3 Reaction cell heat switch 040400000 P1 1
Reaction cell heater/switch Relay Board 045230100 P2 4 Reaction cell heat switch 040400000 P1 2
Reaction cell heater/switch Relay Board 045230100 P2 5 Reaction cell heater 2A 040400000 P1 5
D-3
04521C (DCN5731)
M200E INTERCONNECT LIST (Ref: 04496D)
Cable Part
#
Signal Assembly PN J/P Pin Assembly PN J/P Pin
CONNECTION FROM CONNECTION TO
0410
5
CBL, Ke
y
board, dis
p
la
y
to motherboard, E-serie
s
Kbd Interrupt Keyboard 042580000 J2 7 Motherboard 057020100 J106 1
DGND Keyboard 042580000 J2 2 Motherboard 057020100 J106 8
SDA Keyboard 042580000 J2 5 Motherboard 057020100 J106 2
SCL Keyboard 042580000 J2 6 Motherboard 057020100 J106 6
Shld Keyboard 042580000 J2 10 Motherboard 057020100 J106 5
04176 CBL, DC
p
ower to rela
y
board, E-serie
s
DGND Relay Board 045230100 P8 1 Power Supply Triple PS0000037 J1 3
+5V Relay Board 045230100 P8 2 Power Supply Triple PS0000037 J1 1
+15V Relay Board 045230100 P8 4 Power Supply Triple PS0000037 J1 6
AGND Relay Board 045230100 P8 5 Power Supply Triple PS0000037 J1 4
-15V Relay Board 045230100 P8 6 Power Supply Triple PS0000037 J1 5
+12V RET Relay Board 045230100 P8 7 Power Supply Single PS0000038 J1 3
+12V Relay Board 045230100 P8 8 Power Supply Single PS0000038 J1 1
04211 CBL, Serial data, motherboard to CPU, E-serie
s
RXD(0) CPU board CP0000026 CN3 3 Motherboard 057020100 J12 14
RTS(0) CPU board CP0000026 CN3 4 Motherboard 057020100 J12 13
TXD(0) CPU board CP0000026 CN3 5 Motherboard 057020100 J12 12
CTS(0) CPU board CP0000026 CN3 6 Motherboard 057020100 J12 11
GND(0) CPU board CP0000026 CN3 9 Motherboard 057020100 J12 10
RXD(1) CPU board CP0000026 CN4 3 Motherboard 057020100 J12 9
RTS(1) CPU board CP0000026 CN4 4 Motherboard 057020100 J12 8
TXD(1) CPU board CP0000026 CN4 5 Motherboard 057020100 J12 7
CTS(1) CPU board CP0000026 CN4 6 Motherboard 057020100 J12 6
GND(1) CPU board CP0000026 CN4 9 Motherboard 057020100 J12 5
NET+ CPU board CP0000026 CN5 2 Motherboard 057020100 J12 9
NET- CPU board CP0000026 CN5 4 Motherboard 057020100 J12 7
GND CPU board CP0000026 CN5 6 Motherboard 057020100 J12 5
Shield CPU board CP0000026 CN5 Motherboard 057020100 J12 2
04339 CBL, CPU to Ethernet
(
o
p
tional
)
, E-series
Ethernet DCD CPU board CP0000026 CN4 1 Ethernet board 043940000 P101 6
Ethernet DSR CPU board CP0000026 CN4 2 Ethernet board 043940000 P101 4
Ethernet RXD CPU board CP0000026 CN4 3 Ethernet board 043940000 P101 3
Ethernet RTS CPU board CP0000026 CN4 4 Ethernet board 043940000 P101 10
Ethernet TXD CPU board CP0000026 CN4 5 Ethernet board 043940000 P101 8
Ethernet CTS CPU board CP0000026 CN4 6 Ethernet board 043940000 P101 5
Ethernet DTR CPU board CP0000026 CN4 7 Ethernet board 043940000 P101 9
Ethernet GND CPU board CP0000026 CN4 9 Ethernet board 043940000 P101 16
Ground CPU board CP0000026 CN4 Ethernet board 043940000 P101 2
04433 CBL,
p
ream
p
lifier to rela
y
board, M200
E
Preamplifier DGND Relay Board 045230100 P9 1 Preamplifier board 041800500 P5 1
Preamplifier +5V Relay Board 045230100 P9 2 Preamplifier board 041800500 P5 2
Preamplifier AGND Relay Board 045230100 P9 3 Preamplifier board 041800500 P5 3
Preamplifier +15V Relay Board 045230100 P9 4 Preamplifier board 041800500 P5 4
Preamplifier -15V Relay Board 045230100 P9 6 Preamplifier board 041800500 P5 6
04437 CBL,
p
ream
p
lifier to TEC, M200E
Preamp TEC drive VREF Preamplifier board 041800500 J1 1 TEC board 049310100 J3 1
Preamp TEC drive CTRL Preamplifier board 041800500 J1 2 TEC board 049310100 J3 2
Preamp TEC drive AGND Preamplifier board 041800500 J1 3 TEC board 049310100 J3 3
04521C (DCN5731)
D-5
D-6
04521C (DCN5731)
1 2 3 4 5 6
A
B
C
D
6
54321
D
C
B
A
APPROVALS
DRAWN
CHECKED
APPROVED
DATE
SIZE DRAWING NO. REVISION
SHEET
Error : LOGO.BMP file not found.
The information herein is the
property of API and is
submitted in strictest con-
Unauthorized use by anyone
fidence for reference only.
for any other purposes is
prohibited. This document or
any information contained
in it may not be duplicated
without proper authorization.
OZON_ GEN
01669 G
1 130-Nov-2006
LAST MOD.
B
of
DRIVER
+15V
+15V
+15V
+15V
+15V
115V
115V
15V
15V
D2
1N4007
VR2
100K
TP3
C7
.1
R8
1.2K
R7
10
R6
10
R5
1.2K
TP1
TP2
TP6
C6
100pF
+
C8
1000uF/25V
Q2
IRFZ24
+
C1
1000uF/25V
C2
.01
R9
.1
R10
3K
C11
.22
C12
.22
C10
.1
1
2
3
4
5
6
J1
1
2
3
4
J2
SD
10
VREF
16
INV+
2
COMP
9
RT
6
CT
7
INV-
1
+SEN
4GND 8
-SEN 5
OSC 3
E_A 11
E_B 14
C_A 12
C_B 13
VIN 15
U1
SG3524B
OUT 3
GND
2
IN
1
U2
LM7815
+
C4
4.7uF/16V
C5
.1
C3
.1
+
C9
2200uF/35V
TP5
TP4
L1
68uH
VR1
1K 20T
R11
150K
Q1
IRFZ924
R1
4.7K 1%
R2
10K 1%
R4
10K 1%
R12
10K 1%
R13
10K 1%
R14
4.7K 1%
R15
4.7K 1%
1
4
3
2
8
7
6
5
T1
PWR XFRMR
D1
1N4007
"PW"
"FREQ"
10/15/96 REV. D: Added PTC1,2 secondary overcurrent protection.
PTC2
1.1A
PTC1
1.1A
11/21/96 REV. E: Minor cosmetic fixes
10/01/99 REV. F ADDED VERSION TABLE AT D6
VERSION TABLE
016680000 - CE MARK VERSION
016680100 - NON CE MARK (OBSOLETE)
016680200 - SUB PS 17 SWITCHER FOR LINEAR SUPPLY
016680300 - LOW OUTPUT + FIXED FREQ
016680400 - HI OUTPUT + FIXED FREQ
REPLACE VR2 WITH A WIRE JUMPER
REPLACE R4 WITH RS297 127KOHM
REPLACE VR2 WITH A WIRE JUMPER
REPLACE R4 WITH RS13 11 KOHM
STD PROD. VERSION UP TO 10/99
DELETE COMPONENTS
T1, D1, D2, C9, C11, PTC1, PTC2, U2
ADD COMPONENTS
PS1
016680600 - HI OUTPUT,E SERIES
Text
Text
Text
DELETE COMPONENTS
T1,D1,D2,C9,PTC1,PTC2,U2
04521C (DCN5731)
D-7
1 2 3 4 5 6
A
B
C
D
654321
D
C
B
AAPPROVALS
DRAWN
CHECKED
APPROVED
DATE
SIZEDRAWING NO. REVISION
SHEET
The information herein is the
property of API and is
submitted in strictest con-
Unauthorized use by anyone
fidence for reference only.
for any other purposes is
prohibited. This document or
any information contained
in it may not be duplicated
without proper authorization.
THERMOELECT
01840 B
1 114-Jul-1999
LAST MOD.
B
of
COOLER_CONTROL
1
25
4
6 7
3
1
2
5
4
6 7
3
12
11 8
109
12
11
8
109
1
2
+15+15
+15 +15
1 2 3 4
5 67 8
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
1234
5 67 83
21
11 4
5
67
10
98
12
13
14
+15
+15 +15 +15 +15
+ +
1
2
1
2
3
+15 +15
D-8
04521C (DCN5731)
1 2 3 4 56
A
B
C
D
6
54321
D
C
B
A
APPROVALS
DRAWN
CHECKED
APPROVED
DATE
SIZE DRAWING NO. REVISION
SHEET
Error : LOGO.BMP file not found.
The information herein is the
property of API and is
submitted in strictest con-
Unauthorized use by anyone
fidence for reference only.
for any other purposes is
prohibited. This document or
any information contained
in it may not be duplicated
without proper authorization.
PCA 03631, Isolated 0-20ma, E Series
03632 A
1119-Jul-2002
LAST MOD.
B
of
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
J1
HEADER 4X2
+15V
+15V
IOUT-
IOUT+
VIN-
VIN+
15 7
9
12
16
10
8
+VS1
-VS1 GND1 -VS2GND2
+VS2
VIN VOUT
U4
ISO124
VIN- JP1
JUMPER2
+12V -12V
+12V
-12V
VS
1
0V
2
0V
5
+VOUT
6
-VOUT
7SOUT 8
SIN 14
U1
DCP010515
C1
0.47
C2
0.47
C3
0.47
ISO_+15V
ISO_GND
ISO_-15V
ISO_-15V ISO_+15V
R1
4.75K
R2
9.76K
3
2
6
1
8
7 4
U2
OPA277
C4
1000PF
C5
220PF
D1
1N914
ISO_+15V ISO_-15V
VREF
15
SENSE
12
VRADJ
11
VIN(10)
4
VREFIN
3
VIN(5V)
5
GND
216MA 9
4MA 10
SPAN 8
OFFADJ 7
GATEDRV 14
SSENSE 13
SR 1
+V 16
OFFADJ 6
U3
XTR110
ISO_+15V
IOUT+
C6
0.1
C7
0.1
Q1
MOSFETP
IOUT-
TP1
TESTPOINT
Date Rev. Change Description Engineer
8/9/00 A INITIAL RELEASE (FROM 03039) KL
TP3
ISO+15
TP2
TESTPOINT
TP4
ISO-15
TP5
ISO_GND
TP6
GND
04521C (DCN5731)
D-9
1 2 3 4 5 6
A
B
C
D
6
54321
D
C
B
A
Title
Number RevisionSize
B
Date: 30-Jun-2004 Sheet of
File: N:\PCBMGR\RELEASED\03954cc\PROTEL\03954a.ddbDrawn By:
Te
Te
03956 A
M100E/M200E Relay PCB
31 3
1 2
U2A
SN74HC04
3 4
U2B
5 6
U2C
11 10
U2E
13 12
147
U2F
OUT4 1
K2
OUT 3 3
GND
4GND
5
OUT 2 6
K7
OUT 1 8
IN 1
9IN 2
10
VCC 11
GND
12 GND
13
ENABLE
14 IN 3
15 IN 4
16 U5
UDN2540B(16)
1
2
3
4
5
J3
CON5
VBATT
1
VOUT
2
VCC
3
GND
4
BATT_ON
5
LOW LINE'
6
OSC IN
7
OSC SEL
8
RESET 16
RESET' 15
WDO' 14
CD IN' 13
CD OUT' 12
WDI 11
PFO' 10
PFI 9
U4
MAX693
C2
0.001
VCC
R4
1M
C3
1
A
AKK
D17
RLS4148
VCC
D1
RED
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
RN1
330
I2C_Vcc
D2
YEL
D3
YEL
D4
YEL
D7
GRN
D8
GRN
D9
GRN
AA
K
K
D10
GRN
9 8
U2D
VCC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
J4
8 PIN
VALVE0
VALVE1
VALVE2
VALVE3
11
2
2
+
C6
2000/25
+12V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
J5
CON10THROUGH
11
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
J7
CON10THROUGH
11
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
J8
CON10THROUGH
11
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
J9
CON10THROUGH
DGND
VCC
AGND
+15V
AGND
-15V
+12RET
+12V
EGND
CHS_GND
AC_Line
AC_Neutral
I2C_Vcc
1 2
JP3
HEADER 1X2
DC PWR IN KEYBRD MTHR BRD SYNC DEMOD SPARE
VCC
1 2
+
3-4
K1
SLD-RLY
1 2
+
3-4
K2
SLD-RLY
1 2
+
3-4
K3
SLD-RLY
I2C_Vcc
1
2
3
JP4
WTCDG OVR
+
C5
10/16
11
2
2
+C4
10/16
C1
0.1
R3
20K
1
2
3
4
J1
4 PIN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
J216 PIN
11
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
J10
CON10THROUGH
1
TP1
DGND
1
TP2
+5V
1
TP3
AGND
1
TP4
+15V
1
TP5
-15V
1
TP6
+12RT
1
TP7
+12V
T
General Trace Width Requirements
1. Vcc (+5V) and I2C VCC should be 15 mil
2. Digitial grounds should be at least 20 mils
3. +12V and +12V return should be 30 mils
4. All AC lines (AC Line, AC Neutral, RELAY0 - 4, All signals on JP2) should be 30 mils wide, with 120 mil isolation/creepage distance around them
5. Traces between J7 - J12 should be top and bottom and at least 140 mils.
6. Traces to the test points can be as small as 10 mils.
T
Q1
IRF7205
RELAY0 RELAY1 RELAY2
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
JP1
HEADER 4X2
R1
2.2K R2
2.2K
VCC
R6
10K
R5
10K
INT
1
A1
2
A2
3
SCL
22
SDA
23
P10 13
P00 4
P01 5
P02 6
P03 7
P04 8
P05 9
P06 10
P07 11
Vss
12
A0
21
P11 14
P12 15
P13 16
P14 17
P15 18
P16 19
P17 20
Vdd 24
U1
PCF8575
I2C_Vcc
IO3
IO4
IO10
IO11
IO12
IO13
IO14
IO15
AC_Neutral
RELAY0
RELAY1
RELAY2
VLV_ENAB
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
JP2
Heater Config Jumper
RELAY0
TS0
TS1
TS2
RELAY1
RELAY2
TS0
TS1
TS2
11
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
J11
CON10THROUGH
11
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
J12
CON10THROUGH
RELAY0
RELAY1
RELAY2
WDOG
RL0 RL1 RL2 VA0 VA1 VA2 VA3
COMMON0
COMMON1
COMMON2
LOAD0
LOAD1
LOAD2
REV AUTH DATE
BCAC 10/3/02 CE MARK LINE VOLTAGE TRACE SPACING FIX
APPLIES TO PCB 03954
D-10
04521C (DCN5731)
1 2 3 4 5 6
A
B
C
D
654321
D
C
B
A
Title
Number RevisionSize
B
Date: 30-Jun-2004 Sheet of
File: N:\PCBMGR\RELEASED\03954cc\PROTEL\03954a.ddbDrawn By:
Te
Te
03956 A
100E/200E/400E RELAY PCB
32 3
1 2
U3A
SN74HC04
9 8
U3D
11 10
U3E
OUT4 1
K2
OUT 3 3
GND
4GND
5
OUT 2 6
K7
OUT 1 8
IN 1
9IN 2
10
VCC 11
GND
12 GND
13
ENABLE
14 IN 3
15 IN 4
16 U6
UDN2540B(16)
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
RN2
330
D5
YEL D6
YEL D11
GRN D12
GRN D13
GRN D14
GRN D15
GRN
VCC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
J6
CON10
Valve4
Valve5
Valve6
Valve7
+12V
I2C_Vcc
1 2
+
3-4
K4
SLD-RLY
1 2
+
3-4
K5
SLD-RLY
I2C_Vcc
T
T
RELAY3 RELAY4
IO3
IO4
IO10
IO11
IO12
IO13
13 12
147
U3F
IO14
IO15
AC_Line
1
2
3
4
5
6
J20
MOLEX6
AC_Neutral
Aux Relay Connector
RELAY3
RELAY4
VLV_ENAB
AA
K
K
D16
GRN
3 4
U3B
5 6
U3C
1
2
J13
MINIFIT-2
1
2
J14
MINIFIT-2
VCC
C13
0.1
Q2
IRL3303
Q3
IRL3303
+12V
+12V
+12RET
Use 50 mil traces
Use 40 mil traces
RL3 RL4 VA4 VA5 VA6 VA7 TR0 TR1
04521C (DCN5731)
D-11
1 2 3 4 5 6
A
B
C
D
6
54321
D
C
B
A
Title
Number RevisionSize
B
Date: 30-Jun-2004 Sheet of
File: N:\PCBMGR\RELEASED\03954cc\PROTEL\03954a.ddbDrawn By:
Te
Te
03956 A
100E/200E/400E RELAY PAB
33 3
3
26
1
58
74
U8
LTC1050
ZR1
5.6V
A
AKK
ZR2
5.6V
C7
0.1
C9
0.1
-15V
+15V
R8
2.55K
R7
2.55K
R11
249K
R9
1K
1
2
J15
TYPE J
1
2
J18
TYPE k
C8
0.1
K TC Connector
J TC Connector
1
2
3
4
J17
MICROFIT-4
VDD_TC
VEE_TC
3
26
1
58
74
U9
LTC1050
K7
Vin 2
Gnd
4
J8
TOUT 3
R- 5
U10
LT1025 C12
0.1
R12
249K
R10
1K
1
2
J16
TYPE J
1
2
J19
TYPE K
C11
0.1
K TC Connector
J TC Connector
VDD_TC
VEE_TC
C10
0.1
C14
0.1
R14
676K 1 2
JP6
JUMPER
R13
332K 1 2
JP5
JUMPER
3
21
84
U7A
OPA2277
R15
11K
R19
10K
CCW
CCW
WW
CW CW
CW
R17
5K
+15V
-15V
C15
0.1
C16
0.1
5
67
U7B
OPA2277
R16
11K
R20
10K
CW
R18
5K
C17
1
C20
1 uF
AA
K
K
ZR3
10V
AA
K
K
ZR4
10V
R21
20k
R22
20k
++
+
+
+
-
-
-
-
D-12
04521C (DCN5731)
1
2
345 6
A
B
C
D
6
5
4
3
2
1
D
C
B
A
Title
Number RevisionSize
Orcad B
Date: 17-Jun-2008 Sheet of
File: N:\Pcbmgr\05701dn.E-motherboard.gen4\Source\05701a.DDBDrawn By:
Schematic for E Series Motherboard PCA 05702
1 8
05703 A
A3
A2
A1
D1
D4
IOW
A0
A0
D7
IOR
SYSCLK
D2
D5
D3
D0
D6
A6
A4
A7
A9
A8
A5
INT
0X32E
0X32D
IOEN
AEN
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A12
A14
A13
A15
ENAB2
INT
D4
D1
D2
D5
D5
D6
IOW
D4
D7
IOW
D2
D6
D0
D4
D3
D0
D2
D3
D3
D5
IOR
D1
D0
D6
IOR
D7
D1
D7
DIGIO1
SHDAC
IRQ12
KBINT
1
TP2
A1 2
A2 3
A3 4
A4 5
A5 6
A6 7
A7 8
A8 9
G1
1
G2
19
Y1
18
Y2
17
Y3
16
Y4
15
Y5
14
Y6
13
Y7
12
Y8
11
U7
74HC541
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
J108
MICROFIT-16
C
10
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
5
RN16
47Kx8
D
12
CLK
11
Q9
Q8
PRE
10
CLR
13
U5B
74HC74
GND 32
A0 31
IOCHECK 1
D7 2
D6 3
D5 4
D4 5
D3 6
D2 7
D1 8
D0 9
IOCHRDY 10
AEN 11
A19 12
A18 13
A17 14
A16 15
A15 16
A14 17
A13 18
A12 19
A11 20
A10 21
A9 22
A8 23
A7 24
A6 25
A5 26
A4 27
A3 28
A2 29
A1 30
J101A
PC104
GND 33
RESETDRV 34
+5V 35
IRQ9 36
-5V 37
DRQ2 38
-12V 39
ENDXFR 40
+12V 41
(KEY) 42
SMEMW 43
SMEMR 44
IOW 45
IOR 46
DACK3 47
DRQ3 48
DACK1 49
DRQ1 50
REFRESH 51
SYSCLK 52
IRQ7 53
IRQ6 54
IRQ5 55
IRQ4 56
IRQ3 57
DACK2 58
TC 59
BALE 60
+5V 61
OSC 62
GND 63
GND 64
J101B
PC104
R61
47k, 5%
R38
2.2K, 5%
1
2
3
U6A
74HC32
A0
2
A1
4
A2
6
A3
8
A4
11
A5
13
A6
15
A7
17
B0
3
B1
5
B2
7
B3
9
B4
12
B5
14
B6
16
B7
18
EN 1
P=Q 19
VCC 20
GND 10
U1
74HC688
D1
9
D2
8
D3
7
D4
6
D5
5
D6
4
D7
3
D8
2
CLK
11
OC
1
Q1 12
Q2 13
Q3 14
Q4 15
Q5 16
Q6 17
Q7 18
Q8 19
U874HC574
C38
0.15 uF, ceramic
9
10
8
U6C
74HC32
1
TP56
A
23
B
22
C
21
D
20
G1
18
G2
19
Y0 1
Y1 2
Y2 3
Y3 4
Y4 5
Y5 6
Y6 7
Y7 8
Y8 9
Y9 10
Y10 11
Y11 13
Y12 14
Y13 15
Y14 16
Y15 17
U2
74HC154
4
5
6
U50B
74HC08
12
13
11
U50D
74HC08
9
10
8
U50C
74HC08
1
2
JP1
IDC-HEADER
C3
0.15 uF, ceramic
1
2
3
U51A
74HC08
D
2
CLK
3
Q5
Q6
PRE
4
CLR
1
U5A 74HC74
12
13
11
U6D
74HC32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
J102
PC104CD
1
2
JP5
IDC-HEADER
R59
47k, 5%
4
5
6
U51B
74HC08
IACK
4
INT
5VCC 20
A0
6
SDA 2
VSS 10
RD
16
CS
17
WR
18
RESET
19
DB0
7
DB1
8
DB2
9
DB3
11
DB4
12
DB5
13
DB6
14
DB7
15
SCL 3
CLK
1
U10
PCF8584
1
2
JP3 IDC-HEADER
1
TP44
R3
2.2K, 5% 1
2
3
4
5
6
J107
INLINE-6
12
13
11
U51D
74HC08
R4
2.2K, 5%
VCC 1
VCC 2
GND
3
GND
4
WDI
6RESET 7
GND
8
U3
LTC699CS8
3
4
6
1
X3
JITO-2-DC5F-10OHM
C39
1.2 uF, 6.3V ceramic
D[0..7]
IOW
IOR
SHDAC
DIGIO3
DIGIO4
TEMP
DACV
WRDAC
VFPROG
CHGAIN
VFREAD
SHDN
DIGIO0
DIGIO2
TC1
SHDN
I2C_RESET
I2C_RESET
I2C_DRV_RST
VCC
VCC
+12V
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
ADDR=0x360 (DEFAULT)
R5
47k, 5%
R25
NOT INSTALLED
DO0
DO1
DO2
DO3
DO4
DO5
DO6
DI0
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4
DI5
DI6
DI7
DO0
DO1
DO2
DO3
DO4
DO5
DO6
DO7
DI0
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4
DI5
DI6
DI7
SCL
SDA
DGND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
J106
MICROFIT-8
KBINT
VCC
D1
D0
D
12 CLK
11 Q9
Q8
PRE
10
CLR
13
U4B 74HC74
D
2CLK
3
Q5
Q6
PRE
4
CLR
1
U4A
74HC74
VCC
DO7
IRQ10
R24
2.2K, 5%
2
1
DS5
LED, RED, smt 1206
2
4
U39
74AHC1GU04
1
2JP6
IDC-HEADER
1
2
3
U50A
74HC32
ADDR = 0x320 (JP1 INSTALLED)
AEN
IOEN
IOW
1
2
3
JP7
HEADER3-DEFAULTED-1
12
shorted - sldr side
JP4
1
2
shorted - sldr side
JP2
SDA
SCL
DGND
VCC
I2C_RESET
Notes:
1) This schematic is for PCA #05702
2) This schematic is for PCB 05701
Pins 1&2 shorted on PCA
0X32C
0X32F
04521C (DCN5731)
D-13
1
2
345 6
A
B
C
D
6
5
4
3
2
1
D
C
B
A
Title
Number RevisionSize
Orcad B
Date: 17-Jun-2008 Sheet of
File: N:\Pcbmgr\05701dn.E-motherboard.gen4\Source\05701a.DDBDrawn By:
Schematic for E Series Motherboard PCA 05702
28
05703 A
1
MT1
MOUNTING HOLE
1
TP13
+12V 8
+12RET 7
DGND 1
+15V 4
-15V 6
AGND 3
+5V 2
AGND 5
EGND 9
CHASGND 10
J15
MOLEX-10
11
6
5
4
12
3
9
8
2
1
7
10
SW1001
SW PUSHBUTTON-4PDT
TV ARRAY
11
22
33
44
5
5
8
8
7
7
6
6
TV1
SMDA15LCC
TV ARRAY
11
22
33
44
5
5
8
8
7
7
6
6
TV2
SMDA15LCC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
J12
INLINE-12
1
1
22
R11
4.9K, 5%
NC
1
RXD
2
TXD
3
NC
4
GND
5
NC
6
RTS
7
CTS
8
NC
9
J1013
DB9M
2
1
DS2
LED, GRN, smt 1206
R10
NOT INSTALLED
21
DS1
LED, RED, smt 1206 R111
10k, 1%
1
TP14
1
TP18
R12
4.9K, 5%
1
TP15
R13
NOT INSTALLED
R14
NOT INSTALLED
1
TP16
1
TP17
+15V
-15V
VCC
+12VRET
+12V
-15V
Com1 - RS232-A
Com2 - RS232-B/RS485
AUXDC POWERIN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
J1010
DB9 FEMALE
TX1
CTS1
21
DS4
LED, GRN, smt 1206
2
1
DS3
LED, RED, smt 1206
RS-GND1
RX0
TX0
RTS0
CTS0
RS-GND0
RX1
RTS1
R2
2.2K, 5%
R1
2.2K, 5% VCC
1
MT2
MOUNTING HOLE
1
MT3
MOUNTING HOLE
1
MT4
MOUNTING HOLE
1
MT5
MOUNTING HOLE
1
MT6
MOUNTING HOLE
1
MT7
MOUNTING HOLE
1
MT8
MOUNTING HOLE
1
MT9
MOUNTING HOLE
DCE side of switch is side towards pin 1,
TX for Com2 RX for Com2
TX for Com1 RX for Com1
VCC
RX1
TX1
RTS1
CTS1
RS-GND1
DTE
9
10
8
U51C
74HC08
+C1
10 uF, 35V, TANTALUM
VCC
+ C2
10 uF, 35V, TANTALUM
D1
MBRS340CT
D9
MBRS340CT
R35
NOT INSTALLED
D1, D9 & R35 must be
within 1" of J15
D-14
04521C (DCN5731)
12345 6
A
B
C
D
6
5
4
3
2
1
D
C
B
A
Title
Number RevisionSize
Orcad B
Date: 17-Jun-2008 Sheet of
File: N:\Pcbmgr\05701dn.E-motherboard.gen4\Source\05701a.DDBDrawn By:
Schematic for E Series Motherboard PCA 05702
3 8
05703 A
DACV
D0
CLK
D0
CLK
SHDAC
D0
CLK
D0
CLK
D3
D6
D7
D5
D0
D1
D2
D4
CSRANGE1
CSRANGE2
CSDACA
CSDACB
DAC1V
IOW
CLK
DAC3V
DAC0V
C14
0.15 uF, ceramic
CLK
1
DIN
2
VOA 5
GND 6
CS
3
VOB 8
DOUT
4
VCC 7
U31
DAC, 12 BIT
1
TP32
C6
0.15 uF, ceramic
-
+
9
10
8
4
11
U35C
OP-AMP, PRECISION QUAD
C53
0.15 uF, ceramic
C11
0.15 uF, ceramic
W1 22
AGND1 21
W2 4
AGND4 5
B2 2
AGND2 1
A1
23
DGND 9
W4 8
A4
7
A2
3
RS
15
AGND3 17
W3 18
A3
19
B3 20
VCC 16
B4 6
CLK
14
SDO
13
SHDN
10
CS
11
B1 24
SDI
12
U32
POT, DIGITAL
C8
0.15 uF, ceramic
1
TP28
C10
0.15 uF, ceramic
-
+
6
5
7
4
11
U36B
OP-AMP, PRECISION QUAD
C12
0.15 uF, ceramic
R23
10k, 1%
R22
18.7K
-
+
13
12
14
4
11
U36D
OP-AMP, PRECISION QUAD
1
TP26
R19
10k, 1%
1
TP27
W1 22
AGND1 21
W2 4
AGND4 5
B2 2
AGND2 1
A1
23
DGND 9
W4 8
A4
7
A2
3
RS
15
AGND3 17
W3 18
A3
19
B3 20
VCC 16
B4 6
CLK
14
SDO
13
SHDN
10
CS
11
B1 24
SDI
12
U34
POT, DIGITAL
CLK
1DIN
2
VOA 5
GND 6
CS
3
VOB 8
DOUT
4
VCC 7
U33
DAC, 12 BIT
-
+
2
3
1
4
11
U35A
OP-AMP, PRECISION QUAD
R18
10k, 1%
D1
2
D2
3
D3
4
D4
5
D5
6
D6
7
D7
8
D8
9
CLK
11 OC
1
Q1 19
Q2 18
Q3 17
Q4 16
Q5 15
Q6 14
Q7 13
Q8 12
U30
74HC574
R16
18.7K
C17
0.15 uF, ceramic
-
+
2
3
1
4
11
U36A
OP-AMP, PRECISION QUAD
R63
10k, 1%
R15
40K
2
2
4
4
6
6
8
8
11
33
55
77
J19
IDC-8
C18
0.15 uF, ceramic
-
+
13
12
14
4
11
U35D
OP-AMP, PRECISION QUAD
2
2
4
4
6
6
8
8
11
33
55
77
J21
IDC-8
9
10
8
U20C
74HC32
-
+
9
10
8
4
11
U36C
OP-AMP, PRECISION QUAD
2
2
4
4
6
6
8
8
11
33
55
77
J23
IDC-8
-
+
6
5
7
4
11
U35B
OP-AMP, PRECISION QUAD
-
+
2
3
1
8
4
U29A
OP-AMP, PRECISION DUAL
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
J22
MICROFIT-10
C9
0.15 uF, ceramic
TV ARRAY
11
22
33
44
5
5
8
8
7
76
6
TV4
SMDA15LCC
R17
18.7K
1
TP33
4
5
6
U20B
74HC32
TV ARRAY
11
22
33
44
5
5
8
87
76
6
TV3
SMDA15LCC
C16 0.15 uF, ceramic
0
1
0G
2
1
3
1G
4
2
5
2G
6
3
7
3G
8
J1020
TERMBLOCK-8
R20
18.7K
1
TP21
R21
10k, 1%
-
+
6
5
7
8
4
U29B
OP-AMP, PRECISION DUAL
1
TP29
IOW
D[0..7]
DACV
CSDACA
CSDACB
DAC0
DAC1
DAC2
DAC3
SHDAC
DAC0V
DAC3V
DAC1V
DAC2V
WRDAC
VREF
TC2
-15V
+15V
VCC
VCC VCC
VCC
+15V
-15V
+15V
-15V
-15V
+15V
+15V
+15V
+15V
+15V
+15V
+15V
-15V
-15V
-15V
-15V
-15V
-15V
DAC RANGE &OFFSET PROGRAM
DAC 2
DAC3
DUAL DAC A2
DAC1
DUAL DAC A1
ANALOG VOLTAGE & CURRENT OUTPUTS
ISOLATED 0-20MA OPTIONAL BOARDS
SOCKET U31
SOCKET U33
CSDACA
CSDACB
L1
L2
L3
L4
FE BEAD
L5
L6
L7
FE BEAD
C21
10000 pF C7
10000 pF
C15
10000 pF
C20
10000 pF
C4
10000 pF
C5
10000 pF
C13
10000 pF
C19
10000 pF
L15
D7
MBRS340CT
D8
MBRS340CT
D7 and D8
Must be located
within 1" of U32 & U34
04521C (DCN5731)
D-15
1
2
345 6
A
B
C
D
6
5
4
3
2
1
D
C
B
A
Title
Number RevisionSize
Orcad B
Date: 17-Jun-2008 Sheet of
File: N:\Pcbmgr\05701dn.E-motherboard.gen4\Source\05701a.DDBDrawn By:
IOW
CH1
CH3
CH4
CH7
CH8
CH9
CH12
CH13
CH14
SB
MID
SA
SC
MSB
D4
D0
D3
D6
LSB
START
D7
SEL60
D5
SEL60
CH2
CH11
D4
D3
D6
D4
D1
D2
D2
D0
D3
D1
D5
D2
D1
D7
D7
D0
D5
D6
1
TP50
3
4
6
1
X2
JITO-2-DCA5AE-4.8MHZ
+
C41
10 uF, 35V, TANTALUM
1
TP52
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
J110
MICROFIT-12
C51
0.15 uF, ceramic
C42
0.15 uF, ceramic
R46
1.1K, 5%
C47
1.2 uF, 6.3V ceramic
1
TP48
IN 16
4IN 15
5
IN 14
6IN 13
7
IN 12
8
IN 11
9IN 10
10 IN 9
11
IN 3
21
NC 3
+VSS 1
NC 2
IN 5
23
IN 4
22
IN 2
20 IN 1
19
ENB 18
A0 17
A1 16
A2 15
A3 14
VREF 13
IN 6
24
GND 12
IN 8
26
-VSS 27
OUT 28
IN 7
25
U52
AN MUX
+
C50
10 uF, 35V, TANTALUM
1
TP57
1
TP51
R49
100
NC 1
VIN 2
TRIM
5VOUT
6NR 3
NC
8
GND 4
NC
7
U56
VOLTAGE REF
C43
0.15 uF, ceramic
1
TP55
C40
0.15 uF, ceramic
C49
0.15 uF, ceramic
C54
0.15 uF, ceramic
C44
.022 uF, 50V
D1
2
D2
3
D3
4
D4
5
D5
6
D6
7
D7
8
D8
9
CLK
11
OE
1
Q1 19
Q2 18
Q3 17
Q4 16
Q5 15
Q6 14
Q7 13
Q8 12
U58
74HC574
C52
0.15 uF, ceramic
C48
1.2 uF, 6.3V ceramic
1
TP53
COS
12
OPT10V
10
-VS
11
CLK
13
FOUT 14
8VI
9
10VI
8
GND 15
AGND 16
COMP- 17
COMP+ 18
OP OUT
4
NC 3
+VS 2
OP-
5
OP+
6
REF 20
5VI
7
NC 19
NC 1
U54
AD652KP
D1
2
D2
3
D3
4
D4
5
D5
6
D6
7
D7
8
D8
9
CLK
11 OE
1
Q1 19
Q2 18
Q3 17
Q4 16
Q5 15
Q6 14
Q7 13
Q8 12
U60
74HC574
1
TP54
R43 100
R47100
-
+
7
2
3
4
6
U53
OP-AMP, PRECISION
1
TP49
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
J109
MICROFIT-12
R48 200
4
5
8
1 X1
MB100H-4.8MHZ
+
C45
10 uF, 35V, TANTALUM
R45
1M, 1%, 1206 CHIP
C46
0.15 uF, ceramic
TIE 40
TIE 39
TIE 38
TIE 37
TIE 36
FREQ 35
TIE 34
TIE
12
GND
10
DB7
11
TIE
13
DB0
14
ICLK 42
TIE 33
DB3
9RDMBYTE
8
VCCIO 32
SEL60 29
START
28
TDO 30
TDI
15
TMS
16
TCK
17
RDMSB
18
VFCLK 43
DB5 44
DB6 4
TIE 3
TIE 2
DB2 5
VCCINT 41
RDLSB 6
READ
27
SC
26 SB
25
GND
23
IOR
22 VCCINT
21
DB1
20
TIE 1
SA
24
DB4
7
TIE
19
GND 31
U57
Xilinx CPLD
C55
0.15 uF, ceramic
C
10
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
5
RN17
100Kx8
D1 2
S1
3
-VS 4
GND 5
S4
6
D4 7
IN4
8IN3
9
S3
11
IN1
1
IN2
16
D2 15
S2
14
+VS 13
VCC 12
D3 10
U55
DG444DY
4
5
6
U59B
74HC32
1
2
3
U59A
74HC32
IOR
VFREAD
D[0..7]
VFPROG
DACMUX
CHGAIN
TEMPMUX
IOW
SHDN
VREF
TC6
TC7
TC8
+15V
VCC
+15V
VCC
-15V
VCC
-15V
+15V
-15V
VCC
+15V
VCC
VCC
+15V
VCC
-15V
ANALOG INPUTS
C
10
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
5
RN15
100Kx8
C
10
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
5
RN14
100Kx8
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH7
CH6
CH6
CH8
CH9
CH11
CH12
CH13
CH14
1TP1
VREF
1TP3
AGND
4
R9 100
PLACE 100
OHM
RESISTOR AS
CLOS AS
POSSIBLE TO
X1 AND X2
R45 induces an
offset in analog
signal to give a
'live 0' for sensors
with 0 or slightly
negative output
R47 and R48 reduce the gain
for analog inputs by 1%, so
that we can read slightly above
full scale, to prevent overflow
of ADC reading
VCC
Schematic for E Series Motherboard PCA 05702
05703 A
8
D-16
04521C (DCN5731)
1
2
345 6
A
B
C
D
6
5
4
3
2
1
D
C
B
A
Title
Number RevisionSize
Orcad B
Date: 17-Jun-2008 Sheet of
File: N:\Pcbmgr\05701dn.E-motherboard.gen4\Source\05701a.DDBDrawn By:
Schematic for E Series Motherboard PCA 05702
58
05703 A
DAC2V
DAC1V
DAC0V
DAC3V
D0
D1
D2
C37 0.15 uF, ceramic
12
13
11
U59D
74HC32
C36 0.15 uF, ceramic
1
2
3
45
6
7
8
RN18 1Kx4
A0
2ENB
3
V-
4IN 1 5
IN 2 6
IN 3 7
IN 4 8
OUT
9
IN 7 11
WR
1
A2
16
GND
15
+VSS
14
IN 5 13
IN 6 12
IN 8 10
A1
17
RS
18
U48
MAX382CWN
D1
2S1 3
-VS
4
GND
5
S4 6
D4
7
IN4 8
IN3 9
S3 11
IN1 1
IN2 16
D2
15 S2 14
+VS
13
VCC
12
D3
10
U49
DG444DY
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
J27
MICROFIT-14
XT1
THERMISTER
TEMPMUX
DACMUX
TEMP
IOW
DAC1
DAC2
DAC3
D[0..7]
DAC0V
DAC0
DAC1V
DAC3V
DAC2V
SHDN
+15V
-15V
+5VANA
VCC
VCC +15V
+5VANA
+15V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
RN21
10Kx4
R34
10K
THERMISTER1
THERMISTER2
THERMISTER3
THERMISTER4
THERMISTER5
THERMISTER6
THERMISTER7
THERMISTER8 THERMISTER5
THERMISTER6
IN
1
ON/OFF
3OUT 5
NC 4
GND
2
U23
LP2981IM5
C29
1 uF
BYPASS CAPS
MUST BE WITHIN
1/2" OF THE
REGULATOR
INPUT/OUTPUT
PINS
+C60
10 uF, 35V, TANTALUM
C
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
RN20
10Kx9, 2%
04521C (DCN5731)
D-17
1
2
345 6
A
B
C
D
6
5
4
3
2
1
D
C
B
A
Title
Number RevisionSize
Orcad B
Date: 17-Jun-2008 Sheet of
File: N:\Pcbmgr\05701dn.E-motherboard.gen4\Source\05701a.DDBDrawn By:
Schematic for E Series Motherboard PCA 05702
6 8
05703 A
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D[0..7]
IOR
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
A1
2
A2
3
A3
4
A4
5
A5
6
A6
7
A7
8
A8
9
G1 1
G2 19
Y1 18
Y2 17
Y3 16
Y4 15
Y5 14
Y6 13
Y7 12
Y8 11
U11
74HC541
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
J1004
TERMBLOCK-10
1
TP7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
J1006
TERMBLOCK-10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
RN1
510x4
16
14
12
10
15
13
11
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
U15
PS2702-4
A1
2
A2
3
A3
4
A4
5
A5
6
A6
7
A7
8
A8
9
G1 1
G2 19
Y1 18
Y2 17
Y3 16
Y4 15
Y5 14
Y6 13
Y7 12
Y8 11
U14
74HC541
16
14
12
10
15
13
11
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
U13
PS2702-4
16
14
12
10
15
13
11
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
U12
PS2702-4
D[0..7]
DIGIO4
IOR
DIGIO0
VCC
VCC
CONTROL INPUTS
EXTERNAL
CONTROL
IN
A
EXTERNAL
CONTROL
IN
B
EXT_+5V_OUT
EXT_+5V_OUT
L19
L20
L22 FE BEAD
L21
L23
L24
L25FE BEAD
L26
L28
L29
L27
FE BEAD
L30
C35
10000 pF
C56
C57
C34
10000 pF
C59
10000 pF
C61
C62
C58
10000 pF
C64
10000 pF
C65
C66
C63
10000 pF
C
10
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
5
RN3
510x8
C
10
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
5
RN2
15Kx8
C
10
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
5
RN4
15Kx8
C97
330 pF, 50V
C98
C99
C96
330 pF, 50V
C101
330 pF, 50V
C102
C103
C100
330 pF, 50V
R26
100
R27
100
R28
100
R29
100 R30
100
R31
100
R32
100
R33
100
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Place these termination resistors at the end of each data
line. Each data line
should be laid out as a daisy-chain, the signal passing
from one IC to the next.
C22
C23
L8
L9
C25
C24
L11
L10
D-18
04521C (DCN5731)
1
2
345 6
A
B
C
D
6
5
4
3
2
1
D
C
B
A
Title
Number RevisionSize
Orcad B
Date: 17-Jun-2008 Sheet of
File: N:\Pcbmgr\05701dn.E-motherboard.gen4\Source\05701a.DDBDrawn By:
Schematic for E Series Motherboard PCA 05702
78
05703 A
D4
D5
D6
IOW
D7
SHDN
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
IOW
D7
SHDN
D0
D1
D2
D3
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
RET
9
GND
10
J1018
TERMBLOCK-10
16
14
12
10
15
13
11
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
U28 PS2702-4
1
TP19
16
14
12
10
15
13
11
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
U25 PS2702-4
4
5
6
U6B
74HC32
D1
2
D2
3
D3
4
D4
5
D5
6
D6
7
D7
8
D8
9
CLK
11 OE
1
Q1 19
Q2 18
Q3 17
Q4 16
Q5 15
Q6 14
Q7 13
Q8 12
U27
74HC574
D1
2
D2
3
D3
4
D4
5
D5
6
D6
7
D7
8
D8
9
CLK
11 OE
1
Q1 19
Q2 18
Q3 17
Q4 16
Q5 15
Q6 14
Q7 13
Q8 12
U24
74HC574
16
14
12
10
15
13
11
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
U22 PS2702-4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
J1017
TERMBLOCK-12
12
13
11
U20D
74HC32
16
14
12
10
15
13
11
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
U26 PS2702-4
SHDN
D[0..7]
IOW
DIGIO2
DIGIO3
VCC
VCC
B STATUS OUTPUTS
DIGITAL OUTPUTS
A STATUS OUTPUTS
VCC
D6
DIODE, SCHOTTKY
F1
RESETTABLE FUSE, 0.3A, 60V
L48
L49
L47 FE BEAD
L50
L43
L44
L46 FE BEAD
L45
L52
L53
L51 FE BEAD
L54
L56
L57
L55 FE BEAD
L58
C81
10000 pF
C80
C79
C82
10000 pF
C84
10000 pF
C85
C86
C83
10000 pF
C89 10000 pF
C88
C87
C90
10000 pF
C92
10000 pF
C93
C94
C91 10000 pF
EXT_+5V_OUT
C
10
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
5
RN10
510x8
C
10
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
5
RN12
510x8
L12
FE BEAD
L14
L13
FE BEAD
C26
C27
C28
04521C (DCN5731)
D-19
1
2
345 6
A
B
C
D
6
5
4
3
2
1
D
C
B
A
Title
Number RevisionSize
Orcad B
Date: 17-Jun-2008 Sheet of
File: N:\Pcbmgr\05701dn.E-motherboard.gen4\Source\05701a.DDBDrawn By:
Schematic for E Series Motherboard PCA 05702
8 8
05703 A
IOW
SHDN
D3
D7
D0
D1
D2
D1
D6
D3
D4
SHDN
D5
D4
D2
D7
D6
D0
D5
Q4
SO2222
R8
2.2K, 5%
1
4
3
2
5
K4
RELAY SPDT
1
2
3
U20A
74HC32
9
10
8
U59C
74HC32
R58
2.2K, 5%
1
4
3
2
5
K1 RELAY SPDT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
J1009
TERMBLOCK-12
Q2
SO2222
R6
2.2K, 5%
1
4
3
2
5
K2
RELAY SPDT
D1
2
D2
3
D3
4
D4
5
D5
6
D6
7
D7
8
D8
9
CLK
11
OE
1
Q1 19
Q2 18
Q3 17
Q4 16
Q5 15
Q6 14
Q7 13
Q8 12
U21
74HC574
Q3
SO2222
16
14
12
10
15
13
11
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
U19 PS2702-4
R7 2.2K, 5%
1
4
3
2
5
K3
RELAY SPDT
Q1
SO2222
16
14
12
10
15
13
11
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
U18 PS2702-4
D1
2
D2
3
D3
4
D4
5
D5
6
D6
7
D7
8
D8
9
CLK
11
OE
1
Q1 19
Q2 18
Q3 17
Q4 16
Q5 15
Q6 14
Q7 13
Q8 12
U17
74HC574
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
J1008
TERMBLOCK-14
16
14
12
10
15
13
11
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
U16 PS2702-4
SHDN
DIGIO0
D[0..7]
IOW
DIGIO4
VCC
VCC
+12V
+12V
+12V
+12V
+12VRET
DIGITAL OUTPUTS
CONTROL OUTPUTS
EXTERNAL CONNECTOR
SOLDER SIDE
EXTERNAL
REAR PANEL
ALARM OUTPUTS
D2
DIODE, SCHOTTKY
D3
DIODE, SCHOTTKY
D4
DIODE, SCHOTTKY
D5
DIODE, SCHOTTKY
L40
L41
L39 FE BEAD
L42
L32
L33
L31 FE BEAD
L34
L36
L37
L35 FE BEAD
L38
C72
10000 pF
C73
C74
C71
10000 pF
C69
10000 pF
C68
C67
C70
10000 pF
C76
10000 pF
C77
C78
C75
10000 pF
C
10
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
5
RN7
510x8
C
10
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
5
RN5
510x8
L59 FE BEAD
C95
10000 pF
CO_EXT_RET
D-20
04521C (DCN5731)
1 2 3 4 5 6
A
B
C
D
654321
D
C
B
A
Title
Number RevisionSize
B
Date: 21-Mar-2002 Sheet of
File: N:\YHWork\M300B\keyboard\04257a\04259A.ddbDrawn By:
S5
S1
S2
S3
S4
S6
S7
S8
C1
.1uF
VCC
SDA
SCL
+5_DISP
DISP_RET
KYBRD_INT
VCC
SDA
SCL
+5_DISP
DISP_RET
KYBRD_INT
VCC
S9
RI-1000 ONLY
1
2
3 8
5
7
4
6
10
9
J1 JP3
1
2
3 8
5
7
4
6
10
9
J2 JP4
Y1
1
Y2
2
Y3
3
AVL 13
Y4
4
Y5
5
OSC
6
KBM
7
X4 8
X3 9
X1 12
X2 11
Vss
10
OE
14
D_E 15
D_D 16
D_C 17
D_B 18
D_A 19
Vcc 20
U1
74C923
+C6
10uF
PRE
4
CLK
3
D
2
CLR
1
Q5
Q6
U3A
MM74HC74A
C7
300pF
R2
1.0K
VCC
VCC
A1
SONALERT
RED
YEL
GRN
+
DS1
DS3
DS2
RI-1000 ONLY
DS4
DS6
DS5
INT
1
A1
2
A2
3
SCL
22
SDA
23
P10 13
P00 4
P01 5
P02 6
P03 7
P04 8
P05 9
P06 10
P07 11
Vss
12
A0
21
P11 14
P12 15
P13 16
P14 17
P15 18
P16 19
P17 20
Vdd 24
U2
PCF8575
MAINT SW
PRE
10
CLK
11
D
12
CLR
13
Q9
Q8
U3B
MM74HC74A
MAINT SW RET
MAINT LED V+
MAINT LED
LANG SW
LANG SW RET
SPR I/O_0
SPR I/O RET
MAINT_LED
MAINT_LED
LANG_SELCT
SPR_I/O_0
LANG_SELCT
SPR_I/O_0
MAINT_SW
MAINT_SW
VCC
12
3
4
5
6
RN1
4.7K
KYBRD_INT
12
34
56
78
910
1112
1314
1516
J3
+5_DISP
DISP_RET
AO
1
A1
2
A2
3
SCL
14
SDA
15
INT 13
P0 4
P1 5
P2 6
P3 7
P4 9
P5 10
P6 11
P7 12
Vdd 16
Vss
8
U4
PCF8574
DISP_WR
DISP_WR
RST 3
Vss
2
Vdd
1
U6
MCP120T
Q2
MMBT3904
D
1
2
G
3S4
5
6
Q1
SI3443DV
AO
1
A1
2
A2
3
SCL
14
SDA
15
INT 13
P0 4
P1 5
P2 6
P3 7
P4 9
P5 10
P6 11
P7 12
Vdd 16
Vss
8
U5
PCF8574
12
3
4
5
6
RN2
4.7K
DISP_PWR
VCC
DISP_BUSY
DISP_BUSY
DISP_PWR_EN
TO/FRM DISPLAY
OPT. MAINT SWITCH
TP2
VCC
TP3
+5_DISP
TP6
DISP_PWR
TP7
DISP_RET
TP1
GND
TP8
BUSY
DISP_RET
+5_DISPVCC
DISP_BUSY
DISP_PWR
C2
.1uF
+C13
10uF
C3
.1uF
C8
220pF
C9
220pF
+5_DISP
C4
.1uF
+C14
100uF
DISP_RET
C10
220pF
(U1)
C11
220pF
C12
220pF
DISP_RET
C5
.1uF
(U2)
1
2
JP5
DISP_PWR_OVR
DISP_PWR_EN must
be high for display to
be powered.
KBD_A0
KBD_A1
KBD_A2
DISP_DA_A0
DISP_DA_A1
DISP_DA_A2
DISP_CN_A0
DISP_CN_A1
DISP_CN_A2
SCL
SDA
SCL
SDA
SCL
SDA
SPR_I/O_1
SPR_I/O_2
SPR_I/O_1
SPR_I/O_2
SPR I/O_1
SPR I/O RET
SPR I/O_2
SPR I/O RET
DISPLAY CONTROL
DISPLAY DATA
KEYBOARD, LED & HORN
GRN LED
YEL LED
RED LED
LED 4
LED 5
LED 6
HORN
12
34
56
78
910
1112
1314
1516
1718
JP1
ADRS SLCTS
12
3
4
5
6
7
9
8
10
RN5
4.7K
R3
4.7K R4
4.7K
KBD_A0
KBD_A1
KBD_A2
DISP_CN_A2
DISP_CN_A1 DISP_DA_A2
DISP_DA_A0
DISP_DA_A1DISP_CN_A0 1 2
3 4
JP2 I2C TERMINATION
SCL
SDA
Schematic for PCA #04258 and PCB #04257, Keyboard/Display Interface for E series
04259 a
C15
.1uF
(U4)
DEFAULT ADDRESS SELECTS FOR I2C TO PARALLEL
DECODERS:
KEYBOARD (KBD_A0 - A2)
1 1 1
DISPL CONTROL (DISP_CN_A0 -A1)
0 1 1
VCC
C16
.1uF
(U45
4.85V DTCT
TP4
SDA
TP9
SCL
SCL
SDA
TP5
KYBRD INT
KYBRD_INT
OPT. LANG. SWITCH
S13
1
2
3
4
5
10
9
7
8
6
RN3
220
MAINT_LED_V+
MAINT_LED_V+
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
J4
3M-2514-6002UB
S12
T8201
VCC
Layout Instructions:
1. Minimum trace width 8 mil would like to have
10 mil traces if possible.
2. Please run traces on both and backside but
where possible fill one side with GND.
3. Minimum width for +5_DISP, DISP_PWR,
DISP_RET is 40 mil, except to test points.
4. Minimum width for VCC, GND, Vdd, Vss is
30 mil, except to test points
NOTES:
1. This schematic is based on
the PWB PN, 03974 and
applies to PCA PN, 03975
C17
1500uF
R20
1K
+5_DISP
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
M1 M2
M3 M4
M5
M9
M6
M8
M7
M10 MF3
MF4
04521C (DCN5731)
D-21
1 2 34
A
B
C
D
4
321
D
C
B
A
APPROVALS
DRAWN
CHECKED
APPROVED
DATE
SIZE DRAWING NO.REVISION
SHEET
The information herein is the
property of API and is
submitted in strictest con-
Unauthorized use by anyone
fidence for reference only.
for any other purposes is
prohibited. This document or
any information contained
in it may not be duplicated
without proper authorization.
SCH, PCA 04003, PRESS/FLOW, 'E' SERIES
04354D
113-Dec-2007
LAST MOD.
B
of
R2
1.1K
+15V
1
2
3
4
5
6
S1
ASCX PRESSURE SENSOR
1
2
3
4
5
6
S2
ASCX PRESSURE SENSOR
1
2
3
S3
FLOW SENSOR
+15V
+15V
TP5
S2_OUT
TP4
S1/S4_OUT
TP2
10V_REF
TP1
GND
TP3
S3_OUT
2
3
1
VR2
LM4040CIZ
2
3
1
VR1
LM4040CIZ
R1
499
1
2
3
4
5
6
J1
MINIFIT6
C1
1.0UF
C2
1.0UF
1
2
3
4
S4
CON4
+15V
C3
1.0
CN_647 X 3
FM_4
D-22
04521C (DCN5731)
+5V
PL101:13 13
PL101:14 14
IC103:C
74ACT32
10
98
IC103:B
74ACT32
5
46
IC103:D
74ACT32
13
12 11
IC102:D
74AC00D
11
13
12
IC102:A
74AC00D
3
2
1
+5V +5V
R104
499
R103
499
TXD
DS103 RXD
DS104
+5V
ACT,
DS101
LINK
DS102
C109
100nF
C110
100nF
TG43-1406N
T101
8
7
6
3
2
1
15
14
11
10
9
16
1: 2
1:1 J101
S2
10 S1
9NC4
8NC3
7NC2
5NC1
4TX+
1
TX-
2
RX+
3
RX-
6
C104
22pF
22pF
C105
IC103:A
74ACT32
2
13
+5V+5V
C118
100nF
IC102:B
74AC00D
6
5
4
+5V+5V
74ACT138
IC101
Y7 7
Y6 9
Y5 10
Y4 11
Y3 12
Y2 13
Y1 14
Y0 15
G1
6
G2
4
G3
5
C
3B
2A
1VCC 16
GND
8
+5V
Y101
18.432MHz
C0561AD-L
IC104
HLDA
61
HOLD
62
NC1
27
NC2
28
NC3
29
NC4
32
NC5
66
GND
55
GND
67
LANDRQ 18
LANINT 64
-CTS1
59 -DSR1
15 RXD1
30
-RI1
20 -DCD1
60 -RTS1
58 -DTR1
63 TXD1
26
A0 57
A1 19
A2 34
A3 35
A4 36
A5 46
A6 33
A7 37
A8 38
A9 54
A10 56
A11 53
A12 48
A13 51
A14 47
A15 49
A16 45
A17 8
A18 39
A19 50
D15 25
D0 7
D1 6
D14 10
D13 11
D2 5
D12 23
D3 4
D4 3
D11 13
D10 16
D5 2
D6 24
D9 17
D8 22
D7 9
-BHE 31
ALE 41
VCC
1
X1
42
X2
43
CLKO
44
-LMSEL
65
-RES
12
-WR
52
-RD
68
-UCS
14
-LCS
21
URTINT
40
R108
10.0K R109
10.0K
CS8900A-CQ
IC105
EECS 3
EESK 4
EEDATAOUT 5
EEDATAIN 6
A
V
S
S
4
9
6
A
V
S
S
3
9
4
A
V
S
S
2
8
6
A
V
S
S
1
8
9
A
V
S
S
0
1
D
V
S
S
4
7
0
D
V
S
S
3
A
5
7
D
V
S
S
3
5
5
D
V
S
S
2
2
3
D
V
S
S
1
A
1
0
D
V
S
S
1
8
X
T
A
L
1
9
7
X
T
A
L
2
9
8
D
V
D
D
1
9
D
V
D
D
2
2
2
D
V
D
D
3
5
6
D
V
D
D
4
6
9
A
V
D
D
2
8
5
A
V
D
D
1
9
0
A
V
D
D
3
9
5
LINKLED/ HC0 99
LANLED 100
TEST 76
SLEEP 77
INTRQ0
32 INTRQ1
31 INTRQ2
30 INTRQ3
35
IOCHRDY
64 AEN
63 REFRESH
49 SBHE
36 MEMCS16
34 IOCS1 6
33
MEMW
28 MEMR
29 IOW
62 IOR
61
RESET
75 CSOUT
17 DMACK0
16 DMACK1
14 DMACK2
12 DMARQ0
15 DMARQ1
13 DMARQ2
11 CHIPSEL
7ELCS
2
SD0
65 SD1
66 SD2
67 SD3
68 SD4
71 SD5
72 SD6
73 SD7
74 SD08
27 SD09
26 SD10
25 SD11
24 SD12
21 SD13
20 SD14
19 SD15
18
SA0
37 SA1
38 SA2
39 SA3
40 SA4
41 SA5
42 SA6
43 SA7
44 SA8
45 SA9
46 SA10
47 SA11
48 SA12
50 SA13
51 SA14
52 SA15
53
SA17
58
SA16
54
SA18
59 SA19
60
DI+ 79
DI- 80
CI+ 81
CI- 82
DO+ 83
DO- 84
TXD+ 87
TXD- 88
RXD+ 91
RXD- 92
RES 93
BSTATU S/ HC1 78
+5VY102
20.0 MHz
C107
15pF
C106
15pF
R113
499R
R112
499R
+5V
R111
4K99
R110
4K99
+5V
R114
4K99
100R
R115
68pF
C108
24R3
R116
24R3
R117
R102
4.99K
C122
1uF 16V
1uF 16V
C123
+5V
C120
1uF 16V
1uF 16V
C121
IC106
MAX237
RI3
16 RI2
23 RI1
4
RO3 17
RO2 22
RO1 5
TO5
20
TO3
1TO2
3TO1
2
TI5 21
TI4 19
TI3 18
TI2 6
TI1 7
GND
8
C2- 14
C2+ 13
C1-
12
C1+
10
V- 15
V+
11
VCC 9
TO4
24
TTLRS-232
+5V
C101
100nF 100nF
C102
+5V
100nF
C128
+5V
PL101:11 11
PL101:10 10
PL101:9 9
PL101:8 8
PL101:7 7
PL101:6 6
PL101:5 5
PL101:4 4
PL101:3 3
IC102:C
74AC00D
8
10
9
+5V
C113
100nF
+5V
C112
100nF
+5V
100nF
C111
+5V
C114
100nF
+5V
C116
100nF
+5V
100nF
C115
+5V
C117
100nF 100nF
C127
+5V
+5V
C103
100nF
MT1
MT2
+5VR101
4.99K
+5V
PL101:1 1
PL101:15 15
PL101:2 2
PL101:16 16
PL101:12 12
4.99K
R106
+5V
100nF
C126
TL7705
IC107
GND 4
VCC 8
RESET 6
RESET 5
SENSE
7
CT
3
REF
1
RESIN
2
+5V+5V
1uF 16V
C125
1uF 16V
C124
4.99K
R105
+5V
C119
100nF
+5V
+5V
PL102-1
C129
10uF 16V
PL102-2
R107
10.0K
STATUS
3 PARTS DENOTED "S" ON SECONDARY SIDE OF PCA
2 ALL RESISTANCES IN OHMS, 1%
1 THIS SCHEMATIC APPLIES TO PWB 04393 REV. A.
NC
NC
(7)
(4)
(3)
(1)
(8)
(6)
(2)
CTS
DSR
RXD
RI
DCD
RTS
DTR
RESET
TXD
TELEDYNE ADVANCED POLLUTION
INSTRUMENTATION INC.
ETHERNET INTERFACE SCHEMATIC
04395
11SLAN.S03
Thu Jul 25 2002
DB-9 PIN NUMBERS IN PARENS.
NOTES:
S
S
S
S
A
S
S
S
S
S
SS
SS
S
S
S
S
S
GND
GND
+5V
+5V
(5)
S
S
SSS
A15
A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
ABC D
4
3
2
1
DCBA
1
2
3
4
Filename Sheet of
Drawn byDate
Size BNumber Rev
Title
04521C (DCN5731)
D-23
1 2 3 4 5 6
A
B
C
D
6
54321
D
C
B
A
Title
Number RevisionSize
B
Date: 10-May-2007 Sheet of
File: N:\PCBMGR\04179cc\Source\RevG\04179.ddbDrawn By:
H04181
M100E/200E PMT Preamp PCA
03
Interconnections
04181H-1-m100e200e.sch
preamp cktry
04181H-2-m100e200e.SCH
HVPS Cktry
04181H-3-m100e200e.SCH
D-24
04521C (DCN5731)
1 2 3 4 5 6
A
B
C
D
6
54321
D
C
B
A
Title
Number RevisionSize
B
Date: 10-May-2007 Sheet of
File: N:\PCBMGR\04179cc\Source\RevG\04179.ddbDrawn By:
R27 499
R8
150K
R15
SEE TABLE
R32
499
R35
1.0K
R2
51.1K
b1
c2
E
3
Q2
PN2222
C23
100 pF
+15V
+15V
+15V
+15V
R7
10K
R1
10K
R16
100K
R6
100K
R9
2.0K
+12V_REF
+12V_REF
Q3
J176
RT1
C6
0.1 uF
C26
0.1 uF
5
6
7
48
U3B
LF353
48
2
3
1
U3A
LF353
48
2
3
1
U2A
LF353
+
C1
N/I
R37
3.3K
+5V_SYS
1
2
3
J2
3 PIN INLINE
TP23
*
TP24
*
TP3
*
VREF
COOLER CONTROL
AGND
TH1
6.2V
S
G
D
R28
50K 1
2
3
D2
11DQ05
D1
6.2V ZENER
OPTIC TEST
R18
SEE TABLE
FSV
+12V_REF
LED+
THERMISTOR+
R23
4.99K
PMT TEMPERATURE FEEDBACK
TO TEC BOARD
PMT_TEMP
OPTIC_TEST
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
J6
MICROFIT-8
+5V_SYS
TP16*
TP11*
TP15
*TP14
*TP13
*
TP20
*
TP21
*
TP22
*
TP19
*
TP25
*
TP17
*
TP18
*
ELEC TEST
OPTIC TEST
PREAMP RNG BIT2
PREAMP RNG BIT1
PMT TEMP
HVPS VOLTAGE
PMT SIGNAL
HVPS
PMT_TEMP
OPTIC_TEST
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
J3
INLINE-9-RA
+15V
HVPS
THERMISTOR+
LED+
PREAMP1
100E/200E PMT PREAMP PCA Schematic
H
1 3
04181
HIGAIN
ETEST
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
J5
MINIFIT-10
Power Connector
Signal Connector
+15V
L2
4.7 uH
+
C21
100uF
C49
0.68 uF
-15V
L1
4.7 uH
+
C16
4.7uF, 16v
C46
0.68 uF
R41
300K
R10
SEE TABLE
1
2
3
4
5
6
JP2
PMT TEMP CONFIG JUMPER
TJP1A
TJP1A
TJP2A
TJP2A
-15V
VPMT
2
4
U13
74AHC1GU04
ON JP2:
FOR 100E/200E : SHORT PINS 2 &5 ONLY.
FOR 200EU: SHORT PINS 3 & 6 and PINS 2 & 5.
COMP. 100E 200E 0200EU
-------------------------------------------------
R18 10K 10K 14K
R15 55K 55K 47K
R10 8.09K 8.09K 10K
Printed documents are uncontrolled
04521C (DCN5731)
D-25
1 2 3 4 5 6
A
B
C
D
6
54321
D
C
B
A
Title
Number RevisionSize
B
Date: 10-May-2007 Sheet of
File: N:\PCBMGR\04179cc\Source\RevG\04179.ddbDrawn By:
R12
1000M
R3
4.99K
R38
N/I
R17
SEE TABLE
+
C28 10uF/25V
+
C2710uF/25V
C2 100 pF
-15V
+15V
GUARD RING
NOTES: UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
3.
2.
1.
RESISTANCE IS IN OHMS.
RESISTORS ARE 1%, 1/4W.
CAPACITANCE IS IN MICROFARADS.
R13
N/I, POT
1
2
3
3
2
6
8
7
4
U1
OPA124
SPAN ADJUST
THIS CIRCUIT MUST BE USED
AS A MATCHED PAIR WITH THE
TEC CONTROL CIRCUIT
4.
R4
100
R44
SEE TABLE
R11 100M
IN1 1
COM1 2
NC1
3
V-
4GND 5
NC4
6COM4 7
IN 4 8
IN 3 9
COM3 10
NC3
11
V(L)
12 V+
13
NC2
14 COM2 15
IN2 16
U4
DG444DY
-15V
+15V
C4 0.001 uF
+5V_SYS
ETEST
R43
4.99K
TP6
*
VREF
R19
10K, POT
1
2
3
ELECT. TEST
PREAMP1
PREAMP2
PREAMP1 PREAMP2
ETEST
ETEST_SIGNAL
ETEST_SIGNAL
ETEST
2
4
U17
74AHC1GU04
2
4
U5
74AHC1GU04
ETEST
HIGAIN
R36
250K
C3
SEE TABLE
5
6
7
48
U2B
LF353, OPAMP
+15V
C48
0.1 uF
C47
0.68 uF
-15V
HIGAIN
VPMT
R5
N/I, SHORTED
FB
1
AGND
2
V-
3
DIV RATIO
4C OSC 5
V+ 6
OUT 7
BUFOUT 8
U11
LTC1062CN8
+12V_REF
-2.5V
C9
3900 pF, FILM
C11
1.0uF
TP9
*
TP1
*
TP8
*
TP7
*
C30 0.68 uF
C5 0.68 uF
R29
50k, POT
1
2
J1
COAX
PMT Signal Connector
PMTGND
PMTGND
PMTGND
PMTGND
5
6
7
48
U16B
LF353, OPAMP
R48
1K
R46 100
4
8
2
3
1
U9A
LF353
+15V
-15V
TP2
*
C31
0.68 uF
C29
0.68 uF
+15V
-15V
R51
SEE TABLE
HIGAIN
R50
N/I
H04181
M100E/200E PMT Preamp PCA Schematic
23
VERSION TABLE:
0100 - M10XE
0200 - M20XE
COMP. 0100 0200
----------------------------------------------
R17 20.0K 10.0 ohms
R44 39.2K 25.5K
R51 10K not installed
C3 0.1 uF 0.012
C11 11.0 1.0
C36
0.1 uF
+C11A
22uF/25V +C11B
22uF/25V
For 1.0 uF use C11.
For 11 uF use C11A & C11B.
SEE TABLE
Printed documents are uncontrolled
D-26
04521C (DCN5731)
1 2 3 4 5 6
A
B
C
D
6
54321
D
C
B
A
Title
Number RevisionSize
B
Date: 10-May-2007 Sheet of
File: N:\PCBMGR\04179cc\Source\RevG\04179.ddbDrawn By:
48
2
3
1
U16A
LF353, OPAMP
R33 4.99K
R47
3.92K
R49
1.0K
C45 100pF
C20
0.68 uF
+12V_REF
+C15
10uF/25V
+ C50
10uF/25V
-15V
+5V_LOCAL
C33
0.68 uF
C7
0.68 uF
C32
1.0uF/16V
R42
4.99K
R20
4.99K
1
4
3
6
2
5
S1
1
4
3
6
2
5
S2
+5V_LOCAL
+15V
TP4
*
TP10*
+5V_LOCAL
VREF
1 12 4 8 2 4 8
HVPS
D6
11DQ05
+C34
10uF/25V
A1
K
2
D7
16V
HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY
3
2
1
VR1
LM336Z-2.5 R24
2k
-15V
-2.5V
TP12
*
TP5
*
C42
0.68 uF
C14
10uF/25V
+15V
5
6
7
48
U9B
LF535
C
10
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
5
RN1
100Kx8
IN
1
ON/OFF
3OUT 5
NC 4
GND
2
U14
LP2981IM5
+ C22
10uF/25V
IN
3OUT 1
GND
2
U8
LM78L12ACZ(3)
+15V
-15V
C25
0.1 uF
C24
0.1 uF
H04181
M100E/200E PMT PREAMP PCA Schematic
33
C51
0.1uF/ 50V
CA0000199
CA0000192
IN 4
OUT
6
GND
1GND
2
U22 LT1790AIS6-5
GND
6Vcc 1
Iout
8
D7 9
Vrf(-)
3D6 10
D5 11
Vrf(+)
2D4 12
D3 13
D2 14
COMP
4
D1 15
D0 16
Vee
7
TC
5
U6
DAC0802
Printed documents are uncontrolled
04521C (DCN5731)
D-27
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
D D
C C
B B
A A
Ti tle
Number Revis ionSize
A
Date: 6/28/2004 Sheet of
File: N:\PCBMGR\..\04468B.sch Drawn By:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
JP1
No t U sed
R1
22
R2
SCH, E-Series Analog Output Isolator, PCA 04467
04468 B
D-28
04521C (DCN5731)

Navigation menu